308 files changed, 18176 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/21832-h.zip b/21832-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e46076a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h.zip
diff --git a/21832-h/21832-h.htm b/21832-h/21832-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..980427b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/21832-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,10303 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+<html>
+<head>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=ISO-8859-1" />
+<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the Savages, by Roger Thompson Finlay</title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+
+      @media print {
+       .pagenum         {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit;
+                          text-align: right; color: gray; display: none; visibility: hidden; }
+       }
+      @media screen {
+        .pagenum        {position: absolute; left: 92%; font-size: x-small; background-color: inherit;
+                         text-align: right; color: gray; display: inline; visibility: visible;}
+        .pagenum a       {text-decoration:none; color:#444;}
+        .pagenum a:hover {color:#F00;}
+       }
+
+       div.frontmatter {max-width: 48em;
+          margin-left: auto;
+          margin-right: auto;
+          page-break-before: always; }
+
+       body > p { text-align: justify; text-indent: .5em;
+                  max-width: 40em; margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+       p             {margin-top: .33em; font-size: medium; margin-bottom: 0em;}
+       p.noindent    {text-indent: 0em; text-align: justify;}
+       p.center      {text-align: center; text-indent: 0em;}
+       p.titleblock  {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: center; line-height: 125%;}
+       p.titleblockl {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; text-indent: 0em; text-align: left; line-height: 125%;}
+       p.chapter     {margin-top: 0em; margin-bottom: 0em; line-height: 100%;}
+
+       h2+p, h3+p { text-indent: 0; }
+
+       h1,h2,h3,h4 {
+            text-align: center; clear: both; page-break-after: avoid ! important;}
+       hr {width: 33%;
+           margin-top: 2em; margin-bottom: 2em;
+           margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;
+           clear: both;}
+       hr.chapter {width: 55%; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 0em; page-break-before: always;}
+       hr.sorta   {width: 45%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;}
+       hr.minor   {width: 30%; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 0.5em;}
+
+       table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+       td.chap {text-align: left; padding-left: 10px;}
+       td.pr {text-align: right; padding-left: 6px; }
+       td.abstract p {letter-spacing: 0.02em; text-align: justify;
+                     margin-left: 14%; margin-right: 0%; margin-top: .25em; margin-bottom: 0.75em;}
+
+       body {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%;}
+
+       a {text-decoration: none;}
+
+       .center {text-align: center;}
+       .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;}
+       .u     {text-decoration: underline;}
+
+       .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+       .figleft {margin: auto; text-align: left;}
+       .caption {font-size: 80%; font-weight: bold;}
+       .scribedcaption {font-size: 100%; font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;}
+       img {border: none;}
+    hr.full { width: 100%;
+              margin-top: 3em;
+              margin-bottom: 0em;
+              margin-left: auto;
+              margin-right: auto;
+              height: 4px;
+              border-width: 4px 0 0 0; /* remove all borders except the top one */
+              border-style: solid;
+              border-color: #000000;
+              clear: both; }
+    pre      {font-size: 75%;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<h1>The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the
+Savages, by Roger Thompson Finlay</h1>
+<pre>
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at <a href = "http://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a></pre>
+<p>Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the Savages</p>
+<p>Author: Roger Thompson Finlay</p>
+<p>Release Date: June 14, 2007  [eBook #21832]</p>
+<p>Language: English</p>
+<p>Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1</p>
+<p>***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES***</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<h3>E-text prepared by Joe Longo<br />
+    and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team<br />
+    (http://www.pgdp.net)</h3>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 626px;">
+<img src="images/spine-cover.jpg" width="626" height="717"
+alt="Spine and cover for The Conquest" title="Cover" />
+</div>
+
+
+<hr class="major" />
+
+<div class="frontmatter">
+
+<p class="center">
+<span style="font-size: 150%;">THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</span><br /><br />
+<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">By</span> ROGER T. FINLAY</span>
+</p>
+
+
+
+<p class="noindent" style="margin-bottom:2em;">Thrilling adventures by sea and land of two boys and an aged Professor
+who are cast away on an island with absolutely nothing but their
+clothing. By gradual and natural stages they succeed in constructing all
+forms of devices used in the mechanical arts and learn the scientific
+theories involved in every walk of life. These subjects are all treated
+in an incidental and natural way in the progress of events, from the
+most fundamental standpoint without technicalities, and include every
+department of knowledge. Numerous illustrations accompany the text.</p>
+
+<p class="noindent" style="text-align: center; margin-bottom:2em;">
+Two thousand things every boy ought to know. Every page<br/>
+a romance. Every line a fact.</p>
+
+
+<p class="center">
+           <i>6 titles&mdash;60 cents per volume</i><br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+                  The Castaways<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+               Exploring the Island<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+                  The Tribesmen<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+              The Capture and Pursuit<br />
+<br />
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS<br />
+            The Conquest of the Savages<br />
+<br /><br />
+
+</p>
+<p class="noindent" style="text-align: center;">
+<span style="font-size: 70%;">PUBLISHED BY</span><br />
+<span style="font-size: 115%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span><br />
+<span style="font-size: 100%;"><span class="smcap">147 Fourth Avenue &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;&nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp; &nbsp;      New York</span></span>
+</p>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+<h2>THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS</h2>
+<hr class="minor" />
+<h3>TREASURES OF THE ISLANDS</h3>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;">
+<a id="illus-front" name="illus-front" />
+<img src="images/illus-p003.jpg" width="400" height="607"
+alt="The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them"
+title="The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them" />
+<span class="scribedcaption">&quot;<i>The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them</i>&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_62">See p. 62</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+
+<table width="450" cellpadding="2" cellspacing="0" summary="Title page" border="1">
+  <col style="width:80%;" />
+  <tr>
+    <td align="center">
+<br /><br />
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 180%; margin-bottom: .5em; font-variant: small-caps; word-spacing: 0.4em;">The Wonder Island Boys</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 2px; font-weight: 600; font-size: 145%; margin-bottom: 1em;">THE CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 0em;">BY</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0em; font-size: 110%;">ROGER T. FINLAY</p>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 3em; font-size: 90%; margin-bottom: 3em;">ILLUSTRATED</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 119px;">
+<img src="images/illus-nybc.png" width="119" height="116" alt="N Y B Co." title="" />
+<span class="caption">N Y B Co.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 5em; font-size: 85%; margin-bottom: 0em;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p>
+<p class="titleblock" style="margin-top: 0px; font-size: 85%; font-variant: small-caps;  margin-bottom: 2em;">New York</p>
+</td>
+  </tr>
+</table>
+
+
+<p class="center">
+<span class="smcap" style="font-size: 110%;">Copyright, 1914, by</span>
+<br /><span style="font-size: 110%;">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</span>
+</p>
+
+
+<hr class="sorta" />
+<h3>CONTENTS</h3>
+<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents">
+<col style="width:5%;" />
+<col style="width:80%;" />
+<col style="width:15%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left" style="font-size: small">CHAPTER</td>
+  <td colspan="2" class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">I.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_I"><span class="smcap">The Compact Between the Four Allied Tribes,</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_11">Page 11</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+The camp startled by Sutoto. Confederation of the
+Tuolos, Kurabus and Illyas. A council of all the
+chiefs. The Professor's address. Advising unity of all
+the tribes against the hostiles. The assent of the
+chiefs. The views of Oma, Uraso and Muro. How
+the allied tribes met. Review of the work of the Professor
+and the boys. Determine to send a force to
+the Cataract. Conclude to remove all tools to the
+southwest. The warriors selected. Adopting a settled
+plan. Mustering the warriors. Sending for Chief Suros
+of the Berees. The muster roll. John in command
+of the forces to the Cataract. Blakely in command
+of the home forces. The march to protect the Brabos.
+A compact between the allied tribes. John and his
+party on the march. Sadness at giving up Cataract.
+At the Cataract. The flag as a charm. Uraso's interpretation
+of the flag.</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">II.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_II"><span class="smcap">Busy Times at the Cataract. The Alarming News</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_24">Page 24</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+The tribute to the flag. A national talisman. Entertaining
+the warriors. Starting the water wheel in
+motion. The sawmill at work. Making spears. Gathering
+and threshing barley. The roast ox and the feast.
+Making bread. The surprising novelties for the warriors.
+Determining to make guns before dismantling.
+Building a new wagon. Uraso directing the work of
+the men. The universal tattoo. Its significance. Designating
+name and rank. Clothing. Blakely drilling
+the army at the Brabo village. News of the approach
+of the old chief Suros. The Professor and party receiving
+him with honor. The conversation with Suros.
+His hearty accord. Jim and Will. Their observations.
+The value of unity. Sutoto's report about the confederated
+tribes. Information of their movement toward
+Cataract. John's scouts at the Cataract capture two
+Kurabus. Startling intelligence. Interviewing the
+captives. Completing the new wagon. Sending out
+scouts toward the Kurabus.
+</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">III.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_III">  <span class="smcap">Intercepting the March of the Confederates. The
+Treasure</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_37">Page 37</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Blakely with a force to intercept the confederates.
+Sutoto delegated to inform John. Reaching the Cataract.
+Interesting scenes at the Cataract for Sutoto.
+The scouts report the tribes to the west. Blakely's
+force near the confederates. Watching their movements.
+John's messenger to Blakely. Advice that the
+tribes are waiting for reinforcements. The tribes on
+the march east. Blakely's message to John. Blakely
+intercepting the tribes. His message to the enemy.
+Their surprise. To give their answer in two suns.
+The message to the Professor. The Professor decides
+to capture the Kurabus' village. On the march. Capturing
+the Kurabus' reinforcements. The villages in
+his possession. The Professor's message to John and
+Blakely. A message from Blakely. Hurrying the work
+at Cataract. Making guns and spears. Taro. The
+treasure in the cave. Decide to take it to their new
+home. Loading up the wagons. Transferring the hoard
+in the caves. A messenger informing John of the battle.
+Instructs Muro to go to aid of Blakely.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">IV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">  <span class="smcap">The Surrender of the Kurabus</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_50">Page 50</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+The load of treasure. A doleful sound. The "cry of
+the lost soul." Activity at Cataract. Bringing in the
+flag. The trip to Observation Hill. The warriors
+participate. George and Harry lower the flag. An
+impressive scene. The last sad night at the Cataract.
+A runner from John to the Professor. The confederates
+within eight miles of Cataract. A movement to
+capture them. Messenger from the Kurabus' village
+arrives too soon. The flight of the confederated tribes.
+The Kurabus determine to defend their village. John
+orders a forced march to assist the Professor. The
+messenger from Muro advises the Professor. He learns
+of the approach of the Professor. The arrival of John.
+The confederates at the Kurabus' village. Surprise
+of the latter at the leniency of the Professor. Advancing
+on the Kurabus' village. A messenger from,
+the Kurabus. Agree to surrender. The flight of the
+Tuolos and Illyas. The Kurabus join the allies. Submission.
+Tastoa's message to the other tribes.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">V.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_V"> <span class="smcap">The New Town Site. The Water Wheel and Sawmill</span>
+</a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_62">Page 62</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Return to the Brabo village. The train from Cataract
+in sight. The triumphal entrance into the village.
+The festivities. Safety of the Brabos assured. The
+Professor tells the chiefs his object in forming the
+alliance. Suggests the building of a new town. To
+belong to all the tribes. To take all the chiefs to the
+new town. The boys want their herd of yaks. Sutoto
+and party go for them. Blakely's fighting force. The
+Banyan tree. Its peculiar growth. Sap in trees.
+Capillary attraction. Hunting a town site. Uraso
+selects a place. A water-fall. An ideal spot. Reported
+arrival of the herd. Fencing off a field. How
+the fence was built. The warriors at work. Building
+a new water wheel. Erecting a sawmill. The warriors
+at work bringing in logs. The sawmill at work.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI"> <span class="smcap">Building Up the New Town</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_74">Page 74</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Disquieting rumors of the confederates. Shop and
+laboratory put up. A safe place for the treasure.
+Making looms. Searching for minerals. Putting
+up a furnace and smelter. Making molds for
+copper coins. The mint. Teaching the people how
+to use money. First lessons in industry. The
+measure of value. Coins of no value. Paying
+wages. Inculcating the ideas of pay for labor. Teaching
+natives the principles of purchase and sale. Making
+bargains. Begin the erection of buildings. The
+Tuolos and Illyas still bitter. Evidences of hostilities.
+Decide to conquer the Tuolos. John at the head of
+an expedition. The natives encouraged to bring in
+all kinds of vegetables. Chica. Burning oil. Why
+different plants grow differently on the same soil.
+Ralph and Tom accompany John on the expedition.
+Going to visit the tribe which captured them.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII"> <span class="smcap">The Expedition Against the Tuolos</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_86">Page 86</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Crossing the West River. Approaching the Tuolos village
+from the south. The advance scouts. First signs
+of the Tuolos. The feasting at the village. Ralph and
+Tom wander from the camp. They discover a cave.
+Striking a match. The weird interior. Leave the cave
+to notify John. Return to the cave. A hurried exploration.
+The home of the Medicine men. Their absence
+at the village. Meeting the Medicine men at
+the entrance. Effecting a capture. The Krishnos. A
+curious cross found by John in the cave. Its history.
+The uproar in the village. John confronting the
+Medicine men. They tell him the Great Spirit will
+destroy him. John strikes a light on the cross with,
+matches. The Medicine men in terror. Orders one
+of them to go to the village and tell the Chief to surrender.
+Surrounding the village. Muro captures a
+rival set of Medicine men. Another cave. Questioning
+the newly-arrived captives. They are defiant.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">VIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII"> <span class="smcap">The Submission of the Tuolos</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_100">Page 100</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Threatening the Medicine men. Beating them for lying.
+Morning. Dissensions in the village. Learn they are
+surrounded. The Chief comes forward. Meeting John
+and Muro. John's plain talk to the Chief. Demands
+his immediate surrender. The Chief stunned. Says he
+will go and tell his people. The Chief returns. Surrenders.
+The warriors march into the village. Liberating
+the captured Brabos. Ralph and Tom visit
+the large hut where they were confined. Blakely
+showing the Chief the maneuvers of the warriors.
+The Chief proposes to torture the Medicine men. John
+interferes. Asks that they be turned over to him.
+The Professor and the colony. The insulting message
+from the Illyas. The messenger to John. Building
+chairs and tables. Two-and three-room cottages.
+Stimulating individual efforts. The first thief and
+the treatment. John and party visit the cave east of
+the village.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">IX.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX"> <span class="smcap">Plans for the Benefit of the Natives</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_111">Page 111</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Entering the cave. What they found. The treasure
+as John had described it. Removing it to the wagon.
+The Chief, the Krishnos and a number of the warriors
+taken to the new town. Approaching home. The
+Chief Marmo. Meets the Professor. The welcoming
+functions. Interest in the works. Watching the loom.
+Trying to teach him new ideas. A lesson in justice.
+Told the difference between right and wrong. Blakely
+the man of business. The island as a source of wealth.
+Blakely determines to stay on the island. Agree to
+build a large vessel. Projecting a trip home. Agricultural
+pursuits. The states. How lands were to
+be disposed of. Value of land. Proposing an expedition
+to the Illyas. Marmo sends a message to the
+Illyas. Making new guns for the expedition.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">X.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_X"> <span class="smcap">The Peculiar Savage Beliefs and Customs</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_124">Page 124</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+The Krishnos. Chief Marmo learning. The Tuolo
+workman asks permission to bring his family to the
+new town. The boys find a name for the town. Unity.
+The Hindoo christening. The expedition against the
+Illyas. Three hundred warriors. Reflections of the
+boys. Six tribes. Heading for the Saboro village.
+Muro happy. A day and night of feasting. Muro's
+family. The pocket mirrors. Lolo. An artisan.
+Events at Unity. Two deaths. The peculiar rites.
+The Spirits in the air. Rewards. Savage beliefs. The
+honored dead. Lessons from the Great Spirit.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI"> <span class="smcap">Expedition to Subdue the Illyas</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_137">Page 137</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+The warriors' families. The plaintain leaf. The native
+loom. Weaving. Primitive goods. A store set up.
+Kitchen utensils. Bringing in ore and supplies. Sanitary
+arrangements. Home comforts. Native combs.
+Fish fins. An immense turtle. Tortoise shells. John
+and the war party. Illyas reported in front. Character
+of country. Savage beliefs. The moon in their
+worship. Distance to the Illyas village. In sight
+of the first Illyas. Borderlines. Double line of guards.
+Illyas surprised. Capturing an Illyas warrior. Sending
+him back with a peace message. A strong position.
+The history of the Illyas. Differences in the
+color of the various tribes.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII"> <span class="smcap">The Perilous Trip of the Wagon</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_149">Page 149</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+At Unity. Suros and Oma announce they will not return
+to their tribes. The return of the Tuolo warrior
+and family. A cottage for him. Famished. How
+the Professor explained his act of humanity to Chief
+Marmo. The principles of justice. Marmo accompanies
+the Professor through the town. An object lesson.
+Ralph and Jim in charge of the factory. Sending
+out hunters to gather in yaks. Laying out fields.
+Wonderful vegetation. John and the Illyas. Planking
+movement around the Illyas. The charge. The Illyas
+in confusion. Their retreat. The forest a barrier.
+Sighting the main village. Astonishment at its character.
+An elevated plateau. A town by design. Peculiarly
+formed hills or mounds. Fortified. The mystery.
+Sending the wagons to the south. Avoiding
+the forest. No word from the team. The teams reach
+the river. Intercepted. Illyas in front. Blocked by
+precipitous banks. Forming camp. Sending messengers
+to John. Muro gets the message. Hastens to
+relieve the force with the wagon. The savage attack.
+A volley behind the Illyas.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII"> <span class="smcap">The Remarkable Discovery at Blakely's Mountain
+Home</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_163">Page 163</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+At Unity. The weekly outing. The great forest to the
+west. The trip of the whites to Blakely's forest home.
+Driftwood. Centrifugal and centripetal motion. The
+forest animals. Orang-outan. The monkeys. Reaching
+the hill. The scaling vine. Reaching the recessed
+rocks. The two skeletons in the rocks. A gun and
+trinkets. A sextant. A letter. No identity. The
+message. Effort to decipher it. A mound for the
+bones. Forwarding copy of message to John. John's
+examination of the Illyas' village. The remarkable
+character of the buildings. Muro returns with the
+wagons. The Tuolos as fighters. Two captured. Trying
+to open communications. Returns of the messengers.
+Defiance. Permitting the messenger to return.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XIV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV"> <span class="smcap">The Surprise and Capture of the Illyas' Stronghold</span>
+</a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_175">Page 175</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Astonishment of the Illyas' messenger. The character
+of the eastern side of the town. A movement in the
+night. Surrounding the town. Muro and Uraso as warriors.
+The architecture of the buildings. Not built
+by the natives. Different kinds of architecture. Their
+distinction. Disposing the forces. The signal for attack.
+John, and his party rush the breastworks. Enter
+the town. The surprise and confusion of the Illyas.
+Harry observes the Illyas' chief and attendants. Surrounds
+and capture them. Muro makes a charge.
+The chief signals surrender. Uraso surrounds the
+Illyas. Marched to the great square. The conference between
+John and the chief. The Doric building. The
+Illyas' chief. His imperious air. Dignity of Uraso and
+Muro.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XV.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV"> <span class="smcap">The Rescue of Five Captives</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_187">Page 187</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+The chief's question. John's brief answer. The chief
+trying to deceive John. Questions the chief about the
+messages. The lying answers. The punishment imposed
+on the warriors. Orders the same punishment for
+the chief. Consternation. Uraso and Muro plead for
+the chief. Whipping the most disgraceful punishment
+for a chief. Demands the white captives. Sama to show
+the way to their hiding place. The wagon
+brought out. The boys, accompanied by Lolo, and commanded
+by Stut. Reach the village. The captives' hut.
+The rush for the door. The five captives. Three <i>Investigator's</i>
+boys. A pitiable sight. Hungry. Harry's
+inscription on the litter. A Saboro and a white man.
+Taking the Illyas' warriors along. Feeding the rescued
+ones.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVI.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI"> <span class="smcap">Remarkable Growth of Unity</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_199">Page 199</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Awaiting word from John. Telegraph line needed.
+Wireless telegraphy. Sound and power. Vibrations.
+A universal force. B Street in Unity. Visiting the
+villagers in their homes. Incentives to beautify their
+houses. Erecting larger dwellings for the chiefs. The
+schoolhouse. A growing town. Marvels to the chiefs.
+The mysterious things the white men do. The thermometer.
+Teaching medicine. Cinchona. Calisaya.
+Acids. The boys reach the Illyas' village with the
+liberated prisoners. Making them comfortable. The
+white man a former companion of John. A health resort.
+The <i>Investigator's</i> lifeboat No. 3. Mystery about
+the note. The commotion outside. Capturing the
+Illyas' reinforcements from the south. Provisions.
+Cultivation of the soil. George and Harry explore the
+buildings. Trying to solve the puzzle. Arrangements
+of the streets.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII"> <span class="smcap">The Mysterious Cave. Returning to Unity</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_211">Page 211</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Cornerstones. The treasure chart. Caves near the
+town. A guess at the meaning of the buildings. The
+Medicine men. Questioning the chief. He says John
+will be destroyed if he enters the cave. John's test
+of the truth of the chief's statement. The trip to the
+cave. Proving that the Medicine men lied. The chief
+enjoys his first ride. The cave entrance. John goes in.
+He finds the Krishnos. Their conversation. John appears
+before them. The consternation. Orders them
+to leave the cave. Shows the chief that the Medicine
+men have lied. Taking them to the village. John and
+the boys explore the cave alone. No treasure. An immense
+deposit of copper. Probable explanation of the
+houses of the town. An immense chamber. The start
+for Unity. Sighting the Saboro village. Muro's family.
+Waiting to go to Unity. The town out to meet the
+returning warriors. Angel at the reception.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">XVIII.</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII"> <span class="smcap">Building a Ship to Take Them Home. Peace</span>,
+</a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#p_221">Page 221</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td class="abstract" colspan="3"><p>
+Oroto surprised at the appearance of Marmo. Anxious
+to see the great White Chief. The Professor welcomes
+the Illyas' chief. His great surprise. Friendship. Has
+no further belief in the wise men. Life and death.
+Why he was brought to Unity. Peace among the tribes.
+Oroto and Marmo confer. A jollification of the whites.
+What had been accomplished in two years. Building
+a ship for home. Sadness as well as joy. The engineering
+force of Unity. How the different tribes lived
+together. Rich soil. New houses. New people. A
+printing press. A schoolhouse. Making paper. Many
+mysteries unsolved. One thing lacking. The flag. Getting
+the flagpole. The ceremony. Hoisting OLD
+GLORY.</p>
+</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="right">&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;</td>
+  <td class="chap"><a href="#GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS"><span class="smcap">Glossary of Words Used in the Texts</span></a></td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS">Page 237</a></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+
+<h3>LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS</h3>
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_9" id="p_9">p. 9</a></span></p>
+<table border="0" width="86%" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Illustrations">
+<col style="width:75%;" />
+<col style="width:25%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&quot;The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them&quot;</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-front">Frontispiece</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+  <td class="pr" style="font-size: small">PAGE</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&quot;Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts&quot;</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-038">38</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&quot;The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror&quot;</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-095">86</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&quot;The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip&quot;</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-235">230</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Position of Wagon and Attacking Force</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-018">18</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">George's Old Dutch Oven</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-026">26</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Tattooed Arm. Antelope</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-029">29</a></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Taro Plant and Bulb</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-045">45</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Banyan Tree</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-065">65</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Showing Capillary Attraction</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-068">68</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Sample of Island Fence</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-071">71</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The One-cent Coin</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-076">76</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Five-cent Coin</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-077">77</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Chica. The Gum Plant</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-084">84</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Stone Cross Found in the Cave</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-092">92</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Ancient Crosses</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-093">93</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-131">131</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Primitive Weaving-Frame</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-137">137</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Comb from Fin of Fish</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-140">140</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Marmoset</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-166">166</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Proboscis Monkey</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-167">167</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Mysterious Message</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-170">170</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Orders of Architecture</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-179">179</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Peculiar Illya Village</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-212">212</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Diagram of Cross-shaped Cave</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-219">219</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">Paper-making Machine</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-231">231</a></td>
+</tr>
+
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The Stars and Stripes</td>
+  <td class="pr"><a href="#illus-236">236</a></td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+</div>
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_11" id="p_11">p. 11</a></span></p>
+<h2>THE CONQUEST</h2>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2>
+
+<h3>THE COMPACT BETWEEN THE FOUR ALLIED TRIBES</h3>
+
+
+<p>When the morning sun was struggling to come
+up over the mountains in the east, the whole camp
+was startled by Sutoto, who, with a number of
+the Berees during the night, had acted as a picket,
+to observe the attitude of the defeated tribes.</p>
+
+<p>He made his way to the Professor, who had
+taken his old place in the wagon. "The Tuolos,
+Kurabus and Illyas have all united and are now
+on the big river."</p>
+
+<p>"When did you last see them?"</p>
+
+<p>He held up his fingers to indicate the time,
+and the Professor called to Will: "Do you know
+what time he means?"</p>
+
+<p>Will soon interpreted the sign to mean three
+in the morning.</p>
+
+<p>"If they have not been separated it is a sign
+that they intend to continue the fight," said John.</p>
+
+<p>"I suggest," replied the Professor, "that we call
+a council of the principal men in the tribes, and
+let them fully understand what our aim and desires
+are, and thus unite the four tribes in a bond
+of unity. This is a most opportune time."</p>
+
+<p>The news of the obvious action of the tribes
+to the north was soon learned by all, and when<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_12" id="p_12">p. 12</a></span>
+the Professor's view was communicated there was
+a universal assent.</p>
+
+<p>Within an hour the chiefs assembled, and the
+Professor addressed them as follows: "My
+brothers, I am glad to be able to talk to you, and
+Uraso and Muro will tell you what I have to say.
+The Great Spirit sent us here, and we tried for
+a long time to tell you why we came, but you did
+not understand it.</p>
+
+<p>"The Great Spirit is the same to all tribes; he
+does not favor one more than the other, but sometimes
+one tribe will understand better than the
+other what he wants, and when they do know
+what he says it makes them stronger and better.</p>
+
+<p>"We believe the Great Spirit wants the different
+tribes to live together in peace, and not kill
+each other, and for that purpose he has given
+each one something to do. If he does that in a
+right way he not only helps himself, but he helps
+everyone else.</p>
+
+<p>"We want to show you how to do this, but before
+we can start we must all be like one family. We
+do not ask the Berees to give up their customs
+and become Saboros, nor do we want the Brabos
+to do as the Osagas do. We do not care what
+you believe about this or that, or how you shall
+dress, or what language you shall speak. The
+only thing we should be careful to do alike is to
+so work that we shall not injure each other.</p>
+
+<p>"It will not be hard to learn this, and we will
+all be patient, and we ask you to be patient with
+us. We want to show you that the ground is
+your mother, and when you ask her for fruit she<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_13" id="p_13">p. 13</a></span>
+will give you plenty, and you can soon learn to
+make things which will make your wives and children
+happy and contented.</p>
+
+<p>"You will know that anything you own will be
+yours, and none can take it from you, and if anyone
+tries to take it, everyone will stand up and
+protect you. The tribes which are now to the
+north must be made to understand this, and we
+must unite to compel them to agree to this manner
+of living.</p>
+
+<p>"I know that the tribes are powerful enemies,
+and can bring a great many warriors to fight
+against us, but we do not want to kill, nor do we
+want them to kill us. Your weapons are not any
+better than the ones they have, and we want to
+make some that will enable us to overcome them,
+not for the purpose of killing them, but only to
+protect ourselves and our homes and children.</p>
+
+<p>"If that is what you want and you agree with
+me that it is the right thing to do, we will help
+you. To do that you must not fight each other.
+I have heard that you do not believe in sacrificing
+captives, as the Tuolos and the Illyas and the
+Kurabus do, and I am glad of it.</p>
+
+<p>"I am told that you all know Suros, the great,
+father of the Berees, and that he is wise. He
+is my friend, and he must be present at our councils,
+but we cannot go to him now, because we must
+protect our friends, the Brabos, against the warring
+tribes.</p>
+
+<p>"But we must also be prepared to meet those
+enemies, and where we live, we have the workshop
+by which we can make all the wonderful things<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_14" id="p_14">p. 14</a></span>
+needed for our protection. We must go to the
+Brabos' village, to be on guard, while others must
+go to our village and bring back those articles,
+and we will make the things at your own homes,
+so we can compel those tribes to submit."</p>
+
+<p>These words affected all the warriors, and they
+gathered around the chiefs and expressed their
+willingness to do all that the Professor had suggested.</p>
+
+<p>One after the other, the chiefs assented, and
+the Brabos were especially pleased. Their chief,
+Oma, arose and said: "We have been fighting our
+friends, and not our enemies, but we did not know
+any better. We thought everyone was an enemy.
+The Great White Chief has told us a new way
+to live, and we will do whatever he says."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso, chief of the Osagas, held up his hand,
+and turned to the people: "I was wounded by
+the White Chief, and he took me to his village and
+treated me like a friend. He cured me of my
+wounds, and I became his friend. I left him and
+tried to come back and tell my people what a
+wonderful father he was, but the Illyas captured
+me, and when I escaped, and returned, found my
+people had gone out to fight him and his people.
+This made me sorry. I cannot tell you of all the
+things I saw at his village, and now let the White
+Chief say what I shall do and my whole tribe will
+help him. Muro will tell you what he has learned,
+because he, too, knows him."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not know how to tell you about this wonderful
+man," said Muro. "I have seen him refuse
+to kill his enemies, when he could easily do it. He<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_15" id="p_15">p. 15</a></span>
+healed the Kurabus, and returned him to his
+friends, and that is something new for us to think
+about. His enemies are our enemies, and his
+friends are our friends."</p>
+
+<p>This remarkable scene, which took place on the
+battle-field, could not be properly understood
+without some explanation of the preceding affairs
+in the history of Wonder Island.</p>
+
+<p>About a year and a half previous to this, the
+Professor referred to, and two boys, George Mayfield
+and Harry Crandall, who were companions on
+the schoolship <i>Investigator</i>, were wrecked and
+cast ashore on the island. It was fortunate that
+they landed on a portion of the island remote from
+the inhabited part, and for several months had
+no idea that any human beings lived there.</p>
+
+<p>They had absolutely nothing but their clothing;
+not even a knife or other tool, but despite this,
+set to work to make all the appliances used in
+civilized life. The preceding volumes showed how
+this was done, and what the successive steps were
+to obtain food and clothing, and to make tools and
+machinery.</p>
+
+<p>They built a home, and put up a water wheel,
+a workshop and laboratory; captured a species
+of cattle, called the yak, and used the milk for
+food, and trained the oxen to do the work of
+transportation; they found ramie fiber and flax,
+built a loom and wove goods from which clothing
+was made; they found various metals, in the form
+of ore and extracted them; and finally made guns,
+electric batteries, and did other things, as fast
+as they were able to carry on the work.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_16" id="p_16">p. 16</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In the meantime several exploring trips were
+undertaken, and they learned of the existence of
+savage tribes, and what was more startling still,
+ascertained that other boats, belonging to the ill-fated
+<i>Investigator</i>, had been cast ashore, and later
+on came in contact with several tribes with whom
+they had a number of fights, and by chance discovered
+a tribe, the Tuolos, who held two of the
+boys in captivity.</p>
+
+<p>These they rescued, namely, Thomas Chambers
+and Ralph Wharton. Returning from one of these
+expeditions they found a man at their home, who
+had entirely lost his memory. This was John L.
+Varney, a highly educated man, who had seen service
+in many lands, and later on was restored to
+reason.</p>
+
+<p>Prior to the present enterprise, which was related
+in the opening pages, a chief, Uraso, of the
+Osagas, was wounded and captured by them, and
+taken to their Cataract home, as they called it,
+and when healed, he had left them, for the purpose
+of returning to his own tribe, so that he
+might bring them to the Cataract as friends; but
+he was captured and detained.</p>
+
+<p>During this interim, the last expedition was organized,
+and after some mishaps, they proceeded
+into the part of the country where the savages
+lived, and on the way rescued the chief of the
+Saboros, and also a former companion of John.</p>
+
+<p>Two weeks before our story begins, the Professor
+was captured by a band of Berees, and
+taken to their village, where he was instrumental
+in healing the chief's favorite daughter, and in<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_17" id="p_17">p. 17</a></span>
+gratitude, placed his warriors at the Professor's
+disposal to rescue his friends, who were about to
+be attacked by the hostile tribes.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor saw and rescued two more of
+the shipwrecked boys, who were held captive by
+the Berees, and together they started to relieve
+the occupants of the wagon. The various tribes
+had been at war with each other, and when they
+learned that the wagon with the whites was entering
+their country, all sought to effect the capture;
+but the enmity between certain tribes caused
+several of them to unite and the three most bitter
+and vindictive, namely, the Tuolos, Kurabus
+and the Illyas, were opposed to the Osagas, the
+Saboros and the Berees.</p>
+
+<p>It was fortunate that all these forces met at the
+place where the wagon was located, and in the
+battle which followed, the whites and their allies
+won. The situation was, however, that the victory
+might soon be a fruitless one, because the three
+tribes could muster a larger force than the four
+tribes now joined under the Professor, and might
+renew the attack at any time.</p>
+
+<p>"Let us now see what the situation is," said the
+Professor, to the chiefs. "I have made a map of
+the island, showing where the various tribes are
+located, and where the villages are situated, so
+we may all have a like understanding."</p>
+
+<p>"I would suggest," said John, "that a part of
+the force be sent to the Cataract and bring all the
+machinery and stock we have at that place, to this
+part of the island, where it can be set up and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_18" id="p_18">p. 18</a></span>
+operated. In that way we can the more readily
+teach the people how to do the work."</p>
+
+<p>"That is absolutely necessary, as it is too far off
+where the plant is now located, to be of service
+to us."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 368px;">
+<a id="illus-018" name="illus-018" />
+<a href="#p_18">
+<img src="images/illus-fig1-p018.png" width="368" height="311"
+alt="Fig. 1. Position of the Wagon and attacking Forces."
+title="Fig. 1. Position of the Wagon and attacking Forces." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 1. <span class="u">Position</span> <span class="u">of</span>
+<span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Wagon</span> <span class="u">and</span> <span class="u">attacking</span> <span class="u">Forces</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"If you will allow me to say something it
+might help us," remarked Muro. "Let the Professor
+select a certain number of warriors from
+each tribe, to go to your village and bring the
+things here, and others will remain, and watch
+our enemies."</p>
+
+<p>"That is a good idea," observed Blakely, "but
+before doing that I think we ought to muster our
+forces, so that we may know what we have to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_19" id="p_19">p. 19</a></span>
+depend on, and the chiefs can tell us who are the
+best fitted for the various tasks."</p>
+
+<p>"Your view is the correct one," answered the
+Professor, "and Muro, you, Uraso and Ralsea, inform
+all of them what is required. I shall expect
+you, Blakely, to take charge of the mustering of
+the forces."</p>
+
+<p>The suggestion was understood and agreed to
+by all, and the various tribes were arranged in
+columns.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor addressed them as follows: "In
+our country, we have a plan for everything we
+do, and everything is done in order. We try to
+follow the plan in which the Great Spirit orders
+everything done. We want every man to do something
+and be responsible for one part of the work."</p>
+
+<p>"While the people are gone to the White Chief's
+village, others might go to the Berees' village and
+bring the Great Chief Suros, as he is wise, and
+we should like to have him here," added Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>"Your suggestion," said the Professor, "is a
+wise one, and it will show how earnest you are in
+making this bond a lasting one among you. I
+thank you for calling attention to the matter, and
+it shall be acted on at once."</p>
+
+
+<table style="text-indent: 0;"
+border="0" width="450" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="list">
+<col style="width:20%;" />
+<col style="width:80%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr>
+  <td align="left" colspan="2">
+  <p>The muster roll, as prepared by Blakely, showed
+the following results:</p>
+
+<p>
+The Berees: Sub-chief Ralsea and eighty-five warriors.
+</p>
+
+<p>The Osagas: Chief Uraso, two sub-chiefs and one hundred and ten warriors.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The Saboros: Chief Muro, three sub-chiefs and
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_20" id="p_20">p. 20</a></span>one hundred and fifteen warriors.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The Brabos: Chief Oma, two sub-chiefs and one hundred and five warriors.
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The whites were enumerated as follows:
+</p>
+
+<p>
+The Professor.<br />
+John L. Varney.<br />
+Samuel Blakely.<br />
+</p></td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+  <td class="left">{ George Mayfield,</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="left">{ Harry Crandall,</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="left">{ Thomas Chambers,</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">The boys:</td>
+<td class="left">{ Ralph Wharton,</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="left">{ James Redfield,</td>
+</tr>
+<tr>
+  <td align="left">&nbsp;</td>
+<td class="left">{ William Rudel.</td>
+</tr>
+</tbody>
+</table>
+
+
+<p>The combined force thus numbered four hundred
+and twenty-four, not counting Angel. It
+should be said that Angel was an orang-outan,
+captured while a baby, and he had been educated
+by George to do many wonderful things. It is
+well known that these animals are great imitators,
+but this one really learned many useful things.
+One of them was to climb the tallest trees and
+warn George of the approach of enemies, and
+this was such a wonderful thing, that Muro explained
+it to his people and they really admired
+the animal, and who was, in consequence, a great
+pet.</p>
+
+<p>When the council met the Professor said: "I
+will detail one hundred and fifty men to accompany
+John to our village to bring the things from
+that place, and those remaining will go to the
+Brabos' village to watch our enemies and to protect
+the home of our friends. Ralsea should take
+the litter and twenty men and go after the Great<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_21" id="p_21">p. 21</a></span>
+Chief Suros, and bring him here, so that we may
+consult with him."</p>
+
+<p>"We have thirty guns," said John, "and at least
+half should be left with you while we are away."</p>
+
+<p>"It might also be well," remarked Blakely, "to
+have the different chiefs select the most competent
+men in the four tribes to whom instructions
+might be given in the use of the guns, and I will
+drill them and show how to handle them to the
+best advantage."</p>
+
+<p>The four chiefs selected the men for the expedition
+from the respective tribes, and the four
+boys who had been together for so long, begged
+that they might be of the party also, and the
+Professor could not deny them this privilege.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning the entire force started
+on the march for the Brabos' village, and before
+night arrived at the main one, where the Professor
+and his party had the first close sight of the
+village and the inhabitants.</p>
+
+<p>Runners were sent ahead to inform the people
+of the expected arrivals. This was the first time
+in the history of the island that a foreign tribe had
+ever visited them, except in a hostile manner, and
+the curiosity of the women and children was intense.</p>
+
+<p>Oma, the chief, had graciously ordered the best
+hut for the Professor, but he declined it with many
+thanks, and presented the chief's wife with one of
+the mirrors, which delighted them. Some of the
+warriors were designated to procure game, and
+others to bring in wood for the fires, and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_22" id="p_22">p. 22</a></span>
+most skilled were selected to scout to the northwest
+to determine the movements of the enemy.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning, John and his party, with the
+wagon, started for the Cataract home. Uraso
+and Muro were designated to accompany them,
+and you may be sure that to the boys this trip
+had in it every enjoyment that could be brought
+to them.</p>
+
+<p>"What a difference there is in things, now,"
+mused Harry, as he drove the yaks along. "I
+hope they will have no trouble with those treacherous
+tribes until we get back."</p>
+
+<p>"It makes me sad to think that we have to
+give up the Cataract," said George. "The past
+year has been a happy one to all of us, even
+though we have had serious times. And what
+shall we do with the flag?"</p>
+
+<p>They had made a beautiful flag, which floated
+from a tall staff on Observation Hill. It would
+have been a grief to permit it to remain.</p>
+
+<p>John overheard the conversation. "Yes; we
+shall certainly take it with us, and teach the
+natives here to respect it." And the boys applauded
+the sentiment.</p>
+
+<p>In two days more the party sighted the Cataract,
+and saw "Old Glory" floating from the mast.
+When they saw it again, they took off their hats
+and gave three cheers. This so astonished the
+natives that they could not understand it, and
+Uraso told his people that the flag was worshipped
+by the white people.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you hear what Uraso told them?" asked
+John.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_23" id="p_23">p. 23</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"No; what was it!"</p>
+
+<p>"He said that white people did not carry individual
+charms to ward off troubles, but that they
+had the flag for that purpose, and the one flag
+was the charm of all the people; and he also told
+them it was made a certain way for that purpose."</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_24" id="p_24">p. 24</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2>
+
+<h3>BUSY TIMES AT THE CATARACT. THE ALARMING NEWS</h3>
+
+
+<p>The flag incident, and Uraso's interpretation of
+it, amused the boys immensely.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know why Uraso thought so?" asked
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"No; I can't understand why he ever had such
+an idea," replied Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"You forget it has been our custom, ever since
+I can remember, to go to Observation Hill, each
+day, to watch the sea, in the hope that a vessel
+might be sighted. Uraso thought that was intended
+as a tribute to the flag."</p>
+
+<p>"After all," said Ralph, on reflecting, "they are
+not so much out of the way, and the flag is really
+our talisman, isn't it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; because it is a real protection, and not
+a fancied one. It is a symbol, behind which lies
+all the power of a material kind, which is able to
+help us everywhere, and among all people. The
+charm which the savage wears, is a symbol to him,
+and that typifies protection from some unknown
+power. To us that is a reality, and we know
+where the power is."</p>
+
+<p>The dear old Cataract home. How the boys
+roamed over every part of it, and went down where
+the cattle were still ranging around. The place
+was a study for the warriors.</p>
+
+<p>"Now, boys, for the first day entertain your visi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_25" id="p_25">p. 25</a></span>tors,
+show them everything, and amuse them in
+every way possible; and after to-morrow we must
+commence work in earnest," was John's injunction
+to the boys.</p>
+
+<p>What could be more natural than to start the
+water wheel in motion? The warriors stood on
+the bank, watched them push it in place, and then
+the sawmill was started. The process of turning
+out lumber with the saw was marvelous. Every
+part of the shop was filled, as the boys set the
+grindstone, the lathe, and the gristmill into
+motion.</p>
+
+<p>When a log was finally secured to be cut into
+shafts for spears, and they saw the wood-turning
+lathe make the shaft round and true, their enthusiasm
+knew no bounds.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell them, Muro, that is what we want them to
+do," said John, and they opened their eyes at
+the possibilities.</p>
+
+<p>There was still quite an amount of barley which
+had not been ground, and the willing warriors
+helped the boys bring a lot to the mill and the
+production of the flour before their eyes was such
+an amazing thing that they could not even give
+vent to their expressions.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the day one of the bullocks had been
+killed by John's order, and a roasting pit dug
+out, and this was now being prepared for the principal
+meal of the day, and many of them were
+interested in this new way of roasting an entire
+carcass.</p>
+
+<p>A quantity of vegetables had also been gathered
+by the parties detailed for the purpose, and George<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_26" id="p_26">p. 26</a></span>
+was the busiest of the lot, as he personally
+attended to the cooking of the various dishes. He
+had most willing helpers, each one trying to lend
+a hand, so that he did little more than direct.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 348px;">
+<a id="illus-026" name="illus-026" />
+<a href="#p_26">
+<img src="images/illus-fig2-p026.png" width="348" height="195"
+alt="Fig. 2. George&#39;s Old Dutch Oven."
+title="Fig. 2. George&#39;s Old Dutch Oven." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 2. <span class="u">George&#39;s</span>  <span class="u">Old</span>  <span class="u">Dutch</span>  <span class="u">Oven</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>But he was determined to have bread, and it did
+not take long to improvise an old Dutch oven
+with the firebrick, and in this a fire was built, so
+that the bricks were heated up intensely, and the
+fire then withdrawn, and a cover put over the
+chimney. The heated brick, therefore, did the
+baking. Loaf after loaf was put in, and while
+the dough had not risen as it should have done,
+owing to lack of time, still the bread produced
+was something so unlike anything the natives had
+ever seen, that the making of it in their presence
+was a joy, to say nothing of the eating of it when
+the meal was served.</p>
+
+<p>It was not only a picnic; it was a feast. None
+there, excepting Uraso and Stut, had ever tasted
+such things before. They knew what honey was,
+but sugar was a novelty, and this was supplied<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_27" id="p_27">p. 27</a></span>
+without stint. George had no opportunity to make
+any delicacies in the form of cakes, but he made
+a barley pudding in which was a bountiful supply
+of sago.</p>
+
+<p>After the meal, John called the boys together
+and said: "Before dismantling the place here it
+has occurred to me that there are some things
+which we ought to make, because it will take some
+time to set up the parts, even after we get them
+in the new locality. I believe we still have quite
+a quantity of the cast-steel bars, from which we
+intended making gun barrels."</p>
+
+<p>"In looking over the stock to-day," said Harry,
+"I find we have sufficient to make at least fifty
+barrels, and I have prepared the lathe to do just
+what you have suggested."</p>
+
+<p>"Good boy," responded John. "You and Tom
+keep at that, and don't mind about anything else.
+If we can once get the barrels bored out, and the
+fittings made, we can put them together without
+having the shop in running order."</p>
+
+<p>"In talking with Harry yesterday," said Tom,
+"we made up the scheme of putting a small bench
+in the wagon, with the vise, so that we can put
+together some of the guns on our way."</p>
+
+<p>"All that is in the right direction. And now,
+another thing. The wagon we have is not at all
+adequate for what we have to take with us, but
+we have plenty of people to carry things, and they
+will be glad to do it, but some things are very inconvenient
+to carry, so that it will be of material
+assistance if we build another wagon."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_28" id="p_28">p. 28</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at John, merrily laughing at
+the suggestion.</p>
+
+<p>"Just the thing," said Ralph, "and it is easily
+done. We still have the old wheels that were
+used before we built the last set."</p>
+
+<p>"Quite true; I had entirely forgotten about that.
+Uraso will help, and will be just the fellow to
+direct his men. Now let us start at this with
+vigor. We must return as early as possible. The
+hostiles may attack the Professor at any time, and
+the weapons are necessary articles."</p>
+
+<p>As they were about to separate, Harry remarked:
+"We have a quantity of the iron which
+we made, and instead of carrying it along in the
+wagon, it occurred to me that we ought to forge
+out some spears and bolos."</p>
+
+<p>"I had counted on doing that myself, but many
+thanks for the suggestion," answered John.</p>
+
+<p>There was one thing noticeable in all the warriors,
+and that was the universal tattoo. This
+was something practiced by all. Referring to the
+custom, Ralph asked: "What is the cause of the
+tattooing habit?"</p>
+
+<p>John looked at him with a smile, as he answered:
+"People who wear few clothes want something
+with which to decorate themselves. The idea always
+was and always will be, to improve on nature.
+That is one of the reasons. The other is, that it
+was an original way of distinguishing one individual
+from another. You will notice among these
+people, that the chiefs have a different tattoo from
+the others in the tribe."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean that the name of each man<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_29" id="p_29">p. 29</a></span>
+was tattooed so he would be known in that
+way?"</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 348px;">
+<a id="illus-029" name="illus-029" />
+<a href="#p_29">
+<img src="images/illus-fig3-p029.png" width="348" height="253"
+alt="Fig. 3. The Tattooed arm. Antelope."
+title="Fig. 3. The Tattooed arm. Antelope." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 3. <span class="u">The</span>  <span class="u">Tattooed</span>  <span class="u">arm</span>. <span class="u">Antelope</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"Yes; and also to designate his rank. The
+names of great warriors and wise men of the tribe
+are generally descriptive. The North American
+Indian adopted that course, and it was a very
+sensible thing to do. You have heard of Sitting
+Bull, Rain in the Face (that is, a pock-marked
+individual), Antelope, and others of like character,
+could be drawn, and thus convey the name
+without difficulty. Uraso and Muro mean some
+particular things or objects which can be depicted,
+and thus one tribe can communicate with the other,
+even though they do not understand each other's
+language."</p>
+
+<p>"Then clothing is also another way of showing
+rank or title?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_30" id="p_30">p. 30</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"In countries where people are compelled to
+wear covering as a matter of comfort, the clothing
+was adopted as a means of expressing the
+person's position in life."</p>
+
+<p>After John and his party left the Brabos' village,
+the Professor called Blakely into consultation,
+and advised him to organize the remaining
+warriors into some cohesive form, and provide a
+definite and orderly plan of carrying out the scouting
+and picketing tactics necessary to keep them
+advised of the movements of the hostiles.</p>
+
+<p>Blakely had already acquired a fairly good
+knowledge of the rudiments of the native tongue,
+so that he was able to get along well in giving his
+orders and disposing of the warriors. He was
+ably seconded by Ralsea and Sutoto; and especially,
+the latter, became one of the most important
+factors in the organization of the tribes in
+making a strong and intelligent fighting force.</p>
+
+<p>Two days after John left, it was announced that
+the old Chief Suros was on his way from the
+southern part of the island, and the Professor
+headed a party of thirty picked men, accompanied
+by Sutoto, to welcome him. The warriors were
+taken from the four tribes.</p>
+
+<p>They met the litter, bearing the Chief, fully five
+miles from the village, and Suros was visibly affected
+at the honor shown him. The Professor
+extended every act of courtesy, and when they
+arrived at the village, the Professor was quick
+to give him the full details of all the happenings
+since their last interview.</p>
+
+<p>"We have talked over the plans to make you<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_31" id="p_31">p. 31</a></span>
+and all of your people happy and strong. I have
+sent a number of the warriors to my village, and
+they will bring all our things with them, so that
+we may put them up in your country, and teach
+your people how to build and to make useful articles,
+and beautiful ornaments."</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard the wonderful things which you
+have done, and what you have promised, and we
+will try and follow your words," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"I have told the people that you must be here,
+as we value your wisdom. We would go to you,
+but we still have powerful enemies to the north,
+and they are waiting to attack us. Until we are
+safe from them we cannot go to you; but when
+my people return we will be better prepared to
+resist."</p>
+
+<p>The chief was visibly affected at this consideration
+for him, and he thanked the Professor for
+sending the messengers.</p>
+
+<p>The boys, Jim and Will, were interested observers
+in all that was taking place, and the Professor
+had them about him at all times, and to
+them he communicated his orders. Their ready
+understanding of the native tongue was a great
+help to the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>It was for this reason that the Professor was
+glad the two boys were content to remain with
+him. Speaking about the savages, to the Professor,
+Jim remarked: "There is always one
+thing which seems singular about these fellows.
+They are awfully quick at learning. Now, what I
+can't understand is, that, quick as they are, they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_32" id="p_32">p. 32</a></span>
+do not seem to advance very much, but stay in
+the same rut right along."</p>
+
+<p>The Professor smiled at the observation, as he
+replied: "Sir John Lubbock, a noted English
+naturalist, sums up his estimate of the savage
+mind in the following statement: 'Savages unite
+the character of childhood with the passions and
+strength of men.' Their utter simplicity is their
+weakness. When that is aroused, if properly
+done, they become men."</p>
+
+<p>"But what is the great difficulty in the way of
+their advance?"</p>
+
+<p>"The greatest writers seem to agree that the
+primary want of the savage is a rigid, definite
+and concise law. The idea of order does not appeal
+to him, except to a limited extent. Like children,
+they do not go beyond the immediate thing.
+The reasoning faculties are not impaired, but are
+undeveloped."</p>
+
+<p>But Jim's observation was true. Blakely early
+discovered this in treating with the natives, and
+it did not take long to make them understand
+that by working together for the common defense
+they could be made far more effective than by permitting
+each to do as his own impulse dictated.</p>
+
+<p>Thus, by constant association with the head men
+in the different tribes, he early learned who were
+the best runners, and the most skillful scouts, and
+who were particularly reliable for the different
+branches of the service.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto, as stated, was the most valuable factor,
+and the Professor grew to love him. One day he
+came in great haste, and said: "I have news for<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_33" id="p_33">p. 33</a></span>
+you. The tribes are directly north of us, and appear
+to be moving to the east."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know how large a force they have?"</p>
+
+<p>"Fully three hundred."</p>
+
+<p>"Have you any theory why they have not attacked
+us before?"</p>
+
+<p>"I think they are sending for more warriors."</p>
+
+<p>"How many more can they depend on from their
+tribes?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not more than one hundred and fifty or two
+hundred."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think it is possible, Blakely, that they
+have learned of the force which we have sent to
+the Cataract?"</p>
+
+<p>"This movement to the east seems to indicate
+it."</p>
+
+<p>"In order to satisfy yourself it would be wise
+for you to ascertain their actions at once."</p>
+
+<p>"I have selected a hundred picked men, and
+shall take the field this afternoon. I have suspicions
+that they are delaying on account of reinforcements,
+or waiting for reports from the runners
+which they have, no doubt, sent to the Cataract."</p>
+
+<p>"I was rather stupid in that matter," exclaimed
+the Professor. "I had overlooked the fact that
+the Kurabus were the ones who attacked us at the
+Cataract, and as they know its locality it is but
+natural they should make an advance in that
+quarter."</p>
+
+<p>Blakely and his men were on the way within
+a half hour after this conversation. This was
+now the fifth day after the departure of John.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_34" id="p_34">p. 34</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Professor, and the chiefs, Oma and Suros,
+were in daily consultation, and together were developing
+a plan by which the different tribal interests
+could be welded together, and to establish a
+form of government which would be agreeable to
+all.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning of the sixth day, after John's
+party left the Brabos' village, three of the hunters
+who were of the party delegated to bring in game,
+and one of whom had been instructed in the use
+of the gun, captured two Kurabus within a mile
+of the Cataract.</p>
+
+<p>These were brought to John at once, and there
+was high glee at the success of the hunters.
+Harry was the first to see the captives and he
+rushed in to John with this information:</p>
+
+<p>"The hunters have captured two Kurabus, and
+who do you suppose is one of them? He is the
+fellow we wounded and brought here with us.
+Don't you remember the one we carried out at the
+time I put an inscription on his litter?"</p>
+
+<p>John smiled, as he recalled the litter. His association
+with the different ones made him fairly well
+acquainted with the language by this time; but
+Uraso and Muro were present. As they were
+brought in, John looked at them and his brow darkened,
+as he addressed them sternly.</p>
+
+<p>"Why are you here?"</p>
+
+<p>They cringed before his piercing look.</p>
+
+<p>"Answer me! Do you want us to kill all of
+your people? Did you tell your chief when we
+let you go, that we did not want war, but peace?"</p>
+
+<p>Neither of them answered, but shrank back.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_35" id="p_35">p. 35</a></span>
+John assumed a terrible anger, as he continued:
+"We healed you, and tried to show our friendship,
+but you tried to kill us. Is that what you
+people believe in?"</p>
+
+<p>Tama, who was the warrior alluded to by Harry,
+soon recovered his speech, and after glancing
+around at the chiefs, said: "The chiefs would
+not believe what you said."</p>
+
+<p>"What are you here for now?"</p>
+
+<p>"I was sent here to see what you were doing."</p>
+
+<p>"How many were sent?"</p>
+
+<p>"No one but Reto and myself."</p>
+
+<p>"Lock them up," said John, "and keep a good
+guard over them. So that is their game, is it?
+So much the more important for us to get the
+weapons ready."</p>
+
+<p>The new wagon was now ready for the top,
+and this was completed in short work. John
+started on the bolos immediately, and also forged
+out a number of spears. The boys were set to
+work preparing the stocks for the barrels, and
+these were cut out in the rough at the sawmill,
+and several more knives prepared. The most
+skillful of the warriors were then instructed to
+dress them up and get them ready for the barrels.</p>
+
+<p>The work was prosecuted not only during the
+day, but at night, as well. It was fortunate that
+during the time the yaks were lost, some months
+before, they had trained a pair to drive, and these
+were now again yoked up to give them experimental
+training for the coming journey.</p>
+
+<p>Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and
+the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_36" id="p_36">p. 36</a></span>
+Giving them explicit instructions to proceed westward,
+and discover, if possible, whether their
+enemies were making any movement toward the
+Cataract, and if, on the other hand, the movement
+was toward the Professor and the Brabos' village,
+to send one runner to the village and the other
+back to the Cataract.</p>
+
+<p>In less than ten days' time Harry had turned
+out thirty-two barrels, and John had given a great
+deal of attention to the preparation of the ammunition.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_37" id="p_37">p. 37</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2>
+
+<h3>INTERCEPTING THE MARCH OF THE CONFEDERATES.<br/>THE TREASURE</h3>
+
+
+<p>Blakely started north with the picked warriors,
+and before evening came in sight of them,
+headed for the east. It was evident that they
+were about to go to the Cataract.</p>
+
+<p>Sutoto begged to be permitted to go there and
+inform them of the danger of attack, and Blakely
+consented, and without waiting for the morning,
+was on his way. He traveled most of the night,
+reaching the place in the afternoon, and was received
+by John and the others with the most
+effusive welcome.</p>
+
+<p>"What are you here for?" asked John hurriedly.</p>
+
+<p>"The tribes are coming this way."</p>
+
+<p>"I have just learned from one of our runners
+that they went far to the north of you, and assumed
+that the intention was to attack us."</p>
+
+<p>"The Professor should be warned at once," was
+Sutoto's response.</p>
+
+<p>"I have instructed that to be done," answered
+John.</p>
+
+<p>The scenes around the Cataract were intensely
+interesting to him. He wandered around with
+the boys, and asked questions on every conceivable
+subject. Blakely had given him one of the
+guns, and he was taken to the workshop and told<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_38" id="p_38">p. 38</a></span>
+how they were made. These things so fascinated
+him that, hungry as he was, he could hardly be induced
+to take time for his meals.</p>
+
+<p>The boys admired him immensely, and together
+they acted like boys. The water wheel; the sawmill;
+the two stones which served as the gristmill;
+the grindstones; the lathes; and the little
+foundry were entrancing.</p>
+
+<p>When the boys took him to the blacksmith shop,
+and he saw the forge, and the numerous spear
+heads which John had turned out, as well as the
+bolos, his eyes showed the intense delight the sight
+afforded him.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning one of the runners appeared
+and stated that the tribes were still waiting, and
+also imparted the further information that Blakely
+and his party were at a safe distance, and unknown
+to the hostiles.</p>
+
+<p>It was obvious now that they were awaiting the
+arrival of the two scouts who had been captured
+before advancing. Several scouts and runners
+were again sent forward, with instructions to return
+with information the moment an advance
+was made.</p>
+
+<p>When Blakely reached the vicinity of their confederated
+enemies, he thought it wise to keep in the
+background, and was at a loss to account for the
+delay during the entire day, but before evening
+one of the Berees, who had been sent by John, arrived
+in camp.</p>
+
+<p>"I have just come from the white man's village,
+and they know that the tribes are moving in
+that direction."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 387px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;">
+<a id="illus-038" name="illus-038" />
+<a href="#p_38">
+<img src="images/illus-p035.jpg" width="400" height="611"
+alt="Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts"
+title="Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">&quot;<i>Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the most trustworthy scouts</i>&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_35">See p. 35</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_39" id="p_39">p. 39</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"How did they discover it?"</p>
+
+<p>"We captured two spies and have them as captives."</p>
+
+<p>This information suggested the cause of the delay.
+He immediately called a runner, and indited
+the following letter: "I am keeping on the watch,
+and am not afraid to attack the whole of them, if
+need be. If the guns you are making are not
+completed, do not worry about it, as I shall keep
+them interested here for several days longer. I
+will not appear unless I find they have taken up
+the march in your direction. Blakely."</p>
+
+<p>The following day the scouts informed Blakely
+that the allies had broken camp and were about
+to move to the east. Calling the warriors together,
+he addressed them as follows: "My friends; we
+are about to meet your enemies, not for the
+purpose of fighting them, but to prevent them
+from attacking our friends at the white man's
+home. Our friends there are preparing the fire
+guns for us, before they come to us, and we must
+now stand together to prevent them from going
+there until we are ready to meet them."</p>
+
+<p>The warriors all crowded around, and showed
+by their attitude that they could be depended
+upon.</p>
+
+<p>"We have with us eleven fire guns, and I will
+now tell you how we must fight them, if it is
+necessary. I will stand in the center of the front
+line, with the guns, and on each side of us will
+be the ones I shall select. All those in front will
+have bows and arrows, but you will not need them,
+unless they come up too close. We must now<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_40" id="p_40">p. 40</a></span>
+march to the right, as fast as we can, and get between
+them and our friends."</p>
+
+<p>The column started out on its mission, and made
+its way with the utmost speed to the east, and before
+noon turned to the north, being thus placed
+directly in the path of the oncoming forces. The
+allies moved along deliberately, entirely unaware
+of the existence of any force.</p>
+
+<p>Before four o'clock the first signs of the advance
+were observed. Blakely had selected a
+strong position on a slight elevation, on the east
+side of one of the little streams which flowed into
+the Cataract River, that commanded an open front.
+His entire force was placed between two natural
+objects, the right resting behind a rocky projection
+and the left to the rear of a heavy chaparral
+of wood.</p>
+
+<p>Entirely unsuspecting, the allies marched along
+the stream, and crossed not a hundred yards below.
+When they were within hailing distance, John
+and Ralsea suddenly appeared in front of their
+concealed column, and the latter, at the instigation
+of Blakely, addressed them as follows:</p>
+
+<p>"The white men do not want war, but peace. They
+have come only to rescue their own people. You
+must give them up, or there can be no peace. The
+white chief tells me that if you injure or kill the
+white men you now have he will hold you responsible,
+because he is powerful, and is now ready to
+destroy you and your wives and children, but he
+does not want to do that. We are here to prevent
+you from going to the white man's house."</p>
+
+<p>The consternation on the faces of the savages, at<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_41" id="p_41">p. 41</a></span>
+the appearance of two, was easily discernible.
+They listened in silence while Ralsea spoke, and,
+then indicated that they would hold a council and
+give their answer.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that the allies were taken by surprise,
+and it must have been obvious that they had
+no idea of the force which was in their front.
+Blakely had wisely stationed pickets to the right
+and the left, in order to observe their movements,
+after the first surprise was over.</p>
+
+<p>The conference lasted until night fell, and thus
+the first object was gained; delay. In the morning
+one of the chiefs appeared, and Blakely and
+Ralsea again went to the front.</p>
+
+<p>"I will give you our answer," he said. "The
+white man attacked us, and we fought him back.
+He has killed our warriors, and we will not treat
+with him at this time."</p>
+
+<p>Ralsea replied: "You have done the same that
+we have done toward the white man; we were always
+the first to attack them. They tried to be
+friendly, but we would not listen to them."</p>
+
+<p>"We will let you know in two suns what our answer
+is." And he withdrew.</p>
+
+<p>"That means," remarked Ralsea, "that they are
+waiting for reinforcements."</p>
+
+<p>"So much the better. We will be reinforced
+much better than they by the time their reinforcements
+come to hand."</p>
+
+<p>"We must send a runner to the Great White
+Chief, and tell him to stop the Kurabus from coming
+to their assistance," said Ralsea.</p>
+
+<p>"That is a wise suggestion," answered Blakely;<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_42" id="p_42">p. 42</a></span>
+and without delay one was selected and made his
+way to the Brabos' village.</p>
+
+<p>When the Professor received Blakely's note he
+called in the Brabo chief, Oma, and said: "The
+forces we sent out are preventing the allies from
+going to our village, and have sent a runner here
+to inform us that the Kurabus are about to send
+more warriors to aid our enemies. Select one hundred
+warriors and let us go to the Kurabus' village
+and capture the warriors who are there,
+and also put the villages in our power. This may
+make them understand that they have no homes
+to go to unless they come to us."</p>
+
+<p>This information delighted Oma, and he hurriedly
+gathered the warriors, and the Professor
+concluded to accompany them, as he did not want
+the warriors to commit any excesses against the
+villages and inhabitants of their former enemies,
+or exact any reprisals for the past indignities
+that some of them had suffered from the Kurabus.</p>
+
+<p>A day's march brought them close to the main
+village, and scouts were sent to the front to ascertain
+whether the warriors still remaining in the
+village had gone forward. Before the scouts could
+return fully fifty warriors emerged from the village,
+and were taking up the march to join the
+allies.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor instructed the warriors under his
+command to divide into three parties, one to remain
+with him, and the others to go to the right
+and to the left, so that the Kurabus would thus
+be entrapped.</p>
+
+<p>The party marched forward unsuspectingly, di<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_43" id="p_43">p. 43</a></span>rectly
+toward the position occupied by the Professor,
+and he instructed Oma to show himself and
+inform them that they were surrounded and that
+resistance would be useless.</p>
+
+<p>Some, more venturesome than others, started to
+retreat, but the unexpected appearance of the Professor's
+warriors drove them back, and without
+firing a shot or loosing an arrow they submitted.
+When the Professor appeared they were the more
+surprised. The whole were marched back to the
+village, and, although the women tried to escape,
+all were soon rounded up and brought back.</p>
+
+<p>The captured Kurabus warriors were taken to
+the Brabos' village, and the women informed that
+they would not be injured, as the white man did not
+believe in making war.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor at once sent a runner to Blakely
+and also to John. Two days afterwards the runner
+appeared at the Cataract with the following message
+from the Professor:</p>
+
+<p>"We captured the Kurabus' village to-day, and
+all the warriors left there, as they were about to
+leave to join the forces now before Blakely. We
+have taken all of them to the Brabos' village, where
+they will be held. Make the utmost speed with the
+weapons. In the meantime, I have sent a force to
+the north to intercept any reinforcements that the
+Tuolos may forward."</p>
+
+<p>The message from Blakely was as follows: "We
+arrested the movement of the allies yesterday, and
+asked why they were determined to attack us.
+They refused to give an answer, and they are, probably,
+awaiting reinforcements. My forces are be<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_44" id="p_44">p. 44</a></span>tween
+them and the Cataract, and they will give
+their answer in two days."</p>
+
+<p>All this news was imparted to the people, and
+the knowledge was received with enthusiasm. It
+gave the warriors the first glimpse of the value
+of cooperation, and the benefits of a directing
+hand in their affairs.</p>
+
+<p>At the Cataract matters were progressing favorably.
+Reports from Blakely and the Professor
+assured them that they would have no difficulty,
+in a few days, in getting at least thirty of
+the guns ready. Stut proved himself to be the
+most apt pupil, and nothing interested him as much
+as the forge and anvil, and John, noticing this,
+set him to work on the small anvil to forge out
+arrow heads.</p>
+
+<p>The arrows used by the natives were uniformly
+of stone, but the metal ones were perfect, and
+so arranged that, with the ramie fiber, could be
+readily attached to the shaft. The most deft
+workers in the making of the native arrows were
+selected, and together they made up a large quantity
+of arrows, and Stut seemed to be indefatigable
+in turning out the heads for the workers.</p>
+
+<p>During this period the larder was not forgotten.
+The hunters brought in every day an immense
+quantity of taro, which seemed to be their
+favorite vegetable.</p>
+
+<p>This is a stemless plant, which has heart-shaped
+leaves, about a foot long, and the leaves and stalks
+are prepared by them in the same way that we use
+spinach and asparagus.</p>
+
+<p>But the tuber, or root, of this vegetable is the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_45" id="p_45">p. 45</a></span>
+most valuable part. It is larger than the common
+beet, and sometimes grows to a foot or more in
+length. This was beaten into a pulp by the natives,
+and made into a bread or pudding.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a id="illus-045" name="illus-045" />
+<a href="#p_45">
+<img src="images/illus-fig4-p045.png" width="335" height="371"
+alt="Fig. 4. The Taro Plant and Bulb."
+title="Fig. 4. The Taro Plant and Bulb." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 4. <span class="u">The</span>  <span class="u">Taro</span>  <span class="u">Plant</span>  <span class="u">and</span>  <span class="u">Bulb</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"I like the taro," said George. "It can be used
+in so many ways, and I want to try it in the different
+forms as soon as we have an opportunity."</p>
+
+<p>"In the Sandwich Islands, and in many other
+places it is the vegetable from which the well-known
+Poi is made," said John.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_46" id="p_46">p. 46</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Do you know how it is made?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"It is beaten up, just as you see them do it
+here, and then set in the sun to ferment for about
+three or four days. It is afterwards boiled with
+fowl, and makes a very pleasant dish, most appetizing
+and nourishing. The fermented Poi will
+last for weeks. It is the same as the well-known
+kalo of the Pacific Island, the yu-tao of China, the
+sato imo of Japan, and the oto of Central America.
+A fine dish is made of it by boiling and then
+covering the leaves with a dressing of cocoanut
+oil."</p>
+
+<p>Harry and the other boys had been in consultation
+for several days concerning the cave, and a
+day or two before they were ready to start had a
+talk with John about the treasure there. John
+listened attentively, and when they had finished,
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"You are quite right in wanting to take care of
+the valuables there. You are entitled to them."</p>
+
+<p>"But they are yours, as much as ours, and we
+shall not touch them unless it is with the understanding
+that you shall share with us," responded
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"I could not consider it for a moment."</p>
+
+<p>"You cannot help yourself," said the boys in
+chorus. "We have arranged all that matter, and
+you have nothing to say about it."</p>
+
+<p>"But," protested John. "I do not deserve it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, do we?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"But you and the Professor discovered it."</p>
+
+<p>"Before you or Ralph and Tom came we arranged
+the division, so that the Professor has one<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_47" id="p_47">p. 47</a></span>-third
+of it, but we own two-thirds, and that we
+propose to divide equally among all of us," added
+Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Really," said Ralph, "Tom and I are in the
+same position as John, and we feel it is not right
+to take a share, but the boys insist on it."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, if you consider that a settlement, I must
+say that I am going to make good more than my
+share and the shares of Ralph and Tom."</p>
+
+<p>"We don't want you to make it good," insisted
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"But you can't help yourself in that. The cave
+in the Tuolos' country has something in it that
+will make you wonder as much as the treasure you
+have here, and it will be fully as interesting to get
+at and recover as anything you have experienced
+here."</p>
+
+<p>"When do you think we ought to start for the
+west?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Day after to-morrow will see everything ready.
+We shall then have all the ammunition sufficient
+to last us until we can reestablish the plant, and as
+the new wagon is ready, it should not take us
+more than a day, with all the help we have, to load
+and apportion the different loads among the warriors."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why can't we take to-morrow for the expedition
+to the cave?"</p>
+
+<p>"That will suit admirably," he replied.</p>
+
+<p>On the following morning the boys had the yaks
+yoked up, and taking with them a number of the
+copper vessels, and a quantity of the ramie cloth,
+drove over to the side of the hill opposite the Cata<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_48" id="p_48">p. 48</a></span>ract
+house, so as to reach the land entrance of the
+caverns.</p>
+
+<p>"It is not desirable to have any here know of
+our visit nor our purpose. It would not make any
+material difference, as the treasure there is of no
+value to them; but our motives will be misunderstood,"
+remarked John.</p>
+
+<p>Under the circumstances John and the four boys
+were the only ones in the party.</p>
+
+<p>"We are going to have some pretty tough work
+this morning. That gold weighs something."</p>
+
+<p>"Wasn't it a good thing you suggested the making
+the wagon?"</p>
+
+<p>John smiled without saying anything.</p>
+
+<p>The boys eyed him sharply, and finally Harry
+said: "That is what you suggested the new wagon
+for, was it not?"</p>
+
+<p>John nodded an assent.</p>
+
+<p>"Did the Professor say anything to you about
+bringing it along?"</p>
+
+<p>"He did say it might be taken if you thought
+so."</p>
+
+<p>"Didn't he suggest that we should do so?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; he said the matter was left entirely to your
+judgment, and that I should not say anything
+about it, unless you proposed that course."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, I am thinking we shall have a pretty good
+load for one team with what we get out of the
+place," said George.</p>
+
+<p>"It will make a good load, but we can add to it
+the lightest parts of the stock we have at the
+Cataract."</p>
+
+<p>Before reaching the mouth of the cavern, a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_49" id="p_49">p. 49</a></span>
+messenger hurried over from the Cataract with
+the information that two runners had arrived
+from the Professor and from Blakely, and they
+drove back as quickly as possible, and reached
+there to learn that another had just arrived from
+Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>The two runners first to arrive conveyed the information
+stated in the previous chapter, but
+the last carried the additional news that there had
+been a fight between Blakely and the tribes, and
+that he was slowly moving back to the Cataract,
+but there was no occasion for alarm.</p>
+
+<p>The latter part of the note read as follows: "Do
+not be alarmed and continue your work, and if the
+matter should be at all serious I will advise you
+by runner in ample time, and shall in any event
+send another in the next four hours."</p>
+
+<p>John called in Muro and said:</p>
+
+<p>"The forces with Blakely are having a fight with
+the tribes. I want you to take fifty men, and also
+twenty-five guns, and assist Blakely and his warriors,
+and keep me informed of the progress of
+events. Tell him that by day after to-morrow we
+shall be on our way. In the meantime you should
+draw them this way, as we do not want them to go
+back. For that purpose keep up the show of retreating,
+and hold them until day after to-morrow."</p>
+
+<p>Within an hour the column was ready and moved
+toward the scene with celerity, equipped with the
+new guns, and an ample supply of ammunition, together
+with the new arrows which had been made.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_50" id="p_50">p. 50</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SURRENDER OF THE KURABUS</h3>
+
+
+<p>It was late that afternoon before John and the
+boys again drove over to the hill, and lost no time
+in entering the cave. The first care was to bring
+to the steps at the entrance all the vessels in the
+first recess.</p>
+
+<p>Some of them were so heavy that it was necessary
+for four to carry each load. They then proceeded
+to the inner recess, and here a search was
+made for every trace of the treasures there, the
+time required thus making it almost dark before
+they were able to carry out all the different lots.</p>
+
+<p>These were all stored in the bottom of the wagon.
+It was dark as they started for the Cataract. As
+they were leaving they heard the night cry of a bird
+which had often been noticed before, and Ralph
+shuddered, as he said:</p>
+
+<p>"It makes me tremble whenever I hear that
+doleful sound. It was above our head all of the
+night before the Tuolos captured us, and since that
+time it always sounded like an omen to me."</p>
+
+<p>John turned to him, as he replied: "That is
+the voice of the bird called by the Spanish, Alma
+Perdida."</p>
+
+<p>"Well it isn't a pleasant sound, to say the least,"
+added George.</p>
+
+<p>"It is very significant at this time, however,"
+remarked John.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_51" id="p_51">p. 51</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The boys all turned to him, as he continued:
+"It is the 'Cry of the Lost Soul'; that is what the
+name signifies."</p>
+
+<p>And the boys thought of the terrible tragedy in
+the cave they had just left. The silence on the way
+home was significant.</p>
+
+<p>The next morning marked the greatest activity
+in and about the buildings. The wagons were first
+loaded with the things contained in the shop, the
+laboratory and the home. Numerous packages
+were made up in form for the warriors to handle
+conveniently. Nothing was permitted to remain,
+as it was felt that the things they had made were
+too valuable to leave behind. It was past noon before
+the last articles were secured in bundles.</p>
+
+<p>"You should explain to them, Uraso," said John,
+"that we shall have to give them pretty heavy
+loads for the first part of the journey, as the different
+things can be distributed to the others when
+we reach them."</p>
+
+<p>"It will not be necessary to do this," he answered;
+"they are only too glad to carry the heaviest
+loads." And he refused to apologize to the warriors.
+This is referred to for the purpose of showing
+the spirit in which all of them worked to bring
+the things to their own country.</p>
+
+<p>After the loads were all provided for, and the
+different ones instructed as to the parts which
+should be taken by each, John said:</p>
+
+<p>"There is one thing which must now take our
+attention, and that is the bringing in of the flag."</p>
+
+<p>The boys had forgotten this. "You may tell the
+warriors," said John, addressing Uraso, "that we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_52" id="p_52">p. 52</a></span>
+intend to go to the hill and bring in the flag, which
+must be taken with us."</p>
+
+<p>As Uraso interpreted this to the people it had
+a remarkable significance to them. Uraso begged
+permission to take all of them on the expedition,
+and this was readily assented to.</p>
+
+<p>The warriors all armed, as though going forth
+to battle, ascended the hill, with the boys in the
+lead. Arriving there John formed the column in
+a circle around the staff. Angel was present, and
+he shambled toward the pole and mounted it. He
+remembered the little wheel at the top, which had
+afforded them such an amusing incident when it was
+erected.</p>
+
+<p>This time he came down without much solicitation
+on the part of George.</p>
+
+<p>"As George and Harry were the ones to hoist
+the flag, I shall delegate them to lower it," said
+John.</p>
+
+<p>The boys went forward, and at the quiet suggestion
+of John took off their hats. At this signal
+John took off his, and Uraso followed suit, and
+the hint was sufficient for the warriors, who stood
+with uncovered heads while the boys reverently
+lowered it.</p>
+
+<p>The wonder and amazement depicted on the
+faces of those who witnessed it was a spectacle.
+What an impressive thing it was to them; it was
+the mystery, which to the savage mind is always
+an important factor, and John knew it.</p>
+
+<p>The flag was folded with the greatest care, the
+natives watching each move with intense interest,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_53" id="p_53">p. 53</a></span>
+and was then wrapped in cloth, as though it was
+the most valuable treasure in the world.</p>
+
+<p>"We want them to feel that it is something they
+must love and protect. It is safe to say, that after
+this exhibition, everyone of the warriors would
+have fought to the death to preserve that emblem
+of power, like the Israelites of old, who regarded
+the Ark of the Covenant as their fortress and
+strength."</p>
+
+<p>The last night at the Cataract was a sad one
+for the boys. For a year and a half it had been
+their home. They had built every part of it.
+Each portion had some delicious memory connected
+with it, and all must now be left to the
+ravishes of time. Only the water wheel would be
+left.</p>
+
+<p>It hardly seems possible that the accumulations
+at the Cataract would make over one hundred
+packages, aside from the contents of the wagon.
+When the entire stock of material was arranged
+the next morning, it was an interesting sight.</p>
+
+<p>The two wagons were driven out from the
+yard, Harry and Tom in charge of one, and George
+and Ralph of the other team. Twenty-five light
+loads had been made for the advance warriors,
+so that in case of scouting work, one could take
+the loads of two, and thus leave at least a dozen
+free for that duty when required.</p>
+
+<p>A quantity of lumber had been cut over six
+months before, and this was well dried, and would
+be very valuable to them in beginning operations,
+and the loads on the wagons were so great that
+but little of it could be taken in that way. Uraso<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_54" id="p_54">p. 54</a></span>
+saw the utility of the material and insisted that
+it should all be taken.</p>
+
+<p>Besides the packages thus arranged the most expert
+of the warriors carried the thirty-two guns,
+and they had been instructed in their use. Each
+also carried a bow and set of arrows, and some of
+them were provided with spears.</p>
+
+<p>During the preceding day no message had come
+from Blakely, but he knew that the party would
+leave the Cataract on this day, and they felt no
+apprehension on his account.</p>
+
+<p>One of the runners from John reached the Professor
+on the day the train left the Cataract.
+While the latter tried to prevent the knowledge
+of his occupation of the Kurabus village from
+reaching the ears of the warriors, the scouts sent
+out by the Professor intercepted and tried to capture
+the messengers which were sent to inform the
+allies, but failed in their efforts.</p>
+
+<p>When John and his party left, Blakely had
+drawn the allies to a point within eight miles of
+the Cataract, and with the reinforcements, headed
+by Muro, he made a stand. During the night, after
+a consultation with Muro, the latter, with fifty of
+his warriors, made a wide detour to the north,
+and swung around to the west, thus taking a position
+behind the allies, and this was effected without
+their knowledge, as they believed.</p>
+
+<p>The object of this movement was to protect the
+Professor, as the force from the Cataract, joined
+to that of Blakely's, would be ample to drive them
+forward, and it was desirable to effect a capture<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_55" id="p_55">p. 55</a></span>
+of the allies, and thus at one operation place them
+in their power.</p>
+
+<p>Unfortunately, the messengers from the Kurabus'
+village reached the allies before Muro started
+on his trip. The effect on the allies was startling,
+and the Kurabus were determined to protect their
+homes. The latter believed that the object was to
+destroy the village and carry off the women and
+children, and it was but natural that they should
+go to their assistance.</p>
+
+<p>As a result the allies during the night quietly
+stole to the south, which was in the direction of the
+Illyas' territory, intending to march thence west,
+and thus attack the Professor from the south.</p>
+
+<p>Their departure was not discovered until morning
+had been well advanced, and Muro's runner
+did not reach Blakely until the train from the
+Cataract came in sight.</p>
+
+<p>This was most discouraging news, as it meant
+danger to those left with the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"There is but one alternative now," said John.
+"We must make a forced march to the relief of
+the Professor. Uraso has the matter of controlling
+the force well in hand, and Blakely, you and
+I will take all the men excepting the one hundred
+in charge of the material, and go forward
+rapidly."</p>
+
+<p>The first news the Professor had of the new situation
+was gleaned from the messenger which
+Muro had dispatched the moment the escape of
+the allies was discovered.</p>
+
+<p>"Has the Professor been notified?" asked Blakely.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_56" id="p_56">p. 56</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I sent two messengers early this morning," was
+Muro's response.</p>
+
+<p>"That was a wise thing," remarked John. "You
+are to be commended for the step. We must
+make a forced march at once, and you must lead
+the advance with your best men."</p>
+
+<p>Muro was much gratified at this position of
+trust, and called up the warriors selected and
+spoke a few words to them. Without waiting to
+make any other preparations than to provide a
+day's provisions, his party sallied forth, and
+headed straight for the southwest.</p>
+
+<p>The following day, the scouts sent out by the
+Professor to the southeast, discovered the allies
+rapidly moving toward the direction of the Kurabus'
+village, but he knew that he had not a sufficient
+force to meet them, and he also deemed it
+wise to permit them to reach their village, so
+that they might be able to learn for themselves
+that, while he had their homes in his power, he
+had not despoiled them.</p>
+
+<p>This was surprising news to the allies. Such
+a course meant, either that the Professor and the
+tribes with him, were afraid of them, or, that
+Blakely's message to them was in reality true.</p>
+
+<p>Muro's column reached the Professor the following
+day, and before evening John and the main
+body came up. The allies were still at the Kurabus'
+village, and without waiting for the wagon
+and the remaining part of the force to come up,
+all started on the march for the south.</p>
+
+<p>The scouts reported commotion in the village,
+but its cause could not be determined. Undoubt<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_57" id="p_57">p. 57</a></span>edly
+they knew of the presence of the force from
+the north. Camp was made for the night, and
+when morning came it was evident that the Kurabus
+had been deserted by their allies, the Tuolos
+and the Illyas.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning the advance was begun,
+and before ten o'clock a messenger from the Kurabus
+was taken, and he was brought before the
+Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"Why have you been fighting us?" asked the
+Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"My people thought you were trying to kill
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you come to see us now?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because my chief has been deserted by the Illyas
+and the Tuolos."</p>
+
+<p>"Does he wish to surrender?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; if the White Chief will not punish him
+and his people."</p>
+
+<p>"Have any of your warriors gone with the two
+tribes?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"You may tell your chief that we do not want
+war, but peace and friendship, and that we will
+not injure him or his people and that if we desired
+bloodshed we would have killed the warriors we
+took three days ago, and also would have destroyed
+your villages and taken your women and
+children captive."</p>
+
+<p>The messenger was conducted to the front, and
+within two hours he returned with the message
+that the terms were accepted.</p>
+
+<p>"Then tell your chief that all his weapons must<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_58" id="p_58">p. 58</a></span>
+be brought to this place within two hours, and he
+must come here with them, and surrender to us
+in person."</p>
+
+<p>Within the stipulated time, the Kurabus, with
+their chief, appeared in their front, and Muro,
+with his warriors, went out to receive them. It
+must be understood that Muro's tribe, the Saboros,
+lived in the territory adjoining the Kurabus
+to the southeast, and that for years there had
+been bitter enmity between the two, but the Professor
+did not affect to know this.</p>
+
+<p>When the chief, Tastoa, entered the camp, he
+glanced around at the warriors, but did not exhibit
+apparent alarm. He marched direct to the
+Professor, with arms folded, and showed a dignified
+attitude, notwithstanding his humiliation.
+His mien plainly showed that he surrendered to
+the White Chief, and not to his late allies or
+enemies.</p>
+
+<p>In explanation of this, it should be said, that in
+a previous expedition against the Professor the
+Kurabus and the Saboros had been allied, and
+on the way, while they were surrounding the party
+of whites, had a disagreement which resulted in
+a separation and enmity.</p>
+
+<p>"I have come to surrender to the White Chief.
+The Tuolo and the Illyas would not agree with
+me that you meant no harm, and that you would
+do as you said, and have left me."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you have surrendered only because your
+allies left you?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; but because we believed you did not want
+revenge."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_59" id="p_59">p. 59</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What made you think so?"</p>
+
+<p>"When we saw that you did not destroy our
+villages, and did not take our women and children,
+when you could have done so, we believed
+you. We believe the Great White Chief, but we
+do not believe the different tribes."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I cannot accept your surrender. You
+may take all your weapons and return to your
+village, and if you choose to do so, join your late
+allies. We will not make a movement against
+you until you have done so. You must believe
+Suros and Uraso, and Oma and Muro, as well as
+myself."</p>
+
+<p>He cast a curious glance about him, as the
+Professor spoke. This was a new species of warfare.
+What! allow him to return and continue
+the war, after he was in their power? The savage
+mind could not comprehend its meaning.</p>
+
+<p>"Why does the White Chief offer me such
+terms? I am in his power."</p>
+
+<p>"Because the white man does not believe in
+taking advantage of an enemy who has entrusted
+himself in his hands. As long as he is here he
+will not permit it, and the chiefs who are with
+me will not ask me to do it."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not understand this. Does Suros say so?"</p>
+
+<p>"The White Chief says the truth. He brings
+us a message from the Great Spirit. That message
+is different from the ones we learned. He
+has told me why our message is wrong, and my
+people will never again attack another people."</p>
+
+<p>This declaration bewildered Tastoa. He had
+heard the words of the wise Suros. But Oma<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_60" id="p_60">p. 60</a></span>
+arose and said: "I have been your enemy and
+you have been ours. The White Chief has been
+good to us, and I could not understand why. He
+has told us new things, and how we may live in
+happiness, and we believe him. When we took
+your warriors and captured your villages three
+days ago, he ordered that no one should be hurt,
+and he has given the warriors the best of food,
+and treated them as he treated his own warriors.
+We will follow his ways."</p>
+
+<p>Muro's eyes glistened as he arose to speak. "I
+and my people love the Great White Chief. I
+have come from their village, and all they have
+in the village is now coming to all of our people,
+and we are to learn the new way of living. From
+the time the White Chief rescued me from you,
+he has said to us, 'Do not kill; do not kill; but you
+have a right to defend yourselves.' They have
+made the weapons which talk with fire, and there
+are so many of them that they could quickly kill
+all of your people, if he would permit it. Now
+we are going to live like the White Chief tells
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"Then, if the White Chief tells me I must believe
+the Chiefs I will do so."</p>
+
+<p>"There is another thing which you must do.
+The Illyas have some of the white people in captivity.
+You must send a messenger and say that
+if they injure the captives I will visit them and
+destroy them and their villages, and that they
+must at once return to us, and if they do not, we
+will go there and take them by force."</p>
+
+<p>"It shall be done."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_61" id="p_61">p. 61</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Muro, you may restore the weapons to the
+Kurabus."</p>
+
+<p>While the foregoing proceedings caused the utmost
+wonder in all of its phases, the restoration
+of the arms was one which so completely astonished
+them that the Chief could hardly speak.
+He finally approached the Professor, and grasping
+him by the hand, said:</p>
+
+<p>"I have never heard of such things before."</p>
+
+<p>"You must have your weapons, because your
+people must have food. Go to your villages now,
+and take with you the warriors we took three days
+ago. We have given them back their weapons,
+as you see."</p>
+
+<p>Ralsea, Oma and Suros then pressed forward,
+and held out the hands of friendship to him. He
+then turned to the Professor and said: "I do
+not see Uraso."</p>
+
+<p>"No; he is with the people who are coming from
+our village, but he will be the first one to go to
+you and tell you what the others have said."</p>
+
+<p>The first act of Tastoa was to select the fleetest
+runner, to attempt overtaking the Illyas, in order
+to deliver the message which the Professor
+had instructed him to communicate.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_62" id="p_62">p. 62</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2>
+
+<h3>THE NEW TOWN SITE. THE WATER WHEEL AND THE SAWMILL</h3>
+
+
+<p>The Professor and his party immediately left
+for the Brabos' village, and before noon of the
+next day, Uraso, with the wagons and package
+train, came in sight. The warriors, together with
+the chiefs, and the two boys, Jim and Will, rushed
+to meet them, leaving the Professor and Chief
+Suros almost deserted. They smiled at the eagerness
+of all. They were just like boys.</p>
+
+<p>When the procession from the village came up
+they surrounded the wagon and Uraso's warriors,
+and took the packages from the carriers, bearing
+them in triumph to the village, and passed before
+the Professor and Suros. The boys began the
+dancing, and the warriors took up the suggestion,
+and improved on it. The hilarity knew no
+bounds.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso was the first to tell the warriors who were
+with him of the surrender of the Kurabus. This
+acted like a stimulant to the assembly.</p>
+
+<p>Later in the day, when peace and order had
+been restored, the Professor addressed them as
+follows: "Suros and I have enjoyed the dance
+and the joys you have had as much as you who
+have taken part in it. We are both so happy to
+know that you have become brothers. When we
+leave this village the Brabos will know that they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_63" id="p_63">p. 63</a></span>
+are safe from all harm, and that their enemy is
+our enemy, and that if anyone in either of the
+tribes is injured it is the duty of all the tribes
+to come to his aid.</p>
+
+<p>"You must also know that everyone has a right
+to his own property. If I should take anything
+from one of you I ought to be punished. Everyone
+should be made to know this. If a Saboro
+takes anything from an Osaga without his consent,
+the Saboros should be the first to punish
+him, and if they do not then the other tribes
+should punish him.</p>
+
+<p>"We are bringing all the tools from our village,
+so that we can teach you how to make many wonderful
+things. We must find a suitable place to
+put up the machinery. Each tribe will send some
+of their people there to learn, and then the same
+things will be put up in your own lands. To-morrow
+we will go south to establish this place."</p>
+
+<p>There was one thing which was a source of
+grief to the boys, and that was the herd of yaks,
+which had been left behind. John spoke to Uraso
+about it, and Sutoto, who always considered the
+boys first, suggested that he and Muro would take
+two dozen of the warriors and bring the herd
+back.</p>
+
+<p>The boys would have enjoyed this outing with
+him, but the necessity of utilizing their services
+in the erection of the workshop and installing
+the machinery, was too urgent to permit it. The
+boys made it a condition, however, that Sutoto
+should be with them in the active work, as soon,
+as he returned.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_64" id="p_64">p. 64</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Brabos regretted the leave-taking, but
+were delighted to learn from the Professor that
+he expected them to contribute a number of their
+men to accompany the expedition.</p>
+
+<p>They passed through the Kurabus' village the
+next day, and the Professor called the Chief to
+him. "We want some of your men to accompany
+us, because we want to teach them the same as
+the other tribes."</p>
+
+<p>This announcement was a most gratifying one,
+and he answered: "The White Chief has made
+us give him our hearts. My brother and my son
+will go with you."</p>
+
+<p>Could anything have been more expressive of
+the intention of the Kurabus Chief? The lad was
+about the same age as the boys, and they led
+him out to the wagon, and showed him the wonderful
+things, and then began the efforts to find
+words to express their meaning, and enable them
+to understand each other.</p>
+
+<p>It was an amusing thing to see the struggles
+of Blakely, who was whipping the warriors into
+a fighting force. Whenever Blakely was around
+the warriors would give him the military salute,
+as though they had been trained up to it all their
+lives.</p>
+
+<p>"I have often wondered where the military salute
+of raising the hand up to the eyebrows comes
+from," said Ralph.</p>
+
+<p>"Its origin dates from the commencement of
+the English army. During the tournaments of
+the Middle Ages, after the 'Queen of Beauty' was
+enthroned, the knights, who were to take part<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_65" id="p_65">p. 65</a></span>
+in the sports of the day, marched past the dais
+upon which she sat, and, as they passed, shielded
+their eyes from the rays of her beauty. Thus
+the habit continued, only in a modified form, to
+this day."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 352px;">
+<a id="illus-065" name="illus-065" />
+<a href="#p_65">
+<img src="images/illus-fig5-p065.png" width="352" height="279"
+alt="Fig. 5. The Banyan Tree." title="Fig. 5. The Banyan Tree." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 5. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Banyan</span>  <span class="u">Tree</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Uraso had charge of the advance, and when
+they halted that day it was under the spreading
+shade of a tree that was a marvel to the boys,
+although Blakely said there were plenty of them
+in the southern part of the island.</p>
+
+<p>This was a tree, with a large central trunk, the
+branches of which spread out in all directions, to
+distances which were fully fifty feet on each side,
+and at irregular intervals were straight stems
+which shot down straight to the earth, the lower<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_66" id="p_66">p. 66</a></span>
+ends of which took root and thus served as supports
+for the long branches.</p>
+
+<p>The boys went around, examining it from all
+sides. "What is it?" asked the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"It is the banyan tree," answered John. "This
+is not the only kind which exhibits this peculiarity.
+What is called the screw pine also sends
+down shoots in the same way."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, does each of these vertical stems become
+a tree of itself?"</p>
+
+<p>"In the case of the mangrove these aerials, as
+they are called, carry up the sap, and form leaves
+at their upper ends, long after the main trunk
+dies."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean that these drooping branches
+carry up the sap in the opposite direction, after
+they take root?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but that is not so remarkable, when it
+is understood that the buds of all trees are, in
+a measure, roots, and perform the same functions
+as roots. The plum tree, and many others,
+will form roots out of the buds, if the latter are
+buried in the earth."</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard about the orchids, as I believe
+they are called. Do they act in the same way?"</p>
+
+<p>"Not altogether; there are certain plants which
+live on other plants and get sustenance from them,
+just as some insects attach themselves to animals
+and live on them."</p>
+
+<p>"There is one thing I could never understand,"
+remarked Tom, "and that is, why the sap of the
+trees goes upwardly."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall try and answer that question by ask<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_67" id="p_67">p. 67</a></span>ing
+another. If you put the end of a piece of
+blotting paper in water, what causes the water to
+travel along to the other end?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is just as much a mystery," he replied.</p>
+
+<p>"But as you know that to be so, because you
+can see the process, it will enable me to explain
+the principle of the movement of the sap. A
+wick in a lamp becomes saturated and the oil
+travels upwardly as long as the upper end is
+burning; but as soon as the light is put out the
+oil ceases to creep toward the burned end."</p>
+
+<p>"But in the case of a tree there is nothing to
+do that same thing."</p>
+
+<p>"That is what the sun does. It shines on the
+leaf, and absorbs the sap, or portions of it, and
+the sap tries to move upwardly to again moisten
+the dried pores of the wood."</p>
+
+<p>"I always thought the sap moved upwardly, because
+the tree was alive."</p>
+
+<p>"The blotting paper and the wick are not alive,
+are they? Still, you see the same process going
+on. This is due to what is termed capillary attraction.
+Suppose you take two tubes, one larger
+than the other, each open at both ends, and stand
+them in water. The water will rise in the tubes
+above the surface of the water outside, and the
+height it rises depends on the inside diameters of
+the tubes. The smaller the bore the higher will
+the water go up. So with the pores in the wood.
+They are very small, and thus the water moves
+to the greatest heights."</p>
+
+<p>It was now a question of the greatest importance
+to set up their home at the most desirable<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_68" id="p_68">p. 68</a></span>
+point. The Chiefs, together with John and
+Blakely, had numerous conferences with the Professor,
+on this subject. Many things had to be
+taken into consideration.</p>
+
+<p>First: It should be located at a point convenient
+to all the tribes.</p>
+
+<p>Second: It should be on or near the seacoast.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 339px;">
+<a id="illus-068" name="illus-068" />
+<a href="#p_68">
+<img src="images/illus-fig6-p068.png" width="339" height="233"
+alt="Fig. 6. Showing Capillary Attraction." title="Fig. 6. Showing Capillary Attraction." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 6. <span class="u">Showing</span> <span class="u">Capillary</span> <span class="u">Attraction</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Third: Everything else being equal, the most
+desirable place would be in a section which had
+the richest soil.</p>
+
+<p>These considerations were suggested to the
+Chiefs, and all agreed that the river separating
+the land of the Osagas and the Berees would be
+most suitable.</p>
+
+<p>"I know a place," said Uraso, "where there is
+a running water like you have at the Cataract,
+and it is a little river that flows into the big
+river."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_69" id="p_69">p. 69</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Does the water go down steep as we had it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Uraso.</p>
+
+<p>"Let us go there at once," responded the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>Within two days the spot was reached, and at
+the sight of it all were pleased beyond measure.</p>
+
+<p>"It is an ideal spot," exclaimed John. "The
+falls would be much better for our purpose than
+the Cataract, and it is close to the river. As the
+latter has ample depth for good-sized boats, and
+the sea is not more than three miles away, I
+judge, we are near enough to carry out the purpose
+of building the large vessel."</p>
+
+<p>No conferences were required to make the decision.
+"Your judgment is to be commended," said
+the Professor to Uraso. "I do not think there is
+a better spot on the island."</p>
+
+<p>"It suits me," said Blakely. "See the forest to
+the northwest? That is where I used to live. I
+know the boys will enjoy exploring it, and if they
+want excitement at any time, it is near enough
+to give them plenty of exercise."</p>
+
+<p>The boys' eyes glistened with excitement at the
+news. "Won't we have fun over there, when we
+are fixed up!" said Will.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor, addressing the Chiefs, said:
+"We do not need all the men we have here, as
+they will no doubt be needed for a time at their
+homes, in order to take care of the women and
+children. For the present I suggest that one-half
+of them be sent home, and the others remain here,
+and get the work started. This will take several
+moons, and we must then meet, unless we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_70" id="p_70">p. 70</a></span>
+hear from the Illyas sooner, and march against
+them."</p>
+
+<p>The chiefs selected the ones which were to remain,
+and those instructed to return home were
+advised that later on they would be brought to
+the new village, to take their part in the work, and
+thus give an opportunity to all.</p>
+
+<p>The greatest enthusiasm prevailed, and each
+tribe tried to outdo the other in generous acts.
+The example set by the Professor was, indeed, a
+lesson to these poor, ignorant creatures.</p>
+
+<p>"Professor, what shall we do when the herd
+arrives? I think we had better fence in a field for
+them until they get used to the people and learn,
+to remain in this part of the country."</p>
+
+<p>"I am glad that you suggested that, Ralph.
+You may build a fence to hold them, and I suggest
+that you use the space in the forks of the
+river."</p>
+
+<p>"How many men shall I take for the purpose?"</p>
+
+<p>"As Sutoto will likely be here to-morrow, or
+on the following day, you should take enough to
+do it quickly. Use at least fifty of them. Stut
+would be the one to call in for help."</p>
+
+<p>"What kind of a fence shall we build?"</p>
+
+<p>"I will make a sketch of the best form for the
+present. Have some of the men cut posts that
+have several forks like the sketch shows. Cut
+these off at lengths so that one fork will be about
+two feet up out of the ground, and the other five
+feet or a little more above. Set others to work
+cutting the long poles, which you will find along;
+the river bank."</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_71" id="p_71">p. 71</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"How long should we make the poles?"</p>
+
+<p>"Get them as long as you can; but make them,
+say, nine, eighteen or twenty-seven feet long.
+Then, at the same time, others can be digging the
+post holes, and make those eight feet apart and
+two feet deep. When the posts are set, the men
+with the poles can go along and lay them in place,
+just as I show."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 339px;">
+<a id="illus-071" name="illus-071" />
+<a href="#p_71">
+<img src="images/illus-fig7-p071.png" width="339" height="163"
+alt="Fig. 7. Sample of Island Fence." title="Fig. 7. Sample of Island Fence." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 7. <span class="u">Sample</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Island</span> <span class="u">Fence</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The warriors took the bolos and sallied down
+to the stream. Ralph had made a mental calculation
+that at least one hundred posts would be
+required; the line of the fence was laid out and
+the holes marked. Muro took charge of the digging
+of the holes, and the men showed a wonderful
+aptitude for the work. During the afternoon
+the Professor wandered down to the line, and
+went among them, speaking words of cheer and
+commendation to all, so that he impressed his
+wonderful personality on every man.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile Harry, with the other boys, was at
+work preparing a new water wheel. In this he
+had the aid of Uraso, as the director general of
+the men. Many hands make light work. In a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_72" id="p_72">p. 72</a></span>
+single day the wheel was ready for mounting.
+The dried lumber which had been brought over
+was a great advantage in making it, and in preparing
+the bridge below the falls on which the wheel
+was mounted.</p>
+
+<p>This was completed on the evening of the second
+day, just as Sutoto came into view with the
+cattle. It was an amusing sight to see how they
+had brought over the herd.</p>
+
+<p>Apollo was the name of the bull which had the
+terrific fight with the old bull. The first thing
+Sutoto did was to catch Apollo, and firmly secure
+him with hobbles. He was led in front, and the
+others driven along after him, the rest following
+meekly.</p>
+
+<p>When Apollo was finally loosened, and allowed
+the freedom of the corral, he gave a roar, pawed
+up the ground and shook his head at the indignant
+treatment.</p>
+
+<p>Their appearance meant milk and butter.
+There were thirty-five in the herd, of which ten
+were young animals, from four to six months of
+age, and six calves, the latter of which retarded
+the movement of the drove on the route.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning the wheel was put up, and
+it began to turn, to the delight of the men.</p>
+
+<p>"It would be better, Harry, to set up the sawmill
+at once, as I have directed a number of men
+to go to the forest with John, to cut the logs, and
+they will take the two teams along, so that by the
+time you are ready, the material will be here for
+you."</p>
+
+<p>"What shall I cut first?"</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_73" id="p_73">p. 73</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Get out the scantlings for the house and shop,
+as the latter will be the first to receive our attention.
+We must have some place to put the things
+we have in the wagons."</p>
+
+<p>It is remarkable how quickly a set of men, working
+under intelligent directions, can carry out a
+purpose. The logs began coming in shortly after
+noon, and in the morning the saw was at work,
+and it did not cease its operations for many a day.</p>
+
+<p>The natives were so fascinated with it that they
+considered it a grief to leave it. But the Professor
+had other purposes in view. George and
+Tom were selected to make several looms, similar
+to the one brought from the Cataract. In
+this work, as in everything else, some particular
+ones were selected and instructed to do the work.</p>
+
+<p>Ramie fiber was found in abundance, along the
+streams, and after a set of men had been instructed
+how to cut and gather it, they were kept at
+that work, while others were directed how to wet
+it down and rot the woody fiber and taught the
+manner in which the fiber was freed of the stalks.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_74" id="p_74">p. 74</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2>
+
+<h3>BUILDING UP THE NEW TOWN</h3>
+
+
+<p>Within a week most disquieting rumors reached
+the new village as to the attitude of the Illyas
+and Tuolos. The former sent an insulting message
+that if the White Chief wanted the captives
+he should come for them.</p>
+
+<p>The Tuolos had returned to their country, but
+John was determined that they must have a visit.
+Thus far no bands from the warring tribes had
+molested either the Saboros, who were nearest
+on one side, or the Brabos on the other side.</p>
+
+<p>Their silence after a peace message was sent
+them could only be interpreted to mean one thing,
+on the part of the Tuolos.</p>
+
+<p>"The Illyas will not dare to injure the captives
+they have with such a warning as we gave them,
+and if they intended to destroy them it is possible
+that has been done already. Under the circumstances
+a little patience on our part may show
+them that we mean business."</p>
+
+<p>Muro, who understood the Illyas' character better
+than the others, was of the opinion that the
+Professor's views were most likely to accomplish
+the purpose without bloodshed. On the other
+hand, he was of an entirely different opinion with
+respect to the Tuolos.</p>
+
+<p>A few weeks of active work, first, in completing
+all preparations for defense, and second, in organ<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_75" id="p_75">p. 75</a></span>izing
+the tribes into a working unity, would be of
+the greatest importance to the community.</p>
+
+<p>The shop and the laboratory were completed,
+and most of the things in the wagons were now in
+place. The important thing was the disposition
+of the treasure. For the safe keeping of this a
+large pit was dug beneath one end of the shop,
+and an underground vault constructed, the brick
+for this purpose being made from a natural silicate
+found in the hills near by, and which hardened
+without burning. The interior was also
+plastered with the same material, and a strong
+door, small, but thick, was constructed to close
+the opening.</p>
+
+<p>During the night John, the Professor and
+Blakely, with the boys, carefully stored the treasure
+there, so that the different tribes had no idea
+of the use to which the vault had been put.</p>
+
+<p>Two of the simple looms had been made, so
+that there were now three ready to turn out goods,
+and the fiber was in such shape that it could soon
+be utilized. In the meantime the boys concluded
+that as the weaving process was the slowest operation
+it would be well to construct several additional
+looms, and two of them capable of making
+goods four feet wide.</p>
+
+<p>One of the first acts of the Professor was to
+scour the hills to the north for minerals. He was
+in search of copper, and taking a half dozen of
+the natives with him, and one of the teams, a
+load of copper ore was brought in.</p>
+
+<p>The furnaces and smelters had been set up by
+the boys, previous to this, and within ten days<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_76" id="p_76">p. 76</a></span>
+a hundred pounds of copper were run into clay
+receptacles, to be used for the various purposes.</p>
+
+<p>"What do you suppose the Professor wants
+with so much copper?" asked Ralph.</p>
+
+<p>"You can make up your mind he has some
+scheme or other," answered George.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor really did have a scheme, for
+the first thing he consulted Harry about was a
+plan to make some small molds in two parts, out
+of brass, from a plaster paris disk which he had
+carved out.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 331px;">
+<a id="illus-076" name="illus-076" />
+<a href="#p_76">
+<img src="images/illus-fig8-p076.png" width="331" height="152"
+alt="Fig. 8. The One-Cent Coin" title="Fig. 8. The One-Cent Coin" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption"><i>Fig. 8.</i> <span class="smcap">The One-Cent Coin</span></span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"What is that for?" asked Harry, laughing.</p>
+
+<p>"That is to make one of the first coins from
+our mint," he answered, smiling.</p>
+
+<p>A sample of the coin is shown.</p>
+
+<p>"What is the hole in the middle for?"</p>
+
+<p>"So they can be strung on a cord, and thus provide
+a means for keeping them."</p>
+
+<p>"That is the first time I ever heard of that
+plan."</p>
+
+<p>"It is not anything new. The Chinese adopted
+the plan years ago, and Belgium is a country
+which has followed the idea. It has been found<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_77" id="p_77">p. 77</a></span>
+very convenient for shoppers, as they can string
+them on vertical pieces of wire, and in that way
+they are always kept in columns before them, and
+can be readily taken off in making change."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 331px;">
+<a id="illus-077" name="illus-077" />
+<a href="#p_77">
+<img src="images/illus-fig9-p077.png" width="331" height="156"
+alt="Fig. 9. The Five-Cent Coin" title="Fig. 9. The Five-Cent Coin" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption"><i>Fig. 9.</i> <span class="smcap">The Five-Cent Coin</span></span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In making the molds, the molten brass was first
+poured around the paris plaster disk, so that the
+metal was level with the top of the disk, and,
+after it was thoroughly cooled, an additional
+amount of metal was poured over this, so that
+the two parts would separate. The disk was then
+taken out, and two holes made on opposite sides
+through the top. The copper was then poured in
+one hole until it appeared at the other hole. In
+this way the print formed by the disk was cast
+in the coin.</p>
+
+<p>Harry made a half dozen of these molds, and
+the mint was ready for operation. Tom and one
+of the natives set to work making the coins, and
+the first day cast two hundred of them. Within
+a week they became quite expert at the business,
+and when they took stock at the end of the week
+over twenty-five hundred of the coins were in
+the treasury.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_78" id="p_78">p. 78</a></span></p>
+
+<p>A large-sized coin was turned out, which is also
+shown, the smaller being for one cent, and the
+larger five cents. The stock of coins within ten
+days amounted to fifty dollars in value, but it was
+a good beginning.</p>
+
+<p>During the evening the coins were shown
+around and admired, and John said: "We have
+plenty of silver, when the time comes, which can
+be worked up in the same way."</p>
+
+<p>This idea had not occurred to the boys. "But
+how," asked Will, "shall we use these? The natives
+won't give anything for them?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is what we are trying to teach them.
+They are of no value except as a medium of exchange.
+Money is of no value, except as it enables
+us to buy something with it. When you have a
+five-cent piece and a taro root before you, and
+are hungry, which will you take?"</p>
+
+<p>"The taro root, of course."</p>
+
+<p>"So it isn't the coin itself, but only its value
+in what you want. It is want that gives money
+any value."</p>
+
+<p>"But I still don't see how we are going to make
+the natives want the coins."</p>
+
+<p>"We do not intend to make them want them.
+But we may soon have some things they will
+need. Now it is immaterial whether they give
+money for it, or if they furnish us something we
+wish in exchange."</p>
+
+<p>"Then of what use is it to have the coins?"</p>
+
+<p>"Simply because we must have something to
+measure by. If you buy a yard of cloth you must
+have a yardstick. If you want a certain quan<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_79" id="p_79">p. 79</a></span>tity
+of grain you must have a quart or a bushel
+measure. Now that yard or bushel, each, is worth
+so much, and they are measured by a coin or
+coins, of which both know the value."</p>
+
+<p>"I understand now. You are simply trading a
+certain marked coin for a bushel of grain, instead
+of giving something else for it."</p>
+
+<p>"Exactly; money in itself has no value. You
+cannot eat it, or make it serve as an article of
+clothing, or drink it. You can only measure the
+needed things with it."</p>
+
+<p>The practical operation of the use of coins as
+money had its first trial on the following day,
+when the Professor had two hundred cords prepared,
+on which were strung five one-cent coins and
+a five-cent coin.</p>
+
+<p>The warriors were told to file along the wagon,
+and George handed out one of the coin sets to
+each as he passed. They looked at the bright
+disks curiously, at first, and were informed that
+they were being rewarded for the work they had
+done. This was a singular way of requiting them
+for their services. They had obtained food in
+plenty, and therefore this way their pay; but now,
+in addition, they were being rewarded.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso explained the new proceeding. They
+had conspicuously displayed the ramie cloth, made
+in different colors, which had been woven during
+the past two weeks. Not a word was said about
+that. The goods displayed seemed to be of more
+value than the coins. It was something they
+could wear, and they envied the manner in which
+the white people clothed themselves.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_80" id="p_80">p. 80</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John went up to Jim, who had the fiber cloth
+in charge, and asked him for a piece, indicating
+the length of the yardstick, which he held, and
+when he was told that it was worth one of the
+small coins, John made a great show of taking
+one of the coins from the cord and paying for
+the goods which Jim cut off.</p>
+
+<p>Tom did likewise, and this was very soon repeated,
+some taking two yards or more. The
+natives regarded this as a new species of barter,
+and it did not take them long to see the peculiar
+features of the transaction. Before night fully
+half of the coins were again back in the hands of
+the treasurer.</p>
+
+<p>The next day the boys, at the instigation of the
+Professor, began a species of trade with the natives,
+purchasing some trinket or other article, for
+which coins were offered in exchange. This
+spirit began to take possession of the natives.
+Regularly each week the pay for work performed
+was given, and as the weaving of cloth went on,
+the sale of the goods began to increase.</p>
+
+<p>Soon the Professor called the chiefs, and said:
+"We ought to send some of these men to their
+homes, each week, and bring others here, so that
+all may have an opportunity to work and to learn,
+and also be able to buy the goods we make."</p>
+
+<p>There was a twofold purpose in this: The warriors
+would, he knew, take their purchases home,
+and thus give their families the benefits of the
+cloth, and it would incite a desire for them to
+again return and work for the purpose of acquiring
+more goods.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_81" id="p_81">p. 81</a></span></p>
+
+<p>This was the first object lesson. In the following
+week, the second one was quietly brought to
+their attention. The workers had been fed from
+the common table. It was desirable to stimulate
+individual effort.</p>
+
+<p>For this purpose the Professor, John and
+Blakely, as well as the boys, went to the different
+workers, and made bargains; some offered a coin
+for the bringing in of a brace of fowl; others for
+a certain amount of vegetables; and some for particular
+quantities of fruit and for barley.</p>
+
+<p>The sawmill was turning out a certain amount
+of lumber, and the main house was erected, and
+then began the building of a number of small
+two-and three-room dwellings, all put up cheaply,
+but in a substantial manner.</p>
+
+<p>This proceeding was looked on with wonder by
+the warriors. Before long the women and children
+of some of the workers appeared, and their
+coming pleased the Professor immensely.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident that the two warring tribes were
+in communication with each other, and as the affairs
+of the little colony were moving along in a
+very satisfactory way, it was determined to bring
+them to terms. This was brought about by two incidents,
+which will be related.</p>
+
+<p>The Brabo territory extended the farthest north
+of any of the inhabited lands, and adjoined the
+portion occupied by the Tuolos.</p>
+
+<p>In a previous book the history of John was related,
+in which he described an immense cave, near
+their village, occupied by the medicine men of
+their tribe, and where he took refuge when pur<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_82" id="p_82">p. 82</a></span>sued.
+There he discovered a large amount of
+treasure. He and the boys had long wanted to
+go there.</p>
+
+<p>When the report was brought to the new village
+that the Tuolos had made a foray into the
+Brabo territory, and killed several warriors, carrying
+some of the women into captivity, it was
+a warning that could not be disregarded.</p>
+
+<p>Immediately, on the heels of this news, was the
+report of two runners from the Saboros that depredations
+had been committed by the Illyas.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor called John, Blakely and the
+chiefs Oma of the Brabos and Muro of the Saboros
+into consultation.</p>
+
+<p>"We are now in condition," he said, "where we
+must undertake to call those tribes to account.
+The outrages reported are probably only the forerunners
+of others which may be much more serious,
+and I want your views on the course to follow."</p>
+
+<p>"It is fortunate," answered Blakely, "that the
+tribes referred to are separated by the sections
+of the island inhabited by our allies. This gives
+us an opportunity to treat with each separately.
+It seems to me that we should attack the Illyas
+first, as they are the most powerful of the two."</p>
+
+<p>"I do not altogether agree with you," responded
+John. "My view is that we should proceed against
+the Tuolos, as they have committed the most serious
+offense, in killing the Brabos."</p>
+
+<p>"You speak wisely," said Muro. "The Brabos
+are not as well protected as my people."</p>
+
+<p>This observation, coming from Muro, was a most<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_83" id="p_83">p. 83</a></span>
+pleasing one to John and the Professor, and Blakely
+was instructed to muster a force of two hundred.
+Notices were sent to all the allied tribes,
+and within a week they arrived, all eager to engage
+in the expedition.</p>
+
+<p>"While engaged in that work the business must
+not cease here," observed the Professor. "It will
+be your duty, Blakely, to thoroughly drill the men,
+and instruct them in the uses of the weapons.
+For reasons which you will understand, John will
+accompany the expedition."</p>
+
+<p>During all this time there was not a day but
+the Professor, as well as George, Ralph and Jim,
+whenever opportunity offered, scouted about in
+various directions, and brought in new specimens
+of woods, flowers, vegetables, and samples of ores.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor's eyes were gladdened many
+times at the odd parcels left on his table, that
+excited the curiosity of the boys. Jim was an indefatigable
+gatherer of vegetable products, and
+one thing which attracted him immensely was the
+branch of a tree which bore a number of star-leaved
+clusters, each leaf being feather-veined,
+and the stems carried numerous yellowish purple-spotted
+flowers, and also nuts about the size of
+pigeon eggs.</p>
+
+<p>"Down near the large river the banks are full
+of these. Can we make any use of them?" asked
+Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Why that is a variety of Chica," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>"What is Chica, anyhow?"</p>
+
+<p>"The seeds are good for making burning oil.
+The inner bark furnishes a fiber which resists all<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_84" id="p_84">p. 84</a></span>
+moisture; and the nuts possess a substance which
+is well known all over the world as mucilage. It
+is recognized in commerce as gum tragacanth."</p>
+
+<p>"I saw different kinds there. Are they all useful?"</p>
+
+<p>"Some species contain nuts which are very fine,
+but are never eaten raw. They must be roasted."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 347px;">
+<a id="illus-084" name="illus-084" />
+<a href="#p_84">
+<img src="images/illus-fig10-p084.png" width="347" height="287"
+alt="Fig. 10. Chica. The Gum Plant." title="Fig. 10. Chica. The Gum Plant." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 10. <span class="u">Chica</span>. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Gum</span> <span class="u">Plant</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"When Jim and I were down there this morning
+we saw at least a dozen different kinds of
+plants growing together in a space not three feet
+square. We both wondered why each kept on
+growing in its own way, from the same kind of
+soil. Now, don't the plants get all they are made
+of from the same soil? And if that is so, why
+don't they grow to be the same things?"</p>
+
+<p>"Of course, like the animal kingdom, the germ<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_85" id="p_85">p. 85</a></span>
+of each is different, but each takes the identical
+substances from the same soil, and converts them
+into entirely different products. One will make
+a gum; the other produces a kind of milk; others
+will turn out a hard substance, like the outer portion
+of the nut; some will make a vegetable good
+to eat; others will yield a poison, and yet all are
+from the same soil."</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I mean. Even though the plants
+are different, why is it that one will extract one
+thing and another something else?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is due to what is called irritability or sensitiveness
+in plants. One plant is sensitive to the
+flow of certain juices, and is irritated, so that it is
+set into activity when different kinds of substances
+are carried along the pores or deposited in the
+cells. As a result, this irritation causes the plant
+to take only certain ones and reject others, and its
+tissues are thus built up only by such elements as
+its sensitiveness selects."</p>
+
+<p>The training of the warriors with the new guns
+was a stirring sight for the boys, who could not
+help but be present during most of the time during
+the two days preceding the departure for the
+country of the Tuolos.</p>
+
+<p>Ralph and Tom begged permission to accompany
+the party, and this was a natural request,
+because they had been rescued from this tribe the
+year before.</p>
+
+<p>It thus happened that the party of warriors,
+equipped as they had never been before, left the
+village, with one of the wagons, which was loaded
+with provisions and ammunition, and the boys
+took charge of the team.</p>
+
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_86" id="p_86">p. 86</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE EXPEDITION AGAINST THE TUOLOS</h3>
+
+
+<p>It was decided to go north until they reached
+the level country, which would afford easy travel,
+and then move to the west and cross the large
+river which separated the Brabos from the Tuolos,
+as it would be better to meet them on the extreme
+western side of the ridge which they occupied.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you remember, Blakely, what kind of country
+is to be found directly west of their principal
+village?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"I have been over that entire country," responded
+Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>"When I recovered, the morning of the wreck,
+I went inland at once," remarked John, "and I
+never saw the sea again. When you related your
+story about seeing a certain tribe offering up
+victims you must have been on the western side
+of the village."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I came up from the sea."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, you see I came down there directly from
+the north, and I reached the village on the eastern
+side, and I saw the sacrifice of the captives at the
+same time you did, but on the opposite side of the
+village."</p>
+
+<p>"That is very probable. On the western side
+the country is high, but not difficult to travel
+across."</p>
+
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;">
+<a id="illus-095" name="illus-095" />
+<a href="#p_86">
+<img src="images/illus-p095.jpg" width="400" height="613"
+alt="The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror"
+title="The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror" />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">&quot;<i>The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the ground in terror</i>&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_95">See p. 95</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>"That is the exact point I am aiming at. I
+know that all the way down, from the place where<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_87" id="p_87">p. 87</a></span>
+I struck into the interior, it would be almost impassable
+for the wagon."</p>
+
+<p>This settled the route to be taken, and they
+moved westwardly, after crossing the river, and
+before night the boys caught the first glimpse of
+the broad ocean.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning they put out scouts, which went
+well in advance of the column, and Muro was in
+charge of them. His instinct as a trailer was inimitable.</p>
+
+<p>Before evening of the second day the scouts
+announced the first signs of the Tuolos. The village
+could be reached within two hours' march,
+but John advised waiting for the following morning
+before approaching.</p>
+
+<p>During the early evening, however, Muro returned
+on a hurried trip from the front. "They
+are having a great feast at the village, and it appears
+that they will make sacrifices to-night, or to-morrow,
+so that we should approach as close as
+possible, and if we find that is their intention, prevent
+it."</p>
+
+<p>This news stirred all into activity. The column
+went forward with the utmost caution, although
+it was dark, and the wagon had to be guided along
+with great care.</p>
+
+<p>The movement proceeded until nine o'clock, and
+during the night march Muro had arranged a constant
+line of communication with John, through
+his runners. A festival was in progress, and the
+two victims were plainly seen by John when he
+and Muro went through the grass and inspected
+the village.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_88" id="p_88">p. 88</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The inaction of the whites had entirely disarmed
+the Tuolos. Indeed, as afterwards learned,
+they began to think that fear prevented an attack
+on their village, and no sentinels were posted
+to warn them of any approaching foe.</p>
+
+<p>While waiting for the return of John and Muro,
+Ralph and Tom also wandered around the section
+surrounding the camp. They were in a valley,
+on both sides of which were ridges running north
+and south. The moon came out before ten o'clock,
+and they remembered some of the scenes about
+them. They had been brought from the south
+through this identical valley when they were captured
+by the Tuolos.</p>
+
+<p>They were on the hillside, not five hundred feet
+from their camp, and were about to descend the
+hill, when Ralph started back, and grasped Tom's
+arm.</p>
+
+<p>"What is that dark object directly ahead?"</p>
+
+<p>The dark object was an opening into the hill,
+but as it was by the side of a projecting rock, it
+had the appearance of an object. They looked at
+each other for a moment in silence.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if this is another cave, or the one
+John spoke about?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"No, that is on the east side of the village. We
+are below the village. Do you think we had better
+make an investigation?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but I wish John was here. Come on; we
+have plenty of help here if we need it."</p>
+
+<p>The opening was approached as noiselessly as
+possible. It showed a typical cave entrance,
+through solid rock, or, rather, through what ap<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_89" id="p_89">p. 89</a></span>peared
+to be a cleavage which had been spread
+apart. They had no light of any kind, but the
+discovery was one which interested them, because
+they knew of the treasure caves existing on the
+island, and two of them, at least, were within
+their knowledge, and contained immense hoards.</p>
+
+<p>"Can you strike a match, so we can get some
+idea of it?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"I am going to try it at any rate." So saying,
+the match was lighted, and its beams penetrated
+the interior. In their eagerness the match was
+muffled, and went out, but they caught sight of
+a huge white cross, far beyond, and it seemed to
+be moving.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you notice that?" asked Tom excitedly.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean the cross?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"It seemed to move up and down."</p>
+
+<p>"I thought so, too."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't care about going any farther without
+we have some one with us and can have a decent
+light."</p>
+
+<p>The boys hurried to the camp, and waited for
+John. When he came they hurriedly related the
+experience.</p>
+
+<p>"That will do to investigate."</p>
+
+<p>"We saw a cross in there, moving up and down."</p>
+
+<p>"Have we any of the candles with us?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Possibly; I can soon tell."</p>
+
+<p>Tom came back with the news that he had found
+a box of them.</p>
+
+<p>"As the village is quieting down, we shall have
+plenty of time to make the examination to-night.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_90" id="p_90">p. 90</a></span>
+We must wait until Muro returns, so as to get the
+latest news, and can then start out."</p>
+
+<p>Muro returned shortly after, and together with
+the boys, went up the hill, and entered the
+mouth of the cavern. Three candles were lighted.
+The great cross was before them, but it was such
+a different thing, now that they were face to face
+with it. The end of the chamber, which the light
+penetrated, had four openings to the chambers
+beyond, two above and two below. These openings
+were separated from each other, and the white
+walls between the openings appeared to form the
+white cross.</p>
+
+<p>It was wonderfully realistic, this fanciful and
+fantastical carving of nature through the rocky
+structure.</p>
+
+<p>"But I saw it move; that is sure," said Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Did you see that move, or was it the light of
+the match that moved?" asked John. "Imagination
+plays many a trick, during the excitement of
+the moment."</p>
+
+<p>John took the light, and by moving it up and
+down showed how the beams, shining past the
+glistening walls, would cause the illusion of the
+cross moving.</p>
+
+<p>The cavern was found to be much broken up
+as they advanced, and reaching the second set of
+chambers, it was evident that some one had lately
+occupied it. Penetrating farther into the interior,
+they were surprised to see articles of savage
+clothing, and long reeds, that had been burned
+at the ends, together with utensils for cooking.</p>
+
+<p>"We have entered one of the homes of the medi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_91" id="p_91">p. 91</a></span>cine
+men of the Tuolos. I have no doubt they are
+now at the village attending the festivals, and we
+had better leave as quickly as possible."</p>
+
+<p>Before the entrance was reached they heard a
+great commotion outside, and their own people
+rushing to and fro, and as they were emerging
+three fantastically garbed natives met them. John
+ordered them to halt in the native tongue, and they
+stood there irresolute. The boys also leveled their
+guns at them, and they submitted as Muro and his
+men rushed up.</p>
+
+<p>The appearance of John and the boys startled
+Muro beyond expression, as the latter said: "These
+are the medicine men of the tribe."</p>
+
+<p>"I knew it," responded John. "We have just
+been investigating the place they live," and he
+pointed to the mouth of the cavern.</p>
+
+<p>These were the men who performed the sacred
+rites of the Tuolos, and were called the Krishnos,
+as they learned from Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"Take them to the camp," ordered John.</p>
+
+<p>Without more ado, they were hustled down to
+the wagon. It seems that when the Krishnos returned
+from the village they found themselves in
+the immediate vicinity of the camp, and in the effort
+to escape aroused the sentries, who rushed
+upon them.</p>
+
+<p>If they could have reached the cave, not one of
+the warriors would have dared to enter it, as their
+superstitious fears would have prevented them,
+but outside the cave they had no such feelings.
+It was fortunate, therefore, that John and the
+boys were there to prevent them from entering.</p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_92" id="p_92">p. 92</a></span></p>
+
+<p>As they were going down the hill, John exhibited
+a curious cross, He had found it in the cave,
+just before he advised the boys to go out. It was
+made of stone, and one of the limbs had a hole
+near its end, which indicated that it had been
+carried as a charm.</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't that singular? Why should the natives
+have the Christian sign of the cross?"</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 337px;">
+<a id="illus-092" name="illus-092" />
+<a href="#p_92">
+<img src="images/illus-fig11-p092.png" width="337" height="184"
+alt="Fig. 11. Stone Cross found in Cave." title="Fig. 11. Stone Cross found in Cave." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 11. <span class="u">Stone</span> <span class="u">Cross</span> <span class="u">found</span> <span class="u">in</span> <span class="u">Cave</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"That is one of the earliest symbols that the
+world knows. Its use goes back beyond the earliest
+period of history. It was the favorite figure
+used by the astronomers and astrologers of the
+ancient Babylonians, fully four or five thousand
+years ago. The clay tablets and stone monuments
+of the Persians contained them; the Hittites, in
+the earliest Jewish times, used them; and the ancient
+Egyptians decorated the High Priests officiating
+in the temples with figures of the cross."</p>
+
+<p>"It seems to me that if it was used by peoples
+in different parts of the earth, there must have
+been some reason for it."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_93" id="p_93">p. 93</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"One of the well-known forms found in the inscriptions
+shows the cross within a circle. This
+seems to be the meaning of the phrase in Isaiah
+which says the 'four ends of the earth.' In Bible
+times the earth was known to be round, so that
+the expression used in the Bible about the 'circle
+of the earth,' and the four ends, seem to point
+clearly to the cross within the circle, to indicate
+the four points of the compass."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 349px;">
+<a id="illus-093" name="illus-093" />
+<a href="#p_93">
+<img src="images/illus-fig12-p093.png" width="349" height="209"
+alt="Fig. 12. Ancient Crosses." title="Fig. 12. Ancient Crosses." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 12. <span class="u">Ancient</span> <span class="u">Crosses</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"So the Christians took an old form and made
+it their symbol?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; the Roman cross, used at the crucifixion,
+had the lower stem longer than the other, and
+from this fact that form became the Cross of
+Christianity."</p>
+
+<p>The uproar created by the pursuit attracted the
+attention of the warriors in the village, who ran
+to and fro, and soon learned the cause of the
+disturbance.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_94" id="p_94">p. 94</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The camp was kept quiet, however, but the
+scouts watched the excitement created, and reported
+the results at frequent intervals. Muro knew
+they would not desert the village, as they would
+not be likely to leave it at the mercy of their
+enemies, at least without a fight.</p>
+
+<p>John confronted the medicine men as soon as
+the wagon was reached.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do your people make war, and refuse to
+treat with us?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because you have no right to come and try to
+kill us."</p>
+
+<p>"Why did you imprison our people, and offer up
+some of them as a sacrifice?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because your people fought us."</p>
+
+<p>"You lie; you took those who were defenseless,
+and had no weapons. You do not tell the truth."</p>
+
+<p>"The Great Spirit told us to kill you."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you try to lie to me. I do not believe
+you. The Great Spirit never told you so. He
+would not speak to you."</p>
+
+<p>"The white man does not know. He speaks to
+us."</p>
+
+<p>"Where does he speak to you?"</p>
+
+<p>"In the sacred cave."</p>
+
+<p>"How does he tell you?"</p>
+
+<p>"With wonderful signs."</p>
+
+<p>"Tell me some of the wonderful signs."</p>
+
+<p>"He makes a great light, and we read it in the
+light. He makes a great noise, and we know what
+he says."</p>
+
+<p>"Does he make a great light and a great noise
+up there?" and John pointed up to the heavens.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_95" id="p_95">p. 95</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Then why did you lie to me when you said that
+he speaks to you in the cave?"</p>
+
+<p>"We can understand it only in the cave."</p>
+
+<p>While they were thus speaking John held the
+stone cross in his hand, and the Krishnos eyed
+him curiously. He finally saw the movement, and,
+quick as a flash, he reached down in his pocket,
+unobserved by them, and drew forth one of the
+wooden matches, which they had made at the Cataract.</p>
+
+<p>"What is this?" he asked sternly, pointing to
+the cross.</p>
+
+<p>They raised their hands and rolled their eyes
+upwardly, as though about to pronounce a malediction
+on John. He deftly drew the match along
+the rear side of the stone, and as it blazed forth
+into light, he thrust it forward into their faces.</p>
+
+<p>The act was such a startling one that they threw
+themselves on the ground in terror.</p>
+
+<p>"The Great Spirit told me that you lied, and he
+is about to come out of the stone and consume
+you. He will follow you everywhere unless you
+go to the Tuolos at once and tell them that the
+Great Spirit has told you to give up the captives,
+and to never again kill any of them. You must tell
+them we have been sent to make them our friends,
+and that if they do not follow this advice we will
+punish them."</p>
+
+<p>The Krishnos cringed before John. It was obvious
+to the surrounding warriors that the words
+they had heard had an ominous import, and they
+saw how feeble were the devices of the so-called<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_96" id="p_96">p. 96</a></span>
+wise men when pitted against the knowledge of
+John.</p>
+
+<p>John assumed a most tragic attitude, as he
+slowly raised his arm and pointed with his finger
+to the savage village. "Go," he said, "and bring
+back to me the answer before the morning sun
+comes up."</p>
+
+<p>They hesitated. "Do you fear to go? Are the
+wise men cowards? Did the Great Spirit tell you
+to fear the Tuolos? Shall we go and sacrifice all
+your people?"</p>
+
+<p>"They will not believe us; they will kill us."</p>
+
+<p>"Then they, too, know you have lied to them.
+If you remain here you will not be safe, because
+the great light might destroy you."</p>
+
+<p>Then turning to Muro he said: "Take these men
+to their village, and see that they are forced to
+meet their chiefs," and with an imperious air he
+turned from them.</p>
+
+<p>Muro's warriors were not too gentle with them.
+The spell of savage witchcraft had been broken.
+John and all of them knew it. They were hustled
+forward in the darkness, and as they approached
+the village Muro told them to advise the chiefs in
+his presence what John had said.</p>
+
+<p>Muro and the warriors, with the loaded guns,
+remained at a safe distance, and the Krishnos entered
+the village. They waited in silence for more
+than an hour, and then a commotion was noticed,
+which grew more intense as the voices increased
+in volume.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime John with the rest of the warriors
+came up quietly in the rear, and, after con<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_97" id="p_97">p. 97</a></span>sulting
+with Blakely and Muro, the village was surrounded.</p>
+
+<p>The boys saw the large hut where they were confined,
+after being captured, and from which they
+were rescued. Calling John's attention to it,
+Ralph said: "That big house is the place they kept
+us, and that is where you found us."</p>
+
+<p>John looked at them in surprise. He did not
+know this, as at the time the boys were rescued he
+was in mental darkness, and did not recall the incident.</p>
+
+<p>It was obvious that some tragedy was being enacted.
+While awaiting the result of the conference
+Muro was away instructing the pickets who
+were around the village. He soon appeared, bringing
+with him two Tuolos whose dress betokened
+them as belonging to the same order as the individuals
+who had been sent into the village.</p>
+
+<p>Calling John aside he said:</p>
+
+<p>"The Tuolos have two rival sets of medicine
+men. These belong to the other set, and are the
+ones who perform the religious rites."</p>
+
+<p>"Where did you find them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Directly east of the village."</p>
+
+<p>"Were they going to the village?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Did they come from the hill on the east side?"</p>
+
+<p>John mused for a while, and then said quietly
+to Muro: "They came from a cave on the hill,
+where they perform their rites, and it is a place I
+want to see. It is one of the reasons I insisted on
+coming to settle matters first with the Tuolos."</p>
+
+<p>Muro was astounded at the information, as he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_98" id="p_98">p. 98</a></span>
+asked: "How do you know there is a cave in the
+hill?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because I have been in it, and I know what it
+contains. They are having trouble in the village
+with the Krishnos we sent there."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," responded Muro; "and they have sent for
+the others, as they do not believe what they have
+told the chiefs."</p>
+
+<p>"I will question the ones you have brought in."</p>
+
+<p>The two captured were brought before John.
+They stood before him in defiant attitude, and
+some of the Brabo warriors cringed at their frowning
+mien.</p>
+
+<p>"Why were you going to the village?" he asked
+with a severe frown.</p>
+
+<p>At this question they scarcely deigned to move
+their heads, and were silent. The question was
+repeated, but they refused to answer. This was
+carrying out the very line of conduct which Muro
+had advised John would be the case, and in concert
+they had mapped out a course of action.</p>
+
+<p>"Tell me, Muro, have any of your people the
+same fear of these Krishnos as the others possess
+in the various tribes?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is the universal belief in the various tribes
+that to offend them means death. The only ones
+who are supreme are the chiefs, who often imprison
+them, but even the chiefs dare not kill
+them."</p>
+
+<p>"Will your people carry out our command if
+we do not order them killed?"</p>
+
+<p>"My people will do whatever I say, even though
+it be to kill them. They saw how the other Krish<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_99" id="p_99">p. 99</a></span>nos
+quaked when you made the fire come out of
+the stone."</p>
+
+<p>"Then, if they refuse to answer me, I will order
+them to be beaten. You will understand."</p>
+
+<p>"That will be done with pleasure," he answered.</p>
+
+<p>It was obvious to all that the Krishnos considered
+themselves immune from the threats of John,
+as they stood there and seemed to breathe imprecations
+on the heads of their captors.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_100" id="p_100">p. 100</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SUBMISSION OF THE TUOLOS</h3>
+
+
+<p>The situation was a tense one to the entire
+party, and John moved forward, placing himself
+directly in front of them.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think the Great Spirit can prevent us
+from punishing you? If you do not answer immediately
+I will call on him to lay stripes on you. Do
+you answer?"</p>
+
+<p>He stepped back slowly, and then suddenly
+spoke out the warning signal that he had arranged
+with Muro, and instantly six of the most powerful
+Saboros sprang upon them and bound them together
+face to face. John stood there with arms
+folded. He raised a hand, and two of the warriors
+raised the supple and toughened twigs, and
+brought them down on their bare backs.</p>
+
+<p>It was all done with such wonderful celerity and
+precision that it astounded the circle of warriors
+beyond measure, and the effect was doubly so to
+the two Krishnos. John had staged this to produce
+the greatest effect. The Krishnos were bound
+with their heads side by side, and a cloth put over
+their heads, so that they had no knowledge who
+their tormentors were.</p>
+
+<p>They danced about, and in their shrieks called
+out imprecations on their enemies, but soon, as the
+blows continued, begged for mercy, and Muro signaled
+them to cease.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_101" id="p_101">p. 101</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The cloth was removed and John again addressed
+them. They again persevered in their
+silence, and at a motion the cloth was again placed
+over their heads.</p>
+
+<p>Before the second chastisement began they
+yielded and the cords were released.</p>
+
+<p>"You see the Great Spirit did not come to your
+assistance. Why were you going to the village?"</p>
+
+<p>"To tell the chiefs not to yield to you."</p>
+
+<p>"The Great Spirit has told me to tell you that
+the Tuolos must give up their captives, and cease
+war. Will you tell the chief so?"</p>
+
+<p>"The Great Spirit did not tell you so," they defiantly
+answered.</p>
+
+<p>At a signal from John the cords were again
+brought into play, and the cloth exhibited. At this
+sight they pleaded for mercy, and promised to do
+as John requested. They were released and conducted
+to the outer line of pickets, and quickly
+disappeared within the village.</p>
+
+<p>It was now nearly four in the morning, and the
+first streaks of light began to show in the east.
+Muro knew the Tuolo character. They regarded
+themselves to be the superiors of all the tribes,
+and hitherto had treated the others with contempt,
+excepting the Illyas, whom they respected only
+because they were the most powerful.</p>
+
+<p>"They are having a warm time discussing the
+situation," remarked John, as he noted the surging
+inhabitants. That there was indecision became
+apparent, and the condition of the Krishnos
+more precarious, as light began to give them a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_102" id="p_102">p. 102</a></span>
+more decided glimpse of the activities in the village.</p>
+
+<p>Soon warriors were noticed rushing to and from
+the large circle within which the Krishnos sat.
+Bows and spears were hurriedly grasped.</p>
+
+<p>"What does it mean?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"It is likely they know they are surrounded,
+and have decided to defend themselves," answered
+Muro.</p>
+
+<p>A warrior of distinguished appearance emerged
+from the circle, and advanced toward the position
+occupied by John. Muro beckoned to John, and
+together they moved into the open. The warrior
+saw the two approaching, and he halted.</p>
+
+<p>Turning to his band he spoke a word, and another
+no less distinguished stepped from the rank
+and moved toward him.</p>
+
+<p>"The first one is the chief, and the other one he
+called to follow is the next in rank. As there are
+two of us, so must there be two on his side."</p>
+
+<p>John and Muro advanced without halting, and
+as they neared each other the chief, in the most
+haughty manner, addressed Muro as follows:</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you come to make war on my people?"</p>
+
+<p>Muro, taking his cue from John's previous attitude,
+rose to his full height and replied: "You have
+always been the aggressor against the other people,
+and you have within the last moon killed and
+taken two Brabos in captivity, and we demand
+their return."</p>
+
+<p>"That I will not do."</p>
+
+<p>"Then the White Chief will speak to you."</p>
+
+<p>John advanced and began the conversation.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_103" id="p_103">p. 103</a></span>
+"The white people do not desire war. You captured
+two of my people and I took them from you
+with only four men. All the tribes but you and
+the Illyas have united to compel you to submit,
+and you shall not again be free to murder and injure
+other people.</p>
+
+<p>"If you want war, we are prepared to fight you.
+Your village is surrounded, and we have the fire
+guns which will compel you to yield. If you will
+surrender, we will see to it that you and your
+people shall not be harmed, but if you resist you
+will be killed. You cannot escape."</p>
+
+<p>The chief was stunned, and could not answer.
+John saw the impression the address had made,
+and proceeded: "What did the Krishnos tell you?
+Did they not tell you to surrender? Did they not
+tell you that they lied when they said the Great
+Spirit wanted you to kill us?"</p>
+
+<p>The chief was silent. Was he debating the
+matter in his mind? John continued: "When this
+speaks," he said, pointing to his gun, "all of the
+fire guns about your village will speak."</p>
+
+<p>"How shall we know you will keep your word?"</p>
+
+<p>Muro held up his hand, as he spoke: "Ask the
+Kurabus whether the White Chief keeps his word."</p>
+
+<p>Before he could reply, John added: "The White
+Chief keeps his word. He believes the people
+here will keep their word if they know the others
+will do so. He has armed the tribes who have
+allied themselves with him, because he believes in
+them, and we do not want to make you captives,
+or offer sacrifices of your brave men."</p>
+
+<p>"The White Chief speaks wisely," said Muro.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_104" id="p_104">p. 104</a></span>
+"He does not believe in making sacrifices. The
+Great Spirit has told him that is wrong."</p>
+
+<p>Still the chief pondered, and, slowly raising his
+head, said: "I believe the white man, and what he
+says. I will tell my people."</p>
+
+<p>He turned and moved toward the village, John
+and Muro remaining there, as an indication that
+they expected an immediate answer.</p>
+
+<p>"He will yield," said Muro, "and according to
+custom, will first tell his people what his decision
+is."</p>
+
+<p>Muro was right. Within a half hour the chief
+advanced at the head of his warriors, the latter
+of whom had left their bows and spears at the
+circle, and the two stood ready to receive them.</p>
+
+<p>As the two chiefs appeared the warriors lined
+up behind them.</p>
+
+<p>"I have brought my warriors here to show you
+that we will be friends." And John advanced and
+took the hand of the chief.</p>
+
+<p>"In my country we become friends when we take
+each other's hands, and I am glad to see that you
+have wisdom to accept us as your friends."</p>
+
+<p>At a signal from Muro, the warriors advanced
+from all sides, and together they marched into the
+village, the different ones telling the Tuolos the
+wonderful things the White Chief was doing, and
+how they were bringing all the tribes together,
+and making them stop war.</p>
+
+<p>The first act of the Tuolo chief was to liberate
+the two Brabo warriors. When the wagon was
+driven into the village, the people gathered around
+the curious contrivance. Some of them remem<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_105" id="p_105">p. 105</a></span>bered
+it when it was there nearly a year before,
+but under quite different circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>The boys, Ralph and Tom, soon attracted the
+attention of the chief. He went up to them, and
+simulating the act of John, held out his hand.
+The boys understood it, and respectfully responded
+and saluted the chief, in regular military fashion.</p>
+
+<p>Then, climax to the foregoing events, Blakely
+gave a word of command to the fifty who were
+armed with the guns, and for the benefit of their
+new allies, put them through a manual of arms.
+The precision with which this was done, and the
+remarkable manner in which the subsequent evolutions
+were performed, astonished the Tuolos.</p>
+
+<p>While this was going on there was little time
+to notice the condition of the Krishnos. They had
+been bound; and were now lying in disgrace at the
+place where the circle had been formed, trembling
+at their fate.</p>
+
+<p>Before preparations had been made for breakfast,
+the chief gave a command, and a number of
+warriors rushed up to the poor fellows, and began
+to drag them to the large hut.</p>
+
+<p>Muro motioned to John, and quietly said: "They
+will probably torture them."</p>
+
+<p>John appeared before the chief and said: "The
+Great Spirit will be offended if you injure the
+Krishnos."</p>
+
+<p>"What would you have me do with them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Give them to me."</p>
+
+<p>The chief ordered them to be brought forward,
+and spoke to them: "The White Chief has asked<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_106" id="p_106">p. 106</a></span>
+me not to injure you, and at his command I have
+given you to him."</p>
+
+<p>This announcement seemed to stun them, but
+Muro was quick to assure them that the White
+Chief meant no harm.</p>
+
+<p>The boys took complete satisfaction in going
+over to the large hut, to again witness the place
+where they had spent two weeks in terror, expecting
+that each day would be their last.</p>
+
+<p>But we must return to the Professor and the
+colony. Two days after the departure of John
+and his force, the second insulting message came
+from the Illyas, in which the statement was made
+that they and the Tuolos had united to drive the
+White Chief from the country and to destroy the
+tribes who were allied against them.</p>
+
+<p>A messenger was sent after John, but this was
+not necessary, as the Tuolos were in their power
+before the messenger came.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor had ordered the building of a
+number of small houses, each containing two or
+three rooms, and these were plainly fitted up for
+comfort. Some of the natives became quite expert
+at putting up these structures when once directed.</p>
+
+<p>George and Jim were set to work, with a half
+dozen of the men, at building chairs and tables
+for the houses, and the work of weaving the cloth
+goods was not interrupted for a moment. As
+stated, the women began to drift in, and the Professor
+welcomed them. When they arrived, many
+of them with their children, the Professor assigned
+them and their husbands to these cottages.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_107" id="p_107">p. 107</a></span></p>
+
+<p>This was an intense delight to them. Each cottage
+had a small patch of ground surrounding it,
+and the first care was to advise them how to lay
+off and plant flowers about the place, to make the
+surroundings attractive.</p>
+
+<p>It must not be thought that the houses were
+gifts. It was not the purpose to instill the idea
+that this work was one of charity. Instead each
+head of a family was made to understand that he
+must pay for the home, and this was done in
+as simple a manner as possible, so it would be
+appreciated and understood.</p>
+
+<p>Individual effort was stimulated on the part of
+the different workers. As fast as the members of
+a worker's family arrived, they were installed in
+houses, and then began a new system of providing
+for their keep. Hitherto, they had boarded
+at the expense of the common fund; but now this
+was gradually changed, and they were informed
+that each family must provide its own food, and
+that those who did so would receive a larger number
+of coins.</p>
+
+<p>This resulted in each one trying to find some
+new direction in which they could get the coins.
+It is curious how this new phase of living brought
+out traits common to humanity everywhere. Some
+more eager than others, and having less honesty
+than the common run of natives, sought to get their
+sustenance by resorting to trickery and thievery.</p>
+
+<p>In their native state this was not considered a
+crime. It was commendable, unless detected. But
+by constant talk, on the part of the Professor, and
+by example, he instilled into the policemen, which<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_108" id="p_108">p. 108</a></span>
+he had installed, the principles of honesty. He
+awarded those who were vigilant, and the result
+was that they were most acute to detect the rogues.</p>
+
+<p>The first thief was caught the day after John's
+party had gone. He was immediately brought before
+the Professor. The arrest of a thief was
+such a new proceeding that the workers could
+not be kept at work, and the Professor suggested
+that they should all be present at the trial.</p>
+
+<p>The inquiry was conducted with decorum, Harry
+being appointed to prosecute him, and George
+to defend the prisoner. George did it vigorously,
+too, but it was a plain and palpable case, and he
+was found guilty. This proceeding was another
+entirely new manner of treating an offender, and
+the people marveled at the attempt to defend the
+thief.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor saw the cause of the wonderment,
+and said: "We do not defend the wrong,
+but we believe that each man who is charged with
+a crime should be permitted to defend himself.
+If he does not know how to properly defend himself,
+then it is our duty to see that he is protected
+in all his rights, for he is not a criminal until it is
+proven."</p>
+
+<p>"He has tried to explain why he took the goods,
+but you know what he has said was not true, and
+he must be punished for it. He must work two
+moons without getting any of the coins, and if he
+repeats the crime, he must work until he restores
+the value of the goods taken, so that each one will
+know that a thief cannot take things from another
+without paying for it."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_109" id="p_109">p. 109</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The incident for a long time deterred anyone
+from repeating the offense. It was an object lesson,
+because it instilled a respect for a law which
+was fair to all.</p>
+
+<p>Suros, the chief of the Berees, was the most impressed
+by the scene, and could not express himself
+too forcibly at the wonderful effect which the
+principle would have on the tribes in their dealings
+with each other. He was really an intelligent
+native, far ahead of the others in his comprehension
+of the duties of one to the other.</p>
+
+<p>The fact that he was regarded with reverence by
+all but the Kurabus, and was even respected by
+them, was a strong factor in determining the Professor
+to set in motion a form of government which
+it was hoped would forever terminate all bitterness
+of feeling between the tribes, and which will
+be detailed hereafter.</p>
+
+<p>During the day on which the Tuolos submitted,
+the two chiefs, together with John, Blakely and
+Muro, were frequently in consultation.</p>
+
+<p>"The Great White Chief, who rules all of us,
+wishes to see you, and you must bring fifty of
+your warriors with you to his village," said John.
+"He will show you how you can be made strong,
+and your people happy. He will tell you what our
+purpose is, and what the Great Spirit asks you
+to do. We will start in the morning."</p>
+
+<p>The chief, to the surprise of all, did not demur
+at this. That night John called in Blakely, Muro,
+Ralph and Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"I want you to go with me to the cave on the hill
+to the east. There are some things which belong<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_110" id="p_110">p. 110</a></span>
+to us. We shall take them, since they are of no
+use to the people here, and we may be able to put
+some of the things in such a condition that they
+will be of value to the people on the island."</p>
+
+<p>The wagon was taken along, and the people
+wondered at the strange proceedings. Many of
+them followed, but Muro warned them to remain
+behind. It was evident to all, however, that they
+were going to the Krishno cave, and its purport
+was a mystery to them.</p>
+
+<p>John's sense of direction did not deceive him.
+He soon found the entrance on the village side,
+and, lighting the candles, immediately entered the
+cavern. John led the way, as his experience in
+its hollows enabled him to point out the direction
+to be taken.</p>
+
+<p>The interior, lighted up by the candles, was most
+weird and beautiful. The stalactite hangings were
+not massive, but showed the most delicate tracings,
+in the first chamber reached. This was the western
+wing of the great interior cross which John had
+previously described.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_111" id="p_111">p. 111</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2>
+
+<h3>PLANS FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE NATIVES</h3>
+
+
+<p>Directly beyond this chamber, and on a line
+with the entrance passage, was an extension which
+led to the other side of the hill. The chamber
+formed an immense cross, in its plan section, and
+the two lateral extremities were the points of interest.</p>
+
+<p>The party first went to the left, and there found
+the habitation of the Krishnos. Peculiar implements
+and instruments were discovered, and all
+of these were taken, and placed together, Muro
+and the boys looking on in wonder.</p>
+
+<p>Among them were found a number of crude
+crosses and numerous charms or amulets, the kind
+that they vended, and which the natives gave their
+souls and bodies to acquire.</p>
+
+<p>"The possession of these will be of great service
+to us, as the people reverence them, and we must
+not expect to change their beliefs in a fortnight."</p>
+
+<p>"You said there was a lot of treasure here," remarked
+Ralph.</p>
+
+<p>"That is in the other wing of the chamber. As
+we have everything from this place that is serviceable,
+we will go to the south wing."</p>
+
+<p>The recessed part of the chamber at this place
+had the appearance of being carved from the rock,
+and decorated with the universal calcium. The
+floor was covered with stalagmites, rough and un<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_112" id="p_112">p. 112</a></span>even,
+showing that the place had not been trod,
+perhaps for centuries.</p>
+
+<p>"What are those curious things?" asked Tom,
+gazing at the square-shaped objects, which were
+arranged in one corner.</p>
+
+<p>"By opening them we shall see."</p>
+
+<p>"Here is one, partly opened," exclaimed Ralph
+in great excitement.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; that is the one I tried to get into," answered
+John. "Notwithstanding it was a hazardous
+thing to do at the time, I took the risk. The
+Krishnos were at that very time at the other wing
+which we just left."</p>
+
+<p>The receptacle was brought out and examined.
+The wealth of gold and silver was amazing. Blakely
+could hardly believe the testimony of his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>"Your ship, the <i>Adventurer</i>, is floating around
+in pieces on the Pacific, but I imagine there is
+enough here to compensate you for the loss of the
+vessel," remarked John, as he noticed Blakely's
+wondering look.</p>
+
+<p>"How can we ever get all this stuff on the
+wagon?" asked Tom. "The boxes are all falling
+to pieces."</p>
+
+<p>"The Krishnos have plenty of copper vessels, as
+well as others, which they have gathered up from
+the wrecks on the coast. You know the best of
+everything goes to them, and the chiefs are not
+strong enough really to prevent them on account
+of the superstitious fears they inculcate."</p>
+
+<p>True enough, the eastern wing had a hoard of
+vessels, some of them of the greatest value, which
+were arranged about the chests of treasure, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_113" id="p_113">p. 113</a></span>
+the work of filling the receptacles was industriously
+undertaken. This occupied them for fully three
+hours, and the greater task of carrying them to
+the wagon was begun.</p>
+
+<p>When they emerged from the cave at four in
+the morning they were tired beyond all description,
+but they had a mass of treasure, that did not
+pale in comparison with the amount taken out of
+the caverns near the Cataract.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning the Tuolos were selected, and
+the chief invited to enter the wagon. John went
+to the large hut, and released the Krishnos. They
+were unbound, and directed to follow the marching
+column, surprised at being free from the captive
+bonds. They could not understand such treatment,
+and this was heightened when John ordered the
+aged Krishno, who walked with difficulty, to take
+a place in the wagon.</p>
+
+<p>The natives saw the warriors and their chief
+depart, not as prisoners, since all had their weapons,
+but conducted in state, if the appearance of
+the chief in the vehicle was an indication of the proceeding.</p>
+
+<p>Two days thereafter the cavalcade approached
+the village, and the chief strained his eyes, as he
+peered at the multitude about him, and saw a village
+of a most remarkable character, where two
+moons before was a virgin tract of land.</p>
+
+<p>The venerable appearance of the Professor attracted
+him. He was startled at the sight of
+Suros, and then, glancing about, he recognized
+Oma of the Brabos, Uraso of the Osagas, and
+lastly, Tastoa, chief of the Kurabus, lately his ally.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_114" id="p_114">p. 114</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Professor welcomed him with outstretched
+hand. "You are wondering at the sight of your
+late enemies, and of your friends. We have nothing
+but friends here. They can tell you that we
+welcome you as a friend, and will explain why
+we do so. We will show you what the people are
+doing for themselves, and how happily they live,
+and the White Chief brought you here so that you
+might see these things for yourself."</p>
+
+<p>"We welcome you, Marmo, as one of our
+friends," said Suros. "I tried many moons ago to
+tell you that the Great Spirit did not want us to
+kill each other, but the wise men told you differently.
+We do not believe them any more, but listen
+to the White Chief."</p>
+
+<p>"He has told us the most wonderful things, and
+taught us how the white men live, and how different
+tribes live together in peace."</p>
+
+<p>After the welcoming functions and the explanations
+were concluded, he was taken to the different
+works, and everything explained to him. He
+saw the water wheel, and how it turned the sawmill
+and the grindstone and lathes, and the mill
+for making the flour.</p>
+
+<p>The looms interested him the most of all. It is
+singular how the various tools and machinery
+affected the different ones, and this was particularly
+observed by the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"I have watched the several tribes," said Harry,
+"as they first looked about them at the strange
+things, and it is curious how the different things
+impress them. I have noticed that the Osagas are
+particularly interested in machinery. The Saboros<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_115" id="p_115">p. 115</a></span>
+like anything connected with the soil, and they
+would make good agriculturists."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you remember when Uraso came to the
+Cataract he never took any stock in the guns, but
+Stut couldn't keep his hands off them?" responded
+Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"The old chief Marmo thought the loom was the
+finest thing in the whole lot. He is over there
+now, and has been watching it for the last two
+hours."</p>
+
+<p>For two days the chief wandered around, paying
+no attention to anything but the machinery,
+and the products turned out. The coins were a
+novelty, and a string was presented to him. He
+noticed the friendly attitude of all the warriors
+to his men, and marveled at the change.</p>
+
+<p>He could not understand why the men would
+work for the coins, and then give them up for
+something else. The Professor tried to explain
+this, and it must be confessed that it was a hard
+thing to do. It seemed that nothing but a practical
+application would make it plain.</p>
+
+<p>The Tuolo chief was a ready listener now, and
+was unusually quick to grasp a situation, although
+he could not learn the ethics of the white man.
+The Professor had him present at one of the trials
+for theft of a petty nature, which occurred a few
+days after his arrival.</p>
+
+<p>He was surprised to find that any notice should
+be taken of such a trivial affair. The Professor,
+commenting on it at the trial, which he did particularly
+for the benefit of Marmo, said: "It is not the
+amount of the theft, but the act itself, which we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_116" id="p_116">p. 116</a></span>
+must condemn. If you could have taken a larger
+amount you would have done so, and you must
+learn that the property you took did not belong
+to you but the some one else, and that is just as
+much a crime as though you took all the man possessed."</p>
+
+<p>That was sufficient for his first lesson in justice.
+"But," he asked of the Professor, "can all
+men be guilty of doing wrong?"</p>
+
+<p>"Can you do wrong?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"But you are a Great Chief, and how can you
+do wrong in taking things from your people?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because the people own the things, just as
+much as you own the things which you have properly
+obtained."</p>
+
+<p>"Then if you do wrong, will you be punished?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; just the same as the people who do
+wrong. My punishment should be greater, if I
+do wrong, because I should set them an example
+to do right."</p>
+
+<p>"But how can I do wrong if I take anything
+from my people? I own everything."</p>
+
+<p>"Who gave everything to you? By what right
+should you or I own everything? Because we are
+chiefs does not give us the right to own everything."</p>
+
+<p>"Then how can the chiefs ever own anything?"'</p>
+
+<p>"They should work for it like everyone else
+does."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you work like the others do?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I oversee the work of others and try to
+make them happy, and see that no one is idle and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_117" id="p_117">p. 117</a></span>
+that the laws are obeyed. For that work I am
+paid, just as the others are paid for the work they
+do. I do this work because my people ask me to
+do so, and they pay me a certain number of coins
+for the work, the same as the man is paid for the
+particular work he does."</p>
+
+<p>This doctrine, so entirely new, could not be
+grasped at once, and he continued with his questionings:
+"But the people may not want me as their
+chief, and take some one else, and that would
+cause trouble, and no one would know who was
+chief."</p>
+
+<p>"Then it becomes your duty to so conduct yourself
+that they will not want some one else to be
+chief. If a man works for me and he does not
+know or care how he does the work, or is careless,
+and I cannot depend on him, I get somebody else
+in his place. Would you keep such a man?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; but I would have the power to send him
+away."</p>
+
+<p>"Then the wise chief must know that if he acts
+as a true father to his people they will not try
+to get another chief."</p>
+
+<p>Blakely had been a man of affairs at home, and
+was a sharp, shrewd business man. To him the
+Professor entrusted the arranging of the affairs of
+the town, impressing on him the importance of directing
+the natives into a wide and diversified character
+of enterprises.</p>
+
+<p>The business was one admirably suited to his
+temperament. He had long ago spoken to the
+boys and John about the promotion of the island,
+by the establishments of various industries, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_118" id="p_118">p. 118</a></span>
+particularly agricultural pursuits, which would
+require workmen to cultivate coffee, cocoa, the
+spices, and the numerous vegetable products which
+grew in a wild state in great abundance everywhere.</p>
+
+<p>These various articles, if grown systematically,
+would mean an immense source of wealth, and
+should afford employment for all the natives, and
+thus mean their advancement.</p>
+
+<p>The hills were full of mineral. He knew this,
+and had the testimony of the Professor as to the
+valuable character of the various ores. Sooner or
+later communication could now be established with
+the outer world. All were contemplating the preparation
+of a suitable vessel which would enable
+them to return to the United States.</p>
+
+<p>One evening, while the conversation was on this
+absorbing topic, he remarked: "I don't know how
+you gentlemen feel about this place, but as for
+myself I feel that from a business point of view
+this is the ideal spot. I am just as anxious as you
+are to see my home again, but the possibilities
+are so immense here, that, as soon as possible,
+I shall come back."</p>
+
+<p>"For my part," replied the Professor, "if a
+ship should appear in the harbor to-morrow, I
+would not for a moment consider leaving these
+people. The work of their redemption is not even
+started in such a way as to permit me to safely
+leave them. The boys may well be pardoned and
+commended for wanting to go home, but my work
+is here."</p>
+
+<p>"That expresses my sentiment exactly," said<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_119" id="p_119">p. 119</a></span>
+Harry. "I want to go home, it is true, but what a
+wonderful experience we have had here, and when
+I think of the remarkable progress we have made
+it astonishes me more than I can tell you. If I do
+go home it will be to come back again, because I
+want to be where the Professor is. I like this
+work, and the excitement it affords."</p>
+
+<p>"You won't have any more savages to fight," responded
+the Professor, "and it might not be so
+interesting for you."</p>
+
+<p>"Making guns is much more pleasant than using
+them against people."</p>
+
+<p>George's face was a study. He was the sentimental
+one of the lot. He was by all odds the
+most emotional, and the greatest lover of home.
+But withal that he reechoed the sentiments of
+Harry. "If I could only see home again, I would
+be content, and when I came back it would be to
+know that I could return whenever I wanted to."</p>
+
+<p>All the boys were enthusiastic about the trip
+home. Many plans were projected, and talked
+over.</p>
+
+<p>"Won't it create a sensation," remarked Ralph,
+"when it is announced that three of the <i>Investigator's</i>
+lifeboats were wrecked on an island, and
+that the survivors arrived after an absence of&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," broke in Tom. "How long?"</p>
+
+<p>"That will depend on several things," said
+John. "First, to bring the Illyas to terms, and
+second, to build a boat big enough to take us safely
+to the nearest harbor which is in communication
+with America. As for myself, this life and the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_120" id="p_120">p. 120</a></span>
+hopes for the future are too alluring for me to even
+try to get away."</p>
+
+<p>With characteristic energy Blakely consulted
+Harry and the working force in the shop.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think we could turn out some plows?"
+he asked.</p>
+
+<p>Harry smiled. "This establishment is prepared
+to turn out anything it has orders for."</p>
+
+<p>"Then put down my order for a half dozen
+plows, to be delivered as quickly as possible."</p>
+
+<p>The new town was located within the territorial
+limits of the Osagas' country, and it was now
+necessary to make immediate provision for some
+sort of laws or regulations with respect to the
+land. The savage theory was that the chief owned
+all the land, and this was a condition that well
+might breed trouble.</p>
+
+<p>Osaga was the chief. He was the first to receive
+the full understanding of the new doctrine.
+It was proposed that he should receive as full compensation
+a certain stipulated sum, and in return
+make a transfer of all his rights to the State.</p>
+
+<p>"But what is the State," he asked, "and who will
+he be?"</p>
+
+<p>"The State will mean all of you."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I will own a part of it just the same as
+everybody else?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; let me explain that still further. When
+your people begin to raise coffee and cocoa, and
+all the other things which the people in the world
+will come here for and buy of you, the lands all
+about you will become very valuable, and many
+will come here to buy them. The money will go<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_121" id="p_121">p. 121</a></span>
+to the State, which means you and everyone else
+here."</p>
+
+<p>"Will it be done the same with the Berees, and
+the Kurabus and the Saboros?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; each will be a State of its own, and will
+be governed in the same way, and a Saboro will
+come here and buy some land, and you will protect
+him, and when one of the Osagas goes to the
+Berees he can buy land there, and they must protect
+him and his wife and children."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I see what you mean. I am content. I
+will do this whether the others do or not."</p>
+
+<p>"But I assure you," continued the Professor,
+"that the others will be compelled to do as you
+do."</p>
+
+<p>"How can we compel them?"</p>
+
+<p>"No one will want to buy their land, and they
+will not become valuable for that reason, like
+yours, because the people who come here will buy
+only where they know there is a law and where
+they know they will be protected."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso grasped the wonderful import of this
+statement, and became its most enthusiastic advocate.
+He had many talks with Marmo and Muro,
+and he presented the matter in such a way that
+most suitably appealed to the savage mind.</p>
+
+<p>The all-absorbing topic now was the proposed
+expedition to the Illyas. Marmo, the Tuolo chief,
+had sent a message to their chief, in which he set
+forth the advantages which would accrue to them
+to quietly submit, and also stated that he did so
+willingly, in the belief such a course would be of
+the greatest and most lasting benefit.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_122" id="p_122">p. 122</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Marmo had received no response, and the outlook
+boded no good. Preparations were begun,
+and Marmo insisted that his warriors should form
+part of the force, and that he himself would accompany
+the expedition. As the boys, by the
+aid of their helpers, had been at work on the guns
+from the time the factory was set up, they had
+a hundred and twenty guns completed. This was
+ample for any requirement.</p>
+
+<p>Two new wagons were also made, and several
+smaller ones, designed for single steers, the latter
+being used by the Professor and the chiefs in going
+to and fro.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_123" id="p_123">p. 123</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2>
+
+<h3>THE PECULIAR SAVAGE BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS</h3>
+
+
+<p>The chief Marmo had now an opportunity to
+learn another lesson he was not prepared for.
+Many of the warriors objected to going on the expedition.
+The work at the factory and in the various
+occupations so fascinated them that they
+begged to be excused.</p>
+
+<p>At the request of the Professor many were excused
+from going, care having been taken to consult
+the boys who had charge of the various parts
+of the business as to the ones which could best be
+spared.</p>
+
+<p>Marmo mused over these things. He saw the
+great cordiality that existed between his warriors
+and the other tribes. He was also gratified to see
+some of his men making things which were novel
+to him, as they were fascinating to the men.</p>
+
+<p>The Krishnos were all about and were the personal
+charges of the Professor. He had them,
+daily in the laboratory, and all seemed to be
+pleased and happy. Marmo wanted to know
+whether they desired to go home, but all declined.
+There seemed to be a fascination about the place
+he could not understand.</p>
+
+<p>One evening the Professor saw a Tuolo worker
+stealthily coming up the pathway leading to the
+laboratory, and after looking about with a curi<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_124" id="p_124">p. 124</a></span>ous
+air, pushed open the door, and in the most
+subservient manner begged permission to speak.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor took him by the hand and led
+him to a chair. "What is it you want, my man?
+Can I do anything for you!"</p>
+
+<p>The hearty manner and smiling face of the Professor
+emboldened him to speak.</p>
+
+<p>"I have a wife and three children in the Tuolo
+village, and I want permission to bring them
+here."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you want to go back there?"</p>
+
+<p>"If I do then I will have no more work. I like
+the work. I can make many things now, and I
+want my family here."</p>
+
+<p>This was an appeal which could not be neglected,
+and he responded in this manner: "You
+do not need to ask me to bring your family here.
+You have a right to do so."</p>
+
+<p>"But my chief will not let me do so."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you ask him?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I will send for him."</p>
+
+<p>"When Marmo appeared the Professor told him
+the desire of the man, and when he had concluded
+the chief was puzzled for a moment, and, turning
+to the warrior, said:</p>
+
+<p>"I cannot understand why my warriors do not
+care about going to war. They like the machinery,
+and the way the little things are made, and to
+learn how to make them. The White Chief says
+you have a right to bring your family here. That
+is well; but you must not forget your people, and
+when you learn these wonderful things you must<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_125" id="p_125">p. 125</a></span>
+come and teach the people at the village how to
+do them."</p>
+
+<p>He was extremely gratified at this permission.
+A half hour afterwards the Professor called Tom
+and told him of the incident, and suggested that
+he should be provided with a quantity of food for
+the journey. But he had already gone. That was
+certainly sufficient to show the intense eagerness
+to bring back his people.</p>
+
+<p>George and Ralph were the ones who were always
+on the alert for new things, and Jim made
+a good companion for them in this respect. The
+latter was the first one to actively canvass the
+subject of a name.</p>
+
+<p>There had been too much to do even to think
+of this before, and if it occurred to the Professor
+he had never mentioned it. Jim went over to
+see the Professor as soon as the idea occurred to
+him.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor smiled when he saw Jim's eagerness.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, the idea is a good one, but that is something
+which you boys will have to decide. It has
+not occurred to John and Blakely, I know."</p>
+
+<p>"I thought it would be a good thing to call it
+Industria, or something of that kind," responded
+Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"I like that name, but you settle it among yourselves."
+Jim was back very quickly, and rushing
+in to the boys, cried out:</p>
+
+<p>"The Professor said it was up to us to get a
+name for it."</p>
+
+<p>"Name for what?" asked Harry.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_126" id="p_126">p. 126</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"For the town, of course."</p>
+
+<p>"Well, what shall it be?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Call it America," shouted Will.</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, that's too big a name," roared Ralph, with
+a scornful touch in his voice. "Just imagine how
+this would sound: 'William Rudel, Esq., America,
+Wonder Island?' What would the postmaster
+think of such an address?"</p>
+
+<p>It did look a little out of proportion, as the boys
+laughed at the sally.</p>
+
+<p>"Let's call it Independence; everybody seems to
+be pretty independent here," was Tom's suggestion.</p>
+
+<p>"I have the best name in the lot."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Industria."</p>
+
+<p>"There you are again with your Latin," answered
+Harry. "This is going to a real American
+town. None of your Latin endings, or any other
+dead language. This is a live town."</p>
+
+<p>"Here is John; let's get a suggestion from him."</p>
+
+<p>He heard the merry laughter, and as he approached
+wonderingly inquired about the cause of
+the hilarity. George said: "We have been holding
+a convention to find a name for the town. We
+have decided to leave it to you."</p>
+
+<p>"Name of the town? Let me see. I suppose
+you want a stunning name? Something that will
+make people sit up and take notice. Eh? Well,
+if it turns out all right it doesn't need a name,
+and if it is a failure everybody will be calling it
+names."</p>
+
+<p>The boys laughed at this first attempt that John<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_127" id="p_127">p. 127</a></span>
+had ever essayed to treat a subject in a jesting
+way, but he continued: "If this convention hasn't
+enough wit about it to select a name I don't think
+you ought to get an outsider to make a suggestion.
+But seriously, Unity would be a good name;
+and so Hustletown."</p>
+
+<p>"Unity is just the thing," suggested George.
+There was not a dissenting voice.</p>
+
+<p>"Now that we have the name, I suppose we shall
+have to christen it to make it hold," remarked
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"Considering the trials and tribulations we have
+gone through to put this town on the map it doesn't
+need any christening. If we work as hard to make
+it a success as we did to get it started we needn't
+be ashamed of it," said Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Probably, the same principle will apply in this
+case as the sentence uttered by the Hindoo priests
+at the christening of an infant."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?"</p>
+
+<p>"Thou hast come into the world with all around
+thee smiling; so live that when thou departest thou
+mayest smile while all around thee weep."</p>
+
+<p>"That is a beautiful sentiment. Hurrah for
+Unity!" and George raised his hat to start the
+shouting.</p>
+
+<p>As the expedition against the Illyas was about
+ready to start, the time for the departure was set
+for the following day. Two of the wagons were
+brought into requisition, and loaded with sufficient
+provisions to prevent the necessity of foraging
+too much.</p>
+
+<p>George and Harry begged to be taken along, as<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_128" id="p_128">p. 128</a></span>
+they had put in some strenuous times during the
+two months at Unity, and this was readily granted.
+The other boys were to remain and take charge of
+the active work. John had command of the expedition,
+and Blakely had now too much work at
+the new town to enable him to take part.</p>
+
+<p>Over three hundred warriors were mustered for
+the expedition. One hundred of the picked men
+had the muzzle-loading guns, and an ample supply
+of ammunition was stored in the wagons, and each
+gun bearer had twenty-five rounds.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor said, on the eve of their departure:
+"I have every confidence in the ability of Mr.
+Varney to make it unnecessary to give him any advice,
+but I must say a word to all the warriors.
+You are going to the tribes, not for the purpose
+of revenge. We know they have captives in their
+possession, and we have demanded their return.
+They sent us an insulting message.</p>
+
+<p>"Notwithstanding this, we must consider that
+they have sent us this reply out of ignorance of our
+true purpose. Each man must conduct himself as
+the chiefs dictate. There must be no killing except
+in self-defense."</p>
+
+<p>Muro and Uraso, as well as Ralsea, were to accompany
+them, but the other chiefs were kept at
+home, this arrangement having been made because
+the others really preferred to continue the
+work in the factory and field.</p>
+
+<p>It was a glorious day to begin the campaign.
+George and Harry were in their element.</p>
+
+<p>"What a wonderful thing it is to look at these
+people now, and recall what our situation was a<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_129" id="p_129">p. 129</a></span>
+year ago," said Harry, as they drove down the
+road which had been made from the village to
+the east.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; a year ago, we were having some troubles,
+as it was about that time we got the first
+intelligence that these people were on the island,"
+answered George.</p>
+
+<p>"I had particular reference to the trip we made
+by sea, when we were wrecked the second time."</p>
+
+<p>The entire column marched out past the Professor
+and the chiefs Oma, Suros, Marmo and
+Tastoa. The six tribes had contributed to the
+expedition, which they hoped would end all future
+wars, and put the island in a condition of peace,
+and thus enable them to carry out the great work
+planned by the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>Before evening of the second day the main Saboro
+village came in sight. Muro was in a heaven
+of delight. Many of his warriors were in the column,
+and some still remained at Unity. But the
+women and children were still there, and they
+rushed out to meet the advancing column.</p>
+
+<p>The news of the uprising of the Illyas was confirmed.
+A large party of them were less than a
+day's march to the east, and the appearance of the
+fighting force was a welcome one. There was no
+reason to apprehend that they had any knowledge
+of the surrender of the Tuolos.</p>
+
+<p>The night and part of the day spent at the Saboro
+village was a period of feasting. Uraso met
+his sister, the wife of Muro, and the boys were
+lionized by the chief's family, who took particular
+pleasure in entertaining them. They had heard<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_130" id="p_130">p. 130</a></span>
+so much about the remarkable boys, and their capacity
+to make the beautiful things.</p>
+
+<p>Harry and George brought with them a number
+of the mirrors, and those, with other little trinkets,
+were presented to the women. The boys were
+particularly impressed with Muro's eldest son, a
+boy of their same age, and George won Muro's
+heart when he asked if he could not accompany
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Speaking to Harry he said: "Wouldn't Lolo enjoy
+the work at the factory? I hope he will let
+us take him with us when we go back."</p>
+
+<p>"I am going to ask Muro," replied Harry, and
+he sought him out at once. "We want Lolo to go
+back with us to Unity."</p>
+
+<p>Muro was delighted at the proposal, and he
+answered: "Yes; Lolo shall go back with us, because
+all of my family are going with us and we
+shall live there."</p>
+
+<p>This news was a source of the greatest pleasure,
+you may be sure, and it was most gratifying
+to Muro, because he admired the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Lolo will like to work in the shop with you.
+He can now make the best bows in the tribe, and
+he makes fine arrows." And Lolo exhibited some
+of his handiwork, which, from the standpoint of
+the native weapons, was really creditable.</p>
+
+<p>Returning now to Unity, we shall have to relate
+some very singular thing's which should be mentioned,
+as it shows the peculiar beliefs and practices
+of the natives.</p>
+
+<p>On the day the force left the village occurred
+the first death in Unity. This was one of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_131" id="p_131">p. 131</a></span>
+warriors, who had been wounded during the last
+fight with the Tuolos and Illyas, and he had lingered
+along until he finally succumbed. He was
+one of the best men, and was mourned by the
+Osagas, of which he was a member.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 339px;">
+<a id="illus-131" name="illus-131" />
+<a href="#p_131">
+<img src="images/illus-fig13-p131.png" width="339" height="238"
+alt="Fig. 13. Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds." title="Fig. 13. Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 13. <span class="u">Ready</span> <span class="u">for</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Happy</span> <span class="u">Hunting</span> <span class="u">Grounds</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Singularly, another of the same tribe died the
+following morning, who was the exact opposite
+of the warrior. Within six hours of the death
+of the latter his friends carried him away, and
+he was buried. The warrior, however, was not
+buried, but, instead, his body was carried to an
+open place, fully a half mile beyond the town, and
+placed on a hanging cot suspended from two trees.</p>
+
+<p>The boys witnessed the ceremonies, and could
+not understand the meaning of it.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do they bury one so soon after death, and
+keep the other for several days, and then suspend
+his body in the air?" asked Tom.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_132" id="p_132">p. 132</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Professor, who attended both ceremonies,
+responded: "This action on their part has a great
+significance. In most savage countries there is
+no more noble thing than to die on the battlefield.
+Usually those who die in that way are not accorded
+a burial, generally, because, in case such a warrior
+belongs to a defeated party, his friends do not
+have the opportunity to inter the body.</p>
+
+<p>"Sir Samuel Baker, in his book, 'The Explorations
+on the White Nile,' relates an incident where
+he came to a village which had two graveyards, on
+opposite sides of the road. On one side were the
+scattered bones of the dead, and on the other side
+mounds to indicate burial plots.</p>
+
+<p>"On questioning the chief, he said: 'Yes; our
+honored dead have their bones exposed, as you
+see, but those who were of no use are put out of
+sight underground.'</p>
+
+<p>"So the object seemed to be to keep them where
+the people could see them?"</p>
+
+<p>"That appears to be the reason the chief gave to
+Baker. But there may be another reason for this
+custom, and I shall get Suros' views on that subject."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't there some religious meaning connected
+with it," asked Ralph.</p>
+
+<p>"I do not think so. Here is Suros; let us question
+him."</p>
+
+<p>As Suros approached the Professor said: "I
+notice that one has been put underground and the
+other not; why do they observe this difference?"</p>
+
+<p>"We cannot honor the dead by allowing them to
+go back to the earth."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_133" id="p_133">p. 133</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Why will it do any good to honor the dead?"</p>
+
+<p>"If we did not honor them, no one would want to
+be great. No one would like to be a great warrior."</p>
+
+<p>"Is that the only reward a man has, to be honored
+after he is dead?"</p>
+
+<p>"What other reward has a man?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you not think man will live hereafter?"</p>
+
+<p>"When? After he dies?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; how can man live after he dies, and his
+body is given to the winds or to the earth?"</p>
+
+<p>"The white man believes he will live again?"</p>
+
+<p>"Does the white man believe the yak will live
+again?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"Well the yak is stronger than a man, and if
+the yak cannot live again, then how can man, who
+is not so strong, expect to do so?"</p>
+
+<p>This was a bit of philosophy which sounded curiously
+to the boys, and the Professor, noticing it,
+said: "Singularly, this is the same answer which
+Sir Samuel Baker obtained from certain African
+tribes, when he questioned them in like manner."</p>
+
+<p>But the Professor was interested in Suros' statement
+that they would not permit the body of the
+honored dead to go back to the earth, and he continued:</p>
+
+<p>"You said that you did not want the honored
+dead to go back to the earth. When you give his
+body to the air, does it not go back to the earth?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; the earth and the air are entirely different,
+The Great Spirit is in the air; not in the earth."</p>
+
+<p>"Then you give him to the Great Spirit?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_134" id="p_134">p. 134</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Yes; the Great Spirit takes his body."</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you believe that man has a spirit also?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; because we have never seen it."</p>
+
+<p>"But you have never seen the Great Spirit, and
+yet you say there is one."</p>
+
+<p>"We have seen the Great Spirit. He comes when
+it rains, and we can see him and hear him. We can
+feel the wind that he blows, and we can see the
+great light which he makes every day, and the
+smaller lights at his villages every night."</p>
+
+<p>Two things were thus impressed on the boys&mdash;namely,
+that they considered the air entirely distinct
+from the earth, and that the Great Spirit
+made the thunder and lightning, and that the sun
+was the Spirit's light by day, and the moon and
+stars the lights of his villages by night.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding Suros' limited knowledge, it
+must be said that in his further talk with the Professor
+he showed himself to be possessed of qualities
+which placed him far above the common run
+of the natives. When he was asked why honor
+was such a prize to them, he answered:</p>
+
+<p>"Our good men are happy to know that they
+are so placed that the Great Spirit can take them.
+What greater happiness is there for him?"</p>
+
+<p>"Don't you believe that trying to make your people
+happy and contented will please the Great
+Spirit?"</p>
+
+<p>"We do not know that. We do not know why
+the Great Spirit should want the bodies of our
+great warriors and good men. We cannot understand
+it."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_135" id="p_135">p. 135</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"The white man believes that if you do good to
+your fellow-man it will please the Great Spirit."</p>
+
+<p>"That may be; but I do not see why. There is
+no reason why he should care how I treat my people.
+That is not what he is up there for. What
+good will it do him? How will it help him? I do
+not believe many of the things I have been told
+by the wise men, and I have never sacrificed the
+captives I have taken, although my father before
+me did. I try to make my people happy, because
+when I see the Great Spirit giving us the day and
+the bright light and the rain, so that the things
+about us may grow, it seems to me that he is trying
+to be good to us, and I believe that is what we
+should do to each other."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_136" id="p_136">p. 136</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2>
+
+<h3>EXPEDITION TO SUBDUE THE ILLYAS</h3>
+
+
+<p>The occupation of the little houses by the families
+of the natives gave the boys the first close
+view of the people in their home lives. They
+were exceedingly primitive. The leaf of the plantain
+tree was the greatest boon to these people,
+and the women were engaged most of the time
+in removing the beautiful fiber and in laboriously
+weaving cloth from the strands.</p>
+
+<p>They were exceedingly deft in this, and it is
+singular how quickly they grasped the idea of
+the loom, as a means to make a better article.
+The loom used by them was a very crude affair,
+and an idea may be gained of its form by the
+accompanying illustration, which shows the fork
+of a tree branch (A), which serves to hold the
+ends of the warp threads (B). To weave the
+goods, the woof thread (C) is threaded back and
+forth, and as they had no needles for the purpose,
+a thorn was used.</p>
+
+<p>This thorn had no eye, but its large end was
+split, and the end of the thread held in the cleft
+thus made. Every family had this primitive
+loom, and the whole time, outside of their other
+household duties, was given to the weaving
+process.</p>
+
+<p>The size of each woven piece was about twelve
+by fifteen inches, and the different sections were
+afterwards sewn together. When they saw the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_137" id="p_137">p. 137</a></span>
+more modern looms at work it interested them
+intensely, and the Professor, noticing their eagerness
+and natural talents in this direction, concluded
+that this was a good field to encourage
+the industry.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 346px;">
+<a id="illus-137" name="illus-137" />
+<a href="#p_137">
+<img src="images/illus-fig14-p137.png" width="346" height="167"
+alt="Fig. 14. Primitive Weaving Frame." title="Fig. 14. Primitive Weaving Frame." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 14. <span class="u">Primitive</span> <span class="u">Weaving</span> <span class="u">Frame</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Most of the looms made goods thirty inches
+wide, and it was not long before several of the
+women were instructed in the art of using the
+looms. Like all of the low order of people, they
+were extremely fond of colors, and that is one
+of the things which attracted them to the fabrics
+which had been previously made and exhibited.
+At the end of the week they were paid for their
+work, the same as the others who were employed.
+The Professor now considered it time to make a
+change in the system of providing supplies. Under
+the direction of Will, a store was set up, which
+had on hand a supply of vegetables and game.
+As many of the warriors were away, and the
+others were generally employed in the workshop
+and fields, some systematic effort had to be made
+to gather food supplies and hunt.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_138" id="p_138">p. 138</a></span></p>
+
+<p>By offering certain sums for such articles the
+Professor induced individual effort in that direction.
+The provender thus provided was placed on
+sale in the store, and by every art the heads of
+families were encouraged to purchase those things
+and take them home for consumption there.</p>
+
+<p>Gradually, the workers were made to understand
+that a certain sum would be expected in return
+for their board, so that, in course of time,
+each one became accustomed to know the values
+of certain things all of which were measured by
+the coins now in circulation.</p>
+
+<p>The kitchen utensils were very limited indeed.
+They had no metal vessels of any kind. Any article
+of that kind was worth a fortune, and it was
+only the chiefs who had such things, and they
+were obtained from the wrecks of vessels which
+had reached them from time to time.</p>
+
+<p>Under the direction of the Professor, considerable
+time was given to the bringing in of ores,
+particularly iron, and the process of recovering
+the metals from the ores was undertaken by a
+considerable part of the force.</p>
+
+<p>Charcoal and coke were turned out, as a preliminary
+to the smelting of the ores, and as fast
+as the metal was in shape, cooking vessels of various
+sizes were manufactured, and these were
+placed on sale at the store. It was thus possible
+for each family to acquire several articles of this
+kind, which heretofore had been considered the
+most valuable of all treasures.</p>
+
+<p>Such a thing as a chair or a table was unknown
+on the island. The beds were made of the native<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_139" id="p_139">p. 139</a></span>
+grasses, strewn on the floor. It will be understood,
+therefore, that the manner of furnishing
+the houses occupied by the whites was a marvel;
+and when the families of the various workers
+moved into their new possessions, it naturally
+dawned on them that chairs and tables, as well
+as properly arranged beds, should accompany
+such luxury.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor was at the homes of these people
+daily, suggesting ideas for comfort and convenience.
+One of the things which interested him
+most was the subject of cleanliness. People living
+in the manner to which they were accustomed,
+made the sanitary part of the domestic arrangement
+an exceedingly difficult problem.</p>
+
+<p>The necessity of cleanliness was impressed on
+them very forcibly when, later on, he was called
+to administer to many of the children, who were
+attacked by diseases, brought on directly by carelessness
+in thoroughly removing all dirt and decaying
+matter.</p>
+
+<p>To a certain degree the natives understood this,
+and the subject has been referred to previously,
+where they had the habit of anointing their bodies
+and those of the infants with various oils, which
+were obnoxious to insects and germs.</p>
+
+<p>That knowledge made the task of using disinfectants
+much easier to instill in their minds. It
+was impressed on them that properly caring for
+the home was a daily task, and must not be
+neglected.</p>
+
+<p>The women used combs made from the fins of
+fish. These were constructed in the following<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_140" id="p_140">p. 140</a></span>
+manner: The entire fin was removed, and the bony
+structure at the base of the teeth was bound between
+two strips of bamboo, and tied around by
+fibers, as shown. The whole was then placed in a
+vessel containing boiling water. The result was
+that when taken out the meat of the fish, being
+glue-like, would act as a cement to hold the teeth
+in place.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 337px;">
+<a id="illus-140" name="illus-140" />
+<a href="#p_140">
+<img src="images/illus-fig15-p140.png" width="337" height="115"
+alt="Fig. 15. Comb from fin of Fish." title="Fig. 15. Comb from fin of Fish." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 15. <span class="u">Comb</span> <span class="u">from</span> <span class="u">fin</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Fish</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Such combs are anything but sanitary, as might
+be surmised, and the inhabitants were subject to
+pests arising from articles so made. Their only
+salvation was, in fact, the daily habit of using oil,
+and, from a sanitary point of view, there was nothing
+objectionable to this excepting the odor which
+naturally followed, due to the oil becoming rancid.
+The boys then began to make combs from a specie
+of bamboo, and from the ironwood tree.</p>
+
+<p>During one of the fishing trips the boys brought
+home an immense turtle. The Professor's eyes
+sparkled when he saw it.</p>
+
+<p>Will related their experience in capturing it.
+"Is it good to eat?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; all turtles and tortoises are good to eat."</p>
+
+<p>"What is the difference between the two?"</p>
+
+<p>"The turtle is a sea animal, and the tortoise<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_141" id="p_141">p. 141</a></span>
+a land and water animal. You must have caught
+this near the sea, as it is a specie of turtle called
+the Testudo."</p>
+
+<p>"What a beautiful mottled top it has!"</p>
+
+<p>"That is why it interested me so much," replied
+the Professor. "You now have something that is
+far better than the wood for making combs and
+other like articles."</p>
+
+<p>"Isn't that fine! Will it be difficult to make
+them up from this?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is the simplest thing in the world. The
+outer shell, which is all that is used, is put into
+boiling water, and this softens it so that it can
+be worked easily."</p>
+
+<p>"It seems singular that it is called a 'tortoise'
+shell if the land animals are called tortoises."</p>
+
+<p>"When the shell first became a matter of commerce,
+it was supposed that the turtle and the
+tortoise were the same, and the name tortoise
+being much older than turtle, the former appellation
+remained in designating the shell."</p>
+
+<p>The day and night of festivities of John and
+the warriors, at the Saboro village, was ended,
+and the column took up its march for the country
+of the Illyas.</p>
+
+<p>Several of the scouts, sent out two days before,
+returned during the night, and reported that there
+was a strong force directly ahead and that the
+lower villages were also sending up a body of
+men, but that the latter were still two days away.</p>
+
+<p>Calling Muro, John asked: "What is the
+nature of the country to the extreme south, or
+next to the sea?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_142" id="p_142">p. 142</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I have never been there, but it is elevated,
+and is a fine country. One of my men has been
+there, and he may be able to tell you something
+about it. I will call him."</p>
+
+<p>The warrior alluded to was tall, handsome
+and fully tattooed, as was the custom with the
+most distinguished of the Saboros.</p>
+
+<p>"Can you tell me," asked John, "what the nature
+of the country is south of the mountains, and
+near the sea?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is the country of the wise men of the Illyas.
+They will not allow others to go near there."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know why?"</p>
+
+<p>"It is said there are wonderful things there."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know whether there are any big holes
+in the ground there?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and in some of them they keep their
+captives."</p>
+
+<p>"Do they sacrifice their captives in those
+places?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; they take them from those places to the
+villages."</p>
+
+<p>"At what times do they make the sacrifices?"</p>
+
+<p>"When the night is dark."</p>
+
+<p>John understood from this that the sacrifices
+were during the period when there was no moon.</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you suppose that they wait for that
+time?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Because the Great Spirit out of anger has
+hidden the light and to appease him the sacrifices
+are offered at that period. This is one of
+the tales that the wise men give out as the excuse
+for the ceremony."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_143" id="p_143">p. 143</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John had another motive for these questions,
+as will appear later on. The main Illyas village
+was far to the north of the caves mentioned. Besides
+the main one were three others, all ranging
+along the western base of the mountain.</p>
+
+<p>"How long will it take us," asked John, "to
+reach the main village?"</p>
+
+<p>"Osaga knows about that, as he was near there,
+and was detained for several weeks before he
+escaped."</p>
+
+<p>"I had forgotten about that." He was, however,
+at this time, one of the scouts, and when he
+returned later in the evening, said:</p>
+
+<p>"We can reach there in two days, unless we
+should be met by the Illyas on the way. I do
+not think they will retreat without making a show
+of fight, as they will have all their warriors in
+the field, when they know we are marching against
+them."</p>
+
+<p>At the rate they were going, the main force of
+the enemy would be reached during the day, unless
+they should retreat. The opinion of both
+Uraso and Muro was that they would not permit
+too close approach to the village before offering
+fight.</p>
+
+<p>The entire route from Unity, and through the
+Saboro country, was one continual stretch of immense
+undulating plains, covered at intervals
+with magnificent forests, and it was evident that
+the soil was rich and capable of yielding any products
+in profusion.</p>
+
+<p>The weather, too, was magnificent. Indeed, it
+was at a time of the year when there were few<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_144" id="p_144">p. 144</a></span>
+storms, the moisture being sufficient to support
+the growing vegetation and keeping it a beautiful
+green. What a paradise this part of the island
+would be made, if it could be maintained in
+peace!</p>
+
+<p>The march was a continued and steady one, the
+warriors appearing happy and acted as though
+they were going to a festival, instead of to war.
+Early in the afternoon the advance scouts reported
+the first sight of the savages, but only
+detached bands, which indicated, however, that
+they were not far away.</p>
+
+<p>Several hours before they had entered the Illyas'
+country. There was no strict dividing line
+between the different countries, but it appeared
+to be tacitly agreed that certain water courses,
+or other natural lines, marked the territorial limits
+of each.</p>
+
+<p>These divisions were so little understood, in
+fact, by either, that they caused frequent disputes.
+A party from one tribe in hunting would,
+incautiously, venture too far, and if the other
+party happened to be near, and in sufficient force,
+would attack on the plea that the territory had
+been invaded.</p>
+
+<p>This was a matter which the present campaign
+would settle, because the Professor saw the necessity
+of accurately prescribing the limits held by
+each tribe.</p>
+
+<p>It was five o'clock in the evening before reports
+came in that the main body of the enemy was
+in sight. John went forward with Uraso and
+Muro, fully a mile beyond the main force, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_145" id="p_145">p. 145</a></span>
+on the way selected a good camping spot, leaving
+several there to order the main body to encamp
+when they arrived.</p>
+
+<p>With the scouts now returning, and which were
+picked up, a fairly adequate idea was obtained
+as to the number, which was variously estimated
+at two hundred and fifty, which did not take into
+consideration the warriors from the other villages,
+because they now had knowledge of at least
+one party from the south, on the way to reinforce
+the Illyas.</p>
+
+<p>John gave strict orders that no one should
+fire a gun during the night, and that a double
+line of guards should be maintained. The course
+pursued during the campaign was as follows:
+Thirty pickets were selected for the watch, five
+from each tribe. These formed fifteen posts, two
+warriors being at each post, and it was arranged
+that the two should be of different tribes, and as
+all were in supporting distance of each other, in
+case of an alarm, one of the two watchers would
+thus be in a position to quickly alarm the camp.</p>
+
+<p>An advance set of pickets was also thrown out,
+under the personal command of Muro, to watch
+the enemies' camp. Fortunately, there was no
+alarm during the night. Early in the morning
+the forces were put in line for approaching the
+Illyas' camp.</p>
+
+<p>When the first advance came within sight of
+their camp, the utmost consternation and confusion
+resulted, showing how carefully John had
+concealed their movements.</p>
+
+<p>Muro's scouts had the fortune to capture one<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_146" id="p_146">p. 146</a></span>
+of the Illyas, who was evidently one of the hunters,
+and the captive was brought in at the time
+when some of his own men had advanced uncautiously
+too far.</p>
+
+<p>He was brought before John at once, who addressed
+him as follows:</p>
+
+<p>"Why have your people started out on the warpath
+against us?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because you killed our warriors in the last
+battle."</p>
+
+<p>It is singular how the natives in all their interviews
+of like nature, always found it convenient
+to refer to the last and most immediate act as
+a particular reason for their enmity. In this respect
+they were veritable children.</p>
+
+<p>They might have been, as they were in this
+case, the original aggressors, but if an attempt is
+made to repay them the original cause of the strife
+is forgotten, and the last act only is considered.
+John knew it would be of no use to argue the
+matter with him.</p>
+
+<p>"You may go back to your chief and tell him
+that we have come to get the captives he has.
+You must tell him that we have no desire to injure
+him or his people. Tell him that all the tribes
+are now united, and that if he does not give up
+the white people and all others, we will take him
+and his villages, and give his lands to the other
+tribes.</p>
+
+<p>"You must further tell him that we must have
+his answer at once, and if he does not answer by
+the time the sun is above us (noon), we will consider
+him our enemy, and shall attack him."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_147" id="p_147">p. 147</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The captive received full instructions from
+Uraso, who warned him that if he failed to convey
+this information in the manner given it would
+go hard with him.</p>
+
+<p>John went forward with the prisoner, and he
+was released within sight of the Illyas' camp.
+The enemy was at that time in great commotion,
+as they were, from all indications, preparing for
+defense.</p>
+
+<p>They occupied a naturally strong position. The
+camp was on the western side of a hill and at the
+bottom was a small stream.</p>
+
+<p>Directly behind the camp was a heavy forest,
+which, in case of retreat, would afford them shelter.
+There was a bend in the river, where the
+camp was located, so that the position was impregnable
+as against the native weapons.</p>
+
+<p>The Illyas were not counting on meeting a foe
+armed with guns like the allies possessed. They
+did not conceive how their enemies could possibly
+make a sufficient number of guns to count against
+their numbers and their skill.</p>
+
+<p>In the talks which John had with Uraso he
+learned the history of this peculiar tribe. Originally
+the tribe had practical sway over the entire
+island. They were bitter and vindictive, and
+this intense feeling was that which acted against
+them in the end.</p>
+
+<p>The result was that in times past a constant
+tribal warfare was in evidence among the heads
+of the leading families. The Kurabus and the
+Tuolos were originally Illyas, or offshoots from
+this great tribe. This was also shown by the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_148" id="p_148">p. 148</a></span>
+characteristics of those three tribes, and by their
+dress as well as language.</p>
+
+<p>John had noticed that the Berees were the
+whitest people on the island, and that the Osagas
+and Saboros were much lighter in color than the
+other tribes. Uraso confirmed Suros' statement
+to the Professor, that there was white blood in
+the veins of many of the people of these three
+tribes, brought about by castaways who had been
+adopted by the people in earlier times.</p>
+
+<p>The Illyas kept themselves aloof from the
+others, excepting the Tuolos and Kurabus, and
+these three tribes were the only ones who still
+adhered to the custom of offering up captives as
+sacrifices.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_149" id="p_149">p. 149</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE PERILOUS TRIP OF THE WAGON</h3>
+
+
+<p>Affairs at Unity were moving along at marvelous
+speed. Suros, chief of the Berees, announced
+to the Professor that he did not intend to return
+to his country, but would send for his family and
+the families of all his chiefs. This was, indeed, a
+pleasant surprise for the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>Oma, of the Brabos, was the next to fall into line,
+and we have already stated that such was Muro's
+intention. The bringing together of all these interests,
+to form one common family, was really
+the intention of the Professor, and it was now
+being carried out without any suggestion on his
+part.</p>
+
+<p>Each day brought to the village accessions from
+some of the tribes, mainly the women and children
+of those who were employed, or who were with
+John's forces.</p>
+
+<p>Four days after John's departure the Professor
+saw one of the Tuolos approaching, carrying
+an infant, with his wife and two other children.
+The Professor went out to meet them, calling
+Will, as he saw they were in a famished condition.
+It was the native referred to previously,
+who had begged permission to bring his family
+to Unity.</p>
+
+<p>Several of the little cottages had been completed,
+and the surprise of the Tuolo and his wife<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_150" id="p_150">p. 150</a></span>
+was complete when he led them to one of these
+homes, and installed them in it.</p>
+
+<p>Food was brought, and the native cooks ordered
+to prepare it for them at once. The act so astonished
+the Tuolo chief, Marmo, that he could
+not express himself. For a day he sat pondering.
+The Professor noticed the act, but he said
+nothing. The next morning Marmo called, and
+said:</p>
+
+<p>"I can see why the White Chief told me it was
+well to act so the people would not want another
+chief."</p>
+
+<p>"But I am not acting in this way so that the
+people will want to keep me as their chief."</p>
+
+<p>This reply puzzled him.</p>
+
+<p>"But why do you treat my people in this way?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because he is a man just like myself. I have
+no right to treat him in any other way."</p>
+
+<p>"But he is only a ravoo (common) man."</p>
+
+<p>"Why is he only a common man?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because he is not a warrior, nor were his
+people warriors before him."</p>
+
+<p>"But he is a man, the same as you and I are.
+Because he is not a warrior, or was not born of
+some one who was a warrior, or if he does not
+belong to the family of a chief, makes no difference
+to the white man. His children may become
+chiefs, or great men, and if we show them that
+they may become like we are, it will make all of
+them better, and it will not injure us."</p>
+
+<p>This philosophy was too deep for the chieftain.
+He could not comprehend it, nor could he find<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_151" id="p_151">p. 151</a></span>
+words to express his opinions of the new light
+which it gave him.</p>
+
+<p>"Is that why you teach the people to make so
+many things?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; that is for an entirely different reason.
+We teach people to make these things so they
+may be able to help themselves and make their
+wives and children happy. We try to teach them
+that it is wrong to be idle. To let them know
+that there is a better way to live than by fighting
+each other or injuring their neighbors."</p>
+
+<p>"But why do you act so kindly to one of my
+people when we tried to kill you?"</p>
+
+<p>"That makes no difference to us now. You
+acted that way because you did not know any better.
+You would not try to injure us now, would
+you? Do you think that man would be my enemy?
+When he tells his friends what I have done, will
+they be my enemy?"</p>
+
+<p>"These things are all so new to me. There will
+be no more Tuolos, or Osagas, or Berees."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; there will be the same tribes always. In
+the white man's country there are still the same
+tribes in the different countries. They love to
+think of their own country and their own people,
+even though they may live with the other tribes,
+and when a man goes from one tribe to live with
+another, the people protect him just the same as
+though he was one of them."</p>
+
+<p>The Professor was not yet through with his
+lesson, and suggested that Marmo should accompany
+him. They wandered through the town, and
+called at the cottage of the newly arrived Tuolo.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_152" id="p_152">p. 152</a></span>
+The children were playing about, and the wife
+was supremely happy, but awed when the Professor
+and chief appeared.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor took up the little one and affectionately
+caressed it, to the astonishment of the
+mother. She knew the Chief Marmo would not
+condescend to such an act; but to think that the
+Great White Chief should do such a thing was
+something beyond her comprehension.</p>
+
+<p>Marmo looked on in amazement. It was another
+thing which was unlike any teaching or belief
+that he had ever known, that it made a powerful
+impression on him.</p>
+
+<p>This is but one incident in the history of the
+village which tended to instill in the minds of the
+people, the cardinal duty of man to man. It was
+a practical example, and the knowledge of it went
+from family to family. It became one of the topics
+of conversation among the men. Equal and
+exact justice was meted out to each, irrespective
+of what their tribal relations might be.</p>
+
+<p>In the absence of Harry and George, Ralph and
+Jim had charge of the factory, and were busy
+each day turning out plows and other agricultural
+implements. At the suggestion of the Professor,
+eight more of the steers had been trained to work,
+and he gathered together a dozen of the best men,
+and gave instructions to secure as many of the
+yaks as could be found.</p>
+
+<p>He offered certain sums for this purpose. It
+was known that, to the west, and north of the great
+forest, were large herds running wild. The proposal
+stirred them to activity. The party pre<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_153" id="p_153">p. 153</a></span>pared
+for the hunt, and in this were assisted by
+Blakely, who gave them many timely hints as to
+the best method to lasso them.</p>
+
+<p>The first expedition started the day after John
+left, and within a week the first installment of
+ten animals arrived, and they had returned for
+more. These were tamed and broken to work.
+The scenes about the town were assuming the
+proportions of a vast beehive of the most earnest
+and enthusiastic workers that it was possible to
+imagine.</p>
+
+<p>Fields were now laid out, and certain money
+offers made for the production of seeds of various
+kinds. Coffee-tree shoots, nutmeg plants,
+cocoa cuttings, and many other like species of
+vegetation were apportioned to the newly plowed
+fields.</p>
+
+<p>Every kind of vegetable known to the island,
+and which now grew in a wild, but scattered, state,
+was sought for, and distributed in small patches
+over the plowed area. Fruit trees were set out,
+and these latter, with a view to make them the
+home sites which were to be the next lines to be
+developed.</p>
+
+<p>It will thus be seen that there was enough to
+tax the energies of Blakely and the Professor,
+to keep the laborers employed, and prevent any
+drones from getting into the hive.</p>
+
+<p>When the captive Illyas which John had sent
+with the ultimatum did not return, nor did the
+enemy show any symptoms of complying when
+the sun neared midday, it was concluded that the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_154" id="p_154">p. 154</a></span>
+only plan to pursue would be a quick and a sharp
+assault.</p>
+
+<p>The moment the sun reached its height, John
+ordered Muro to take one hundred of the men by
+a detour to the right, and Uraso with a like number
+to the left.</p>
+
+<p>"Cross the stream and close up behind them
+in the woods. I will make the attack, and you
+remain at a distance. If they should attempt to
+retreat I will follow them up rapidly. We must,
+if possible, force their surrender."</p>
+
+<p>The two forces were off promptly, and within
+a half hour John judged that they must be in
+position. The Illyas were still on the hill in
+force, apparently not suspecting that two flanking
+columns were in their rear.</p>
+
+<p>As John gave the order to march forward
+there was the crack of a half dozen guns to their
+right, in the position occupied by Muro's force.
+This startled the Illyas, as it did John. The latter
+interpreted this at once. It was, undoubtedly,
+a reinforcing band which Muro had intercepted.</p>
+
+<p>This was indeed the case. The knowledge of
+this force coming to their assistance, was probably
+the reason why the Illyas were so defiant.
+Muro, at the head of fifty of his men, charged
+the band, to prevent them from uniting, but at
+the same time it brought down on him a large portion
+of the Illyas. Uraso, suspecting the truth,
+and knowing that the excited movement of the
+Illyas indicated a rush to assist, broke through
+the woods and thus struck them on their left
+flank, which so surprised them that they broke<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_155" id="p_155">p. 155</a></span>
+in confusion and, fled before John and the main
+body could come up.</p>
+
+<p>The entire Illyas force was now in confusion.
+John was in possession of their camp, and Uraso's
+warriors were hurrying through the dense woods,
+so that between the three forces, a number were
+captured in the effort to escape to the east and
+south.</p>
+
+<p>Within an hour, not an Illyas was in sight, except
+those captured, but the main force, unfortunately,
+escaped. The wagons were brought up,
+and now came the problem, how to get them
+through the forest, without making too much of
+a detour.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso suggested that Stut should take a sufficient
+number of warriors to afford protection, and
+descend the stream to a point below where the
+country was clearer, and then trail to the east
+and meet the main column five miles west of the
+main village.</p>
+
+<p>The pursuers, under the leadership of John,
+followed the trails of the disorganized Illyas, in
+the hope that they would be able to be close on
+their heels when they emerged from the forest four
+miles beyond.</p>
+
+<p>They found this forest maze the most remarkable
+of any wooded area on the island. The trees
+were not only immense, but the undergrowth exceedingly
+dense. It is not often the case that the
+two growths are found together, and it would
+have been impossible to get the wagons through
+the mass.</p>
+
+<p>This forest was in reality the great barrier,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_156" id="p_156">p. 156</a></span>
+which kept the Illyas in such a protected position
+against the inroads of the other tribes, even
+though they should have combined, and they
+counted on this bulwark to protect them in the
+present case.</p>
+
+<p>It took the pursuing force over three hours to
+push its way through, and they had the satisfaction
+of seeing the main body of the Illyas beyond,
+and brought together in a compact organization.
+As soon as the opening was reached, they halted
+for the noon meal, and instructions were given
+to follow up as hurriedly as possible.</p>
+
+<p>"We should move our force to the south, and
+attack them from that side," said John, "for the
+reason that their only hope of reinforcements is
+from that quarter."</p>
+
+<p>The villages were lying along the base of the
+mountain range, the general altitude of the great
+plain being fully two hundred feet higher than
+the other level portions of the island. The mountains
+to the east, while not high as mountains go,
+were by far the greatest of any on the island, and
+John was anxious to know their character, for reasons
+heretofore explained.</p>
+
+<p>In two hours more they would reach the vicinity
+of the main village, and the great struggle for
+the mastery would begin. In the distance could
+be seen the main portion of the town, and it was
+far more imposing than any other in the island.
+There was more or less a mystery about the place.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso said: "The place we are now going to
+is the oldest village in the country. Many, many
+years ago it was a great village, and had big<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_157" id="p_157">p. 157</a></span>
+houses. They were built by some people that no
+one knows, but they were not built to live in."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know what they are like?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>"Nobody can tell, because they do not keep captives
+there, and only take them to that place for
+the sacrifices."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know that the place has the wonderful
+buildings you speak of?"</p>
+
+<p>"This was learned from the only captive who
+ever escaped from them at the place. I was kept
+at the village to the north, and it was from that
+place I escaped."</p>
+
+<p>As the village was neared the sight of the buildings
+astonished John. While not massive, they
+were of a type entirely distinct from the native
+huts. It was built on an elevated plateau and
+amidst most magnificent trees, the most prominent
+of which were the great redwoods.</p>
+
+<p>Some little indications of ground cultivation
+were found, as they passed the deserted huts on
+their way. Small patches of yam and cassava
+were the principal vegetables noticed.</p>
+
+<p>It was nearly four o'clock before they crossed
+a stream of water, flowing to the south, and beyond
+which a good glimpse of the village could
+be seen. John surveyed the scene and was astonished
+at the character of the spot, since it had
+evidently been chosen by design, and for some
+particular reason.</p>
+
+<p>Its location at an altitude which commanded a
+view to the north and south, and also afforded
+a view to the west, betokened some reason not
+compatible with the savage idea of a town. All<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_158" id="p_158">p. 158</a></span>
+villages thus far found were close to streams,
+and were located apparently by chance, but here
+was a town which was more like a civilized place,
+since it was so located that it afforded the finest
+opportunity for drainage.</p>
+
+<p>But another surprise was in store for John.
+"What are those peculiarly formed hills which run
+to the right and left?" he asked.</p>
+
+<p>Muro had noticed them, but was unable to answer.</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard," said Uraso, "that they have
+earth-houses to protect the town, but I do not
+know how they are made."</p>
+
+<p>This information was sufficient to inform John
+that the town was actually provided with a chain
+of defensive works, and this greatly added to
+his astonishment.</p>
+
+<p>"We are certainly getting at the heart of this
+mystery," he said, musingly, as Muro came up.
+The latter informed him that they had captured
+two Illyas who were making their way to the
+village from the south, and within ten minutes
+they were brought before him.</p>
+
+<p>John questioned them, but they refused to impart
+any information. The direction from which
+they had come occasioned some uneasiness because
+the wagons were en route from that quarter,
+and they might be runners to the main village
+for the purpose of informing the chief of the fact,
+or, they might be from one of the villages announcing
+reinforcements.</p>
+
+<p>As night approached, and no word was had
+from the force with the wagon, John directed Muro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_159" id="p_159">p. 159</a></span>
+to take twenty-five of the best men, and go directly
+south in search of the convoy.</p>
+
+<p>George and Harry accompanied the teams, and
+when they left the main column the forest was
+skirted in their trip southwardly. It was known
+that the forest was less dense in that direction,
+and after traveling thus for nearly four hours,
+the men delegated to beat the forest to the east,
+announced that they might safely turn to the east,
+which meant two hours more of struggling through
+a country which, without the warriors to aid
+them, would have been impossible.</p>
+
+<p>Most of the men were ahead of the team with
+their bolos, cutting down and dragging away the
+trees and bushes, and thus forming a trail which
+would allow the wagons to pass. It was past
+six in the evening when the river was reached.</p>
+
+<p>In order to gain as much time as possible, Stut
+and the boys concluded to push across, and move
+northwardly along the eastern bank, as it was
+evident the eastern shore afforded the best route.</p>
+
+<p>Before the plan could be put into execution a
+body of Illyas appeared in force before them.
+They hastily drew back, and after consulting, concluded
+to proceed north along the western bank.</p>
+
+<p>They had not proceeded a quarter of a mile
+before they ran into an ambush of Illyas, and
+two men were struck by arrows. Stut gave the
+order to fire, and the bush was cleared. Immediately
+a force appeared in their rear, but Stut
+advised an advance, as such a course would bring
+them closer to relief.</p>
+
+<p>Another mile was traversed, but the first les<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_160" id="p_160">p. 160</a></span>son
+was heeded, and the enemy did not come close
+enough to enable the gunmen to get an opportunity
+to shoot. But now an unforeseen obstacle
+presented itself. They had been marching along
+the more or less elevated bank of the stream, and
+directly in their path was a stream flowing into
+the main one, with steep and rocky sides, so precipitous
+that it would be impossible for the
+wagons to cross them, heavily laden as they were.</p>
+
+<p>The Illyas appeared in force behind them, and
+apparently none were to the front, thus indicating
+that they did not believe the wagons could cross,
+and in this they were right. It was growing
+dark. Harry suggested that they make camp and
+arrange for protection during the night.</p>
+
+<p>This was done, the two wagons being placed
+thirty feet apart, and the fort sections were used
+to connect the rear ends of the wagons, so that
+a U-shaped fort was thus provided, the open end
+of the fort being toward the river, which was the
+side they had no fear of, so far as the savages
+were concerned.</p>
+
+<p>While these preparations were going on no attempt
+was made to attack them. "They are
+either waiting for morning, or for reinforcements,"
+was Stut's comment.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think it would be possible to get a
+messenger through to John?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but it would be better to send two."</p>
+
+<p>"We can easily spare them," responded Harry,
+"and you had better select them at once."</p>
+
+<p>Two intelligent warriors, one a Saboro, well
+known to Stut, and an Osaga, were delegated to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_161" id="p_161">p. 161</a></span>
+run the risk, and they started to the north along
+the river.</p>
+
+<p>The night was intensely dark, but notwithstanding
+this Muro pushed forward to the south, and
+the utmost speed, under those conditions, was
+not more than a mile or mile and a half an hour.</p>
+
+<p>It was known that reinforcements were on the
+way from the south. They might meet such a
+force, and the utmost caution was necessary. It
+was fortunate that the two messengers from Stut
+heard Muro's warriors, and for the purpose of
+determining who they were, approached closely,
+and made themselves known.</p>
+
+<p>This intelligence was sufficient for Muro to act.
+The scouts guided them back, and as it was beginning
+to grow light the cracks of several guns were
+sufficient to indicate the direction of the wagons,
+and the fact that the attack had begun.</p>
+
+<p>Muro was a tactician. The scouts stated the
+situation, with the impassible ravine to the north,
+and the attackers to the south of their position.
+His force was on the eastern side of the river, and
+moving back a sufficient distance to prevent knowledge
+of his presence from reaching the Illyas,
+went to the south, and crossed the river in their
+rear.</p>
+
+<p>The attack of the savages was in force against
+the wagon, and the spirited cracks of the guns
+showed Muro that he must make haste if he would
+have a part in it.</p>
+
+<p>Harry and George were seasoned fighters, but
+in this case they were entirely in the dark as to
+the numbers which opposed them. This lack of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_162" id="p_162">p. 162</a></span>
+knowledge was the only thing which gave them
+any concern. They knew that sooner or later
+John would rescue them in force. The problem
+was to resist and gain time.</p>
+
+<p>The Illyas had heretofore proven themselves
+wonderful fighters and remarkably tenacious.
+This attack was a more determined one than they
+had ever witnessed. There was no cessation in
+their forward advance, and they were most skillful
+in seeking cover.</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other, but neither spoke
+his fears, if he had any; to say the least, it was
+the most businesslike of anything which they had
+witnessed.</p>
+
+<p>Suddenly, they heard the noise of a volley behind
+the Illyas, and the latter made a concerted
+rush for the underbrush to the west, as Muro,
+with his men, sprang forward through the clearing;
+and the boys, with Stut, sprang from the
+wagon and started the cheering, followed by the
+warriors.</p>
+
+<p>Muro rushed up and embraced Stut and the
+boys. A hurried breakfast was prepared, and the
+fort sections replaced. There was no time to lose.
+They must get back to John and be prepared to
+take part in the capture of the great village of
+the Illyas.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_163" id="p_163">p. 163</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE REMARKABLE DISCOVERY AT BLAKELY'S MOUNTAIN HOME</h3>
+
+
+<p>It was the custom of the Professor to take the
+boys each week for an outing in some direction
+from Unity. The most attractive part was toward
+the great forest, west of the large river. Several
+boats had been made, which were used principally
+for fishing, and one of these was usually taken.
+They would then sail down the little branch
+stream, on which the town was located, and cross
+the large river.</p>
+
+<p>During the entire time they were at the village
+Blakely had not gone across the river, although
+he frequently indicated a desire to do so, particularly
+to look up the location of the home on
+the hill at the forest's edge, where he found seclusion
+from the savages for nearly nine months.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor and the boys insisted on his accompanying
+them on this occasion, and having
+given instructions to the men, they manned the
+large boat and were soon on the western shore of
+the river.</p>
+
+<p>The large quantity of driftwood, which was in
+evidence here, as elsewhere, attracted the attention
+of Jim, as he turned to the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"I have often wondered why it is that there is
+so much driftwood on the western shore of this
+stream, and hardly any on the eastern shore."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_164" id="p_164">p. 164</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Blakely, his attention having been drawn to it,
+remarked that he had found this to be the case
+in a number of streams, not only on the island, but
+elsewhere.</p>
+
+<p>"That is a singular thing," replied the Professor.
+"It is accounted for by the rotation of the
+earth, which is from west to east. The rotation
+of the earth in that direction also accounts for the
+prevailing trade winds which are from the east to
+the west."</p>
+
+<p>"In what way should the rotation of the earth
+cause the drift to move westwardly?"</p>
+
+<p>"There are two forces which act on a free object
+on the surface of the earth, namely, centrifugal
+and centripetal. The first named is that action
+which tends to throw an object outwardly, like
+dirt flying out from a rapidly moving wheel; and
+the latter action is that which draws inwardly.
+Thus the spokes might be likened to centripetal
+force. The attraction of gravitation in the earth
+is the centripetal force, and its rotation produces
+the centrifugal force. When an object, like a
+plumb bob, or an article floating on the water is
+free to move, it is found to lag behind the movement
+of the earth surface, this retarding movement
+being sufficient to cause it to creep to the
+west, with the result you have noticed."</p>
+
+<p>The hill pointed out by Blakely was fully three
+miles west of the river. The four boys, Ralph,
+Tom, Jim and Will, with Blakely and the Professor,
+all armed with guns, made a party strong
+enough to enable them to successfully withstand
+the attack of any animal, and it was proposed to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_165" id="p_165">p. 165</a></span>
+make a trip through a portion of the forest, so as
+to get some idea of its character.</p>
+
+<p>To carry out this plan, their course was directed
+to the west, and within an hour and a half were
+well in the thick of the wood. The first thing that
+attracted the attention of all were the magnificent
+trees, among them a species of pitch pine, together
+with immense redwood trees, and numerous oak
+species abounded.</p>
+
+<p>Before they had penetrated a mile the first animals
+were seen. They had never been hunted, as
+the natives kept away from the forest fastnesses,
+and it was singular to see the familiarity of the
+animals. An immense panther, or tree leopard,
+fascinated the boys, and they maneuvered to get
+close enough for a shot. He was very wary, however,
+and Blakely and the Professor kept in the
+background while the boys stalked him from tree
+to tree, and finally Ralph had him in range and
+fired.</p>
+
+<p>He crashed down but alighted on his feet, and
+without waiting for any explanations bounded
+over to the spot where Ralph and Will were
+crouched behind a fallen tree. Will saw the movement
+and called to Jim and Tom, and the latter,
+taking careful aim, fired, without, apparently,
+checking the animal.</p>
+
+<p>With a powerful spring he landed on the tree,
+not five feet from the boys, and Jim shot the moment
+he landed, the shot taking effect in the left
+eye, and he dropped his head and lay still, hanging
+over the fallen tree.</p>
+
+<p>This was exciting, while it lasted, and gave them<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_166" id="p_166">p. 166</a></span>
+something to talk about for the rest of the day.
+Blakely dragged the animal down, and Ralph and
+Will, trembling as they were, had their knives
+out when Blakely commenced to skin the panther.
+It was a fine trophy, made doubly valuable, as it
+had been their first attempt to secure big game.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 352px;">
+<a id="illus-166" name="illus-166" />
+<a href="#p_166">
+<img src="images/illus-fig16-p166.png" width="352" height="272"
+alt="Fig. 16. The Marmoset" title="Fig. 16. The Marmoset" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 16. The Marmoset</span></span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The boys regretted that Angel had not accompanied
+them, as they saw numerous orang-outan;
+and here for the first time they came across whole
+tribes of monkeys, particularly the marmoset, an
+interesting little creature. The most striking
+ones were the proboscis monkey, the face being
+not unlike that of an old man with an extremely
+long nose, with whiskers around the neck.</p>
+
+<p>Blakely and the Professor made many notes of
+the trees, and discussed the uses to which they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_167" id="p_167">p. 167</a></span>
+might be put, and the boys had their eyes open for
+the wonderful display of animal life on all sides.</p>
+
+<p>It was fully two o'clock before their steps were
+turned toward the north, so that the hill could be
+reached, and when they emerged from the forest,
+Blakely pointed out the spot and the best way to
+reach it. The boys went forward with a rush, and
+mounted the hill, but while they searched in every
+direction could not locate the rocky recess occupied
+by Blakely.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 340px;">
+<a id="illus-167" name="illus-167" />
+<a href="#p_167">
+<img src="images/illus-fig17-p167.png" width="340" height="363"
+alt="Fig. 17. Proboscis Monkey" title="Fig. 17. Proboscis Monkey" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption"><span class="smcap">Fig. 17. Proboscis Monkey</span></span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The latter came up smiling. "I told the Pro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_168" id="p_168">p. 168</a></span>fessor
+you would have some trouble in finding it.
+Look directly above you."</p>
+
+<p>About twenty feet from where they stood was
+a projecting rock, and to the left of it another,
+extending out at right angles.</p>
+
+<p>"But how are we going to reach it?" asked
+Ralph.</p>
+
+<p>"Go around farther to the right, and you will
+find a vine. I used that as a ladder."</p>
+
+<p>Around to the right the boys scampered, each
+trying to get there first. There was no vine in
+sight. Blakely was coming up, as the boys turned
+back, disappointed.</p>
+
+<p>"Not there?" he inquired. "It ran up this tree.
+What is this? Some one has cut it off and dragged
+it up to the shelf above; do you see it there?" and
+Blakely pointed to the vine stump, hidden by the
+grass and weeds.</p>
+
+<p>The boys saw the plain evidence of the cuts.</p>
+
+<p>"This is decidedly interesting," exclaimed
+Blakely, as he turned to the Professor. "This was
+done since I was here."</p>
+
+<p>The only way to reach the ledge was to climb
+the tree and try to drag the vine from the ledge,
+and Ralph volunteered to do this.</p>
+
+<p>It was not much of a task, and when the vine
+had been drawn down he moved out on the limb
+and easily stepped on the ledge of the nearest
+rock, and then drew over the vine so the boys could
+readily reach the main ledge.</p>
+
+<p>Blakely was the last to gain the top, and he led
+the way around the first projecting rock. The
+view from this point was a charming one.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_169" id="p_169">p. 169</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Look to the east," cried Ralph; "see Unity
+beyond; isn't this fine?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys now understood why this was a desirable
+place for Blakely. It appeared to be absolutely
+safe from either animals or man.</p>
+
+<p>"How did you ever happen to find this place?"
+asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"Simply by accident&mdash;the fact is, I stumbled on
+it. I mean that literally. You see there is only
+one point higher than this. That is directly above
+this ledge. I went up the hill from the forest
+side, and came out to the point, and, missing my
+footing, fell down to this ledge, and discovered that
+the only way I could get out was by the vine ladder."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that?" exclaimed Will, springing back,
+and pointing to an object in front.</p>
+
+<p>Blakely started forward like a shot, and moved
+around the main point from which Will came.
+The boys followed. Directly ahead, and on the
+ledge in front of the recess were two skeletons.
+The boys were shocked at the sight, and
+the Professor stopped and intently examined
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"Some one made this his home after I left
+it, that is sure. Here are things I never saw."</p>
+
+<p>"Was this your gun?" asked Jim, as he picked
+up a rusty weapon.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," replied Blakely, in great excitement.
+"But how did it get here? I had it with me when
+I was captured the first time."</p>
+
+<p>He looked at the Professor in amazement, and
+then began a minute search of the articles scat<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_170" id="p_170">p. 170</a></span>tered
+about, and lying in the little coves within
+the main recess. Here were found a sextant, several
+knives, some coins, a bunch of keys, a package
+of letters, written in German, a revolver, but
+no ammunition, various articles of clothing, all in
+the last stages of decay and eaten with holes by
+insects.</p>
+
+<p>But the condition of the skeletons caused the
+greatest speculation. They were lying near together,
+and there was no indication of a struggle
+between them. One was lying with the head resting
+on a mass of molding leaves, and this was
+drawn aside and examined.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 347px;">
+<a id="illus-170" name="illus-170" />
+<a href="#p_170">
+<img src="images/illus-fig18-p170.png" width="347" height="239"
+alt="Fig. 18. The Mysterious Message." title="Fig. 18. The Mysterious Message." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 18. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Mysterious</span> <span class="u">Message</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Here was the first real clue. A bit of paper,
+evidently a page from a scrap book, which showed
+faint traces of writing. Parts were entirely eaten
+away, and after a time the following words were
+deciphered:</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_171" id="p_171">p. 171</a></span></p>
+
+<table style="text-indent: 0;"
+border="0" width="450" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="fragment">
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr><td>
+<p style="font-size:114%;">
+"Escaped during the night&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;miles wes<br />
+tains&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;lyas have Rogers&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;right<br />
+faithful<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;(Signed)&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;roman"<br />
+</p>
+</td></tr></tbody>
+</table>
+
+<p>The German letters contained no information,
+excepting the name "Johan," to which they were
+addressed, and were signed, "Matilda," all dated
+during the year 1911.</p>
+
+<p>"One of these men was a white or Caucasian,
+and the other was, undoubtedly, an aborigine, as
+the skull formation clearly indicates. I am satisfied
+that this one was a native," remarked the Professor,
+after he had made an extended examination.</p>
+
+<p>"This letter may be an interesting one to decipher,"
+said Blakely, as he went over the contents
+again and again. "It seems to me that the part
+of the word 'lyas' has reference to the 'Illyas,' and
+'tains' is part of the word 'mountains.' Probably,
+it would read, if properly reconstructed, 'west of
+the mountains.'"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and the space between 'night' and 'miles'
+refers to the number of miles," added Ralph.</p>
+
+<p>"It is remarkable that we should find evidences,
+of the work of the Illyas at the extreme western
+part of the island, when they are living
+near the eastern border," remarked the Professor.</p>
+
+<p>"I take it," answered Blakely, "that this letter
+was transmitted to the man here, and was written
+by some one, and conveyed, in all probability,
+by this native."</p>
+
+<p>"That is a reasonable supposition. The word<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_172" id="p_172">p. 172</a></span>
+'faithful' may have reference to him," responded
+the Professor, after some reflection.</p>
+
+<p>"Well, we can do no more than give them a decent
+burial," said Blakely.</p>
+
+<p>"It will be a difficult task to do that, as we
+have no tools, and it would be necessary to carry
+the bones a distance in order to inter them. If
+the boys will gather up a quantity of stones we
+can make a covering for them against the wall,
+within one of the coves."</p>
+
+<p>This suggestion was carried out, and the bones
+deposited beneath a mound, and after gathering
+up the various articles they descended the vine
+ladder and made a hurried trip to the river.</p>
+
+<p>Unity was reached as it was growing dark to
+learn that two messengers from John had reached
+them during their absence, detailing the sighting
+of the Illyas' village, which was estimated to be
+five miles west of the mountains.</p>
+
+<p>It was singular how this information seemed to
+supply the missing word in the mysterious message
+found with the skeleton on the hill. The Professor
+at once made a copy of the letter, and forwarded
+it by messenger to John. In the letter he
+detailed the information of the finding of the message,
+and he had hopes that they might be able
+to find some traces of the people mentioned in the
+letter.</p>
+
+<p>While awaiting the return of Muro, John made
+a complete examination of the Illyas' village, encircling
+it to get its full position, and thus enable
+him to devise the best mode to attack, if it should
+be found necessary to do so.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_173" id="p_173">p. 173</a></span></p>
+
+<p>He was astounded to note the character of the
+buildings. They had been the work of white men,
+it was evident.</p>
+
+<p>Muro, with the boys, and the wagons came in
+sight before ten o'clock, to the intense relief of
+John. He suspected the cause of the delay.</p>
+
+<p>"We had a lively brush with them, for a while,"
+said Harry, "but we had no fear at any time."</p>
+
+<p>"Harry is right about that, but I want to tell
+you we have a different class of fighters to deal
+with than anything we have experienced so far,"
+added George. "Why our fire didn't seem to
+frighten them a bit, and they adopted the regular
+Indian plan of getting behind trees and brush."</p>
+
+<p>"What kind of a town is that!" asked Harry,
+as he took the first glimpse of the place through
+the trees.</p>
+
+<p>"Something different in that line, too, as well as
+in the fighting," answered John, as he smiled at
+the question.</p>
+
+<p>"How big a town is it?" asked George.</p>
+
+<p>"I judge, from its size, that there must be fully
+a thousand natives there, but they are keeping
+pretty close. Do you see the line of breastworks
+all around the place!"</p>
+
+<p>The boys were astonished at what they saw.
+No wonder the other tribes hesitated to attack
+them.</p>
+
+<p>The two warriors captured by Muro were
+brought before John, after he had made a survey
+of the place, and by the aid of Uraso one of them
+was instructed to carry information as to their
+intention to the Illyas.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_174" id="p_174">p. 174</a></span></p>
+
+<p>This was to the effect that in the event no reply
+was received before noon no other effort would
+be made to open communications. It was distinctly
+impressed on the warrior that the Illyas must
+give up all the captives, and that an agreement
+must be entered into by them not to leave their
+own boundaries in the future, and John also offered
+protection and a safe return of any messenger
+who might be sent back with the answer.</p>
+
+<p>The captive was released, and, bounding forward,
+was soon within the line of earthworks
+which surrounded the village. The message gave
+a full two hours for them to decide. There was
+not a sign of an Illyas until near the time limit,
+when the same one which conveyed their message
+was noticed approaching the line of the allies.</p>
+
+<p>He came directly to John, and conveyed this information:</p>
+
+<p>"The chiefs do not intend to do as the White
+Chief says. They are entitled to the captives, and
+intend to keep them. If the village is attacked the
+white chiefs and the tribes will be destroyed. We
+do not fear him and his fire weapons."</p>
+
+<p>John motioned to the warrior to depart. For a
+moment he looked at John in amazement. Judging
+the actions of the white man by the ethics of
+the savage, such a message would have meant his
+death. He glanced around stealthily.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso saw why he hesitated, and remarked to
+him: "You are free to go. No one will injure you,
+because the White Chief has given his word to
+protect you. He is not like the Illyas. He does
+not lie."</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_175" id="p_175">p. 175</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE SURPRISE AND CAPTURE OF THE ILLYAS' STRONGHOLD</h3>
+
+
+<p>John smiled, as he saw with what satisfaction
+Uraso gave him this parting shot. Still he hesitated.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso went up to him, and he started back.
+"You need not fear me because we will keep our
+word. Say to your chiefs that Uraso tells them
+they are fools. The Illyas cannot succeed. They
+will be crushed and their villages taken. Your
+village is surrounded, and you cannot get aid from
+your other villages. Go and tell them that we
+shall not again ask them to treat with us."</p>
+
+<p>This address assured him and he first marched
+along carefully, and soon made his way with celerity
+to the village. The Illyas were, unquestionably,
+as much surprised as the messenger at the
+treatment he had received. It was so unlike all
+former experiences.</p>
+
+<p>During John's investigations he had discovered
+that the approach to the village on the east side
+offered the best chance for a rush, as the character
+of the ground was better suited to go up close to
+the line of works, and from that point a better
+view was obtained of the interior of the village.</p>
+
+<p>A movement during the daytime would disclose
+his motives, and he therefore advised Uraso and
+Muro of his plans, and suggested that as they<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_176" id="p_176">p. 176</a></span>
+would be able to mass the troops better during
+the night, the attack should be delayed until early
+morning.</p>
+
+<p>"During the day we will make a great show of
+putting up a line of works to deceive them into the
+idea that we intend to attack from this side. During
+the early morning we will take three-fourths
+of the force and steal around to the east, and
+attack them with a rush."</p>
+
+<p>"But suppose they rush out in this direction?"
+asked Muro.</p>
+
+<p>"We must keep a sufficient force here to hold
+them in check, and, if necessary, to rush in from
+this quarter; and I would like to have you hold the
+ones left for that purpose."</p>
+
+<p>Muro was delighted at the position assigned
+him, and thought he saw the slightest bit of feeling
+on the part of Uraso; but this was soon quelled
+when John took Uraso aside and said: "I want
+you with me, as you know how to handle and direct
+the men."</p>
+
+<p>"I have no right to feel offended because you
+have given Muro this post. He is the best man."</p>
+
+<p>"He is no better than you, but you are better
+than he for the position required when the charge
+is made."</p>
+
+<p>This was, really, true. John knew the capacities
+of each. Muro was a better tactician, but Uraso
+had a much better hold on the affections of the
+warriors, and he was a fearless and intrepid
+fighter.</p>
+
+<p>The boys could not help admiring the fine situ<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_177" id="p_177">p. 177</a></span>ation
+of the village, and the imposing appearance
+of the town.</p>
+
+<p>"See that building facing this way? It has pillars
+different from the building to the left. Why
+do you suppose they made them unlike?" was
+George's query, as they sat in the wagon with
+John during the afternoon waiting for night to
+come.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose they wanted to put in the different
+kinds of architecture, simply as a freak, or for
+some other purpose that I have not yet settled
+in my mind. If I am not mistaken there are at
+least three different orders of architecture represented
+in the buildings. On the other side of the
+town you can see another building, somewhat
+smaller than the one to the left, which has still
+different columns."</p>
+
+<p>"I imagine the one fronting us is the main building.
+What order does that belong to?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is a Doric front. It had its origin in the
+log hut, which was called Dorus."</p>
+
+<p>"How many kinds of architecture are there?"</p>
+
+<p>"There are five distinct orders, as they are
+called."</p>
+
+<p>"What are those besides the Doric?"</p>
+
+<p>"The Ionic, the Corinthian, the Tuscan and the
+Composite."</p>
+
+<p>"What is that building to the left?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is distinctly Ionic."</p>
+
+<p>"I don't see much difference from the Doric,"
+remarked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"The distinction is very marked. The Ionic is<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_178" id="p_178">p. 178</a></span>
+proportioned to the dimensions of a man, and has
+the delicacy of the human figure."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; I can see that now. Has the proportion
+anything to do with the order?"</p>
+
+<p>"The Tuscan is distinguished by the fact that
+the column is usually made seven times the diameter
+of the lower part of the shaft in height."</p>
+
+<p>"But I notice that the ones shown in the two
+buildings don't appear to be very much different
+in proportions."</p>
+
+<p>"No, for the reason that the distinctive features
+between the Doric, Ionic and Corinthian pertain
+to the capitals. Notice how exceedingly simple the
+Doric is. I am sorry there are not other examples
+present, but I shall make some sketches to show
+the differences which are marked."</p>
+
+<p>"I have heard more about the Corinthian than
+any other kind."</p>
+
+<p>"That order is the most beautiful of all, and for
+that reason is so frequently referred to by writers.
+It is designed to represent the delicacy of a young
+girl. The capital is the most ornamental of all
+the orders, and it is also larger and much more
+showy."</p>
+
+<p>"But you have not yet described the Composite."</p>
+
+<p>"The Composite or Roman, is the Ionic grafted
+on the Corinthian. From this you will see that
+not only the general form, but also the proportion
+and the ornamentation, go to make up the various
+orders. To illustrate: The Ionic has, as one feature,
+two scroll-like ornaments, called volutes, and
+it has more moldings and is much more slender<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_179" id="p_179">p. 179</a></span>
+than the Doric. To make the Composite there is
+borrowed the quarter round molding (A) from the
+Tuscan; the leaves (B) from the Corinthian, and
+the volutes (C) from the Ionic."</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 348px;">
+<a id="illus-179" name="illus-179" />
+<a href="#p_179">
+<img src="images/illus-fig19-p179.png" width="348" height="322"
+alt="Doric. Ionic. Corinthian. Tuscan. Fig. 19. Orders of Architecture."
+title="Doric. Ionic. Corinthian. Tuscan. Fig. 19. Orders of Architecture." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">
+Fig. 19. <span class="u">Orders</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">Architecture</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>During the night all preparations were made
+for a quick transfer of the main force to the east.
+Works were thrown up very ostentatiously during
+the afternoon, in their position on the west of the
+village, and it was obvious to the trained eye of
+John, who was constantly observing the movement
+in the village, that they were bringing the warriors
+to the side facing these preparations.</p>
+
+<p>John, together with Muro and Uraso, crept up<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_180" id="p_180">p. 180</a></span>
+close to the line of breastworks, during the night,
+and satisfied themselves the Illyas were deceived
+as to the point of attack.</p>
+
+<p>Shortly before four in the morning the warriors
+marched out, making a wide detour to the right,
+and within an hour were close to the east line, and
+carefully concealed. The plan was for the men
+under Muro to commence the attack, as soon as it
+was light enough to see plainly, and the firing of
+four guns was to be the order for the rush on the
+part of the main force.</p>
+
+<p>All awaited the signal with impatience. Soon
+the firing was heard, and instantaneously, as
+though expecting it, the Illyas were seen rushing
+through the village to the western line.</p>
+
+<p>John gave the word. To approach close to the
+breastworks without firing a gun, and not to discharge
+a single piece until they were well within
+the fortified line.</p>
+
+<p>The entire force moved forward at the shots.
+The line of entrenchments was reached, and John,
+with Uraso by his side, was the first to leap over.
+They halted fifty feet beyond the ridge, to allow
+the warriors to come in and form the line, those
+having the guns in front.</p>
+
+<p>With a shout, the allies bounded forward, withholding
+their fire until the command should be
+given. The Illyas up to this time were principally
+arranged along the western wall, discharging their
+arrows at the force under Muro.</p>
+
+<p>The appearance of the allies within the walls
+was such a terrible surprise that all semblance of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_181" id="p_181">p. 181</a></span>
+order was lost in their ranks. They began to scatter.
+Uraso shouted out in stentorian tones:</p>
+
+<p>"Throw down your arms, or we will fire. Surrender
+and you will not be killed."</p>
+
+<p>John and the front line were now alongside of
+the second building, the one described by him as
+having the columns of the Ionic order, which had
+interested the boys so much.</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the excitement of the moment,
+Harry could not help looking at the building with
+its tawdry and crumbling columns, and in doing so
+espied a half dozen peculiarly garbed Illyas rushing
+out and attempting to escape to the north along
+the narrow street.</p>
+
+<p>Calling a dozen warriors, he, with George, made
+a rush after the escaping fugitives, and before the
+limit of the village was reached they were surrounded
+and carried back.</p>
+
+<p>The Illyas warriors were now in a panic. There
+seemed to be no one to order a surrender or a retreat.
+John ordered Uraso to have his men spread
+out to prevent escape in either direction, and as
+he turned to execute the order, Harry and George
+returned with the prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>At the sight of the captives Uraso shouted the
+order to his men, and quickly turning to John,
+who was slightly in the advance, cried out: "Here
+are the chief and his principal advisers."</p>
+
+<p>John turned to look and noticed that they were
+surrounded by the men in charge of Harry and
+George.</p>
+
+<p>"Good work," he said. "Demand that he tell<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_182" id="p_182">p. 182</a></span>
+his men to surrender." And Uraso repeated the
+message.</p>
+
+<p>The chief saw the situation, but refused to give
+the order.</p>
+
+<p>"Then we shall have to kill them, and unless
+you surrender we shall attack at once."</p>
+
+<p>He had hardly finished the words when Muro,
+seeing the condition of affairs, left their fortress,
+and rushing forward scaled the low entrenchments,
+directing a volley into the now thoroughly disorganized
+and excited warriors. The entire body
+of Illyas had seen the capture of their chiefs.</p>
+
+<p>The appearance of the chiefs at the head of the
+column commanded by John made his position
+safe from attack. Whether the chief refused to
+comply with Uraso's demand from stubbornness,
+or because he was paralyzed at the sudden changes
+from his fancied security, was not apparent at the
+time.</p>
+
+<p>The warriors now advanced with guns ready for
+a volley, and the chief saw that resistance was
+useless. He held up his hand as a signal. John
+rushed forward toward the oncoming warriors
+led by Muro, and the latter, seeing the chief in the
+hands of Uraso, ordered his men to halt.</p>
+
+<p>Meanwhile the forces under Uraso had spread
+out and were approaching the halting warriors,
+who, one by one, threw down their bows, and, as
+they did so, were marched to the open central part
+of the village and surrounded by the men led by
+Muro on one side and Uraso on the other. John
+rushed back to the cordon surrounding the chiefs.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_183" id="p_183">p. 183</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Up to this time not the sign of a woman or a
+child had been seen. But when order was finally
+restored and the defenseless warriors were herded
+together as compactly as possible, the huts surrounding
+the main buildings were opened, as by
+magic, and the women poured forth wailing and
+shrieking.</p>
+
+<p>It was bedlam let loose. They pictured all the
+terrors of captivity. They knew what it meant.
+They passed around the cordon beating their
+breasts, and shrieking like demoniacs. John, motioning
+to Muro and Uraso, stepped aside, and
+ordered the chiefs to follow.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the building they came out of," said
+George quietly to John.</p>
+
+<p>"Then it will be a good place to hold the conference.
+Uraso, instruct your men not to allow
+anyone to leave his place within the circle, and then
+attend the conference with us."</p>
+
+<p>The guards followed John as he entered the
+building. The boys were eager to see the interior.
+Once within they saw a dozen women and twice
+that number of children huddled together in one
+of the rooms. The entrance from the main door in
+front led directly into a hall, and at the rear end
+of the hall was a large room the entire width of
+the building.</p>
+
+<p>Several smaller rooms were on each side of the
+hall. It was, to all appearance, arranged like an
+American or European dwelling, the entire interior
+being finished in wood, but in a terribly dilapidated
+condition.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_184" id="p_184">p. 184</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The surprise was still greater when they found
+in the interior of the great room a number of articles
+of furniture, such as chairs, tables, settees,
+and articles which, in their younger days, might
+have been rugs. Parts of bedsteads were littered
+around, broken articles of furniture were scattered
+here and there, and everywhere the place was lavish
+with dirt.</p>
+
+<p>The boys had seen many native places where
+filth had accumulated, but the atmosphere seemed
+to fairly reek. It appeared so to the boys, who had
+lived so much in the open, and who had such vivid
+imaginations that the wrecked condition of the
+interior suggested a worse atmosphere than there
+really was.</p>
+
+<p>It was not close or confined, that was certain;
+for the places which once, evidently, had windows,
+did not contain even the suggestion of glass. It
+was one mass of broken, misplaced, jumbled up
+belongings, that would require the rebus manager
+of a magazine to assemble in order.</p>
+
+<p>When Uraso returned, and the chiefs were
+placed before them, the boys had an opportunity
+to study the famous chief of the Illyas. They
+took occasion to compare him with the others, for
+the boys now knew all of them.</p>
+
+<p>He was a man, probably sixty years of age,
+with the most curious headdress, which was
+worked to imitate, somewhat, the crown, to which
+his position entitled him. He wore a brightly colored
+mantle, if it could be called such, for it was
+simply thrown over one shoulder, and its pendant<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_185" id="p_185">p. 185</a></span>
+ends were bound to the waist by a wide
+girdle.</p>
+
+<p>He wore short trousers, or pantalets, and Harry
+could hardly keep from laughing, as George suggested
+that he was ultra-English in the way his
+trousers were rolled up. He had the face of a
+man of authority. His every action and look betokened
+one who knew his authority, and the first
+question, together with the imperious manner of
+uttering it, indicated that he was a king, and he
+knew it.</p>
+
+<p>He looked at Uraso and Muro, both chiefs, and
+equal to him in rank. He did it with such an
+imperious air as plainly indicated that he considered
+them his inferiors. Uraso and Muro stood
+there, with arms folded, dignified, and returned
+his gaze with a dignity that won the admiration
+of the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder how Uraso and Muro feel now, when
+they have that old devil at their mercy?" George
+whispered to Harry.</p>
+
+<p>When the circle had been arranged the chief,
+Oroto, addressed John in this terse manner:</p>
+
+<p>"What do you want?"</p>
+
+<p>The question came like a shot. It was the first
+word he had said. Neither of the others had asked
+for information, nor had they deigned to notice
+him, as they were marching to the council chamber.
+This neglect on the part of Muro and Uraso
+may have nettled him. The attitude of the chiefs
+plainly irritated him.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_186" id="p_186">p. 186</a></span></p>
+
+<p>It is well known that people of this kind are
+very sensitive to slights, or what they consider so.
+It is just as likely that the two chiefs purposely
+neglected him in that manner to make the humiliation
+the more complete.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_187" id="p_187">p. 187</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2>
+
+<h3>THE RESCUE OF FIVE CAPTIVES</h3>
+
+
+<p>The question for the moment nettled John.
+Here was a prisoner, powerless in his hands, imperiously
+demanding of his captors what they
+wanted. It may not have occurred to him that
+such a question was out of place.</p>
+
+<p>John drew himself up, and with that piercing
+glance which he could give, leaned forward, and
+slowly, but with terrible emphasis, answered:
+"Nothing."</p>
+
+<p>It was now the chief's turn to show a look of
+surprise. He looked at John, and his eyes wandered
+to Uraso and Muro. Neither indicated the
+slightest curiosity at the answer. Not another
+word was said as John kept his eye on the chief.</p>
+
+<p>Then seeing that he had a different kind of
+creature to deal with than any he had heretofore
+met, addressed John in an entirely different tone
+of voice:</p>
+
+<p>"Why have you captured me and my warriors,
+and why do you intend to destroy my village and
+take my women and children?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because that is what you have been doing all
+your life. We do not ask you to give us anything.
+We have taken everything you have and shall not
+ask you for permission in anything we do. We
+have no desire to injure you or your people, and
+whether we shall do so will depend on your ac<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_188" id="p_188">p. 188</a></span>tion.
+If you will give us certain information it
+may make it easier for you, but if you do not tell
+us it will go hard with you."</p>
+
+<p>"I am ready to listen."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you receive the messenger I sent you three
+days ago?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"What did he tell you?"</p>
+
+<p>"That you intended to kill me and my people."</p>
+
+<p>"Did he not tell you that we did not want war,
+but peace, but that you must give up the captives
+you had?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"Send out for that warrior," John ordered, as
+he glanced at Oroto.</p>
+
+<p>Muro accompanied one of the sub-chiefs, and
+in a few moments returned with him. He came
+in with face hanging down.</p>
+
+<p>He was placed before John. "Why did you
+lie to the chief?"</p>
+
+<p>The savage was mute. He cast an appealing
+glance at his chief, but the latter did not notice
+him.</p>
+
+<p>Addressing Uraso, John said: "Take this man
+out and beat him. He must be punished for
+lying."</p>
+
+<p>George called in several of the warriors, who
+were instructed to carry out the decree. In the
+meantime Uraso called John aside, and stated
+that the poor fellow had undoubtedly told the
+truth, but the chief had lied.</p>
+
+<p>"I suspected that," answered John. "I do not
+want the man beaten, so that you may go and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_189" id="p_189">p. 189</a></span>
+stop the execution of it, but do not let the chief
+know that the order was not carried out."</p>
+
+<p>"Did you get a second message from me yesterday
+through one of your own warriors?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"What did he tell you?"</p>
+
+<p>"He said that you had declared war against
+me and my people and would kill all of us and
+take our women and children into captivity."</p>
+
+<p>"Did he not tell you that we came to make terms
+of friendship, and that all we wanted was the
+captives which you wrongfully held?"</p>
+
+<p>"No."</p>
+
+<p>"Bring in that warrior."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso went out with one of the sub-chiefs, and
+when he appeared addressed him sharply:</p>
+
+<p>"Why did you lie to your chief, and not tell
+him what I told you? Answer me."</p>
+
+<p>The chief merely glanced at the wretch, and
+the latter bowed his head. The question was repeated,
+and he was told that he would be protected
+against the fury of his chief if he would
+tell the truth. As he was about to reply the
+chief merely glanced at him, and his lips were
+sealed.</p>
+
+<p>"Take him out and beat him as severely as you
+have beaten the other. These people must be
+taught to learn that they should not lie."</p>
+
+<p>Uraso understood John's look, and acted accordingly.
+He was taken out, but was not beaten.</p>
+
+<p>Turning to the chief, and acting on the information
+imparted by Uraso, he startled Oroto by
+the following question:</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_190" id="p_190">p. 190</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Why did you lie to me and allow your warriors
+to be beaten?"</p>
+
+<p>The question stunned him for a moment. John
+did not permit him time to frame an excuse.</p>
+
+<p>"You lied to me when you stated that they had
+told you the things you said, and I know it. You
+are deserving of the same punishment as those
+who were wrongfully beaten. Take him out and
+see that he is punished as he deserves."</p>
+
+<p>This judgment against the august one was like
+a death pall on the ears of the sub-chiefs. The
+chief trembled; his footsteps, theretofore so supple,
+were trembling, and he held out his hands
+for support.</p>
+
+<p>The enormity of this punishment to a chief by
+whipping is the most disgraceful thing that can
+happen. The person of a chief must not be defiled
+by a rod, which is intended only for children
+and for offenses committed by the unruly members
+of a tribe.</p>
+
+<p>The procession filed out, and John hurriedly
+called Uraso and Muro to his side, explaining in
+a whisper that they should intercede to prevent
+the punishment.</p>
+
+<p>The excitement of the surrounded warriors was
+intense, as the word was circulated that their
+great chief had judgment pronounced against him,
+and was to be publicly whipped.</p>
+
+<p>As they were proceeding across the open space,
+Uraso and Muro, in well simulated tones, begged
+that John should forego the punishment, but he
+refused to comply until they had reached the
+place selected.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_191" id="p_191">p. 191</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John advanced to him and said: "Your friends,
+Muro and Saboro, have begged me not to inflict
+the punishment for lying; I have decided not to
+do so at this time, as I am guided by their judgment,
+and I know they are wise. Instead, you
+and your chiefs must come with me and see the
+Great White Chief, and he may order that you
+shall not be punished."</p>
+
+<p>This statement that he was not the Great White
+Chief was another piece of news that he could not
+understand.</p>
+
+<p>"And now, I want to know where you have the
+captives?"</p>
+
+<p>He hesitated. He looked at Muro and Uraso
+in a different manner this time. Uraso quietly
+spoke to him: "You cannot escape the vigilance
+of the white man. The wonderful fire guns can
+kill all of your people. You do not know what
+you are doing in trying to resist him. If you do
+not tell him he will find them, and then I cannot
+plead for you."</p>
+
+<p>The chief, turning to one of the sub-chiefs, said:
+"Sama will take you to them."</p>
+
+<p>The boys jumped as they learned the import of
+these words. They looked at John. The latter
+turned to the chief and said:</p>
+
+<p>"How far are they from this place?"</p>
+
+<p>The distance was indicated by signs, which
+Uraso interpreted to mean two hours.</p>
+
+<p>"Bring in the wagons at once, and unload one
+of them; then take the other, with twenty-five
+men well armed, and carry Sama with you. The
+poor fellows are not, probably, in a condition to<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_192" id="p_192">p. 192</a></span>
+walk." Then, again turning to the chief, he
+asked: "How many prisoners have you?"</p>
+
+<p>He held up his hand with fingers outstretched,
+indicating five. There was no delay in preparing
+the wagon, and Jack and Jill, the two old trustworthies,
+were hustled along, to show the path of
+freedom to some of the boys' former companions
+and associates.</p>
+
+<p>John's last injunction was: "Be sure and take
+plenty of food along." The order was unnecessary.
+The boys had thought of this, and the wagon,
+held precious little but articles of comfort for the
+unfortunates.</p>
+
+<p>Sama directed the wagon to the north, and
+Muro's son Lolo accompanied them on the journey.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know," said Harry, "we are going
+straight toward the Cataract?"</p>
+
+<p>"I had quite forgotten that," answered George.
+"How I would like to go back again to the dear
+old place!"</p>
+
+<p>"I have just been thinking, what a wonderful
+life we have had since we landed here. We had
+nothing when we came, and now we have everything!"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered George; and he stopped, while
+his eyes took on a blurry feeling, and the lashes
+began to blink at an alarming rate. "All but
+home!"</p>
+
+<p>Harry looked at George. There was an inflection,
+which he caught.</p>
+
+<p>"Of course; I mean that, too. But we haven't
+lost them. When this business here is settled we<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_193" id="p_193">p. 193</a></span>
+are to go to work on the big vessel. When I
+think of that it eases my mind."</p>
+
+<p>"That is the great comfort to me, too. It makes
+me happy when I think of the joy we are bringing
+to the people here. I really love every foot of
+this island. It has been a wonderful experience
+to us."</p>
+
+<p>"And," responded Harry, "to think that we have
+aided in restoring so many to freedom; John and
+Blakely, and the four boys, and&mdash;I wonder who
+the ones are that we are going after now?"</p>
+
+<p>"That is what I have been thinking about all
+along. But did you ever see such bricks as Uraso
+and Muro?"</p>
+
+<p>Lolo had learned many things in the short ten
+days that he had been with them. The boys had
+attained a remarkable knowledge of the language,
+and Lolo was a constant instructor for them. He
+was so simple and unaffected in his ways that
+they grew to love him.</p>
+
+<p>Within two hours the location of the village was
+sighted. It was distinctly noticed among the
+trees, perched on a hillside, and the excitement
+of the boys was intense. Stut was in charge of
+the warriors.</p>
+
+<p>Before the village was reached several warriors
+belonging to the Illyas appeared, but fell back
+when they saw what was approaching. Stut
+directed Sama to inform them that they had come
+at the command of Oroto.</p>
+
+<p>This information did not satisfy them, but the
+wagon did not stop. As it moved up the incline,
+the warriors lined up, fully twenty of them, won<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_194" id="p_194">p. 194</a></span>dering
+what the strange visit meant. There was
+no act of hostility apparent, still they could not
+understand why there were no Illyas present except
+Sama.</p>
+
+<p>"Take us direct to the captives," commanded
+Stut.</p>
+
+<p>Sama knew where they were. A typical native
+hut, but much larger than the others, stood behind
+the main homes of the village. To that the wagon
+was directed.</p>
+
+<p>The warriors on Stut's command lined up behind
+the wagon, and the boys, accompanied by
+Lolo, rushed for the door. It was but the work
+of a moment to wrench the bars away, and without
+waiting for any ceremony George and Harry
+were inside.</p>
+
+<p>The scene that met their eyes was appalling.
+The five captives were in a pitiful state. Two
+of the three boys were lying on filthy hay, and
+one man, also badly emaciated, was on the other
+side, lying down.</p>
+
+<p>The boy who was still on his feet rushed to
+Harry and threw his arms about him. "Is that
+you, Harry? Thank God! And George, too.
+Where did you come from?"</p>
+
+<p>"Who is this?" came like a moan from one of
+the boys. George stooped down. "Harry, here
+is Robert&mdash;Robert Lamson; and who are you?"
+And he crawled on his knees over to the other,
+who feebly turned his eyes.</p>
+
+<p>Lamson turned to Harry, who was now on his
+knees. "You know Min, don't you?" Min was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_195" id="p_195">p. 195</a></span>
+the nickname of one of the boys, because of his
+diminutive size.</p>
+
+<p>"Poor Min!" said Harry, as he put his arm
+around him. "We will get you out of this at
+once."</p>
+
+<p>"But we are so hungry," cried Robert, as the
+tears streamed down his face.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were all crying now. The tears
+streaked their faces. Lolo was very much affected,
+but he was a jewel in this emergency.
+He called to Stut, and together they carried out
+Robert, and Harry, with his strong arms, lifted
+Min as though he was a feather.</p>
+
+<p>They were carried to the wagon, and tenderly
+laid on the clean, sweet hay. Poor Min had
+fainted with the excitement, and Robert was not
+much better. But who were the men?</p>
+
+<p>When Harry returned to the hut he found the
+warriors around one of the men, talking excitedly.
+He was a Saboro, and Stut recognized him as
+one of his people, who, it was believed, had been
+sacrificed long before. The other was a white
+man, and he was lying in a sort of stupor, apparently
+not recognizing his visitors.</p>
+
+<p>Harry spoke to him, and at the strange voice
+he turned his head, and with an effort raised himself.
+"Who is this? What do you want? Is that
+you, Rogers?" and he fell back exhausted.</p>
+
+<p>The still active boy, Roy Whitten, came up, and
+said: "He was here when we were brought to
+the place. His name is Gustave Wright. He has
+a wonderful story to tell."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_196" id="p_196">p. 196</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"What is the matter with him? Was he
+wounded?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; but he is over that now. The trouble is
+that he is starved, like the rest of us. Can't we
+have something to eat?"</p>
+
+<p>"George is getting it ready for you. You must
+eat sparingly at first. George will attend to that,
+never mind."</p>
+
+<p>The Saboro was in better physical condition
+than the others of the party. There was no time
+for talk. The captives were fed sparingly. "Oh,
+how good this tastes!" said Robert. "We had
+given up all hope, after they brought us here.
+We tried so hard to get away and go to the northeast
+side of the island, where some white people
+are living."</p>
+
+<p>Harry dragged Robert out of the hut, and called
+to George. "Here, George, did you hear what he
+said? How did you know there were white people
+in the northeast part of the island?"</p>
+
+<p>"We saw it on a litter, which the Illyas brought
+into their other village."</p>
+
+<p>Harry looked at George. "That was the litter
+we made at the Cataract, and on which we carried
+out the Kurabu. I wonder how the Illyas got
+hold of it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Where is the Cataract?" asked Robert.</p>
+
+<p>"That is at the northeast part of the island.
+That was our home."</p>
+
+<p>"But don't you live there now?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; we live in a big town at the southwest part
+of the island."</p>
+
+<p>"But this is so wonderful to us. Just you two<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_197" id="p_197">p. 197</a></span>
+boys, and all the savages. How did you manage
+it?"</p>
+
+<p>"But we are not alone. The Professor has been
+with us, and we have Mr. Varney, and we rescued
+a Mr. Blakely, and four of the <i>Investigator's</i>
+boys."</p>
+
+<p>"The Professor&mdash;the Professor, and Varney?
+Rogers spoke about Varney. Do you mean the
+professor of philosophy that you used to be so
+chummy with?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," answered Harry, eagerly. "But let us
+get busy now." Stut had rounded up the warriors,
+and through Sama informed them that they were
+wanted at the village.</p>
+
+<p>The women were in consternation, but Stut informed
+them that no harm would befall the men.
+Up to this time Stut had not permitted Sama
+to give any information about the situation at
+the village, but he now turned to the waiting warriors,
+and said:</p>
+
+<p>"The Great White Chief and all the tribes have
+united, and have taken the Illyas chief and all his
+people prisoners, and all their women and children
+are now captives. The Illyas have not acted
+right and the chiefs must now go to the Great
+Chief and show that he is sorry, and that he
+will not again try to take captives, and will not
+make sacrifices."</p>
+
+<p>Without waiting for a moment, the train started
+back for the Illyas' village. It is wonderful how
+the stimulating influence of surroundings will
+build up and strengthen the depressed. The poor
+boys, emaciated as they were, had smiles and tears,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_198" id="p_198">p. 198</a></span>
+as they heard little snatches of experiences from
+the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"We are telling you these things, but we are
+simply crazy to hear your stories. But they will
+keep. Let us do the talking now. You will be
+all right in a day or two."</p>
+
+<p>The boys' eyes were kept on the vessels containing
+the food. Time and again George would
+shake his head as one or the other tried to get
+another "bite." The liquid food was the first administered.
+The journey back took much longer,
+because Harry would not hurry the animals over
+the rough roads with the patients in their low
+condition.</p>
+
+<p>When the wagon and the train of warriors arrived
+at the village, the only thing the boys saw
+were the warriors of the allies. The captives
+were in the buildings, and were guarded on all
+sides.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_199" id="p_199">p. 199</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2>
+
+<h3>REMARKABLE GROWTH OF UNITY</h3>
+
+
+<p>"We haven't heard from John for two days.
+I wonder if they have met with any difficulties?"
+asked Will, as they were together the evening
+after their trip to the hill and forest.</p>
+
+<p>"John is very prudent, and a man of very extensive
+knowledge as a campaigner. If they had
+met any disaster we should have known of it
+before this."</p>
+
+<p>"We ought to have had a telegraph line. That
+would keep us in touch with the army," added
+Jim.</p>
+
+<p>"Wireless telegraphy would be still better," responded
+Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"But how about wireless telephones?"</p>
+
+<p>"And if wireless telephones, why not wireless
+power?"</p>
+
+<p>The Professor smiled, as one suggestion after
+the other was made. The other boys smiled, too,
+at Jim's last suggestion that power might be
+transmitted by wireless.</p>
+
+<p>"That is going a little too far," said Will. "I
+can understand why sounds can be sent, but power
+is another thing, it seems to me."</p>
+
+<p>"I am afraid that is not a very logical conclusion,"
+interposed the Professor. "What is the
+difference between sound and power?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_200" id="p_200">p. 200</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I should say that sound is a motion in the air,"
+replied Will, "and that power is motion&mdash;&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>"In the air, too," continued the Professor.
+"That is not a very good definition of the matter.
+Let us try and make it clear. Sound is produced
+by vibration; the lowest number of vibrations the
+ear can distinguish, is sixteen per second, which
+is known as the low bass notes of an organ. The
+highest are, approximately, 12,000 per second.
+These vibrations require power to produce them."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you mean to say that all vibrations require
+power?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; nature speaks to us only in the form of
+motion, or vibrations of some sort. Light, heat,
+electricity, are merely different forms of motion.
+Taste and smell, as well as sound, are merely
+modes of motion. The beating heart; the winking
+of the eyelids; the rhythmic breathing of the
+body; the swinging of the pendulum; the movement
+of the sap in trees and the unfolding of the
+leaves; the light mists which go up and the rains
+which bring the particles back again; the winds
+and the waves; and the giant swings of the planets
+through space, all show how nature performs her
+work through unceasing movement; and all these
+require power."</p>
+
+<p>"I remember," remarked Ralph, "about reading
+of a Hindoo fakir in India, who claimed that he
+could bring to him an object ten thousand miles
+away, in ten minutes of time. As that was motion
+it must have taken considerable power to
+do it."</p>
+
+<p>"That is easily determined," answered the Pro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_201" id="p_201">p. 201</a></span>fessor.
+"Ten thousand miles would be 16.6 miles,
+per second, at that velocity. If the article should
+be only one inch square it would take 18,000,000
+horsepower to transport it that distance in the
+time given. This calculation is sufficient to show
+the absurdity of the Hindoo's statement."</p>
+
+<p>Considering that the new community was one
+which had been recruited from a people which
+had no ambition in life, except merely to live, the
+work going on in every quarter was more remarkable
+every day. Tom came to the Professor and
+remarked: "It would do you good to go down
+on street B and see how the Saboros have fixed
+up their places."</p>
+
+<p>This was a sufficient hint for him, and busy as
+he was, he sauntered in that direction.</p>
+
+<p>What he saw was, really, a surprise. Taking
+the hint from the sodding operation which the
+women had noticed around the boys' quarters, he
+found that they had actually borrowed the wheelbarrows
+and made some nice lawns.</p>
+
+<p>The Professor called in at the places, and congratulated
+them on the beautiful appearances, and
+the nice manner in which the work was done
+What a wonderful thing that was to those poor
+women, to see the Great Chief take such notice
+of their work.</p>
+
+<p>He went into the cottages, and examined every
+room, and suggested many changes, and offered
+advice in the manner of keeping the houses clean,
+and in taking care of the children. This work
+of beautifying their homes was, of course, crude,
+but it had a remarkable stimulus to the others.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_202" id="p_202">p. 202</a></span>
+On every hand this was taken up. It was a spirit
+of emulation that was worth encouraging.</p>
+
+<p>When John left with the forces, the Professor
+consulted Blakely, and ordered the erection of
+three larger and more pretentious cottages. Each
+of these had five rooms, all plain, but arranged in
+good taste, and the furniture was also being made,
+and the large number employed enabled them to
+complete the buildings ready for furnishing before
+John's party returned.</p>
+
+<p>The working force was now ready to put up a
+still larger building. "Do you know what this is
+for?" asked Ralph, as the timber was being taken
+to the new location.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose this is to be the Town Hall," replied
+Will.</p>
+
+<p>"No, indeed; it is the schoolhouse." And the
+boys laughed at the idea. But it was an idea that
+was well considered and determined on, long before
+John left on the expedition.</p>
+
+<p>But the town was growing beyond all comprehension.
+Daily new families arrived, and Blakely
+was the busiest man in the place, in his efforts to
+find work for them, while the Professor and the
+boys were often at their wits' end to know how
+and where they would house them. The Saboros
+were the most numerous, followed by the Berees
+and Osagas. But now the Kurabus were coming
+in&mdash;the families of the warriors with John.</p>
+
+<p>The Chief Oroto saw and marveled at the sights.
+During the entire time he had been there, he had
+never suggested the idea of returning. The
+Kurabu medicine men who had been brought down<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_203" id="p_203">p. 203</a></span>
+with him, were still under the charge of the Professor,
+and one day one of them accosted Ralph in
+broken English.</p>
+
+<p>He looked up in surprise. It was the first inkling
+that the so-called wise men were being taught
+the language. Ralph had quite a conversation
+with him, and reported the information to the
+boys.</p>
+
+<p>How was this change brought about? The first
+step of the Professor was to show the wise (?)
+men some of the mysterious things which the white
+men could do. The battery, which the boys had
+made at Cataract, was one of the instruments.
+Then he showed them the simple experiments in
+chemistry; how ores were treated and metals extracted
+and tempered.</p>
+
+<p>These things were so much more important and
+wonderful than anything they could do or ever
+dreamed of, that when he told them they could
+do those things, he had the most willing pupils.
+Hour after hour they would perform some task,
+until they began to crave for new things. Then
+began the work of instilling knowledge of the language
+as a part of their education. They were
+taught how to communicate ideas by signs in the
+English language, and thus the alphabet was
+taught.</p>
+
+<p>A spirit of rivalry was exhibited among them,
+and it was so intense that they had no further time
+for idleness or useless wanderings about the place.
+It was no wonder that the boys saw so little of
+them when the spirit once took possession of their
+energies.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_204" id="p_204">p. 204</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Two of the men referred to had an undoubted
+aptitude for chemical experiments, one of them,
+Talala, being exceptionally bright and quick to
+grasp the meaning of an experiment. He usually
+accompanied the Professor on all his rounds visiting
+the sick, because this was now an imperative
+daily task on his part.</p>
+
+<p>The thermometer was in frequent use and
+Talala understood its meaning. Only the simplest
+remedies were used and administered, and
+the gathering of the vegetables necessary for the
+making up of the remedies was a part of the
+work of each. In this the natives had a pretty
+good knowledge, but they knew nothing of making
+the extracts, or how to concentrate the compounds.</p>
+
+<p>Cinchona, the Peruvian bark, and calisaya, its
+sister, which furnish the quinine of commerce,
+were well known to them, but they did not know
+how the white man made it so more efficient than
+the crude product as used by them.</p>
+
+<p>He explained that by the use of an acid, like
+that furnished by sulphur, a chemical change
+could be produced, whereby a single grain would
+be more efficient than a dozen grains in the way
+they used it. This was labeled "Sulphate of Quinine,"
+and so on along the whole line of remedies,
+he gave a term which they learned, and the reasons
+for it.</p>
+
+<p>When John saw the wagon approaching he
+rushed out, followed by Uraso and Muro. The
+rescued captives were in the wagon. Pending
+their arrival a number of the warriors had cleaned
+out the large building&mdash;the one with the Doric<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_205" id="p_205">p. 205</a></span>
+columns, which stood at right angles to the chief's
+house. This structure appeared to be in the best
+state of preservation.</p>
+
+<p>Another lot of the warriors took the wagon,
+and with their bolos gathered a large quantity
+of the sweet grass from the hillside, and this was
+brought to the building and arranged for the use
+of the chiefs and John, and for the boys when
+they returned.</p>
+
+<p>George was eager to tell of their adventure, and
+of the prisoners they had brought with them.
+"We got three of the boys, but two of them are
+very weak. We have a friend of yours, also."</p>
+
+<p>"Who is it?" exclaimed John, just as eager as
+the boys could be.</p>
+
+<p>"Wright; Gustave Wright."</p>
+
+<p>John bounded into the wagon. Wright saw
+John, and feebly extended his hand.</p>
+
+<p>"I knew I would find you sooner or later," said
+John, as he put his arm around him. "But we
+got you soon enough to save you. All you need
+is something good to eat." And Wright smiled.</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," he answered. "They haven't permitted
+me to take much so far; but I guess they are all
+right. What a fine set of boys you have!"</p>
+
+<p>"The finest in the world. Wait until you know
+them! But never mind about talking now. And
+these are the boys? Poor fellows! What an
+experience they must have had! Come on, men;
+get them out and make them as comfortable as
+possible."</p>
+
+<p>There were willing hands for every job. Muro
+was delighted at the rescue of his friend. He was<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_206" id="p_206">p. 206</a></span>
+one of the most skillful and powerful warriors,
+but he did not look like it at this time.</p>
+
+<p>Inside the patients were ranged about the place,
+and the cooking stove brought in from the wagon.</p>
+
+<p>"I suppose I shall have to take charge of the
+kitchen," said George, as he ordered it arranged
+in place and directed them where to put the various
+articles. Before long the savory odor of the
+vegetables and game reached the famished ones,
+and they begged for some of it.</p>
+
+<p>"A little at a time," said George, soothingly.
+"I am doctor and cook, and there is plenty here,
+of the best kind."</p>
+
+<p>"Oh, doesn't that smell good!" exclaimed Min,
+joyously.</p>
+
+<p>"That's the way I like to hear you talk," said
+Harry. "Your voice doesn't seem starved.
+You'll be out in a couple of days, and be better
+than ever."</p>
+
+<p>"How long have you been in that place?" asked
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"In that particular place, only about a month;
+but we were in a worse place, still farther south,
+for about three months."</p>
+
+<p>"Starving all the time?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"I was moved to say that starving is a good
+thing, in its way, but it has its limits, and four
+months is a little too long for either comfort or
+health. You will find, however," continued John,
+"that you will be much healthier for the experience,
+particularly if you have ever had stomach<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_207" id="p_207">p. 207</a></span>
+troubles, as my friend Wright here has had all
+his life. Isn't that so, Wright?"</p>
+
+<p>"Do you think I have been to a health cure?"
+he asked.</p>
+
+<p>"Certainly; the best kind, for one in your condition."
+And John laughed.</p>
+
+<p>"Probably you took me away before the cure
+was effected; but as I always was magnanimous, I
+shall forgive you this time."</p>
+
+<p>There was a continuous fire of conversation,
+which cheered the patients, and added greatly to
+their store of knowledge.</p>
+
+<p>Harry, who had been outside, rushed in, and
+exclaimed excitedly:</p>
+
+<p>"Did you have <i>Investigator's</i> Lifeboat No. 3?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," exclaimed the boys.</p>
+
+<p>"Who wrote the note we found in it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Did you find our boat? Where did you get
+it?" asked Robert.</p>
+
+<p>"We found it on a river to the north of this
+place."</p>
+
+<p>"How in the world did it ever get there?"</p>
+
+<p>"But who wrote the note?"</p>
+
+<p>"What note?"</p>
+
+<p>"The message signed Will."</p>
+
+<p>The boys looked at each other, as they all shook
+their heads.</p>
+
+<p>"That is one of the mysteries which George and
+I thought you could solve."</p>
+
+<p>"Mysteries! Did you have many of them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Many of them! We had over a dozen, and
+some of them are still on the puzzle board. Do
+you remember Raggy, the drawing teacher? He<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_208" id="p_208">p. 208</a></span>
+always liked to call some of our drawings the
+unsolved puzzles. I wonder where he is? We
+had enough mysteries the first three months to
+supply headaches for a year."</p>
+
+<p>"We want to know about them."</p>
+
+<p>"We'll tell you all about them; and some were
+mighty thrilling. We had some just as exciting
+as any you ever read of in the last boys' series
+that we had about two years ago."</p>
+
+<p>"You see," said George, in a sage-like tone,
+"Harry and I don't read books of that kind any
+more; we simply act them." And the boys, and
+men, too, laughed at this sally.</p>
+
+<p>"Stop your talking for a while and eat something,"
+continued George.</p>
+
+<p>"Good, but it's awful hot," said Min, as he
+puckered up his mouth and drew in a breath of
+cool air.</p>
+
+<p>"I made it hot so you wouldn't eat too fast,"
+chuckled George.</p>
+
+<p>Just then a great commotion was heard on the
+outside, and George, Harry and Robert rushed
+for the door. Beyond the village a scrimmage
+was taking place, and a few shots were fired.</p>
+
+<p>John and Uraso were racing across the open
+place, and dozens of warriors were following.
+Muro was seen as he emerged from the combatants,
+and he was smiling as John came up.</p>
+
+<p>"The reinforcements from the south village
+came too late. I suspected they would be here,
+and I had a number of the men in wait for them.
+They have captured all of them."</p>
+
+<p>John nodded his head with approval at the<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_209" id="p_209">p. 209</a></span>
+course of Muro. The warriors brought in the
+prisoners, who were astounded at the unexpected
+welcome which awaited them. Forty-five were in
+the party. They were put under guard with the
+others.</p>
+
+<p>The utmost care was observed during the night,
+as the Illyas were known to be very foxy, and
+half the force was detailed to keep guard.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning John's first care was to
+make an investigation as to the character of the
+provisions on hand, and to arrange that foraging
+parties should be sent out to bring in vegetables.</p>
+
+<p>He was surprised to learn that the Illyas cultivated
+many kinds of garden products, and fruit
+was growing in abundance. This was found to be a
+prudent thing to consider, when it will be remembered
+that the village now had to feed over three
+hundred of the allies, and that the penned-up
+Illyas were not in a position to go out and bring
+in the daily supply.</p>
+
+<p>The boys were fed at intervals during the night,
+but before four they all felt so much restored
+that sleep overtook them, and John advised them
+to permit sleep, as that would be the best restorer,
+and they were not disturbed until they naturally
+awoke during the forenoon.</p>
+
+<p>A plentiful supply of broth was prepared, and
+administered during the day. But Harry and
+George were simply wild to explore the buildings.
+The excitement had been too intense to enable
+them to give it much thought. But now something
+must be known about the buildings and the reason
+for their erection at that place.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_210" id="p_210">p. 210</a></span></p>
+
+<p>John had questioned various ones about the
+buildings, but none seemed to know anything concerning
+them. Uraso and Muro were just as much
+surprised as the whites. Neither had known of
+the existence of a place with such buildings.</p>
+
+<p>It appears that the Illyas never allowed captives
+to be confined in the village, and this was a
+wise thing; because the escape of anyone would
+be sure to inform the other tribes of the existence
+of the Forbidden City.</p>
+
+<p>The remarkable thing about it, aside from the
+buildings, was the plan upon which the town had
+been built. It was regularly laid out. There were
+three main buildings; the first and largest being
+the one facing the west, with the Doric front.
+The next largest had its front facing the south,
+and this had Ionic columns. The third, and which
+was not noticeable from a position west of the village,
+was smaller than either, with a front of Tuscan
+architecture.</p>
+
+<p>What did these buildings mean? By whom
+were they erected, and for what purpose were they
+intended? These were questions ever uppermost
+in the minds of John and the boys.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_211" id="p_211">p. 211</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2>
+
+<h3>THE MYSTERIOUS CAVE. RETURNING TO UNITY</h3>
+
+
+<p>"It may be there are some sort of records or
+tablets somewhere about the buildings which will
+indicate what they were erected for; but my investigations
+thus far leave me just as much in
+the dark as when I first saw them," remarked
+John, as they were examining the structures.</p>
+
+<p>"I wonder if they have corner stones? Sometimes
+they put records there," observed Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"I made an examination in that direction also,
+but the character of the underpinning is the same
+all around, and the corners have no distinguishing
+stones."</p>
+
+<p>"It must be a very old custom to have cornerstones
+for buildings."</p>
+
+<p>"It was a custom to have cornerstones, or memorial
+stones, in all buildings in ancient times.
+They were well known in the time of Job, and
+buildings thousands of years prior to his day contained
+them. It is not known from what the custom
+arose."</p>
+
+<p>"Didn't you say that the treasure charts showed
+the existence of caves to the southeast of the cave
+we found at the Tuolos' village?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes, and that is something that we shall have
+to investigate to-morrow. To-day the patients
+still need our care, but they will be well enough
+to enable us to be absent to-morrow."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_212" id="p_212">p. 212</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I think we ought to make sketches of the plan
+of this town. I have a presentiment that we shall
+know something more about this place in the future,"
+said George.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 351px;">
+<a id="illus-212" name="illus-212" />
+<a href="#p_212">
+<img src="images/illus-fig20-p212.png" width="351" height="330"
+alt="Fig. 20. The Peculiar Illya Village." title="Fig. 20. The Peculiar Illya Village." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 20. <span class="u">The</span> <span class="u">Peculiar</span> <span class="u">Illya</span> <span class="u">Village</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"By all means have it prepared during the day.
+Later on I may be able to give a pretty good
+guess what all this means." And the boys looked
+at each other significantly.</p>
+
+<p>If the chiefs, or any of the lower order, knew
+anything about the origin of the town, they did
+not make it apparent.</p>
+
+<p>"Do you notice one singular thing about this
+town and the people in it?" asked John.</p>
+
+<p>Neither of the boys could guess.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_213" id="p_213">p. 213</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Where are the medicine men, and those who
+perform the sacred rites at their festivals?"</p>
+
+<p>The boys again looked at each other for an answer.
+George replied: "I think they are at the
+caves of which the charts give some indication,"
+finally exclaimed Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"That is the case, undoubtedly. That is where
+we shall have the difficulty. The chiefs will not
+disclose their hiding places. Before going on the
+search we must question the chief."</p>
+
+<p>In the early morning John and the boys called
+on the chief in company with Uraso. A complete
+change had come over him. Two days before he
+was sullen and moody, after the first lesson had
+been given him. Now he was different and agreeable.</p>
+
+<p>"Before we start for the village of the Great
+White Chief there are some questions I would
+ask you. How many medicine men have you?"</p>
+
+<p>"Ten."</p>
+
+<p>"Where are they?"</p>
+
+<p>"In their dark homes."</p>
+
+<p>"Where are those homes?"</p>
+
+<p>"To the east. Sama will take you to them, but
+you cannot go in."</p>
+
+<p>"Why not?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because you will be destroyed."</p>
+
+<p>"How do you know?"</p>
+
+<p>"Because they have told us so."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you believe them?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you sacrifice your captives because they tell
+you the Great Spirit demands it?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_214" id="p_214">p. 214</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Then I must tell you that they lie to you.
+The Great Spirit does not tell them to sacrifice.
+It is not death to enter their homes."</p>
+
+<p>"But we know that no one has ever come from
+them alive."</p>
+
+<p>"Does the Great Spirit kill them when they go
+in?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you want to know whether they tell the
+truth?"</p>
+
+<p>"Yes."</p>
+
+<p>"Then I will go in, and show you that the Great
+Spirit will not harm me."</p>
+
+<p>"How shall I know that you go in?"</p>
+
+<p>"You must go with me and stand at the opening."</p>
+
+<p>The chief's eyes now wandered about. He was
+visibly affected at this bold declaration, and John
+saw hesitation in his demeanor.</p>
+
+<p>Without giving him time to waver, he continued:
+"The great Chief Oroto must not show his
+people that he is afraid. He must show them that
+he is greater and wiser than the medicine men,
+and that the wise men who have told him those
+tales have not told the truth."</p>
+
+<p>Turning to Uraso he said: "Prepare the wagon,
+and we will start at once." The chief and two of
+the sub-chiefs were taken out and placed in the
+wagon. Harry, George, Uraso and Muro, with a
+picked company of twenty-five men, were selected
+to accompany them.</p>
+
+<p>The wagon was a curiosity to Oroto. He enjoyed
+the ride immensely and admired the manner
+in which Harry handled and guided the yaks.</p>
+
+<p>Their course was directed due east for a mile,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_215" id="p_215">p. 215</a></span>
+and then moved along a well-beaten path diagonally
+up the hill in a southern direction. After
+proceeding thus for a half mile farther the ground,
+became rough and cut up by innumerable gullies.</p>
+
+<p>"How much farther must we go?"</p>
+
+<p>"To the place where the great trees are." And
+he pointed to a group of trees less than five hundred
+feet beyond. Progress with the team was impossible,
+and all alighted. Leaving three of the
+warriors with the team, the others ascended the
+slight elevation, and before them was the mouth
+of the cavern.</p>
+
+<p>The opening was not more than eight feet in
+height, and not over six feet wide, with irregular
+sides. Arriving in front of it, John advanced to
+Oroto, and said: "I am about to show you that the
+Great Spirit will not injure me!" And saying so
+boldly marched in.</p>
+
+<p>He remained for a full half hour, and the chief
+became uneasy. The boys, as well as Uraso and
+Muro, affected not to be disturbed. What John
+did was this: It was evident to him that the occupants
+of the cave had no knowledge of the approach
+of the party.</p>
+
+<p>They knew that the White Chief and the allies
+had captured the village and the chiefs. They felt
+a certain sense of security in their home, because
+in all the tribal warfares the medicine men and the
+wise men of the tribes were regarded with fear and
+reverence.</p>
+
+<p>When John entered the cave, he went in a sufficient
+distance to be surrounded by total darkness.
+He remained concealed long enough so that
+he could become accustomed to the darkness, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_216" id="p_216">p. 216</a></span>
+slowly moved toward the interior, as he felt assured
+the occupants' presence would sooner or
+later be revealed by their lights.</p>
+
+<p>In this he was not mistaken, and he was surprised
+to find them much nearer the entrance than
+he anticipated. It would be more impressive to remain
+for some time than to emerge at once, so he
+sat down to observe the wise men.</p>
+
+<p>There was the most oppressive silence when he
+first observed the light, but as he neared them, a
+more or less animated conversation took place.
+Much of this was understood by John, as his knowledge
+of two of the dialects gave him some key to
+the words uttered. From this it was evident that
+they knew of the rescue of the captives.</p>
+
+<p>The chief had told them of ten belonging to the
+order. John could count only eight. Possibly
+two were in some other part of the cavern, and
+he moved along at the opposite side of the large
+chamber to discover what was beyond.</p>
+
+<p>Brushing along the wall, a hanging stalactite
+was dislodged, and it fell. The noise did not give
+even a momentary start to the company. John
+was surprised. He stopped and reflected, and the
+reason soon became plain. They supposed that it
+was caused by the absent ones returning.</p>
+
+<p>But John waited and the two did not return,
+and they began to glance about. At this time he
+was on the opposite side of the chamber, so that
+the medicine men were between him and the mouth
+of the cave.</p>
+
+<p>A half dozen of them had arisen, and John
+stepped forward with his gun in position. In a
+stentorian voice John shouted:</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_217" id="p_217">p. 217</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"I am the Great White Chief. Go to the door
+of the cave. If any refuse he will die. Go!"</p>
+
+<p>It might be stated that before leaving for the
+cave Uraso had fully instructed John how to use
+the above phrases. His sudden apparition on the
+side opposite the mouth of the cave was most startling
+to them. Not a word was uttered by either.</p>
+
+<p>"Go!" again shouted John. They seemed to be
+paralyzed. By a common impulse they moved toward
+the entrance, and as they marched out and
+saw the party there waiting to receive them, together
+with their own chief, the consternation was
+most marked on the faces of all.</p>
+
+<p>Addressing the chief, John said: "Here are your
+wise men. The Great Spirit is not there. They
+have lied to you."</p>
+
+<p>It was now apparent from the actions of the
+chief why he was considered such a power and a
+terror to his own people and to the tribes. He
+was every inch a chief. He strode forward, and
+would have crushed them with his own hands, but
+John interposed.</p>
+
+<p>"We shall take care of them. They will never
+again lie to the great chief Oroto." And so saying
+they were ordered bound, and Uraso instructed
+to take them to the village and carefully guard
+them.</p>
+
+<p>"You may take the wagon with you, Uraso, as
+the boys and I want to attend to some matters on
+our own account, and we shall soon follow you."</p>
+
+<p>When the cavalcade passed from their sight,
+John said: "I suppose we shall now have an opportunity
+to examine the place. Have you any
+candles?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_218" id="p_218">p. 218</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Harry had not forgotten them, and the boys
+smiled as John also drew forth several, and thus
+they entered the cave. John marched direct to
+the place where the wise men had their quarters,
+and their lamps were still burning.</p>
+
+<p>"By the way, we came in too soon. Two of them
+are outside, or are somewhere in the cave. We
+want them as well as the others. If they find us
+here, they will be likely to get away. But we
+are here now, and we must find out what we can,
+and as quickly as possible." The lights at the habitable
+part of the cave were left burning and the
+three plunged into the passageway which led to the
+east.</p>
+
+<p>"This is the cave noted in the chart. How fortunate
+it is. You will note that this, like the other
+cave, has also a cross-shaped formation, and the
+treasure should be at the south branch."</p>
+
+<p>"Here it is," whispered George.</p>
+
+<p>"What, the treasure?" was Harry's eager question.</p>
+
+<p>"No; the south branch."</p>
+
+<p>"You are undoubtedly right. There is no other
+opening."</p>
+
+<p>This branch was followed less than a hundred
+feet, when a solid white wall appeared in front,
+and it was readily seen that the channel terminated
+in the chamber.</p>
+
+<p>The floor of this chamber was one mass of uneven
+projections, entirely unlike the other parts
+of the cave, and what was more singular still, it
+was fully six feet higher than the floors of the
+other portions, but it was absolutely devoid of<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_219" id="p_219">p. 219</a></span>
+any treasure, or anything which could contain such
+a hoard as the chart seemed to indicate.</p>
+
+<p>"It is just as well," said John, resignedly. "I
+suppose we have enough for our purposes."</p>
+
+<p>While crawling down the rough portion which
+formed the elevated floor of the chamber Harry
+slipped, and broke off a portion of the stalagmite
+overlaying the side. It was dark beneath.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 347px;">
+<a id="illus-219" name="illus-219" />
+<a href="#p_219">
+<img src="images/illus-fig21-p219.png" width="347" height="217"
+alt="Fig. 21. Diagram of the Cross-shaped Cave." title="Fig. 21. Diagram of the Cross-shaped Cave." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 21. <span class="u">Diagram</span> <span class="u">of</span> <span class="u">the</span> <span class="u">Cross-shaped</span> <span class="u">Cave</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>"This is not calcareous matter," exclaimed
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked both in a breath.</p>
+
+<p>The lights were concentrated on a sample, and
+as John raised his head he looked at the boys,
+and slowly uttered one word:</p>
+
+<p>"Copper!"</p>
+
+<p>The boys did not at first grasp the true significance
+of the word. It was marvelous to them that
+copper should be found there, but John thought
+of something else. It offered a possible explanation
+to the origin of the buildings. Where were<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_220" id="p_220">p. 220</a></span>
+the mines? Were they in the cave itself? This
+was not copper ore. It was a partly refined product.</p>
+
+<p>It was evident to John, and further verified that
+the entire chamber, which was fully sixty feet long
+and fifty feet wide, was covered with a layer of
+this copper for a height of six feet. A calculation
+of the value could be readily made.</p>
+
+<p>John and the boys made their way out and past
+the fires that were still burning, and which would
+be relighted no more. The two absent ones were
+not found. They had not returned. The reason
+was explained when the village was reached.
+They were captured by Uraso before they had left
+the cave a thousand feet.</p>
+
+<p>During the day and the succeeding night the
+patients improved each hour. Both of the invalid
+boys were able to sit up. Rogers wanted a full
+meal, but still none were allowed to indulge. John
+announced that a start for home would be made
+in the morning.</p>
+
+<p>There was intense bustle in the village the next
+morning. The chief was informed that he and
+two of his sub-chiefs would be required to accompany
+them, together with one hundred of his warriors.
+The ten wise (?) men were also to be of
+the party.</p>
+
+<p>There was mingled feeling of emotion in the
+minds of the people when they saw their great
+chief for the first time in the knowledge of the
+people humbled and taken captive by a foreign
+tribe.</p>
+
+<p>It was well to leave them with that impression.
+They would soon learn otherwise, and for the first<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_221" id="p_221">p. 221</a></span>
+time begin to appreciate that the white man's
+way is superior to their own.</p>
+
+<p>The boys and Gustave were in the wagon with
+the Chief Oroto. The others were on foot. Occasionally
+John would take a place and delight in the
+chatter of the boys, and sometimes would listen
+to remarks about Oroto, that would not have been
+pleasant for his ears.</p>
+
+<p>John didn't blame them a bit for it either. The
+pale, drawn faces of the two boys made them
+pitiable objects, and when he saw them he felt
+like cursing the chief who would permit such cruelties
+to innocent boys. But he remembered that
+the chief knew no better. He lived according to
+the best that was given him. Why was he to be
+blamed?</p>
+
+<p>There was hardly a subject but was canvassed
+by the boys. The chief soon became interested,
+and he frequently asked Lolo questions. Before
+the journey ended the boys changed their opinions
+about Oroto. Perhaps the vivacity of the boys attracted
+him.</p>
+
+<p>But later on, through Lolo, he began to learn
+things which astounded him. Muro had told his
+son Lolo that Harry was the one who made the
+wonderful guns, and this was communicated to the
+chief. Harry was a hero to him from that time on.
+Lolo told the chief about the wonderful things
+which they were making at the new town, and
+long before they sighted the place he was interested
+just like a common mortal.</p>
+
+<p>But the Saboro village was in sight. "Moro,"
+asked John, "how long will it take to get your
+family ready?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_222" id="p_222">p. 222</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"We shall go on with you this afternoon."</p>
+
+<p>They were ready and waiting when the train
+came in sight. Lolo was out of the wagon and
+sprang to his mother, just like any other boy
+would do, and he told her in two minutes what
+had happened in fifteen days. An American boy
+could not have done better than that.</p>
+
+<p>Was Stut's family going, too? Certainly! The
+boys laughed merrily. One wagon was given over
+to the families, containing seven women and fourteen
+children. But the wagons were lightened of
+their heavy loads of provisions and easily accommodated
+to emigrants.</p>
+
+<p>This was a happy party. The natives never
+knew of such an outing. It was quite a cavalcade.
+Just imagine four hundred warriors, the two wagons,
+the women and the children, the men chanting
+a peculiar song as they marched, occasionally
+interspersed with laughter, and a constant flow
+of talk about the new and wonderful place they
+were going to, of the great white chiefs, and above
+all the real and unaffected pleasure that grew out
+of the knowledge that there would be no more
+war.</p>
+
+<p>On the second day after leaving the Saboro village,
+Unity came in sight. George crawled to the
+top of the wagon, and, raising his hat and waving
+it, began to cheer. Every warrior did likewise
+when he saw the signal. It was a bedlam for a
+few moments. The Illyas chief saw it and smiled.</p>
+
+<p>Unity heard the cheers. There was no more
+work that day. The men in the fields came in.
+Those in the workshops deserted their posts, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_223" id="p_223">p. 223</a></span>
+lined up along the newly made sidewalks that had
+been carefully arranged several days before.</p>
+
+<p>The women were out in force, and the children
+in evidence everywhere. The two wagons were in
+advance, Harry being in the lead. Not a man left
+the town to rush out and greet them. The Professor
+suggested that a more fitting welcome could
+be given by forming lines to receive the warriors
+as they filed by.</p>
+
+<p>The wagon was now within five hundred feet of
+the end of the receiving line of the villagers.
+Angel, the orang-outan, was in the line also. The
+sight of the wagons was too much for him. He
+scampered along the street in that peculiar shuffling
+gait that all the villagers knew, and started
+for the wagon.</p>
+
+<p>He was the only one in the town who disobeyed
+the orders of the Professor. He knew that George
+was in the wagon. He passed the first one, driven
+by Harry, but he was up in the top of the second
+in an instant, and he made his way to George's
+side, and looked up in his face. George put his
+arm around him, as he was accustomed to do, and
+this was sufficient for him.</p>
+
+<p>The children screamed in delight, but Angel
+didn't mind, because he saw that George didn't.
+When George put his arm around Lolo's little
+baby sister, Angel looked at George, reproachfully,
+at first, but when George laughed Angel
+emitted his well-known chuckle, which always indicated
+delight, and he knew that all jealousy had
+vanished.</p>
+
+
+
+<hr class="chapter" />
+<p class="chapter"><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_224" id="p_224">p. 224</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2>
+
+<h3>BUILDING A SHIP TO TAKE THEM HOME</h3>
+
+
+<p>Great was the surprise of Oroto to find that
+Marmo, chief of the Tuolos, and Tastoa, chief
+of the Kurabus, were in the town. Greater still
+was the marvel to know that they were entirely
+free to go and come, and when Uraso announced
+to him that there were no restrictions on his liberty,
+he wondered why he had been brought from
+his village.</p>
+
+<p>This proceeding was most unusual. During the
+preceding day, when they marched into the town,
+he had been kept in one of the buildings under
+guard, and had not seen the Professor, as the
+latter first desired to confer with John, and learn
+all about the facts about the chief and his actions.</p>
+
+<p>Oroto was most anxious to see the Great White
+Chief, and when Uraso announced to him that he
+was prepared to receive him, he was eager to
+go. John thought it would be much better for
+them to meet alone, because it was desired to
+avoid all cause for jealousy among the different
+chiefs, and it would, probably, be disagreeable to
+have them present. All must be present, or none.</p>
+
+<p>Uraso conducted him to the door of the Professor's
+apartment, and left him. As he entered, the
+Professor came forward, and grasped his hand,
+and put his arm around him, and in that manner
+conducted him to a seat.</p>
+
+<p>The chief looked at him, and saw the strong,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_225" id="p_225">p. 225</a></span>
+handsome face and the white beard and hair.
+He appeared to be awed by the sight, as he was
+affected by the kind reception. He was far from
+assuming the defiant attitude with which he met
+John.</p>
+
+<p>"I welcome you," said the Professor. "I know
+we can be friends."</p>
+
+<p>The chief was overcome by the greeting words.
+It was plain that he had prepared for an entirely
+different kind of meeting. He did not answer,
+but sat there with eyes riveted on the Professor,
+and the latter continued:</p>
+
+<p>"I hope my warriors have treated you right,
+and that they have not injured any of your people."</p>
+
+<p>When Oroto had recovered from his surprise
+he responded:</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you call me your friend?"</p>
+
+<p>The Professor smiled, and he answered: "Are
+you my enemy?"</p>
+
+<p>This was a question which was unexpected.
+What manner of man was this? The Professor
+saw the struggle in the chief's mind, as he tried
+to frame a reply.</p>
+
+<p>"I was your enemy; but I do not see why I
+should be. I was told that you were a terrible
+chief."</p>
+
+<p>"Who told you so?"</p>
+
+<p>"The wise men."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you believe them?"</p>
+
+<p>"No; I shall kill them, because they have lied
+to me and my people."</p>
+
+<p>"Why do you wish to kill them? Will that do
+you or your people any good?"</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_226" id="p_226">p. 226</a></span></p>
+
+<p>"Then what can I do with people who deceive
+us?"</p>
+
+<p>"Teach them to understand and know that it is
+better to tell the truth than to lie. When you do
+that you are also teaching the people what is
+right. If you kill them you are teaching people
+revenge, and revenge will not help them."</p>
+
+<p>"You are telling me something new and strange.
+My people would not understand that. They
+would think I feared to punish."</p>
+
+<p>"The white man does not think so. He believes
+that each man is entitled to his life. If he
+does wrong, he may be deprived of his liberty,
+and made to labor for others, and pleasures kept
+from him, but that his life should not be taken
+from him, unless he has committed the greatest
+crime against the people."</p>
+
+<p>"What is the greatest crime?"</p>
+
+<p>"The killing of another."</p>
+
+<p>"I am in your power. What do you want me to
+do? What will you do with me? I did not know
+you taught such things."</p>
+
+<p>"You are in my village; but you are free to go
+where you will. My chief did not bring you here
+to humiliate you, or to punish you. I told him to
+bring you here so you might know how the white
+men live, and how they try to make the people
+happy. You can see these things for yourself.
+Then you can understand."</p>
+
+<p>"I am told that you have people here from all
+the tribes, and that they live together in peace
+and in contentment."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes; and why not? Because one man was born
+and lives in one place, is that any reason why he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_227" id="p_227">p. 227</a></span>
+should be the enemy of one who lives somewhere
+else?"</p>
+
+<p>"But how can we prevent them from fighting
+each other?"</p>
+
+<p>"Let all the chiefs agree to do what is right
+to each other, and to their people; and treat each
+man the same, whether he belongs to your tribe
+or to some other. Do not seek revenge, but justice."</p>
+
+<p>"I shall forever be the White Chief's friend."</p>
+
+<p>"But you must be not only my friend, but the
+friend of all the chiefs. They have agreed to
+live together in peace. We will find work for all
+your people to do, so they can become happy and
+strong, and I want you to go with me to see the
+things we are doing to help the people. Before
+we do so you must talk to the chiefs who have
+been here and who know what we are trying to
+bring about."</p>
+
+<p>Oroto sought out Marmo at once. He was the
+nearest in kin to the Illyas, and the Professor
+noted this action on his part with the greatest satisfaction.
+Soon Tastoa, of the Kurabus, was
+brought in, and no restraint was placed on any of
+these conferences.</p>
+
+<p>When all the whites met that night you may be
+sure that there was a jollification that knew no
+bounds. What a wonderful thing had been accomplished.
+All grasped the Professor's hand, and
+many tears were shed in the joy of the meeting.
+Six boys and three men had been rescued from the
+jaws of death by the Professor and the two boys.</p>
+
+<p>In less than two years they had transformed an
+island of savage races into some semblance of or<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_228" id="p_228">p. 228</a></span>derly
+life, and inspired the people with a new
+impulse. It was the first time the chiefs of the
+island had ever met together. Within a week all
+were on friendly terms with each other.</p>
+
+<p>At the conference that evening the Professor
+remarked: "We have now put in nearly two years
+of hard work, and accomplished the most wonderful
+results. The boys want to go home, and it is
+right that they should. Owing to the peculiar conditions
+existing here, we have not been in a position
+where we could take any organized steps
+to go home. As long as any of our friends were
+in captivity it was our duty to remain."</p>
+
+<p>"The situation is different now. We have really
+started a little empire here. This is the 'Empire'
+that Harry spoke about when we landed here.
+He little knew how prophetic that was. We now
+have the men, the material, the energy, and the
+ingenuity to make anything that is made anywhere
+in the world."</p>
+
+<p>"We must build a ship&mdash;"</p>
+
+<p>But the Professor could go no further. The
+boys were wild with excitement at the news, as
+they gathered about him.</p>
+
+<p>"But I am coming back again," cried one after
+the other.</p>
+
+<p>"But I am not going away," added the Professor,
+"because I am afraid I should never be able
+to come back again."</p>
+
+<p>There was a tone of sadness as he said this,
+and it touched all the boys. It was hard to tell
+whether this was an occasion for joy or sorrow.</p>
+
+<p>All knew what the Professor and John and<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_229" id="p_229">p. 229</a></span>
+Blakely felt, and that it would become their great
+field for future work.</p>
+
+<p>Here was also a field for the energies of the
+boys, whose abilities could be directed into useful
+channels. Commercially the island was of immense
+value, if properly used. So long as John
+and the Professor were there no wrong speculative
+efforts would dare to be attempted by unscrupulous
+adventurers.</p>
+
+<p>John, together with Harry, Tom and Jim, who
+were the engineering force of the island, soon began
+the work of preparing the material for the
+ship which would place them in communication
+with the great world.</p>
+
+<p>The three new boys were initiated into the crafthood
+which was ever widening and gaining new
+recruits. The natives showed remarkable aptitude
+for the various branches of work. But the
+Professor and Blakely had other ideas than to
+train too many of them to labor in the mechanical
+lines.</p>
+
+<p>Here was a land, rich in soil, capable of growing
+any crop, or adapted to give up its bounty in the
+form of many valuable kinds of produce. Rubber,
+coffee, spices, cocoanuts, the finest fibers, in
+variety, and all of them now growing wild.</p>
+
+<p>This land must be occupied and tilled by a people
+adapted to the soil and climate. The principles
+of agriculture must be instilled. What a
+wonderful work to contemplate!</p>
+
+<p>The schoolhouse was ready, but there were no
+books. Robert had taken the preliminary lessons
+as an artist, and was very handy with the brush
+and pencil. Entirely on his own initiative, he<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_230" id="p_230">p. 230</a></span>
+prepared a set of letters, containing the caps of
+the alphabet, and these were cut out by him, and
+the work so delighted the Professor that he instructed
+the boys how to cast the whole series
+at one time, so that a good stock of type was finally
+turned out.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 400px; margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:2em;">
+<a id="illus-235" name="illus-235" />
+<a href="#p_231">
+<img src="images/illus-p235.jpg" width="400" height="590"
+alt="The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip"
+title="The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption">&quot;<i>The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip</i>&quot;</span>
+<p style="text-align: right; font-size: small;">[<a href="#p_235">See p. 235</a>]</p>
+</div>
+
+<p>"I have an idea," said Robert, "that it would be
+a good thing to put some pictures in the primer;
+just enough to make it look attractive."</p>
+
+<p>"That would be fun," answered Min. "Don't
+say anything to the Professor about it."</p>
+
+<p>The latter had already arranged a simple press,
+but when the latter was nearing completion, Roy
+burst out laughing, as he remarked: "Type is a
+good thing, and so is a printing press, but I am
+interested in knowing where we are going to get
+the paper."</p>
+
+<p>"Paper?" exclaimed George; "lots of it growing
+all about here." And he looked at the boys a
+little maliciously. "All we need to do is to go out
+and gather it."</p>
+
+<p>"Paper growing? Well, I have seen many things
+here, but that is something new to me."</p>
+
+<p>"Do you know what the plantain tree is, the tree,
+with the big sprawling leaves? Those leaves will
+make good sheets for printing on."</p>
+
+<p>The Professor heard the last part of the conversation,
+and remarked: "We might as well make
+paper, and I have already asked Harry to make
+a grinder for furnishing the pulp. We have the
+finest paper stock in the world."</p>
+
+<p>"Yes," exclaimed George; "the ramie."</p>
+
+<p>"No; not that. There is a reason why hemp,<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_231" id="p_231">p. 231</a></span>
+and many other fibers are better than that. Do
+you recall the peculiarity about ramie?"</p>
+
+<p>Harry remembered. It resists moisture, and
+while it makes an excellent paper would be difficult
+with their crude means to turn it out satisfactorily.
+The grinding machine was a simple affair,
+and the fiber was fed through again and again,
+until it was cut up into short lengths.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 362px;">
+<a id="illus-231" name="illus-231" />
+<a href="#p_231">
+<img src="images/illus-fig22-p231.png" width="362" height="374"
+alt="Fig. 22. Paper Making Machine." title="Fig. 22. Paper Making Machine." />
+</a>
+<span class="scribedcaption">Fig. 22. <span class="u">Paper</span> <span class="u">Making</span> <span class="u">Machine</span>.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The principal thing, however, in paper making
+is to get it the same thickness. "It will take too<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_232" id="p_232">p. 232</a></span>
+long to make a cylinder, which makes the paper
+even, and distribute the pulp perfectly, and in
+the absence of that I have ordered an apparatus
+which will turn out a sheet at a time."</p>
+
+<p>The Professor then exhibited a drawing, and
+continued: "Notice the box, which is two feet
+square inside and two feet high. See this cleat
+all around the inside, six inches from the top.
+That is to hold the frame of a cloth web, which
+fits in the box exactly."</p>
+
+<p>"At the bottom of the box is a pipe, right in
+the middle. This pipe is for the purpose of carrying
+the water into the box. Below the box is a
+larger box, and this contains the water which has
+the pulp mixed with it, just enough of the pulp to
+make it look cloudy.</p>
+
+<p>"The water in the box is carried into the box by
+the pump. When the screen, or web, is placed in
+position, and the pump set to work, the water, carrying
+the pulp, moves upwardly in the box, and
+the fine particles of pulp are caught by the screen
+and held there, the little fibers lying crisscross
+over each other.</p>
+
+<p>"Every minute or so the screen with the paper
+mat on its underside must be taken out and another
+put in, and the matted paper on each screen
+put under a press, and the water squeezed out,
+after which it will readily peel off the screen, and
+when it is dried it makes a good blotting paper.
+To make a writing paper of it, the sheet must be
+run through a number of heavily weighted steel
+rollers, but we don't need that for printing our
+books."</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_233" id="p_233">p. 233</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The paper was made in that manner, and the
+Professor was delighted when he saw the illustrations.
+Thus the first serious attempt was made
+to begin the teaching of the children, and when
+the books were ready the boys were all happy to
+undertake the work of teaching. It was here that
+the Tuolo medicine men were utilized, and it may
+be said to their credit that they found the new
+calling agreeable and pleasant.</p>
+
+<p>But there is still so much to be said about the
+town, the people, the actions of the chiefs, the
+work that was being prosecuted, the farms and
+plantations that were started, the manufactured
+articles turned out, the new houses erected everywhere,
+and the intense interest exhibited by the
+people under the new order of things.</p>
+
+<p>The boys knew they had been a great factor in
+the regeneration of the island, and were proud of
+it. Lolo, and boys of like ages with our boys, were
+given special training, due to the suggestion of
+the Professor. Some were taught the theory of
+medicine, as the necessity of proper medical treatment
+was essential. Many received the rudimentary
+knowledge of carpentry and other occupations
+from John.</p>
+
+<p>The ship was the principal topic of conversation,
+and to that the main energies were directed.
+The finest oak trees were cut and brought in; a
+new and larger sawmill installed; the machine
+shop was busy day and night in the making of
+two new lathes, a planer, and several drilling machines.</p>
+
+<p>During the rush and the excitement of all these<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_234" id="p_234">p. 234</a></span>
+new enterprises, the boys could not forget their
+earlier experiences, and about the mysterious
+things which formed parts of their adventures.</p>
+
+<p>To enumerate all of them would take too much
+space, and be unnecessary, but some of them had
+an intense personal interest, and they recalled
+how the missing flag was accounted for when John
+appeared; the removal of their boat at the Palls
+of South River was explained; the discovery of
+the light beyond the West River really indicated
+the location of the savage village.</p>
+
+<p>But there were other things still unaccounted
+for, and the boys craved a solution to the mysterious
+happenings. Who wrote the message
+found in the <i>Investigator's</i> lifeboat, No. 3? Who
+took the flagstaff at Observation Hill? Who
+placed the crude oars and the strange ropes in
+their boat which was found stranded on the sea
+beach ten miles from the place where they left it?</p>
+
+<p>The boys determined to know these things, and
+they trusted to the future to be able to give the
+answers.</p>
+
+<p>Little of the time was devoted to pleasure now.
+The great forest to the west was looked on by
+the boys with longing eyes many times. They had
+heard about the experience at Blakely's old home
+on the hill. One day Harry said: "There is one
+thing lacking in the town."</p>
+
+<p>"What is it?" asked Tom.</p>
+
+<p>"The American flag."</p>
+
+<p>"Good! We must get a fitting flag pole for
+that."</p>
+
+<p>All the boys conspired together that night.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_235" id="p_235">p. 235</a></span></p>
+
+<p>They would go to the great forest and bring in
+the finest pole to be found. Jack and Jill and
+Angel must go with them; and Lolo and his best
+boy friend were invited.</p>
+
+<p>Early in the morning, without giving anyone
+an idea of their intentions, the guns and the bolos
+were loaded on the wagon, and plenty of provisions,
+you may be assured. George and Ralph
+manned the large boat, so that the crossing of the
+river would be facilitated. The wagon still had
+the fort sections, which were taken along so that
+could be floated across.</p>
+
+<p>Within an hour the main river was reached and
+the float sections attached, so that the yaks plunged
+in and drew the wagon across, while the boat
+was drawn up on shore to await their return.</p>
+
+<p>The party plunged into the forest, taking the
+direction which Ralph and Tom had gone on the
+former trip. Quantities of game were bagged,
+but there was no exciting incident. The pole was
+the main thing, after all, and when they tramped
+in every direction the selection was narrowed
+down to two fine specimens of shellbark hickory,
+and one was felled and trimmed, and after hoisting
+one end on the wagon, the other was put on
+the truck and the party drove into Unity in the
+afternoon.</p>
+
+<p>The inhabitants swarmed the streets at the
+novel spectacle. The Professor, John, Blakely
+and Rogers instantly divined the meaning of the
+pole.</p>
+
+<p>"Where shall we put it up?" asked Harry.</p>
+
+<p>"Right in the center of the town," was the Pro<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_236" id="p_236">p. 236</a></span>fessor's
+response. "To-morrow is flag-raising
+day, and it shall be a holiday!"</p>
+
+<p>Before night the hole had been dug, and the immense
+pole erected.</p>
+
+<p>When "Old Glory" went up the next day there
+was nothing lacking but the music; the hats of
+everyone came off as the flag slowly ascended, and
+the cheers that came from the throats of the natives
+could not have been more intense, nor the
+enthusiasm greater, if participated in by genuine
+Americans.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 343px;">
+<a id="illus-236" name="illus-236" />
+<a href="#p_236">
+<img src="images/illus-fig23-p236.png" width="343" height="309" alt="Old Glory" title="Old Glory" />
+</a>
+<span class="caption"><span class="smcap">Old Glory</span></span>
+</div>
+
+
+<p class="center"><br /><br />THE END</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="p_237" id="p_237">p. 237</a></span></p>
+
+
+<hr class="major" />
+<h3><a name="GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS" id="GLOSSARY_OF_WORDS"></a>GLOSSARY OF WORDS</h3>
+<h3>USED IN TEXT</h3>
+
+<table border="0" cellpadding="2" width="86%" cellspacing="0" summary="Glossary">
+<col style="width:15%;" />
+<col style="width:85%;" />
+<tbody valign="top">
+<tr><td align='left'>Astrologer.</td><td align='left'>An interpreter of the supposed influence of the stars on the destinies of man.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Accumulation.</td><td align='left'>To add to; gathering little by little. A store of things.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Acquiring.</td><td align='left'>To receive or gain in whatsoever manner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Accosted.</td><td align='left'>To speak to; to address; to approach.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Adequate.</td><td align='left'>Sufficient; enough.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Alluring.</td><td align='left'>That which attracts; to have a fancy for.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Alternative.</td><td align='left'>Either one or the other.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Animated.</td><td align='left'>Lively; sparkling; exhilarating.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Apportion.</td><td align='left'>To divide and distribute or assign.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Aptitude.</td><td align='left'>Suited to the work; well adapted.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Betokened.</td><td align='left'>To give a promise or evidence of.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Cardinal.</td><td align='left'>The main feature; the original.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Calcareous.</td><td align='left'>Partaking of lime.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Capillary.</td><td align='left'>That capacity in liquids to cohere to material.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Celerity.</td><td align='left'>Quickly; with speed.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Climax.</td><td align='left'>To bring to a conclusion.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Chaparral.</td><td align='left'>A dense cluster of small trees.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Cooperation.</td><td align='left'>Acting together; in concert.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Concise.</td><td align='left'>Short and to the point.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Cohesive.</td><td align='left'>To stick together; to adhere to each other.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Comprehend.</td><td align='left'>To understand.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Compact.</td><td align='left'>In a small space.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Concentrated.</td><td align='left'>To bring together.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Commotion.</td><td align='left'>Not orderly; violent agitation; tumult.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Cringed.</td><td align='left'>To bow in servility; to wince.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Deterred.</td><td align='left'>Prevented; kept from.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Devoid.</td><td align='left'>To be without; bereft.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Depredations.</td><td align='left'>The act of plundering or laying waste.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Decorum.</td><td align='left'>In an orderly manner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Demoniacs.</td><td align='left'>Influenced by demons, or possessed with bad spirit.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_238" id="p_238">p. 238</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Detained.</td><td align='left'>Held as a captive.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Deftly.</td><td align='left'>Neat and skillful in action.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Diagonally.</td><td align='left'>Across from corner to corner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Dismantle.</td><td align='left'>To take apart; to dissever.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Discernible.</td><td align='left'>To see.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Disinfectant.</td><td align='left'>To make germ proof; to make sanitary.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Diversified.</td><td align='left'>A variety; having different qualities; many of the same kind.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Disclose.</td><td align='left'>To show; to advise or inform.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Doctrine.</td><td align='left'>That which is taught or set forth for belief.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Drones.</td><td align='left'>Those which are not busy, or prone to shirk.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Effusive.</td><td align='left'>Talkative.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Emboldened.</td><td align='left'>One who is encouraged to go forward.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Entrapped.</td><td align='left'>One who is caught by some design on the part of another.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Emotional.</td><td align='left'>An excitement of the mind.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Emaciated.</td><td align='left'>Lean; thin from want of food.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Emulated.</td><td align='left'>To copy after; to take pattern from.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Enumerated.</td><td align='left'>Counted.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Entrancing.</td><td align='left'>To put into a state of delight.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Ethics.</td><td align='left'>The philosophy of morals.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Evolutions.</td><td align='left'>A term employed to show the manner in which soldiers are trained.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Factor.</td><td align='left'>One of the elements in a problem.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Fantastical.</td><td align='left'>Peculiarly garbed; out of the natural manner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Fascination.</td><td align='left'>A peculiar drawing to; pleasant attraction.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Function.</td><td align='left'>Any specific act or power that belongs to an agent.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Gratified.</td><td align='left'>Satisfied; well pleased.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Hilarity.</td><td align='left'>Joy; the state of being demonstratively happy.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Identical.</td><td align='left'>The same; exactly alike.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Impulse.</td><td align='left'>That which is done at the moment.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Imprecations.</td><td align='left'>To hurl defiance; to bring down maledictions.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Impressed.</td><td align='left'>To produce an effect; warned.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Imperiously.</td><td align='left'>In a haughty manner; in a way to indicate power.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Imitated.</td><td align='left'>To do in the same manner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Initiated.</td><td align='left'>To bring into; to make familiar with; to install.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Imposing.</td><td align='left'>Adapted to make an impression.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Interspersed.</td><td align='left'>To put between or among.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Indication.</td><td align='left'>To show; to give an idea of.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Instilling.</td><td align='left'>To educate; to teach.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_239" id="p_239">p. 239</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Installed.</td><td align='left'>To establish; to put in the proper place.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Inculcate.</td><td align='left'>To teach by principle, or otherwise.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Indignant.</td><td align='left'>Anger or scorn aroused by a wrong act.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Instigation.</td><td align='left'>To entice another to do a thing.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Indefatigable.</td><td align='left'>Continual act in doing a thing; not weary in work or play.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Innumerable.</td><td align='left'>A large number; many of the same kind or thing.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Indited.</td><td align='left'>To put into words or writing.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Irritability.</td><td align='left'>Rubbing against; friction of part.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Irrepressible.</td><td align='left'>Difficult to control; hard to keep down.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Instrumental.</td><td align='left'>The means by which a thing is done.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Malediction.</td><td align='left'>A wish that harm may come; a curse.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Medium.</td><td align='left'>A means; an object that enables the carrying out of a design.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Muster roll.</td><td align='left'>The list of a set of men who have combined for an object.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Maneuvered.</td><td align='left'>The arranging of forces in a certain manner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Naturalist.</td><td align='left'>One versed in natural history.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Omen.</td><td align='left'>A sign; a favorable or unfavorable issue.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Pendant.</td><td align='left'>Hanging; an article suspended; swinging below.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Penetrated.</td><td align='left'>Going into; entering a body.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Phase.</td><td align='left'>One form; a particular manner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Projection.</td><td align='left'>To give out; a throwing, shooting or sending out.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Precarious.</td><td align='left'>Rather dangerous; not the safest.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Profusion.</td><td align='left'>A quantity; many of the same kind or quality.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Presentiment.</td><td align='left'>Believing or feeling beforehand.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Prescribing.</td><td align='left'>Setting forth; explaining in detail.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Precipitous.</td><td align='left'>Doing quickly; acting without considering results.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Restriction.</td><td align='left'>Within certain bounds or limits.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Restoration.</td><td align='left'>To bring back to its original form.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Requiting.</td><td align='left'>To pay; to give just dues.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Requisition.</td><td align='left'>The necessity for a thing; to call for some quality or article.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Regeneration.</td><td align='left'>To make over anew; to better.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Reconstructed.</td><td align='left'>To put into a better condition; or to restore to its original form.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Rhythmic.</td><td align='left'>Made to correspond in sound, in a regular or determined time.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Rudimentary.</td><td align='left'>Original, or basic.<span class='pagenum'><a name="p_240" id="p_240">p. 240</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Saturated.</td><td align='left'>To thoroughly fill a substance, as with a liquid so it will not hold more.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Scantling.</td><td align='left'>A piece of sawn timber, used as the upright support of a building.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Seclusion.</td><td align='left'>Hidden; kept out of sight.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Semblance.</td><td align='left'>The same as; likened unto.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Simulating.</td><td align='left'>To copy; to imitate.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Smelter.</td><td align='left'>A furnace for melting metals.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Solicitation.</td><td align='left'>Asking for anything; requesting, by petition or otherwise.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Stimulating.</td><td align='left'>To encourage; to cause to act.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Stalagmite.</td><td align='left'>An incrustation on the floor of a cave or cavern.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Stalactite.</td><td align='left'>The calcareous or lime hangings on the walls and ceilings of a cavern.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Stipulated.</td><td align='left'>Set forth in some particular manner.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Tactics.</td><td align='left'>The science or art of military evolutions.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Talisman.</td><td align='left'>Something that produces or is capable of bringing about a wonderful effect.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Tempered.</td><td align='left'>The quality in a metal of hardening.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Tissues.</td><td align='left'>The flesh, muscles and organic materials of a body.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Tournament.</td><td align='left'>A festival of ancient time; games and feats of arms.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Transmitted.</td><td align='left'>Sent away; forwarded to a distant place.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Transport.</td><td align='left'>Carried away by joyful news or emotions.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Typical.</td><td align='left'>A good sample; the like in kind.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Unaffected.</td><td align='left'>Not influenced; without emotion.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Undulating.</td><td align='left'>Wavy; rolling.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Unscrupulous.</td><td align='left'>Not guided by a right course; wrongful actions.</td></tr>
+</tbody></table>
+
+
+
+<hr class="major" />
+
+<h2>THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS</h2>
+<hr class="minor" />
+<h3><span class="smcap">Carpentry for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner
+all subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care
+and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work;
+the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures,
+and the rudiments of architecture. It contains over two
+hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and
+includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the
+art. The most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published
+for boys.</p>
+<hr class="minor" />
+<h3><span class="smcap">Electricity for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically
+applying the work in the successive stages. It shows how the
+knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various
+phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within
+the compass of every boy. It has a complete glossary of terms, and
+is illustrated with two hundred original drawings.</p>
+<hr class="minor" />
+<h3><span class="smcap">Practical Mechanics for Boys</span></h3>
+
+<p>This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of
+practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure
+and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized
+to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work
+is carried out. Every subject is illustrated, and model building
+explained. It contains a glossary which comprises a new system of
+cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in
+explaining subjects. Fully illustrated.</p>
+<hr class="minor" />
+<p class="center">
+<br />
+<i>Price 60 cents per volume</i>
+<br />
+</p>
+
+<hr class="major" />
+<h2><span class="smcap">The Hickory Ridge Boy Scouts</span></h2>
+
+<h3>A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS</h3>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;font-size: 85%; text-align:center;">
+ Which, in addition to the interesting boy scout stories by CAPTAIN ALAN<br/>
+  DOUGLAS, Scoutmaster, contain articles on nature lore, native animals<br/>
+     and a fund of other information pertaining to out-of-door life,<br/>
+            that will appeal to the boy's love of the open<br/>
+</p>
+<hr class="minor" />
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>I. The Campfires of the Wolf Patrol</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities to use
+their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer Chenoweth, a lad
+from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his familiarity with camp
+life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should read.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>II. Woodcraft; or, How a Patrol Leader Made Good</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+This tale presents many stirring situations in which some of the boys are called
+upon to exercise all their ingenuity and unselfishness. A story filled with
+healthful excitement.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>III. Pathfinder; or, The Missing Tenderfoot</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the credit
+of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one after the other.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>IV. Fast Nine; or, a Challenge From Fairfield</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of the
+final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof, form a
+stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent years.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>V. Great Hike; or, The Pride of The Khaki Troop</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest undertaking.
+Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured rivalry of the
+different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing situations.</p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0;"><b>VI. Endurance Test; or, How Clear Grit Won the Day</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of apparent
+failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and surprise their most
+ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain Douglas has written.</p>
+
+<hr class="minor" />
+<p style="text-indent: 0;font-size: 85%; text-align:center;"><b>Boy Scout Nature Lore to be Found in The Hickory Ridge<br/>Boy
+Scout Series</b></p>
+
+<p style="text-align: left; text-indent: 0; font-size: 85%;">
+Wild Animals of the United States&mdash;Tracking&mdash;in Number I.<br/>
+Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States in Number II.<br/>
+Reptiles of the United States in Number III.<br/>
+Fishes of the United States in Number IV.<br/>
+Insects of the United States in Number V.<br/>
+Birds of the United States in Number VI.</p>
+
+<p class="center"><i>Cloth Binding&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;Cover Illustrations in Four Colors&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;40c. per volume</i></p>
+
+<p class="center">THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY</p>
+<p class="center">147 FOURTH AVENUE (near 14th St.) NEW YORK</p>
+
+
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<p>&nbsp;</p>
+<hr class="full" />
+<p>***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES***</p>
+<p>******* This file should be named 21832-h.txt or 21832-h.zip *******</p>
+<p>This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:<br />
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/3/21832">http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/8/3/21832</a></p>
+<p>Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.</p>
+
+<p>Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.</p>
+
+
+
+<pre>
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/license">http://www.gutenberg.org/license)</a>.
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's
+eBook number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII,
+compressed (zipped), HTML and others.
+
+Corrected EDITIONS of our eBooks replace the old file and take over
+the old filename and etext number.  The replaced older file is renamed.
+VERSIONS based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving
+new filenames and etext numbers.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org">http://www.gutenberg.org</a>
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+EBooks posted prior to November 2003, with eBook numbers BELOW #10000,
+are filed in directories based on their release date.  If you want to
+download any of these eBooks directly, rather than using the regular
+search system you may utilize the following addresses and just
+download by the etext year.
+
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/etext06/</a>
+
+    (Or /etext 05, 04, 03, 02, 01, 00, 99,
+     98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90)
+
+EBooks posted since November 2003, with etext numbers OVER #10000, are
+filed in a different way.  The year of a release date is no longer part
+of the directory path.  The path is based on the etext number (which is
+identical to the filename).  The path to the file is made up of single
+digits corresponding to all but the last digit in the filename.  For
+example an eBook of filename 10234 would be found at:
+
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/0/2/3/10234
+
+or filename 24689 would be found at:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/4/6/8/24689
+
+An alternative method of locating eBooks:
+<a href="http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL">http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/GUTINDEX.ALL</a>
+
+*** END: FULL LICENSE ***
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig1-p018.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig1-p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fcac565
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig1-p018.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig10-p084.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig10-p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e5d438
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig10-p084.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig11-p092.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig11-p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acace99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig11-p092.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig12-p093.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig12-p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4a95735
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig12-p093.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig13-p131.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig13-p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cbcca53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig13-p131.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig14-p137.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig14-p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae1fb77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig14-p137.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig15-p140.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig15-p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51263e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig15-p140.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig16-p166.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig16-p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9a0f36d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig16-p166.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig17-p167.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig17-p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c097275
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig17-p167.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig18-p170.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig18-p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a031a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig18-p170.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig19-p179.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig19-p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfd6693
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig19-p179.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig2-p026.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig2-p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3bf6498
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig2-p026.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig20-p212.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig20-p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f424a7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig20-p212.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig21-p219.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig21-p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8768171
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig21-p219.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig22-p231.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig22-p231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45f4291
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig22-p231.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig23-p236.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig23-p236.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..145efff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig23-p236.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig3-p029.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig3-p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea913be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig3-p029.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig4-p045.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig4-p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56a5be4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig4-p045.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig5-p065.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig5-p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9f1bd79
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig5-p065.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig6-p068.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig6-p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bddbfdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig6-p068.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig7-p071.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig7-p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc0dff9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig7-p071.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig8-p076.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig8-p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3022893
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig8-p076.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-fig9-p077.png b/21832-h/images/illus-fig9-p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b32ddd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-fig9-p077.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-nybc.png b/21832-h/images/illus-nybc.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2a9077e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-nybc.png
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p003.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p003.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1bdad7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p003.jpg
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p035.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p035.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c26806
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p035.jpg
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p095.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p095.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4315e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p095.jpg
diff --git a/21832-h/images/illus-p235.jpg b/21832-h/images/illus-p235.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5d7e791
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/illus-p235.jpg
diff --git a/21832-h/images/spine-cover.jpg b/21832-h/images/spine-cover.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e0eba69
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-h/images/spine-cover.jpg
diff --git a/21832-page-images/c001.jpg b/21832-page-images/c001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..56c3360
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/c001.jpg
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f001.png b/21832-page-images/f001.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..95894d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f001.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f002.png b/21832-page-images/f002.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9eac761
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f002.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f003.png b/21832-page-images/f003.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6854bfb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f003.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f004.png b/21832-page-images/f004.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..48d44a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f004.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f005.png b/21832-page-images/f005.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f2b3ca1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f005.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f006.png b/21832-page-images/f006.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be2db1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f006.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f007.png b/21832-page-images/f007.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a3ec1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f007.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f008.png b/21832-page-images/f008.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..481b1c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f008.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f009.png b/21832-page-images/f009.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4668f2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f009.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f010.png b/21832-page-images/f010.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20b6c2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f010.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f011.png b/21832-page-images/f011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1408341
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f011.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f012.png b/21832-page-images/f012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bdb5bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f012.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/f013.png b/21832-page-images/f013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b6e6dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/f013.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p011.png b/21832-page-images/p011.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fc830d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p011.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p012.png b/21832-page-images/p012.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f836fdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p012.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p013.png b/21832-page-images/p013.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d93beaa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p013.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p014.png b/21832-page-images/p014.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19bf328
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p014.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p015.png b/21832-page-images/p015.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9b27494
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p015.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p016.png b/21832-page-images/p016.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30913ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p016.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p017.png b/21832-page-images/p017.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c191ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p017.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p018-image.png b/21832-page-images/p018-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21f0285
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p018-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p018.png b/21832-page-images/p018.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5439bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p018.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p019.png b/21832-page-images/p019.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c8365d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p019.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p020.png b/21832-page-images/p020.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0419034
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p020.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p021.png b/21832-page-images/p021.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..440f663
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p021.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p022.png b/21832-page-images/p022.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..247a105
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p022.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p023.png b/21832-page-images/p023.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6003d23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p023.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p024.png b/21832-page-images/p024.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f64f663
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p024.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p025.png b/21832-page-images/p025.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..921fb9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p025.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p026-image.png b/21832-page-images/p026-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..752019e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p026-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p026.png b/21832-page-images/p026.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d1ca580
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p026.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p027.png b/21832-page-images/p027.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3655d97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p027.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p028.png b/21832-page-images/p028.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c905939
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p028.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p029-image.png b/21832-page-images/p029-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba4598c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p029-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p029.png b/21832-page-images/p029.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..73bc87f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p029.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p030.png b/21832-page-images/p030.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5b628bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p030.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p031.png b/21832-page-images/p031.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02f23e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p031.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p032.png b/21832-page-images/p032.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64476c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p032.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p033.png b/21832-page-images/p033.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..12ab047
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p033.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p034.png b/21832-page-images/p034.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff2e0f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p034.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p035.png b/21832-page-images/p035.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9142753
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p035.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p036.png b/21832-page-images/p036.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eddf322
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p036.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p037.png b/21832-page-images/p037.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b1080c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p037.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p038-insert.png b/21832-page-images/p038-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6f3e98f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p038-insert.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p038.png b/21832-page-images/p038.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f37194b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p038.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p039.png b/21832-page-images/p039.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..58209f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p039.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p040.png b/21832-page-images/p040.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7980623
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p040.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p041.png b/21832-page-images/p041.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc13aa7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p041.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p042.png b/21832-page-images/p042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..16c2884
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p042.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p043.png b/21832-page-images/p043.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b325aab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p043.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p044.png b/21832-page-images/p044.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3da80c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p044.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p045-image.png b/21832-page-images/p045-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18d26fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p045-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p045.png b/21832-page-images/p045.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..99a4499
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p045.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p046.png b/21832-page-images/p046.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..523c1f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p046.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p047.png b/21832-page-images/p047.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fe13b09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p047.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p048.png b/21832-page-images/p048.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74a3322
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p048.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p049.png b/21832-page-images/p049.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bacac04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p049.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p050.png b/21832-page-images/p050.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8e48bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p050.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p051.png b/21832-page-images/p051.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f76e4fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p051.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p052.png b/21832-page-images/p052.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d0884c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p052.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p053.png b/21832-page-images/p053.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b7c464f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p053.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p054.png b/21832-page-images/p054.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94ca806
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p054.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p055.png b/21832-page-images/p055.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fda52db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p055.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p056.png b/21832-page-images/p056.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8cb354d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p056.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p057.png b/21832-page-images/p057.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75f4ae9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p057.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p058.png b/21832-page-images/p058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1377dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p058.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p059.png b/21832-page-images/p059.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..124c513
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p059.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p060.png b/21832-page-images/p060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6321da6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p060.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p061.png b/21832-page-images/p061.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2e03f35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p061.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p062.png b/21832-page-images/p062.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..06271e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p062.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p063.png b/21832-page-images/p063.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35e4fb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p063.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p064.png b/21832-page-images/p064.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13644e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p064.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p065-image.png b/21832-page-images/p065-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2873d73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p065-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p065.png b/21832-page-images/p065.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..692c1a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p065.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p066.png b/21832-page-images/p066.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b01029e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p066.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p067.png b/21832-page-images/p067.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d42eeb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p067.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p068-image.png b/21832-page-images/p068-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c4d1ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p068-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p068.png b/21832-page-images/p068.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4abd72e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p068.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p069.png b/21832-page-images/p069.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa74a06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p069.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p070.png b/21832-page-images/p070.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..479086d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p070.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p071-image.png b/21832-page-images/p071-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3803957
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p071-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p071.png b/21832-page-images/p071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4e5306c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p071.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p072.png b/21832-page-images/p072.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c03919a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p072.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p073.png b/21832-page-images/p073.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68999e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p073.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p074.png b/21832-page-images/p074.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6bf96b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p074.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p075.png b/21832-page-images/p075.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0862a12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p075.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p076-image.png b/21832-page-images/p076-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..917f205
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p076-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p076.png b/21832-page-images/p076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45ac6e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p076.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p077-image.png b/21832-page-images/p077-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9bd1a7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p077-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p077.png b/21832-page-images/p077.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..021eb18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p077.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p078.png b/21832-page-images/p078.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f42655
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p078.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p079.png b/21832-page-images/p079.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a26dd55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p079.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p080.png b/21832-page-images/p080.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..38ae8f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p080.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p081.png b/21832-page-images/p081.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..603e29a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p081.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p082.png b/21832-page-images/p082.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6d6dcef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p082.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p083.png b/21832-page-images/p083.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b0afbd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p083.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p084-image.png b/21832-page-images/p084-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..894081d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p084-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p084.png b/21832-page-images/p084.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c8aaca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p084.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p085.png b/21832-page-images/p085.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f6190bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p085.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p086-insert.png b/21832-page-images/p086-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1308c28
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p086-insert.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p086.png b/21832-page-images/p086.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92e3376
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p086.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p087.png b/21832-page-images/p087.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3419a13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p087.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p088.png b/21832-page-images/p088.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..39be611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p088.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p089.png b/21832-page-images/p089.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c218f95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p089.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p090.png b/21832-page-images/p090.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..056c8c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p090.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p091.png b/21832-page-images/p091.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..83a75fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p091.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p092-image.png b/21832-page-images/p092-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62079fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p092-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p092.png b/21832-page-images/p092.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b3ced94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p092.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p093-image.png b/21832-page-images/p093-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..db07b52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p093-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p093.png b/21832-page-images/p093.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..916139a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p093.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p094.png b/21832-page-images/p094.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..610141c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p094.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p095.png b/21832-page-images/p095.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6a88f89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p095.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p096.png b/21832-page-images/p096.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35e1db5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p096.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p097.png b/21832-page-images/p097.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de4186e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p097.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p098.png b/21832-page-images/p098.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..75417fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p098.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p099.png b/21832-page-images/p099.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d6f6a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p099.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p100.png b/21832-page-images/p100.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..717721a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p100.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p101.png b/21832-page-images/p101.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f767dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p101.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p102.png b/21832-page-images/p102.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..539a920
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p102.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p103.png b/21832-page-images/p103.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..905d9e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p103.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p104.png b/21832-page-images/p104.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cc79a2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p104.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p105.png b/21832-page-images/p105.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8ffced9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p105.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p106.png b/21832-page-images/p106.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f4af81
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p106.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p107.png b/21832-page-images/p107.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..850eb7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p107.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p108.png b/21832-page-images/p108.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de2558d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p108.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p109.png b/21832-page-images/p109.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ffb51b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p109.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p110.png b/21832-page-images/p110.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..93b03d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p110.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p111.png b/21832-page-images/p111.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b116cfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p111.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p112.png b/21832-page-images/p112.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..68b67b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p112.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p113.png b/21832-page-images/p113.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53e8464
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p113.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p114.png b/21832-page-images/p114.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e28d98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p114.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p115.png b/21832-page-images/p115.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64a47bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p115.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p116.png b/21832-page-images/p116.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2924fe4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p116.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p117.png b/21832-page-images/p117.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5af7aec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p117.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p118.png b/21832-page-images/p118.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e81ce7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p118.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p119.png b/21832-page-images/p119.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebb6938
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p119.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p120.png b/21832-page-images/p120.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a56a55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p120.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p121.png b/21832-page-images/p121.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..770e28c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p121.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p122.png b/21832-page-images/p122.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3772323
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p122.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p123.png b/21832-page-images/p123.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5c3c8f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p123.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p124.png b/21832-page-images/p124.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63a0d6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p124.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p125.png b/21832-page-images/p125.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fec7ccc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p125.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p126.png b/21832-page-images/p126.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d007212
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p126.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p127.png b/21832-page-images/p127.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..60c723b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p127.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p128.png b/21832-page-images/p128.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c90f9cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p128.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p129.png b/21832-page-images/p129.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b9f8104
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p129.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p130.png b/21832-page-images/p130.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c131bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p130.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p131-image.png b/21832-page-images/p131-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..61849cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p131-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p131.png b/21832-page-images/p131.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..676e5f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p131.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p132.png b/21832-page-images/p132.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aa20f82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p132.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p133.png b/21832-page-images/p133.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..793113e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p133.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p134.png b/21832-page-images/p134.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b64ed22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p134.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p135.png b/21832-page-images/p135.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3749da3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p135.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p136.png b/21832-page-images/p136.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..de1cf9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p136.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p137-image.png b/21832-page-images/p137-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c08b8c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p137-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p137.png b/21832-page-images/p137.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..425fa72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p137.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p138.png b/21832-page-images/p138.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..672d8c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p138.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p139.png b/21832-page-images/p139.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3ef5b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p139.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p140-image.png b/21832-page-images/p140-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f23b270
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p140-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p140.png b/21832-page-images/p140.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b11cb9f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p140.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p141.png b/21832-page-images/p141.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..30f336d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p141.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p142.png b/21832-page-images/p142.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13c5549
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p142.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p143.png b/21832-page-images/p143.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a28739d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p143.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p144.png b/21832-page-images/p144.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..207a7d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p144.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p145.png b/21832-page-images/p145.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e72df95
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p145.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p146.png b/21832-page-images/p146.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fffb5b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p146.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p147.png b/21832-page-images/p147.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d136cf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p147.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p148.png b/21832-page-images/p148.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b266a29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p148.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p149.png b/21832-page-images/p149.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53b4ef7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p149.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p150.png b/21832-page-images/p150.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c781c5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p150.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p151.png b/21832-page-images/p151.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b475f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p151.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p152.png b/21832-page-images/p152.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8e0b5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p152.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p153.png b/21832-page-images/p153.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aadb85d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p153.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p154.png b/21832-page-images/p154.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b7cd74
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p154.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p155.png b/21832-page-images/p155.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8207ec3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p155.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p156.png b/21832-page-images/p156.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51a03d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p156.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p157.png b/21832-page-images/p157.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e301d54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p157.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p158.png b/21832-page-images/p158.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9dae0ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p158.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p159.png b/21832-page-images/p159.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b2b7d68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p159.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p160.png b/21832-page-images/p160.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..faa47c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p160.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p161.png b/21832-page-images/p161.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bcdd737
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p161.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p162.png b/21832-page-images/p162.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ace748d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p162.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p163.png b/21832-page-images/p163.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0667764
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p163.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p164.png b/21832-page-images/p164.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..647e29a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p164.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p165.png b/21832-page-images/p165.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6564bbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p165.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p166-image.png b/21832-page-images/p166-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8400ba1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p166-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p166.png b/21832-page-images/p166.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2247bf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p166.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p167-image.png b/21832-page-images/p167-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4524bdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p167-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p167.png b/21832-page-images/p167.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..02f1725
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p167.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p168.png b/21832-page-images/p168.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..329b9c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p168.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p169.png b/21832-page-images/p169.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7913bf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p169.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p170-image.png b/21832-page-images/p170-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a10879c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p170-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p170.png b/21832-page-images/p170.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e41fde2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p170.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p171.png b/21832-page-images/p171.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..18d70a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p171.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p172.png b/21832-page-images/p172.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f17316
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p172.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p173.png b/21832-page-images/p173.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7187df7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p173.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p174.png b/21832-page-images/p174.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a018cfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p174.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p175.png b/21832-page-images/p175.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..62629a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p175.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p176.png b/21832-page-images/p176.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ea388b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p176.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p177.png b/21832-page-images/p177.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f38592e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p177.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p178.png b/21832-page-images/p178.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a16f57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p178.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p179-image.png b/21832-page-images/p179-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cff24d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p179-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p179.png b/21832-page-images/p179.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85ee579
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p179.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p180.png b/21832-page-images/p180.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21ae90f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p180.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p181.png b/21832-page-images/p181.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7c113fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p181.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p182.png b/21832-page-images/p182.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6039ff4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p182.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p183.png b/21832-page-images/p183.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d80b1af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p183.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p184.png b/21832-page-images/p184.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..53ef3c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p184.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p185.png b/21832-page-images/p185.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2c1cc03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p185.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p186.png b/21832-page-images/p186.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ae82619
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p186.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p187.png b/21832-page-images/p187.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fa62128
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p187.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p188.png b/21832-page-images/p188.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7b2836f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p188.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p189.png b/21832-page-images/p189.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e9b404a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p189.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p190.png b/21832-page-images/p190.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d8dd3c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p190.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p191.png b/21832-page-images/p191.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..851ccbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p191.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p192.png b/21832-page-images/p192.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d9018df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p192.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p193.png b/21832-page-images/p193.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..361d9f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p193.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p194.png b/21832-page-images/p194.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6be9986
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p194.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p195.png b/21832-page-images/p195.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1135869
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p195.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p196.png b/21832-page-images/p196.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..075a29f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p196.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p197.png b/21832-page-images/p197.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7de8b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p197.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p198.png b/21832-page-images/p198.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1fc15fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p198.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p199.png b/21832-page-images/p199.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d66500
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p199.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p200.png b/21832-page-images/p200.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..85e47be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p200.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p201.png b/21832-page-images/p201.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f22ecd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p201.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p202.png b/21832-page-images/p202.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e397a24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p202.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p203.png b/21832-page-images/p203.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41b1c98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p203.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p204.png b/21832-page-images/p204.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f4b9780
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p204.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p205.png b/21832-page-images/p205.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..969f6e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p205.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p206.png b/21832-page-images/p206.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4398ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p206.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p207.png b/21832-page-images/p207.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2d46c6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p207.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p208.png b/21832-page-images/p208.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..28c38a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p208.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p209.png b/21832-page-images/p209.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0cf7c19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p209.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p210.png b/21832-page-images/p210.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c5a5f75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p210.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p211.png b/21832-page-images/p211.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3469b6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p211.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p212-image.png b/21832-page-images/p212-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bbbef82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p212-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p212.png b/21832-page-images/p212.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7d4a043
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p212.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p213.png b/21832-page-images/p213.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..073b733
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p213.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p214.png b/21832-page-images/p214.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7e38306
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p214.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p215.png b/21832-page-images/p215.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3b0c2ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p215.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p216.png b/21832-page-images/p216.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..692506d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p216.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p217.png b/21832-page-images/p217.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..378cdb9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p217.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p218.png b/21832-page-images/p218.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3cd4d3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p218.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p219-image.png b/21832-page-images/p219-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0550670
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p219-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p219.png b/21832-page-images/p219.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1c79b6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p219.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p220.png b/21832-page-images/p220.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0f0f71a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p220.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p221.png b/21832-page-images/p221.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..34ac911
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p221.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p222.png b/21832-page-images/p222.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f9b559
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p222.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p223.png b/21832-page-images/p223.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..36b3d58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p223.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p224.png b/21832-page-images/p224.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ef77a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p224.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p225.png b/21832-page-images/p225.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c81be37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p225.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p226.png b/21832-page-images/p226.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..732af6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p226.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p227.png b/21832-page-images/p227.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..90a6369
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p227.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p228.png b/21832-page-images/p228.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c562edb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p228.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p229.png b/21832-page-images/p229.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7dea337
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p229.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p230-insert.png b/21832-page-images/p230-insert.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8291544
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p230-insert.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p230.png b/21832-page-images/p230.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ff3a6f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p230.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p231-image.png b/21832-page-images/p231-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82bc426
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p231-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p231.png b/21832-page-images/p231.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8d48ad2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p231.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p232.png b/21832-page-images/p232.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..52d2110
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p232.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p233.png b/21832-page-images/p233.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1a9689
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p233.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p234.png b/21832-page-images/p234.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..21c2ff7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p234.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p235.png b/21832-page-images/p235.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cda3953
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p235.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p236-image.png b/21832-page-images/p236-image.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..145efff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p236-image.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p236.png b/21832-page-images/p236.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d688a1d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p236.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p237.png b/21832-page-images/p237.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..70ddb7a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p237.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p238.png b/21832-page-images/p238.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1aa4c1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p238.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p239.png b/21832-page-images/p239.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8f3390d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p239.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p240.png b/21832-page-images/p240.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f80609
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p240.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p241.png b/21832-page-images/p241.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9097ce5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p241.png
diff --git a/21832-page-images/p242.png b/21832-page-images/p242.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b71b030
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832-page-images/p242.png
diff --git a/21832.txt b/21832.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63994b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7857 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the
+Savages, by Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Wonder Island Boys: Conquest of the Savages
+
+
+Author: Roger Thompson Finlay
+
+
+
+Release Date: June 14, 2007  [eBook #21832]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: CONQUEST
+OF THE SAVAGES***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Joe Longo and the Project Gutenberg Online Distributed
+Proofreading Team (https://www.pgdp.net)
+
+
+
+Note: Project Gutenberg also has an HTML version of this
+      file which includes the original illustrations.
+      See 21832-h.htm or 21832-h.zip:
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21832/21832-h/21832-h.htm)
+      or
+      (https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/1/21832/21832-h.zip)
+
+
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+
+Thrilling adventures by sea and land of two boys and an aged Professor
+who are cast away on an island with absolutely nothing but their
+clothing. By gradual and natural stages they succeed in constructing all
+forms of devices used in the mechanical arts and learn the scientific
+theories involved in every walk of life. These subjects are all treated
+in an incidental and natural way in the progress of events, from the
+most fundamental standpoint without technicalities, and include every
+department of knowledge. Numerous illustrations accompany the text.
+
+  Two thousand things every boy ought to know. Every page
+             a romance. Every line a fact.
+
+         *       *       *       *       *
+
+         _Six titles--60 cents per volume_
+
+         *       *       *       *       *
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Castaways
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+               Exploring the Island
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Mysteries of the Caverns
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+                  The Tribesmen
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+              The Capture and Pursuit
+
+              THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+            The Conquest of the Savages
+
+                    PUBLISHED BY
+             THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+         147 FOURTH AVENUE      NEW YORK
+
+               THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+         *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+THE CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES
+
+
+
+THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS
+
+THE CONQUEST OF THE SAVAGES
+
+by
+
+ROGER T. FINLAY
+
+Illustrated
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+
+The New York Book Company
+New York
+Copyright, 1914, by
+The New York Book Company
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+I. THE COMPACT BETWEEN THE FOUR ALLIED TRIBES,       Page 11
+
+       The camp startled by Sutoto. Confederation of the
+       Tuolos, Kurabus and Illyas. A council of all the
+       chiefs. The Professor's address. Advising unity of
+       all the tribes against the hostiles. The assent of
+       the chiefs. The views of Oma, Uraso and Muro. How
+       the allied tribes met. Review of the work of the
+       Professor and the boys. Determine to send a force to
+       the Cataract. Conclude to remove all tools to the
+       southwest. The warriors selected. Adopting a settled
+       plan. Mustering the warriors. Sending for Chief
+       Suros of the Berees. The muster roll. John in
+       command of the forces to the Cataract. Blakely in
+       command of the home forces. The march to protect the
+       Brabos. A compact between the allied tribes. John
+       and his party on the march. Sadness at giving up
+       Cataract. At the Cataract. The flag as a charm.
+       Uraso's interpretation of the flag.
+
+II. BUSY TIMES AT THE CATARACT. THE ALARMING NEWS
+                                                     Page 24
+
+       The tribute to the flag. A national talisman.
+       Entertaining the warriors. Starting the water wheel
+       in motion. The sawmill at work. Making spears.
+       Gathering and threshing barley. The roast ox and the
+       feast. Making bread. The surprising novelties for
+       the warriors. Determining to make guns before
+       dismantling. Building a new wagon. Uraso directing
+       the work of the men. The universal tattoo. Its
+       significance. Designating name and rank. Clothing.
+       Blakely drilling the army at the Brabo village. News
+       of the approach of the old chief Suros. The
+       Professor and party receiving him with honor. The
+       conversation with Suros. His hearty accord. Jim and
+       Will. Their observations. The value of unity.
+       Sutoto's report about the confederated tribes.
+       Information of their movement toward Cataract.
+       John's scouts at the Cataract capture two Kurabus.
+       Startling intelligence. Interviewing the captives.
+       Completing the new wagon. Sending out scouts toward
+       the Kurabus.
+
+III.  INTERCEPTING THE MARCH OF THE CONFEDERATES. THE
+TREASURE                                             Page 37
+
+       Blakely with a force to intercept the confederates.
+       Sutoto delegated to inform John. Reaching the
+       Cataract. Interesting scenes at the Cataract for
+       Sutoto. The scouts report the tribes to the west.
+       Blakely's force near the confederates. Watching
+       their movements. John's messenger to Blakely. Advice
+       that the tribes are waiting for reinforcements. The
+       tribes on the march east. Blakely's message to John.
+       Blakely intercepting the tribes. His message to the
+       enemy. Their surprise. To give their answer in two
+       suns. The message to the Professor. The Professor
+       decides to capture the Kurabus' village. On the
+       march. Capturing the Kurabus' reinforcements. The
+       villages in his possession. The Professor's message
+       to John and Blakely. A message from Blakely.
+       Hurrying the work at Cataract. Making guns and
+       spears. Taro. The treasure in the cave. Decide to
+       take it to their new home. Loading up the wagons.
+       Transferring the hoard in the caves. A messenger
+       informing John of the battle. Instructs Muro to go
+       to aid of Blakely.
+
+IV.  THE SURRENDER OF THE KURABUS                    Page 50
+
+       The load of treasure. A doleful sound. The "cry of
+       the lost soul." Activity at Cataract. Bringing in
+       the flag. The trip to Observation Hill. The warriors
+       participate. George and Harry lower the flag. An
+       impressive scene. The last sad night at the
+       Cataract. A runner from John to the Professor. The
+       confederates within eight miles of Cataract. A
+       movement to capture them. Messenger from the
+       Kurabus' village arrives too soon. The flight of the
+       confederated tribes. The Kurabus determine to defend
+       their village. John orders a forced march to assist
+       the Professor. The messenger from Muro advises the
+       Professor. He learns of the approach of the
+       Professor. The arrival of John. The confederates at
+       the Kurabus' village. Surprise of the latter at the
+       leniency of the Professor. Advancing on the Kurabus'
+       village. A messenger from, the Kurabus. Agree to
+       surrender. The flight of the Tuolos and Illyas. The
+       Kurabus join the allies. Submission. Tastoa's
+       message to the other tribes.
+
+V. THE NEW TOWN SITE. THE WATER WHEEL AND SAWMILL
+                                                     Page 62
+
+       Return to the Brabo village. The train from Cataract
+       in sight. The triumphal entrance into the village.
+       The festivities. Safety of the Brabos assured. The
+       Professor tells the chiefs his object in forming the
+       alliance. Suggests the building of a new town. To
+       belong to all the tribes. To take all the chiefs to
+       the new town. The boys want their herd of yaks.
+       Sutoto and party go for them. Blakely's fighting
+       force. The Banyan tree. Its peculiar growth. Sap in
+       trees. Capillary attraction. Hunting a town site.
+       Uraso selects a place. A water-fall. An ideal spot.
+       Reported arrival of the herd. Fencing off a field.
+       How the fence was built. The warriors at work.
+       Building a new water wheel. Erecting a sawmill. The
+       warriors at work bringing in logs. The sawmill at
+       work.
+
+VI. BUILDING UP THE NEW TOWN                         Page 74
+
+       Disquieting rumors of the confederates. Shop and
+       laboratory put up. A safe place for the treasure.
+       Making looms. Searching for minerals. Putting up a
+       furnace and smelter. Making molds for copper coins.
+       The mint. Teaching the people how to use money.
+       First lessons in industry. The measure of value.
+       Coins of no value. Paying wages. Inculcating the
+       ideas of pay for labor. Teaching natives the
+       principles of purchase and sale. Making bargains.
+       Begin the erection of buildings. The Tuolos and
+       Illyas still bitter. Evidences of hostilities.
+       Decide to conquer the Tuolos. John at the head of an
+       expedition. The natives encouraged to bring in all
+       kinds of vegetables. Chica. Burning oil. Why
+       different plants grow differently on the same soil.
+       Ralph and Tom accompany John on the expedition.
+       Going to visit the tribe which captured them.
+
+VII. THE EXPEDITION AGAINST THE TUOLOS               Page 86
+
+       Crossing the West River. Approaching the Tuolos
+       village from the south. The advance scouts. First
+       signs of the Tuolos. The feasting at the village.
+       Ralph and Tom wander from the camp. They discover a
+       cave. Striking a match. The weird interior. Leave
+       the cave to notify John. Return to the cave. A
+       hurried exploration. The home of the Medicine men.
+       Their absence at the village. Meeting the Medicine
+       men at the entrance. Effecting a capture. The
+       Krishnos. A curious cross found by John in the cave.
+       Its history. The uproar in the village. John
+       confronting the Medicine men. They tell him the
+       Great Spirit will destroy him. John strikes a light
+       on the cross with, matches. The Medicine men in
+       terror. Orders one of them to go to the village and
+       tell the Chief to surrender. Surrounding the
+       village. Muro captures a rival set of Medicine men.
+       Another cave. Questioning the newly-arrived
+       captives. They are defiant.
+
+VIII. THE SUBMISSION OF THE TUOLOS                  Page 100
+
+       Threatening the Medicine men. Beating them for
+       lying. Morning. Dissensions in the village. Learn
+       they are surrounded. The Chief comes forward.
+       Meeting John and Muro. John's plain talk to the
+       Chief. Demands his immediate surrender. The Chief
+       stunned. Says he will go and tell his people. The
+       Chief returns. Surrenders. The warriors march into
+       the village. Liberating the captured Brabos. Ralph
+       and Tom visit the large hut where they were
+       confined. Blakely showing the Chief the maneuvers of
+       the warriors. The Chief proposes to torture the
+       Medicine men. John interferes. Asks that they be
+       turned over to him. The Professor and the colony.
+       The insulting message from the Illyas. The messenger
+       to John. Building chairs and tables. Two-and
+       three-room cottages. Stimulating individual efforts.
+       The first thief and the treatment. John and party
+       visit the cave east of the village.
+
+IX. PLANS FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE NATIVES            Page 111
+
+       Entering the cave. What they found. The treasure as
+       John had described it. Removing it to the wagon. The
+       Chief, the Krishnos and a number of the warriors
+       taken to the new town. Approaching home. The Chief
+       Marmo. Meets the Professor. The welcoming functions.
+       Interest in the works. Watching the loom. Trying to
+       teach him new ideas. A lesson in justice. Told the
+       difference between right and wrong. Blakely the man
+       of business. The island as a source of wealth.
+       Blakely determines to stay on the island. Agree to
+       build a large vessel. Projecting a trip home.
+       Agricultural pursuits. The states. How lands were to
+       be disposed of. Value of land. Proposing an
+       expedition to the Illyas. Marmo sends a message to
+       the Illyas. Making new guns for the expedition.
+
+X. THE PECULIAR SAVAGE BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS          Page 124
+
+       The Krishnos. Chief Marmo learning. The Tuolo
+       workman asks permission to bring his family to the
+       new town. The boys find a name for the town. Unity.
+       The Hindoo christening. The expedition against the
+       Illyas. Three hundred warriors. Reflections of the
+       boys. Six tribes. Heading for the Saboro village.
+       Muro happy. A day and night of feasting. Muro's
+       family. The pocket mirrors. Lolo. An artisan. Events
+       at Unity. Two deaths. The peculiar rites. The
+       Spirits in the air. Rewards. Savage beliefs. The
+       honored dead. Lessons from the Great Spirit.
+
+XI. EXPEDITION TO SUBDUE THE ILLYAS                 Page 137
+
+       The warriors' families. The plaintain leaf. The
+       native loom. Weaving. Primitive goods. A store set
+       up. Kitchen utensils. Bringing in ore and supplies.
+       Sanitary arrangements. Home comforts. Native combs.
+       Fish fins. An immense turtle. Tortoise shells. John
+       and the war party. Illyas reported in front.
+       Character of country. Savage beliefs. The moon in
+       their worship. Distance to the Illyas village. In
+       sight of the first Illyas. Borderlines. Double line
+       of guards. Illyas surprised. Capturing an Illyas
+       warrior. Sending him back with a peace message. A
+       strong position. The history of the Illyas.
+       Differences in the color of the various tribes.
+
+XII. THE PERILOUS TRIP OF THE WAGON                 Page 149
+
+       At Unity. Suros and Oma announce they will not
+       return to their tribes. The return of the Tuolo
+       warrior and family. A cottage for him. Famished. How
+       the Professor explained his act of humanity to Chief
+       Marmo. The principles of justice. Marmo accompanies
+       the Professor through the town. An object lesson.
+       Ralph and Jim in charge of the factory. Sending out
+       hunters to gather in yaks. Laying out fields.
+       Wonderful vegetation. John and the Illyas. Planking
+       movement around the Illyas. The charge. The Illyas
+       in confusion. Their retreat. The forest a barrier.
+       Sighting the main village. Astonishment at its
+       character. An elevated plateau. A town by design.
+       Peculiarly formed hills or mounds. Fortified. The
+       mystery. Sending the wagons to the south. Avoiding
+       the forest. No word from the team. The teams reach
+       the river. Intercepted. Illyas in front. Blocked by
+       precipitous banks. Forming camp. Sending messengers
+       to John. Muro gets the message. Hastens to relieve
+       the force with the wagon. The savage attack. A
+       volley behind the Illyas.
+
+XIII. THE REMARKABLE DISCOVERY AT BLAKELY'S MOUNTAIN
+      HOME                                          Page 163
+
+       At Unity. The weekly outing. The great forest to the
+       west. The trip of the whites to Blakely's forest
+       home. Driftwood. Centrifugal and centripetal motion.
+       The forest animals. Orang-outan. The monkeys.
+       Reaching the hill. The scaling vine. Reaching the
+       recessed rocks. The two skeletons in the rocks. A
+       gun and trinkets. A sextant. A letter. No identity.
+       The message. Effort to decipher it. A mound for the
+       bones. Forwarding copy of message to John. John's
+       examination of the Illyas' village. The remarkable
+       character of the buildings. Muro returns with the
+       wagons. The Tuolos as fighters. Two captured. Trying
+       to open communications. Returns of the messengers.
+       Defiance. Permitting the messenger to return.
+
+XIV. THE SURPRISE AND CAPTURE OF THE ILLYAS' STRONGHOLD
+                                                    Page 175
+
+       Astonishment of the Illyas' messenger. The character
+       of the eastern side of the town. A movement in the
+       night. Surrounding the town. Muro and Uraso as
+       warriors. The architecture of the buildings. Not
+       built by the natives. Different kinds of
+       architecture. Their distinction. Disposing the
+       forces. The signal for attack. John, and his party
+       rush the breastworks. Enter the town. The surprise
+       and confusion of the Illyas. Harry observes the
+       Illyas' chief and attendants. Surrounds and capture
+       them. Muro makes a charge. The chief signals
+       surrender. Uraso surrounds the Illyas. Marched to
+       the great square. The conference between John and
+       the chief. The Doric building. The Illyas' chief.
+       His imperious air. Dignity of Uraso and Muro.
+
+XV. THE RESCUE OF FIVE CAPTIVES                     Page 187
+
+       The chief's question. John's brief answer. The chief
+       trying to deceive John. Questions the chief about
+       the messages. The lying answers. The punishment
+       imposed on the warriors. Orders the same punishment
+       for the chief. Consternation. Uraso and Muro plead
+       for the chief. Whipping the most disgraceful
+       punishment for a chief. Demands the white captives.
+       Sama to show the way to their hiding place. The
+       wagon brought out. The boys, accompanied by Lolo,
+       and commanded by Stut. Reach the village. The
+       captives' hut. The rush for the door. The five
+       captives. Three _Investigator's_ boys. A pitiable
+       sight. Hungry. Harry's inscription on the litter. A
+       Saboro and a white man. Taking the Illyas' warriors
+       along. Feeding the rescued ones.
+
+XVI. REMARKABLE GROWTH OF UNITY                     Page 199
+
+       Awaiting word from John. Telegraph line needed.
+       Wireless telegraphy. Sound and power. Vibrations. A
+       universal force. B Street in Unity. Visiting the
+       villagers in their homes. Incentives to beautify
+       their houses. Erecting larger dwellings for the
+       chiefs. The schoolhouse. A growing town. Marvels to
+       the chiefs. The mysterious things the white men do.
+       The thermometer. Teaching medicine. Cinchona.
+       Calisaya. Acids. The boys reach the Illyas' village
+       with the liberated prisoners. Making them
+       comfortable. The white man a former companion of
+       John. A health resort. The _Investigator's_ lifeboat
+       No. 3. Mystery about the note. The commotion
+       outside. Capturing the Illyas' reinforcements from
+       the south. Provisions. Cultivation of the soil.
+       George and Harry explore the buildings. Trying to
+       solve the puzzle. Arrangements of the streets.
+
+XVII. THE MYSTERIOUS CAVE. RETURNING TO UNITY       Page 211
+
+       Cornerstones. The treasure chart. Caves near the
+       town. A guess at the meaning of the buildings. The
+       Medicine men. Questioning the chief. He says John
+       will be destroyed if he enters the cave. John's test
+       of the truth of the chief's statement. The trip to
+       the cave. Proving that the Medicine men lied. The
+       chief enjoys his first ride. The cave entrance. John
+       goes in. He finds the Krishnos. Their conversation.
+       John appears before them. The consternation. Orders
+       them to leave the cave. Shows the chief that the
+       Medicine men have lied. Taking them to the village.
+       John and the boys explore the cave alone. No
+       treasure. An immense deposit of copper. Probable
+       explanation of the houses of the town. An immense
+       chamber. The start for Unity. Sighting the Saboro
+       village. Muro's family. Waiting to go to Unity. The
+       town out to meet the returning warriors. Angel at
+       the reception.
+
+XVIII. BUILDING A SHIP TO TAKE THEM HOME. PEACE,    Page 221
+
+       Oroto surprised at the appearance of Marmo. Anxious
+       to see the great White Chief. The Professor
+       welcomes the Illyas' chief. His great surprise.
+       Friendship. Has no further belief in the wise men.
+       Life and death. Why he was brought to Unity. Peace
+       among the tribes. Oroto and Marmo confer. A
+       jollification of the whites. What had been
+       accomplished in two years. Building a ship for home.
+       Sadness as well as joy. The engineering force of
+       Unity. How the different tribes lived together. Rich
+       soil. New houses. New people. A printing press. A
+       schoolhouse. Making paper. Many mysteries unsolved.
+       One thing lacking. The flag. Getting the flagpole.
+       The ceremony. Hoisting OLD GLORY.
+
+
+
+
+LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+  "The warriors, together with the chief and the two boys, Jim
+     and Will, rushed to meet them"                   Frontispiece
+
+                                                              PAGE
+  "Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three
+    picked out the most trustworthy scouts"                     38
+
+  "The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves
+  on the ground in terror"                                      86
+
+  "The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which
+    Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip"                 230
+
+  Position of Wagon and Attacking Force                         18
+  George's Old Dutch Oven                                       26
+  The Tattooed Arm. Antelope                                    29
+  The Taro Plant and Bulb                                       45
+  The Banyan Tree                                               65
+  Showing Capillary Attraction                                  68
+  Sample of Island Fence                                        71
+  The One-cent Coin                                             76
+  The Five-cent Coin                                            77
+  Chica. The Gum Plant                                          84
+  Stone Cross Found in the Cave                                 92
+  Ancient Crosses                                               93
+  Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds                          131
+  Primitive Weaving-Frame                                      137
+  Comb from Fin of Fish                                        140
+  The Marmoset                                                 166
+  Proboscis Monkey                                             167
+  The Mysterious Message                                       170
+  Orders of Architecture                                       179
+  The Peculiar Illya Village                                   212
+  Diagram of Cross-shaped Cave                                 219
+  Paper-making Machine                                         231
+  The Stars and Stripes                                        236
+
+
+
+
+THE CONQUEST
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE COMPACT BETWEEN THE FOUR ALLIED TRIBES
+
+
+When the morning sun was struggling to come up over the mountains in the
+east, the whole camp was startled by Sutoto, who, with a number of the
+Berees during the night, had acted as a picket, to observe the attitude
+of the defeated tribes.
+
+He made his way to the Professor, who had taken his old place in the
+wagon. "The Tuolos, Kurabus and Illyas have all united and are now on
+the big river."
+
+"When did you last see them?"
+
+He held up his fingers to indicate the time, and the Professor called to
+Will: "Do you know what time he means?"
+
+Will soon interpreted the sign to mean three in the morning.
+
+"If they have not been separated it is a sign that they intend to
+continue the fight," said John.
+
+"I suggest," replied the Professor, "that we call a council of the
+principal men in the tribes, and let them fully understand what our aim
+and desires are, and thus unite the four tribes in a bond of unity. This
+is a most opportune time."
+
+The news of the obvious action of the tribes to the north was soon
+learned by all, and when the Professor's view was communicated there
+was a universal assent.
+
+Within an hour the chiefs assembled, and the Professor addressed them as
+follows: "My brothers, I am glad to be able to talk to you, and Uraso
+and Muro will tell you what I have to say. The Great Spirit sent us
+here, and we tried for a long time to tell you why we came, but you did
+not understand it.
+
+"The Great Spirit is the same to all tribes; he does not favor one more
+than the other, but sometimes one tribe will understand better than the
+other what he wants, and when they do know what he says it makes them
+stronger and better.
+
+"We believe the Great Spirit wants the different tribes to live together
+in peace, and not kill each other, and for that purpose he has given
+each one something to do. If he does that in a right way he not only
+helps himself, but he helps everyone else.
+
+"We want to show you how to do this, but before we can start we must all
+be like one family. We do not ask the Berees to give up their customs
+and become Saboros, nor do we want the Brabos to do as the Osagas do. We
+do not care what you believe about this or that, or how you shall dress,
+or what language you shall speak. The only thing we should be careful to
+do alike is to so work that we shall not injure each other.
+
+"It will not be hard to learn this, and we will all be patient, and we
+ask you to be patient with us. We want to show you that the ground is
+your mother, and when you ask her for fruit she will give you plenty,
+and you can soon learn to make things which will make your wives and
+children happy and contented.
+
+"You will know that anything you own will be yours, and none can take it
+from you, and if anyone tries to take it, everyone will stand up and
+protect you. The tribes which are now to the north must be made to
+understand this, and we must unite to compel them to agree to this
+manner of living.
+
+"I know that the tribes are powerful enemies, and can bring a great many
+warriors to fight against us, but we do not want to kill, nor do we want
+them to kill us. Your weapons are not any better than the ones they
+have, and we want to make some that will enable us to overcome them, not
+for the purpose of killing them, but only to protect ourselves and our
+homes and children.
+
+"If that is what you want and you agree with me that it is the right
+thing to do, we will help you. To do that you must not fight each other.
+I have heard that you do not believe in sacrificing captives, as the
+Tuolos and the Illyas and the Kurabus do, and I am glad of it.
+
+"I am told that you all know Suros, the great, father of the Berees, and
+that he is wise. He is my friend, and he must be present at our
+councils, but we cannot go to him now, because we must protect our
+friends, the Brabos, against the warring tribes.
+
+"But we must also be prepared to meet those enemies, and where we live,
+we have the workshop by which we can make all the wonderful things
+needed for our protection. We must go to the Brabos' village, to be on
+guard, while others must go to our village and bring back those
+articles, and we will make the things at your own homes, so we can
+compel those tribes to submit."
+
+These words affected all the warriors, and they gathered around the
+chiefs and expressed their willingness to do all that the Professor had
+suggested.
+
+One after the other, the chiefs assented, and the Brabos were especially
+pleased. Their chief, Oma, arose and said: "We have been fighting our
+friends, and not our enemies, but we did not know any better. We thought
+everyone was an enemy. The Great White Chief has told us a new way to
+live, and we will do whatever he says."
+
+Uraso, chief of the Osagas, held up his hand, and turned to the people:
+"I was wounded by the White Chief, and he took me to his village and
+treated me like a friend. He cured me of my wounds, and I became his
+friend. I left him and tried to come back and tell my people what a
+wonderful father he was, but the Illyas captured me, and when I escaped,
+and returned, found my people had gone out to fight him and his people.
+This made me sorry. I cannot tell you of all the things I saw at his
+village, and now let the White Chief say what I shall do and my whole
+tribe will help him. Muro will tell you what he has learned, because he,
+too, knows him."
+
+"I do not know how to tell you about this wonderful man," said Muro. "I
+have seen him refuse to kill his enemies, when he could easily do it.
+He healed the Kurabus, and returned him to his friends, and that is
+something new for us to think about. His enemies are our enemies, and
+his friends are our friends."
+
+This remarkable scene, which took place on the battle-field, could not
+be properly understood without some explanation of the preceding affairs
+in the history of Wonder Island.
+
+About a year and a half previous to this, the Professor referred to, and
+two boys, George Mayfield and Harry Crandall, who were companions on the
+schoolship _Investigator_, were wrecked and cast ashore on the island.
+It was fortunate that they landed on a portion of the island remote from
+the inhabited part, and for several months had no idea that any human
+beings lived there.
+
+They had absolutely nothing but their clothing; not even a knife or
+other tool, but despite this, set to work to make all the appliances
+used in civilized life. The preceding volumes showed how this was done,
+and what the successive steps were to obtain food and clothing, and to
+make tools and machinery.
+
+They built a home, and put up a water wheel, a workshop and laboratory;
+captured a species of cattle, called the yak, and used the milk for
+food, and trained the oxen to do the work of transportation; they found
+ramie fiber and flax, built a loom and wove goods from which clothing
+was made; they found various metals, in the form of ore and extracted
+them; and finally made guns, electric batteries, and did other things,
+as fast as they were able to carry on the work.
+
+In the meantime several exploring trips were undertaken, and they
+learned of the existence of savage tribes, and what was more startling
+still, ascertained that other boats, belonging to the ill-fated
+_Investigator_, had been cast ashore, and later on came in contact with
+several tribes with whom they had a number of fights, and by chance
+discovered a tribe, the Tuolos, who held two of the boys in captivity.
+
+These they rescued, namely, Thomas Chambers and Ralph Wharton. Returning
+from one of these expeditions they found a man at their home, who had
+entirely lost his memory. This was John L. Varney, a highly educated
+man, who had seen service in many lands, and later on was restored to
+reason.
+
+Prior to the present enterprise, which was related in the opening pages,
+a chief, Uraso, of the Osagas, was wounded and captured by them, and
+taken to their Cataract home, as they called it, and when healed, he had
+left them, for the purpose of returning to his own tribe, so that he
+might bring them to the Cataract as friends; but he was captured and
+detained.
+
+During this interim, the last expedition was organized, and after some
+mishaps, they proceeded into the part of the country where the savages
+lived, and on the way rescued the chief of the Saboros, and also a
+former companion of John.
+
+Two weeks before our story begins, the Professor was captured by a band
+of Berees, and taken to their village, where he was instrumental in
+healing the chief's favorite daughter, and in gratitude, placed his
+warriors at the Professor's disposal to rescue his friends, who were
+about to be attacked by the hostile tribes.
+
+The Professor saw and rescued two more of the shipwrecked boys, who were
+held captive by the Berees, and together they started to relieve the
+occupants of the wagon. The various tribes had been at war with each
+other, and when they learned that the wagon with the whites was entering
+their country, all sought to effect the capture; but the enmity between
+certain tribes caused several of them to unite and the three most bitter
+and vindictive, namely, the Tuolos, Kurabus and the Illyas, were opposed
+to the Osagas, the Saboros and the Berees.
+
+It was fortunate that all these forces met at the place where the wagon
+was located, and in the battle which followed, the whites and their
+allies won. The situation was, however, that the victory might soon be a
+fruitless one, because the three tribes could muster a larger force than
+the four tribes now joined under the Professor, and might renew the
+attack at any time.
+
+"Let us now see what the situation is," said the Professor, to the
+chiefs. "I have made a map of the island, showing where the various
+tribes are located, and where the villages are situated, so we may all
+have a like understanding."
+
+"I would suggest," said John, "that a part of the force be sent to the
+Cataract and bring all the machinery and stock we have at that place, to
+this part of the island, where it can be set up and operated. In that
+way we can the more readily teach the people how to do the work."
+
+"That is absolutely necessary, as it is too far off where the plant is
+now located, to be of service to us."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 1. Position of the Wagon and attacking Forces._]
+
+"If you will allow me to say something it might help us," remarked Muro.
+"Let the Professor select a certain number of warriors from each tribe,
+to go to your village and bring the things here, and others will remain,
+and watch our enemies."
+
+"That is a good idea," observed Blakely, "but before doing that I think
+we ought to muster our forces, so that we may know what we have to
+depend on, and the chiefs can tell us who are the best fitted for the
+various tasks."
+
+"Your view is the correct one," answered the Professor, "and Muro, you,
+Uraso and Ralsea, inform all of them what is required. I shall expect
+you, Blakely, to take charge of the mustering of the forces."
+
+The suggestion was understood and agreed to by all, and the various
+tribes were arranged in columns.
+
+The Professor addressed them as follows: "In our country, we have a plan
+for everything we do, and everything is done in order. We try to follow
+the plan in which the Great Spirit orders everything done. We want every
+man to do something and be responsible for one part of the work."
+
+"While the people are gone to the White Chief's village, others might go
+to the Berees' village and bring the Great Chief Suros, as he is wise,
+and we should like to have him here," added Uraso.
+
+"Your suggestion," said the Professor, "is a wise one, and it will show
+how earnest you are in making this bond a lasting one among you. I thank
+you for calling attention to the matter, and it shall be acted on at
+once."
+
+The muster roll, as prepared by Blakely, showed the following results:
+
+    The Berees: Sub-chief Ralsea and eighty-five warriors.
+
+    The Osagas: Chief Uraso, two sub-chiefs and one hundred and ten
+    warriors.
+
+    The Saboros: Chief Muro, three sub-chiefs and one hundred and
+    fifteen warriors.
+
+    The Brabos: Chief Oma, two sub-chiefs and one hundred and five
+    warriors.
+
+    The whites were enumerated as follows:
+      The Professor.
+      John L. Varney.
+      Samuel Blakely.
+
+                { George Mayfield,
+                { Harry Crandall,
+      The boys: { Thomas Chambers,
+                { Ralph Wharton,
+                { James Redfield,
+                { William Rudel.
+
+The combined force thus numbered four hundred and twenty-four, not
+counting Angel. It should be said that Angel was an orang-outan,
+captured while a baby, and he had been educated by George to do many
+wonderful things. It is well known that these animals are great
+imitators, but this one really learned many useful things. One of them
+was to climb the tallest trees and warn George of the approach of
+enemies, and this was such a wonderful thing, that Muro explained it to
+his people and they really admired the animal, and who was, in
+consequence, a great pet.
+
+When the council met the Professor said: "I will detail one hundred and
+fifty men to accompany John to our village to bring the things from that
+place, and those remaining will go to the Brabos' village to watch our
+enemies and to protect the home of our friends. Ralsea should take the
+litter and twenty men and go after the Great Chief Suros, and bring him
+here, so that we may consult with him."
+
+"We have thirty guns," said John, "and at least half should be left with
+you while we are away."
+
+"It might also be well," remarked Blakely, "to have the different chiefs
+select the most competent men in the four tribes to whom instructions
+might be given in the use of the guns, and I will drill them and show
+how to handle them to the best advantage."
+
+The four chiefs selected the men for the expedition from the respective
+tribes, and the four boys who had been together for so long, begged that
+they might be of the party also, and the Professor could not deny them
+this privilege.
+
+Early in the morning the entire force started on the march for the
+Brabos' village, and before night arrived at the main one, where the
+Professor and his party had the first close sight of the village and the
+inhabitants.
+
+Runners were sent ahead to inform the people of the expected arrivals.
+This was the first time in the history of the island that a foreign
+tribe had ever visited them, except in a hostile manner, and the
+curiosity of the women and children was intense.
+
+Oma, the chief, had graciously ordered the best hut for the Professor,
+but he declined it with many thanks, and presented the chief's wife with
+one of the mirrors, which delighted them. Some of the warriors were
+designated to procure game, and others to bring in wood for the fires,
+and the most skilled were selected to scout to the northwest to
+determine the movements of the enemy.
+
+In the morning, John and his party, with the wagon, started for the
+Cataract home. Uraso and Muro were designated to accompany them, and you
+may be sure that to the boys this trip had in it every enjoyment that
+could be brought to them.
+
+"What a difference there is in things, now," mused Harry, as he drove
+the yaks along. "I hope they will have no trouble with those treacherous
+tribes until we get back."
+
+"It makes me sad to think that we have to give up the Cataract," said
+George. "The past year has been a happy one to all of us, even though we
+have had serious times. And what shall we do with the flag?"
+
+They had made a beautiful flag, which floated from a tall staff on
+Observation Hill. It would have been a grief to permit it to remain.
+
+John overheard the conversation. "Yes; we shall certainly take it with
+us, and teach the natives here to respect it." And the boys applauded
+the sentiment.
+
+In two days more the party sighted the Cataract, and saw "Old Glory"
+floating from the mast. When they saw it again, they took off their hats
+and gave three cheers. This so astonished the natives that they could
+not understand it, and Uraso told his people that the flag was
+worshipped by the white people.
+
+"Did you hear what Uraso told them?" asked John.
+
+"No; what was it!"
+
+"He said that white people did not carry individual charms to ward off
+troubles, but that they had the flag for that purpose, and the one flag
+was the charm of all the people; and he also told them it was made a
+certain way for that purpose."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+BUSY TIMES AT THE CATARACT. THE ALARMING NEWS
+
+
+The flag incident, and Uraso's interpretation of it, amused the boys
+immensely.
+
+"Do you know why Uraso thought so?" asked John.
+
+"No; I can't understand why he ever had such an idea," replied Tom.
+
+"You forget it has been our custom, ever since I can remember, to go to
+Observation Hill, each day, to watch the sea, in the hope that a vessel
+might be sighted. Uraso thought that was intended as a tribute to the
+flag."
+
+"After all," said Ralph, on reflecting, "they are not so much out of the
+way, and the flag is really our talisman, isn't it?"
+
+"Yes; because it is a real protection, and not a fancied one. It is a
+symbol, behind which lies all the power of a material kind, which is
+able to help us everywhere, and among all people. The charm which the
+savage wears, is a symbol to him, and that typifies protection from some
+unknown power. To us that is a reality, and we know where the power is."
+
+The dear old Cataract home. How the boys roamed over every part of it,
+and went down where the cattle were still ranging around. The place was
+a study for the warriors.
+
+"Now, boys, for the first day entertain your visitors, show them
+everything, and amuse them in every way possible; and after to-morrow we
+must commence work in earnest," was John's injunction to the boys.
+
+What could be more natural than to start the water wheel in motion? The
+warriors stood on the bank, watched them push it in place, and then the
+sawmill was started. The process of turning out lumber with the saw was
+marvelous. Every part of the shop was filled, as the boys set the
+grindstone, the lathe, and the gristmill into motion.
+
+When a log was finally secured to be cut into shafts for spears, and
+they saw the wood-turning lathe make the shaft round and true, their
+enthusiasm knew no bounds.
+
+"Tell them, Muro, that is what we want them to do," said John, and they
+opened their eyes at the possibilities.
+
+There was still quite an amount of barley which had not been ground, and
+the willing warriors helped the boys bring a lot to the mill and the
+production of the flour before their eyes was such an amazing thing that
+they could not even give vent to their expressions.
+
+Early in the day one of the bullocks had been killed by John's order,
+and a roasting pit dug out, and this was now being prepared for the
+principal meal of the day, and many of them were interested in this new
+way of roasting an entire carcass.
+
+A quantity of vegetables had also been gathered by the parties detailed
+for the purpose, and George was the busiest of the lot, as he
+personally attended to the cooking of the various dishes. He had most
+willing helpers, each one trying to lend a hand, so that he did little
+more than direct.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 2. George's Old Dutch Oven._]
+
+But he was determined to have bread, and it did not take long to
+improvise an old Dutch oven with the firebrick, and in this a fire was
+built, so that the bricks were heated up intensely, and the fire then
+withdrawn, and a cover put over the chimney. The heated brick,
+therefore, did the baking. Loaf after loaf was put in, and while the
+dough had not risen as it should have done, owing to lack of time, still
+the bread produced was something so unlike anything the natives had ever
+seen, that the making of it in their presence was a joy, to say nothing
+of the eating of it when the meal was served.
+
+It was not only a picnic; it was a feast. None there, excepting Uraso
+and Stut, had ever tasted such things before. They knew what honey was,
+but sugar was a novelty, and this was supplied without stint. George
+had no opportunity to make any delicacies in the form of cakes, but he
+made a barley pudding in which was a bountiful supply of sago.
+
+After the meal, John called the boys together and said: "Before
+dismantling the place here it has occurred to me that there are some
+things which we ought to make, because it will take some time to set up
+the parts, even after we get them in the new locality. I believe we
+still have quite a quantity of the cast-steel bars, from which we
+intended making gun barrels."
+
+"In looking over the stock to-day," said Harry, "I find we have
+sufficient to make at least fifty barrels, and I have prepared the lathe
+to do just what you have suggested."
+
+"Good boy," responded John. "You and Tom keep at that, and don't mind
+about anything else. If we can once get the barrels bored out, and the
+fittings made, we can put them together without having the shop in
+running order."
+
+"In talking with Harry yesterday," said Tom, "we made up the scheme of
+putting a small bench in the wagon, with the vise, so that we can put
+together some of the guns on our way."
+
+"All that is in the right direction. And now, another thing. The wagon
+we have is not at all adequate for what we have to take with us, but we
+have plenty of people to carry things, and they will be glad to do it,
+but some things are very inconvenient to carry, so that it will be of
+material assistance if we build another wagon."
+
+The boys looked at John, merrily laughing at the suggestion.
+
+"Just the thing," said Ralph, "and it is easily done. We still have the
+old wheels that were used before we built the last set."
+
+"Quite true; I had entirely forgotten about that. Uraso will help, and
+will be just the fellow to direct his men. Now let us start at this with
+vigor. We must return as early as possible. The hostiles may attack the
+Professor at any time, and the weapons are necessary articles."
+
+As they were about to separate, Harry remarked: "We have a quantity of
+the iron which we made, and instead of carrying it along in the wagon,
+it occurred to me that we ought to forge out some spears and bolos."
+
+"I had counted on doing that myself, but many thanks for the
+suggestion," answered John.
+
+There was one thing noticeable in all the warriors, and that was the
+universal tattoo. This was something practiced by all. Referring to the
+custom, Ralph asked: "What is the cause of the tattooing habit?"
+
+John looked at him with a smile, as he answered: "People who wear few
+clothes want something with which to decorate themselves. The idea
+always was and always will be, to improve on nature. That is one of the
+reasons. The other is, that it was an original way of distinguishing one
+individual from another. You will notice among these people, that the
+chiefs have a different tattoo from the others in the tribe."
+
+"Do you mean that the name of each man was tattooed so he would be
+known in that way?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 3. The Tattooed Arm. Antelope._]
+
+"Yes; and also to designate his rank. The names of great warriors and
+wise men of the tribe are generally descriptive. The North American
+Indian adopted that course, and it was a very sensible thing to do. You
+have heard of Sitting Bull, Rain in the Face (that is, a pock-marked
+individual), Antelope, and others of like character, could be drawn, and
+thus convey the name without difficulty. Uraso and Muro mean some
+particular things or objects which can be depicted, and thus one tribe
+can communicate with the other, even though they do not understand each
+other's language."
+
+"Then clothing is also another way of showing rank or title?"
+
+"In countries where people are compelled to wear covering as a matter of
+comfort, the clothing was adopted as a means of expressing the person's
+position in life."
+
+After John and his party left the Brabos' village, the Professor called
+Blakely into consultation, and advised him to organize the remaining
+warriors into some cohesive form, and provide a definite and orderly
+plan of carrying out the scouting and picketing tactics necessary to
+keep them advised of the movements of the hostiles.
+
+Blakely had already acquired a fairly good knowledge of the rudiments of
+the native tongue, so that he was able to get along well in giving his
+orders and disposing of the warriors. He was ably seconded by Ralsea and
+Sutoto; and especially, the latter, became one of the most important
+factors in the organization of the tribes in making a strong and
+intelligent fighting force.
+
+Two days after John left, it was announced that the old Chief Suros was
+on his way from the southern part of the island, and the Professor
+headed a party of thirty picked men, accompanied by Sutoto, to welcome
+him. The warriors were taken from the four tribes.
+
+They met the litter, bearing the Chief, fully five miles from the
+village, and Suros was visibly affected at the honor shown him. The
+Professor extended every act of courtesy, and when they arrived at the
+village, the Professor was quick to give him the full details of all the
+happenings since their last interview.
+
+"We have talked over the plans to make you and all of your people happy
+and strong. I have sent a number of the warriors to my village, and they
+will bring all our things with them, so that we may put them up in your
+country, and teach your people how to build and to make useful articles,
+and beautiful ornaments."
+
+"I have heard the wonderful things which you have done, and what you
+have promised, and we will try and follow your words," he answered.
+
+"I have told the people that you must be here, as we value your wisdom.
+We would go to you, but we still have powerful enemies to the north, and
+they are waiting to attack us. Until we are safe from them we cannot go
+to you; but when my people return we will be better prepared to resist."
+
+The chief was visibly affected at this consideration for him, and he
+thanked the Professor for sending the messengers.
+
+The boys, Jim and Will, were interested observers in all that was taking
+place, and the Professor had them about him at all times, and to them he
+communicated his orders. Their ready understanding of the native tongue
+was a great help to the Professor.
+
+It was for this reason that the Professor was glad the two boys were
+content to remain with him. Speaking about the savages, to the
+Professor, Jim remarked: "There is always one thing which seems singular
+about these fellows. They are awfully quick at learning. Now, what I
+can't understand is, that, quick as they are, they do not seem to
+advance very much, but stay in the same rut right along."
+
+The Professor smiled at the observation, as he replied: "Sir John
+Lubbock, a noted English naturalist, sums up his estimate of the savage
+mind in the following statement: 'Savages unite the character of
+childhood with the passions and strength of men.' Their utter simplicity
+is their weakness. When that is aroused, if properly done, they become
+men."
+
+"But what is the great difficulty in the way of their advance?"
+
+"The greatest writers seem to agree that the primary want of the savage
+is a rigid, definite and concise law. The idea of order does not appeal
+to him, except to a limited extent. Like children, they do not go beyond
+the immediate thing. The reasoning faculties are not impaired, but are
+undeveloped."
+
+But Jim's observation was true. Blakely early discovered this in
+treating with the natives, and it did not take long to make them
+understand that by working together for the common defense they could be
+made far more effective than by permitting each to do as his own impulse
+dictated.
+
+Thus, by constant association with the head men in the different tribes,
+he early learned who were the best runners, and the most skillful
+scouts, and who were particularly reliable for the different branches of
+the service.
+
+Sutoto, as stated, was the most valuable factor, and the Professor grew
+to love him. One day he came in great haste, and said: "I have news for
+you. The tribes are directly north of us, and appear to be moving to the
+east."
+
+"Do you know how large a force they have?"
+
+"Fully three hundred."
+
+"Have you any theory why they have not attacked us before?"
+
+"I think they are sending for more warriors."
+
+"How many more can they depend on from their tribes?"
+
+"Not more than one hundred and fifty or two hundred."
+
+"Do you think it is possible, Blakely, that they have learned of the
+force which we have sent to the Cataract?"
+
+"This movement to the east seems to indicate it."
+
+"In order to satisfy yourself it would be wise for you to ascertain
+their actions at once."
+
+"I have selected a hundred picked men, and shall take the field this
+afternoon. I have suspicions that they are delaying on account of
+reinforcements, or waiting for reports from the runners which they have,
+no doubt, sent to the Cataract."
+
+"I was rather stupid in that matter," exclaimed the Professor. "I had
+overlooked the fact that the Kurabus were the ones who attacked us at
+the Cataract, and as they know its locality it is but natural they
+should make an advance in that quarter."
+
+Blakely and his men were on the way within a half hour after this
+conversation. This was now the fifth day after the departure of John.
+
+The Professor, and the chiefs, Oma and Suros, were in daily
+consultation, and together were developing a plan by which the different
+tribal interests could be welded together, and to establish a form of
+government which would be agreeable to all.
+
+On the morning of the sixth day, after John's party left the Brabos'
+village, three of the hunters who were of the party delegated to bring
+in game, and one of whom had been instructed in the use of the gun,
+captured two Kurabus within a mile of the Cataract.
+
+These were brought to John at once, and there was high glee at the
+success of the hunters. Harry was the first to see the captives and he
+rushed in to John with this information:
+
+"The hunters have captured two Kurabus, and who do you suppose is one of
+them? He is the fellow we wounded and brought here with us. Don't you
+remember the one we carried out at the time I put an inscription on his
+litter?"
+
+John smiled, as he recalled the litter. His association with the
+different ones made him fairly well acquainted with the language by this
+time; but Uraso and Muro were present. As they were brought in, John
+looked at them and his brow darkened, as he addressed them sternly.
+
+"Why are you here?"
+
+They cringed before his piercing look.
+
+"Answer me! Do you want us to kill all of your people? Did you tell your
+chief when we let you go, that we did not want war, but peace?"
+
+Neither of them answered, but shrank back. John assumed a terrible
+anger, as he continued: "We healed you, and tried to show our
+friendship, but you tried to kill us. Is that what you people believe
+in?"
+
+Tama, who was the warrior alluded to by Harry, soon recovered his
+speech, and after glancing around at the chiefs, said: "The chiefs would
+not believe what you said."
+
+"What are you here for now?"
+
+"I was sent here to see what you were doing."
+
+"How many were sent?"
+
+"No one but Reto and myself."
+
+"Lock them up," said John, "and keep a good guard over them. So that is
+their game, is it? So much the more important for us to get the weapons
+ready."
+
+The new wagon was now ready for the top, and this was completed in short
+work. John started on the bolos immediately, and also forged out a
+number of spears. The boys were set to work preparing the stocks for the
+barrels, and these were cut out in the rough at the sawmill, and several
+more knives prepared. The most skillful of the warriors were then
+instructed to dress them up and get them ready for the barrels.
+
+The work was prosecuted not only during the day, but at night, as well.
+It was fortunate that during the time the yaks were lost, some months
+before, they had trained a pair to drive, and these were now again yoked
+up to give them experimental training for the coming journey.
+
+Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three picked out the
+most trustworthy scouts. Giving them explicit instructions to proceed
+westward, and discover, if possible, whether their enemies were making
+any movement toward the Cataract, and if, on the other hand, the
+movement was toward the Professor and the Brabos' village, to send one
+runner to the village and the other back to the Cataract.
+
+In less than ten days' time Harry had turned out thirty-two barrels, and
+John had given a great deal of attention to the preparation of the
+ammunition.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+INTERCEPTING THE MARCH OF THE CONFEDERATES.
+
+THE TREASURE
+
+
+Blakely started north with the picked warriors, and before evening came
+in sight of them, headed for the east. It was evident that they were
+about to go to the Cataract.
+
+Sutoto begged to be permitted to go there and inform them of the danger
+of attack, and Blakely consented, and without waiting for the morning,
+was on his way. He traveled most of the night, reaching the place in the
+afternoon, and was received by John and the others with the most
+effusive welcome.
+
+"What are you here for?" asked John hurriedly.
+
+"The tribes are coming this way."
+
+"I have just learned from one of our runners that they went far to the
+north of you, and assumed that the intention was to attack us."
+
+"The Professor should be warned at once," was Sutoto's response.
+
+"I have instructed that to be done," answered John.
+
+The scenes around the Cataract were intensely interesting to him. He
+wandered around with the boys, and asked questions on every conceivable
+subject. Blakely had given him one of the guns, and he was taken to the
+workshop and told how they were made. These things so fascinated him
+that, hungry as he was, he could hardly be induced to take time for his
+meals.
+
+The boys admired him immensely, and together they acted like boys. The
+water wheel; the sawmill; the two stones which served as the gristmill;
+the grindstones; the lathes; and the little foundry were entrancing.
+
+When the boys took him to the blacksmith shop, and he saw the forge, and
+the numerous spear heads which John had turned out, as well as the
+bolos, his eyes showed the intense delight the sight afforded him.
+
+The next morning one of the runners appeared and stated that the tribes
+were still waiting, and also imparted the further information that
+Blakely and his party were at a safe distance, and unknown to the
+hostiles.
+
+It was obvious now that they were awaiting the arrival of the two scouts
+who had been captured before advancing. Several scouts and runners were
+again sent forward, with instructions to return with information the
+moment an advance was made.
+
+When Blakely reached the vicinity of their confederated enemies, he
+thought it wise to keep in the background, and was at a loss to account
+for the delay during the entire day, but before evening one of the
+Berees, who had been sent by John, arrived in camp.
+
+"I have just come from the white man's village, and they know that the
+tribes are moving in that direction."
+
+[Illustration: "_Meantime John consulted Muro and Uraso, and the three
+picked out the most trustworthy scouts_"
+                                                          [See p. 35]]
+
+"How did they discover it?"
+
+"We captured two spies and have them as captives."
+
+This information suggested the cause of the delay. He immediately called
+a runner, and indited the following letter: "I am keeping on the watch,
+and am not afraid to attack the whole of them, if need be. If the guns
+you are making are not completed, do not worry about it, as I shall keep
+them interested here for several days longer. I will not appear unless I
+find they have taken up the march in your direction. Blakely."
+
+The following day the scouts informed Blakely that the allies had broken
+camp and were about to move to the east. Calling the warriors together,
+he addressed them as follows: "My friends; we are about to meet your
+enemies, not for the purpose of fighting them, but to prevent them from
+attacking our friends at the white man's home. Our friends there are
+preparing the fire guns for us, before they come to us, and we must now
+stand together to prevent them from going there until we are ready to
+meet them."
+
+The warriors all crowded around, and showed by their attitude that they
+could be depended upon.
+
+"We have with us eleven fire guns, and I will now tell you how we must
+fight them, if it is necessary. I will stand in the center of the front
+line, with the guns, and on each side of us will be the ones I shall
+select. All those in front will have bows and arrows, but you will not
+need them, unless they come up too close. We must now march to the
+right, as fast as we can, and get between them and our friends."
+
+The column started out on its mission, and made its way with the utmost
+speed to the east, and before noon turned to the north, being thus
+placed directly in the path of the oncoming forces. The allies moved
+along deliberately, entirely unaware of the existence of any force.
+
+Before four o'clock the first signs of the advance were observed.
+Blakely had selected a strong position on a slight elevation, on the
+east side of one of the little streams which flowed into the Cataract
+River, that commanded an open front. His entire force was placed between
+two natural objects, the right resting behind a rocky projection and the
+left to the rear of a heavy chaparral of wood.
+
+Entirely unsuspecting, the allies marched along the stream, and crossed
+not a hundred yards below. When they were within hailing distance, John
+and Ralsea suddenly appeared in front of their concealed column, and the
+latter, at the instigation of Blakely, addressed them as follows:
+
+"The white men do not want war, but peace. They have come only to rescue
+their own people. You must give them up, or there can be no peace. The
+white chief tells me that if you injure or kill the white men you now
+have he will hold you responsible, because he is powerful, and is now
+ready to destroy you and your wives and children, but he does not want
+to do that. We are here to prevent you from going to the white man's
+house."
+
+The consternation on the faces of the savages, at the appearance of
+two, was easily discernible. They listened in silence while Ralsea
+spoke, and, then indicated that they would hold a council and give their
+answer.
+
+It was evident that the allies were taken by surprise, and it must have
+been obvious that they had no idea of the force which was in their
+front. Blakely had wisely stationed pickets to the right and the left,
+in order to observe their movements, after the first surprise was over.
+
+The conference lasted until night fell, and thus the first object was
+gained; delay. In the morning one of the chiefs appeared, and Blakely
+and Ralsea again went to the front.
+
+"I will give you our answer," he said. "The white man attacked us, and
+we fought him back. He has killed our warriors, and we will not treat
+with him at this time."
+
+Ralsea replied: "You have done the same that we have done toward the
+white man; we were always the first to attack them. They tried to be
+friendly, but we would not listen to them."
+
+"We will let you know in two suns what our answer is." And he withdrew.
+
+"That means," remarked Ralsea, "that they are waiting for
+reinforcements."
+
+"So much the better. We will be reinforced much better than they by the
+time their reinforcements come to hand."
+
+"We must send a runner to the Great White Chief, and tell him to stop
+the Kurabus from coming to their assistance," said Ralsea.
+
+"That is a wise suggestion," answered Blakely; and without delay one
+was selected and made his way to the Brabos' village.
+
+When the Professor received Blakely's note he called in the Brabo chief,
+Oma, and said: "The forces we sent out are preventing the allies from
+going to our village, and have sent a runner here to inform us that the
+Kurabus are about to send more warriors to aid our enemies. Select one
+hundred warriors and let us go to the Kurabus' village and capture the
+warriors who are there, and also put the villages in our power. This may
+make them understand that they have no homes to go to unless they come
+to us."
+
+This information delighted Oma, and he hurriedly gathered the warriors,
+and the Professor concluded to accompany them, as he did not want the
+warriors to commit any excesses against the villages and inhabitants of
+their former enemies, or exact any reprisals for the past indignities
+that some of them had suffered from the Kurabus.
+
+A day's march brought them close to the main village, and scouts were
+sent to the front to ascertain whether the warriors still remaining in
+the village had gone forward. Before the scouts could return fully fifty
+warriors emerged from the village, and were taking up the march to join
+the allies.
+
+The Professor instructed the warriors under his command to divide into
+three parties, one to remain with him, and the others to go to the right
+and to the left, so that the Kurabus would thus be entrapped.
+
+The party marched forward unsuspectingly, directly toward the position
+occupied by the Professor, and he instructed Oma to show himself and
+inform them that they were surrounded and that resistance would be
+useless.
+
+Some, more venturesome than others, started to retreat, but the
+unexpected appearance of the Professor's warriors drove them back, and
+without firing a shot or loosing an arrow they submitted. When the
+Professor appeared they were the more surprised. The whole were marched
+back to the village, and, although the women tried to escape, all were
+soon rounded up and brought back.
+
+The captured Kurabus warriors were taken to the Brabos' village, and the
+women informed that they would not be injured, as the white man did not
+believe in making war.
+
+The Professor at once sent a runner to Blakely and also to John. Two
+days afterwards the runner appeared at the Cataract with the following
+message from the Professor:
+
+"We captured the Kurabus' village to-day, and all the warriors left
+there, as they were about to leave to join the forces now before
+Blakely. We have taken all of them to the Brabos' village, where they
+will be held. Make the utmost speed with the weapons. In the meantime, I
+have sent a force to the north to intercept any reinforcements that the
+Tuolos may forward."
+
+The message from Blakely was as follows: "We arrested the movement of
+the allies yesterday, and asked why they were determined to attack us.
+They refused to give an answer, and they are, probably, awaiting
+reinforcements. My forces are between them and the Cataract, and they
+will give their answer in two days."
+
+All this news was imparted to the people, and the knowledge was received
+with enthusiasm. It gave the warriors the first glimpse of the value of
+cooperation, and the benefits of a directing hand in their affairs.
+
+At the Cataract matters were progressing favorably. Reports from Blakely
+and the Professor assured them that they would have no difficulty, in a
+few days, in getting at least thirty of the guns ready. Stut proved
+himself to be the most apt pupil, and nothing interested him as much as
+the forge and anvil, and John, noticing this, set him to work on the
+small anvil to forge out arrow heads.
+
+The arrows used by the natives were uniformly of stone, but the metal
+ones were perfect, and so arranged that, with the ramie fiber, could be
+readily attached to the shaft. The most deft workers in the making of
+the native arrows were selected, and together they made up a large
+quantity of arrows, and Stut seemed to be indefatigable in turning out
+the heads for the workers.
+
+During this period the larder was not forgotten. The hunters brought in
+every day an immense quantity of taro, which seemed to be their favorite
+vegetable.
+
+This is a stemless plant, which has heart-shaped leaves, about a foot
+long, and the leaves and stalks are prepared by them in the same way
+that we use spinach and asparagus.
+
+But the tuber, or root, of this vegetable is the most valuable part. It
+is larger than the common beet, and sometimes grows to a foot or more in
+length. This was beaten into a pulp by the natives, and made into a
+bread or pudding.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 4. The Taro Plant and Bulb._]
+
+"I like the taro," said George. "It can be used in so many ways, and I
+want to try it in the different forms as soon as we have an
+opportunity."
+
+"In the Sandwich Islands, and in many other places it is the vegetable
+from which the well-known Poi is made," said John.
+
+"Do you know how it is made?" asked George.
+
+"It is beaten up, just as you see them do it here, and then set in the
+sun to ferment for about three or four days. It is afterwards boiled
+with fowl, and makes a very pleasant dish, most appetizing and
+nourishing. The fermented Poi will last for weeks. It is the same as the
+well-known kalo of the Pacific Island, the yu-tao of China, the sato imo
+of Japan, and the oto of Central America. A fine dish is made of it by
+boiling and then covering the leaves with a dressing of cocoanut oil."
+
+Harry and the other boys had been in consultation for several days
+concerning the cave, and a day or two before they were ready to start
+had a talk with John about the treasure there. John listened
+attentively, and when they had finished, said:
+
+"You are quite right in wanting to take care of the valuables there. You
+are entitled to them."
+
+"But they are yours, as much as ours, and we shall not touch them unless
+it is with the understanding that you shall share with us," responded
+George.
+
+"I could not consider it for a moment."
+
+"You cannot help yourself," said the boys in chorus. "We have arranged
+all that matter, and you have nothing to say about it."
+
+"But," protested John. "I do not deserve it."
+
+"Well, do we?" asked Harry.
+
+"But you and the Professor discovered it."
+
+"Before you or Ralph and Tom came we arranged the division, so that the
+Professor has one-third of it, but we own two-thirds, and that we
+propose to divide equally among all of us," added Harry.
+
+"Really," said Ralph, "Tom and I are in the same position as John, and
+we feel it is not right to take a share, but the boys insist on it."
+
+"Well, if you consider that a settlement, I must say that I am going to
+make good more than my share and the shares of Ralph and Tom."
+
+"We don't want you to make it good," insisted George.
+
+"But you can't help yourself in that. The cave in the Tuolos' country
+has something in it that will make you wonder as much as the treasure
+you have here, and it will be fully as interesting to get at and recover
+as anything you have experienced here."
+
+"When do you think we ought to start for the west?" asked Harry.
+
+"Day after to-morrow will see everything ready. We shall then have all
+the ammunition sufficient to last us until we can reestablish the plant,
+and as the new wagon is ready, it should not take us more than a day,
+with all the help we have, to load and apportion the different loads
+among the warriors."
+
+"Then why can't we take to-morrow for the expedition to the cave?"
+
+"That will suit admirably," he replied.
+
+On the following morning the boys had the yaks yoked up, and taking with
+them a number of the copper vessels, and a quantity of the ramie cloth,
+drove over to the side of the hill opposite the Cataract house, so as
+to reach the land entrance of the caverns.
+
+"It is not desirable to have any here know of our visit nor our purpose.
+It would not make any material difference, as the treasure there is of
+no value to them; but our motives will be misunderstood," remarked John.
+
+Under the circumstances John and the four boys were the only ones in the
+party.
+
+"We are going to have some pretty tough work this morning. That gold
+weighs something."
+
+"Wasn't it a good thing you suggested the making the wagon?"
+
+John smiled without saying anything.
+
+The boys eyed him sharply, and finally Harry said: "That is what you
+suggested the new wagon for, was it not?"
+
+John nodded an assent.
+
+"Did the Professor say anything to you about bringing it along?"
+
+"He did say it might be taken if you thought so."
+
+"Didn't he suggest that we should do so?"
+
+"No; he said the matter was left entirely to your judgment, and that I
+should not say anything about it, unless you proposed that course."
+
+"Well, I am thinking we shall have a pretty good load for one team with
+what we get out of the place," said George.
+
+"It will make a good load, but we can add to it the lightest parts of
+the stock we have at the Cataract."
+
+Before reaching the mouth of the cavern, a messenger hurried over from
+the Cataract with the information that two runners had arrived from the
+Professor and from Blakely, and they drove back as quickly as possible,
+and reached there to learn that another had just arrived from Blakely.
+
+The two runners first to arrive conveyed the information stated in the
+previous chapter, but the last carried the additional news that there
+had been a fight between Blakely and the tribes, and that he was slowly
+moving back to the Cataract, but there was no occasion for alarm.
+
+The latter part of the note read as follows: "Do not be alarmed and
+continue your work, and if the matter should be at all serious I will
+advise you by runner in ample time, and shall in any event send another
+in the next four hours."
+
+John called in Muro and said:
+
+"The forces with Blakely are having a fight with the tribes. I want you
+to take fifty men, and also twenty-five guns, and assist Blakely and his
+warriors, and keep me informed of the progress of events. Tell him that
+by day after to-morrow we shall be on our way. In the meantime you
+should draw them this way, as we do not want them to go back. For that
+purpose keep up the show of retreating, and hold them until day after
+to-morrow."
+
+Within an hour the column was ready and moved toward the scene with
+celerity, equipped with the new guns, and an ample supply of ammunition,
+together with the new arrows which had been made.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE SURRENDER OF THE KURABUS
+
+
+It was late that afternoon before John and the boys again drove over to
+the hill, and lost no time in entering the cave. The first care was to
+bring to the steps at the entrance all the vessels in the first recess.
+
+Some of them were so heavy that it was necessary for four to carry each
+load. They then proceeded to the inner recess, and here a search was
+made for every trace of the treasures there, the time required thus
+making it almost dark before they were able to carry out all the
+different lots.
+
+These were all stored in the bottom of the wagon. It was dark as they
+started for the Cataract. As they were leaving they heard the night cry
+of a bird which had often been noticed before, and Ralph shuddered, as
+he said:
+
+"It makes me tremble whenever I hear that doleful sound. It was above
+our head all of the night before the Tuolos captured us, and since that
+time it always sounded like an omen to me."
+
+John turned to him, as he replied: "That is the voice of the bird called
+by the Spanish, Alma Perdida."
+
+"Well it isn't a pleasant sound, to say the least," added George.
+
+"It is very significant at this time, however," remarked John.
+
+The boys all turned to him, as he continued: "It is the 'Cry of the Lost
+Soul'; that is what the name signifies."
+
+And the boys thought of the terrible tragedy in the cave they had just
+left. The silence on the way home was significant.
+
+The next morning marked the greatest activity in and about the
+buildings. The wagons were first loaded with the things contained in the
+shop, the laboratory and the home. Numerous packages were made up in
+form for the warriors to handle conveniently. Nothing was permitted to
+remain, as it was felt that the things they had made were too valuable
+to leave behind. It was past noon before the last articles were secured
+in bundles.
+
+"You should explain to them, Uraso," said John, "that we shall have to
+give them pretty heavy loads for the first part of the journey, as the
+different things can be distributed to the others when we reach them."
+
+"It will not be necessary to do this," he answered; "they are only too
+glad to carry the heaviest loads." And he refused to apologize to the
+warriors. This is referred to for the purpose of showing the spirit in
+which all of them worked to bring the things to their own country.
+
+After the loads were all provided for, and the different ones instructed
+as to the parts which should be taken by each, John said:
+
+"There is one thing which must now take our attention, and that is the
+bringing in of the flag."
+
+The boys had forgotten this. "You may tell the warriors," said John,
+addressing Uraso, "that we intend to go to the hill and bring in the
+flag, which must be taken with us."
+
+As Uraso interpreted this to the people it had a remarkable significance
+to them. Uraso begged permission to take all of them on the expedition,
+and this was readily assented to.
+
+The warriors all armed, as though going forth to battle, ascended the
+hill, with the boys in the lead. Arriving there John formed the column
+in a circle around the staff. Angel was present, and he shambled toward
+the pole and mounted it. He remembered the little wheel at the top,
+which had afforded them such an amusing incident when it was erected.
+
+This time he came down without much solicitation on the part of George.
+
+"As George and Harry were the ones to hoist the flag, I shall delegate
+them to lower it," said John.
+
+The boys went forward, and at the quiet suggestion of John took off
+their hats. At this signal John took off his, and Uraso followed suit,
+and the hint was sufficient for the warriors, who stood with uncovered
+heads while the boys reverently lowered it.
+
+The wonder and amazement depicted on the faces of those who witnessed it
+was a spectacle. What an impressive thing it was to them; it was the
+mystery, which to the savage mind is always an important factor, and
+John knew it.
+
+The flag was folded with the greatest care, the natives watching each
+move with intense interest, and was then wrapped in cloth, as though it
+was the most valuable treasure in the world.
+
+"We want them to feel that it is something they must love and protect.
+It is safe to say, that after this exhibition, everyone of the warriors
+would have fought to the death to preserve that emblem of power, like
+the Israelites of old, who regarded the Ark of the Covenant as their
+fortress and strength."
+
+The last night at the Cataract was a sad one for the boys. For a year
+and a half it had been their home. They had built every part of it. Each
+portion had some delicious memory connected with it, and all must now be
+left to the ravishes of time. Only the water wheel would be left.
+
+It hardly seems possible that the accumulations at the Cataract would
+make over one hundred packages, aside from the contents of the wagon.
+When the entire stock of material was arranged the next morning, it was
+an interesting sight.
+
+The two wagons were driven out from the yard, Harry and Tom in charge of
+one, and George and Ralph of the other team. Twenty-five light loads had
+been made for the advance warriors, so that in case of scouting work,
+one could take the loads of two, and thus leave at least a dozen free
+for that duty when required.
+
+A quantity of lumber had been cut over six months before, and this was
+well dried, and would be very valuable to them in beginning operations,
+and the loads on the wagons were so great that but little of it could be
+taken in that way. Uraso saw the utility of the material and insisted
+that it should all be taken.
+
+Besides the packages thus arranged the most expert of the warriors
+carried the thirty-two guns, and they had been instructed in their use.
+Each also carried a bow and set of arrows, and some of them were
+provided with spears.
+
+During the preceding day no message had come from Blakely, but he knew
+that the party would leave the Cataract on this day, and they felt no
+apprehension on his account.
+
+One of the runners from John reached the Professor on the day the train
+left the Cataract. While the latter tried to prevent the knowledge of
+his occupation of the Kurabus village from reaching the ears of the
+warriors, the scouts sent out by the Professor intercepted and tried to
+capture the messengers which were sent to inform the allies, but failed
+in their efforts.
+
+When John and his party left, Blakely had drawn the allies to a point
+within eight miles of the Cataract, and with the reinforcements, headed
+by Muro, he made a stand. During the night, after a consultation with
+Muro, the latter, with fifty of his warriors, made a wide detour to the
+north, and swung around to the west, thus taking a position behind the
+allies, and this was effected without their knowledge, as they believed.
+
+The object of this movement was to protect the Professor, as the force
+from the Cataract, joined to that of Blakely's, would be ample to drive
+them forward, and it was desirable to effect a capture of the allies,
+and thus at one operation place them in their power.
+
+Unfortunately, the messengers from the Kurabus' village reached the
+allies before Muro started on his trip. The effect on the allies was
+startling, and the Kurabus were determined to protect their homes. The
+latter believed that the object was to destroy the village and carry off
+the women and children, and it was but natural that they should go to
+their assistance.
+
+As a result the allies during the night quietly stole to the south,
+which was in the direction of the Illyas' territory, intending to march
+thence west, and thus attack the Professor from the south.
+
+Their departure was not discovered until morning had been well advanced,
+and Muro's runner did not reach Blakely until the train from the
+Cataract came in sight.
+
+This was most discouraging news, as it meant danger to those left with
+the Professor.
+
+"There is but one alternative now," said John. "We must make a forced
+march to the relief of the Professor. Uraso has the matter of
+controlling the force well in hand, and Blakely, you and I will take all
+the men excepting the one hundred in charge of the material, and go
+forward rapidly."
+
+The first news the Professor had of the new situation was gleaned from
+the messenger which Muro had dispatched the moment the escape of the
+allies was discovered.
+
+"Has the Professor been notified?" asked Blakely.
+
+"I sent two messengers early this morning," was Muro's response.
+
+"That was a wise thing," remarked John. "You are to be commended for the
+step. We must make a forced march at once, and you must lead the advance
+with your best men."
+
+Muro was much gratified at this position of trust, and called up the
+warriors selected and spoke a few words to them. Without waiting to make
+any other preparations than to provide a day's provisions, his party
+sallied forth, and headed straight for the southwest.
+
+The following day, the scouts sent out by the Professor to the
+southeast, discovered the allies rapidly moving toward the direction of
+the Kurabus' village, but he knew that he had not a sufficient force to
+meet them, and he also deemed it wise to permit them to reach their
+village, so that they might be able to learn for themselves that, while
+he had their homes in his power, he had not despoiled them.
+
+This was surprising news to the allies. Such a course meant, either that
+the Professor and the tribes with him, were afraid of them, or, that
+Blakely's message to them was in reality true.
+
+Muro's column reached the Professor the following day, and before
+evening John and the main body came up. The allies were still at the
+Kurabus' village, and without waiting for the wagon and the remaining
+part of the force to come up, all started on the march for the south.
+
+The scouts reported commotion in the village, but its cause could not be
+determined. Undoubtedly they knew of the presence of the force from the
+north. Camp was made for the night, and when morning came it was evident
+that the Kurabus had been deserted by their allies, the Tuolos and the
+Illyas.
+
+Early in the morning the advance was begun, and before ten o'clock a
+messenger from the Kurabus was taken, and he was brought before the
+Professor.
+
+"Why have you been fighting us?" asked the Professor.
+
+"My people thought you were trying to kill us."
+
+"Why do you come to see us now?"
+
+"Because my chief has been deserted by the Illyas and the Tuolos."
+
+"Does he wish to surrender?"
+
+"Yes; if the White Chief will not punish him and his people."
+
+"Have any of your warriors gone with the two tribes?"
+
+"No."
+
+"You may tell your chief that we do not want war, but peace and
+friendship, and that we will not injure him or his people and that if we
+desired bloodshed we would have killed the warriors we took three days
+ago, and also would have destroyed your villages and taken your women
+and children captive."
+
+The messenger was conducted to the front, and within two hours he
+returned with the message that the terms were accepted.
+
+"Then tell your chief that all his weapons must be brought to this
+place within two hours, and he must come here with them, and surrender
+to us in person."
+
+Within the stipulated time, the Kurabus, with their chief, appeared in
+their front, and Muro, with his warriors, went out to receive them. It
+must be understood that Muro's tribe, the Saboros, lived in the
+territory adjoining the Kurabus to the southeast, and that for years
+there had been bitter enmity between the two, but the Professor did not
+affect to know this.
+
+When the chief, Tastoa, entered the camp, he glanced around at the
+warriors, but did not exhibit apparent alarm. He marched direct to the
+Professor, with arms folded, and showed a dignified attitude,
+notwithstanding his humiliation. His mien plainly showed that he
+surrendered to the White Chief, and not to his late allies or enemies.
+
+In explanation of this, it should be said, that in a previous expedition
+against the Professor the Kurabus and the Saboros had been allied, and
+on the way, while they were surrounding the party of whites, had a
+disagreement which resulted in a separation and enmity.
+
+"I have come to surrender to the White Chief. The Tuolo and the Illyas
+would not agree with me that you meant no harm, and that you would do as
+you said, and have left me."
+
+"Then you have surrendered only because your allies left you?"
+
+"No; but because we believed you did not want revenge."
+
+"What made you think so?"
+
+"When we saw that you did not destroy our villages, and did not take our
+women and children, when you could have done so, we believed you. We
+believe the Great White Chief, but we do not believe the different
+tribes."
+
+"Then I cannot accept your surrender. You may take all your weapons and
+return to your village, and if you choose to do so, join your late
+allies. We will not make a movement against you until you have done so.
+You must believe Suros and Uraso, and Oma and Muro, as well as myself."
+
+He cast a curious glance about him, as the Professor spoke. This was a
+new species of warfare. What! allow him to return and continue the war,
+after he was in their power? The savage mind could not comprehend its
+meaning.
+
+"Why does the White Chief offer me such terms? I am in his power."
+
+"Because the white man does not believe in taking advantage of an enemy
+who has entrusted himself in his hands. As long as he is here he will
+not permit it, and the chiefs who are with me will not ask me to do it."
+
+"I do not understand this. Does Suros say so?"
+
+"The White Chief says the truth. He brings us a message from the Great
+Spirit. That message is different from the ones we learned. He has told
+me why our message is wrong, and my people will never again attack
+another people."
+
+This declaration bewildered Tastoa. He had heard the words of the wise
+Suros. But Oma arose and said: "I have been your enemy and you have
+been ours. The White Chief has been good to us, and I could not
+understand why. He has told us new things, and how we may live in
+happiness, and we believe him. When we took your warriors and captured
+your villages three days ago, he ordered that no one should be hurt, and
+he has given the warriors the best of food, and treated them as he
+treated his own warriors. We will follow his ways."
+
+Muro's eyes glistened as he arose to speak. "I and my people love the
+Great White Chief. I have come from their village, and all they have in
+the village is now coming to all of our people, and we are to learn the
+new way of living. From the time the White Chief rescued me from you, he
+has said to us, 'Do not kill; do not kill; but you have a right to
+defend yourselves.' They have made the weapons which talk with fire, and
+there are so many of them that they could quickly kill all of your
+people, if he would permit it. Now we are going to live like the White
+Chief tells us."
+
+"Then, if the White Chief tells me I must believe the Chiefs I will do
+so."
+
+"There is another thing which you must do. The Illyas have some of the
+white people in captivity. You must send a messenger and say that if
+they injure the captives I will visit them and destroy them and their
+villages, and that they must at once return to us, and if they do not,
+we will go there and take them by force."
+
+"It shall be done."
+
+"Muro, you may restore the weapons to the Kurabus."
+
+While the foregoing proceedings caused the utmost wonder in all of its
+phases, the restoration of the arms was one which so completely
+astonished them that the Chief could hardly speak. He finally approached
+the Professor, and grasping him by the hand, said:
+
+"I have never heard of such things before."
+
+"You must have your weapons, because your people must have food. Go to
+your villages now, and take with you the warriors we took three days
+ago. We have given them back their weapons, as you see."
+
+Ralsea, Oma and Suros then pressed forward, and held out the hands of
+friendship to him. He then turned to the Professor and said: "I do not
+see Uraso."
+
+"No; he is with the people who are coming from our village, but he will
+be the first one to go to you and tell you what the others have said."
+
+The first act of Tastoa was to select the fleetest runner, to attempt
+overtaking the Illyas, in order to deliver the message which the
+Professor had instructed him to communicate.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE NEW TOWN SITE. THE WATER WHEEL AND THE SAWMILL
+
+
+The Professor and his party immediately left for the Brabos' village,
+and before noon of the next day, Uraso, with the wagons and package
+train, came in sight. The warriors, together with the chiefs, and the
+two boys, Jim and Will, rushed to meet them, leaving the Professor and
+Chief Suros almost deserted. They smiled at the eagerness of all. They
+were just like boys.
+
+When the procession from the village came up they surrounded the wagon
+and Uraso's warriors, and took the packages from the carriers, bearing
+them in triumph to the village, and passed before the Professor and
+Suros. The boys began the dancing, and the warriors took up the
+suggestion, and improved on it. The hilarity knew no bounds.
+
+Uraso was the first to tell the warriors who were with him of the
+surrender of the Kurabus. This acted like a stimulant to the assembly.
+
+Later in the day, when peace and order had been restored, the Professor
+addressed them as follows: "Suros and I have enjoyed the dance and the
+joys you have had as much as you who have taken part in it. We are both
+so happy to know that you have become brothers. When we leave this
+village the Brabos will know that they are safe from all harm, and that
+their enemy is our enemy, and that if anyone in either of the tribes is
+injured it is the duty of all the tribes to come to his aid.
+
+"You must also know that everyone has a right to his own property. If I
+should take anything from one of you I ought to be punished. Everyone
+should be made to know this. If a Saboro takes anything from an Osaga
+without his consent, the Saboros should be the first to punish him, and
+if they do not then the other tribes should punish him.
+
+"We are bringing all the tools from our village, so that we can teach
+you how to make many wonderful things. We must find a suitable place to
+put up the machinery. Each tribe will send some of their people there to
+learn, and then the same things will be put up in your own lands.
+To-morrow we will go south to establish this place."
+
+There was one thing which was a source of grief to the boys, and that
+was the herd of yaks, which had been left behind. John spoke to Uraso
+about it, and Sutoto, who always considered the boys first, suggested
+that he and Muro would take two dozen of the warriors and bring the herd
+back.
+
+The boys would have enjoyed this outing with him, but the necessity of
+utilizing their services in the erection of the workshop and installing
+the machinery, was too urgent to permit it. The boys made it a
+condition, however, that Sutoto should be with them in the active work,
+as soon, as he returned.
+
+The Brabos regretted the leave-taking, but were delighted to learn from
+the Professor that he expected them to contribute a number of their men
+to accompany the expedition.
+
+They passed through the Kurabus' village the next day, and the Professor
+called the Chief to him. "We want some of your men to accompany us,
+because we want to teach them the same as the other tribes."
+
+This announcement was a most gratifying one, and he answered: "The White
+Chief has made us give him our hearts. My brother and my son will go
+with you."
+
+Could anything have been more expressive of the intention of the Kurabus
+Chief? The lad was about the same age as the boys, and they led him out
+to the wagon, and showed him the wonderful things, and then began the
+efforts to find words to express their meaning, and enable them to
+understand each other.
+
+It was an amusing thing to see the struggles of Blakely, who was
+whipping the warriors into a fighting force. Whenever Blakely was around
+the warriors would give him the military salute, as though they had been
+trained up to it all their lives.
+
+"I have often wondered where the military salute of raising the hand up
+to the eyebrows comes from," said Ralph.
+
+"Its origin dates from the commencement of the English army. During the
+tournaments of the Middle Ages, after the 'Queen of Beauty' was
+enthroned, the knights, who were to take part in the sports of the day,
+marched past the dais upon which she sat, and, as they passed, shielded
+their eyes from the rays of her beauty. Thus the habit continued, only
+in a modified form, to this day."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 5. The Banyan Tree._]
+
+Uraso had charge of the advance, and when they halted that day it was
+under the spreading shade of a tree that was a marvel to the boys,
+although Blakely said there were plenty of them in the southern part of
+the island.
+
+This was a tree, with a large central trunk, the branches of which
+spread out in all directions, to distances which were fully fifty feet
+on each side, and at irregular intervals were straight stems which shot
+down straight to the earth, the lower ends of which took root and thus
+served as supports for the long branches.
+
+The boys went around, examining it from all sides. "What is it?" asked
+the boys.
+
+"It is the banyan tree," answered John. "This is not the only kind which
+exhibits this peculiarity. What is called the screw pine also sends down
+shoots in the same way."
+
+"Well, does each of these vertical stems become a tree of itself?"
+
+"In the case of the mangrove these aerials, as they are called, carry up
+the sap, and form leaves at their upper ends, long after the main trunk
+dies."
+
+"Do you mean that these drooping branches carry up the sap in the
+opposite direction, after they take root?"
+
+"Yes; but that is not so remarkable, when it is understood that the buds
+of all trees are, in a measure, roots, and perform the same functions as
+roots. The plum tree, and many others, will form roots out of the buds,
+if the latter are buried in the earth."
+
+"I have heard about the orchids, as I believe they are called. Do they
+act in the same way?"
+
+"Not altogether; there are certain plants which live on other plants and
+get sustenance from them, just as some insects attach themselves to
+animals and live on them."
+
+"There is one thing I could never understand," remarked Tom, "and that
+is, why the sap of the trees goes upwardly."
+
+"I shall try and answer that question by asking another. If you put the
+end of a piece of blotting paper in water, what causes the water to
+travel along to the other end?"
+
+"That is just as much a mystery," he replied.
+
+"But as you know that to be so, because you can see the process, it will
+enable me to explain the principle of the movement of the sap. A wick in
+a lamp becomes saturated and the oil travels upwardly as long as the
+upper end is burning; but as soon as the light is put out the oil ceases
+to creep toward the burned end."
+
+"But in the case of a tree there is nothing to do that same thing."
+
+"That is what the sun does. It shines on the leaf, and absorbs the sap,
+or portions of it, and the sap tries to move upwardly to again moisten
+the dried pores of the wood."
+
+"I always thought the sap moved upwardly, because the tree was alive."
+
+"The blotting paper and the wick are not alive, are they? Still, you see
+the same process going on. This is due to what is termed capillary
+attraction. Suppose you take two tubes, one larger than the other, each
+open at both ends, and stand them in water. The water will rise in the
+tubes above the surface of the water outside, and the height it rises
+depends on the inside diameters of the tubes. The smaller the bore the
+higher will the water go up. So with the pores in the wood. They are
+very small, and thus the water moves to the greatest heights."
+
+It was now a question of the greatest importance to set up their home at
+the most desirable point. The Chiefs, together with John and Blakely,
+had numerous conferences with the Professor, on this subject. Many
+things had to be taken into consideration.
+
+First: It should be located at a point convenient to all the tribes.
+
+Second: It should be on or near the seacoast.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 6. Showing Capillary Attraction._]
+
+Third: Everything else being equal, the most desirable place would be in
+a section which had the richest soil.
+
+These considerations were suggested to the Chiefs, and all agreed that
+the river separating the land of the Osagas and the Berees would be most
+suitable.
+
+"I know a place," said Uraso, "where there is a running water like you
+have at the Cataract, and it is a little river that flows into the big
+river."
+
+"Does the water go down steep as we had it?"
+
+"Yes," answered Uraso.
+
+"Let us go there at once," responded the Professor.
+
+Within two days the spot was reached, and at the sight of it all were
+pleased beyond measure.
+
+"It is an ideal spot," exclaimed John. "The falls would be much better
+for our purpose than the Cataract, and it is close to the river. As the
+latter has ample depth for good-sized boats, and the sea is not more
+than three miles away, I judge, we are near enough to carry out the
+purpose of building the large vessel."
+
+No conferences were required to make the decision. "Your judgment is to
+be commended," said the Professor to Uraso. "I do not think there is a
+better spot on the island."
+
+"It suits me," said Blakely. "See the forest to the northwest? That is
+where I used to live. I know the boys will enjoy exploring it, and if
+they want excitement at any time, it is near enough to give them plenty
+of exercise."
+
+The boys' eyes glistened with excitement at the news. "Won't we have fun
+over there, when we are fixed up!" said Will.
+
+The Professor, addressing the Chiefs, said: "We do not need all the men
+we have here, as they will no doubt be needed for a time at their homes,
+in order to take care of the women and children. For the present I
+suggest that one-half of them be sent home, and the others remain here,
+and get the work started. This will take several moons, and we must then
+meet, unless we hear from the Illyas sooner, and march against them."
+
+The chiefs selected the ones which were to remain, and those instructed
+to return home were advised that later on they would be brought to the
+new village, to take their part in the work, and thus give an
+opportunity to all.
+
+The greatest enthusiasm prevailed, and each tribe tried to outdo the
+other in generous acts. The example set by the Professor was, indeed, a
+lesson to these poor, ignorant creatures.
+
+"Professor, what shall we do when the herd arrives? I think we had
+better fence in a field for them until they get used to the people and
+learn, to remain in this part of the country."
+
+"I am glad that you suggested that, Ralph. You may build a fence to hold
+them, and I suggest that you use the space in the forks of the river."
+
+"How many men shall I take for the purpose?"
+
+"As Sutoto will likely be here to-morrow, or on the following day, you
+should take enough to do it quickly. Use at least fifty of them. Stut
+would be the one to call in for help."
+
+"What kind of a fence shall we build?"
+
+"I will make a sketch of the best form for the present. Have some of the
+men cut posts that have several forks like the sketch shows. Cut these
+off at lengths so that one fork will be about two feet up out of the
+ground, and the other five feet or a little more above. Set others to
+work cutting the long poles, which you will find along; the river
+bank."
+
+"How long should we make the poles?"
+
+"Get them as long as you can; but make them, say, nine, eighteen or
+twenty-seven feet long. Then, at the same time, others can be digging
+the post holes, and make those eight feet apart and two feet deep. When
+the posts are set, the men with the poles can go along and lay them in
+place, just as I show."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 7. Sample of Island Fence._]
+
+The warriors took the bolos and sallied down to the stream. Ralph had
+made a mental calculation that at least one hundred posts would be
+required; the line of the fence was laid out and the holes marked. Muro
+took charge of the digging of the holes, and the men showed a wonderful
+aptitude for the work. During the afternoon the Professor wandered down
+to the line, and went among them, speaking words of cheer and
+commendation to all, so that he impressed his wonderful personality on
+every man.
+
+Meanwhile Harry, with the other boys, was at work preparing a new water
+wheel. In this he had the aid of Uraso, as the director general of the
+men. Many hands make light work. In a single day the wheel was ready
+for mounting. The dried lumber which had been brought over was a great
+advantage in making it, and in preparing the bridge below the falls on
+which the wheel was mounted.
+
+This was completed on the evening of the second day, just as Sutoto came
+into view with the cattle. It was an amusing sight to see how they had
+brought over the herd.
+
+Apollo was the name of the bull which had the terrific fight with the
+old bull. The first thing Sutoto did was to catch Apollo, and firmly
+secure him with hobbles. He was led in front, and the others driven
+along after him, the rest following meekly.
+
+When Apollo was finally loosened, and allowed the freedom of the corral,
+he gave a roar, pawed up the ground and shook his head at the indignant
+treatment.
+
+Their appearance meant milk and butter. There were thirty-five in the
+herd, of which ten were young animals, from four to six months of age,
+and six calves, the latter of which retarded the movement of the drove
+on the route.
+
+Early in the morning the wheel was put up, and it began to turn, to the
+delight of the men.
+
+"It would be better, Harry, to set up the sawmill at once, as I have
+directed a number of men to go to the forest with John, to cut the logs,
+and they will take the two teams along, so that by the time you are
+ready, the material will be here for you."
+
+"What shall I cut first?"
+
+"Get out the scantlings for the house and shop, as the latter will be
+the first to receive our attention. We must have some place to put the
+things we have in the wagons."
+
+It is remarkable how quickly a set of men, working under intelligent
+directions, can carry out a purpose. The logs began coming in shortly
+after noon, and in the morning the saw was at work, and it did not cease
+its operations for many a day.
+
+The natives were so fascinated with it that they considered it a grief
+to leave it. But the Professor had other purposes in view. George and
+Tom were selected to make several looms, similar to the one brought from
+the Cataract. In this work, as in everything else, some particular ones
+were selected and instructed to do the work.
+
+Ramie fiber was found in abundance, along the streams, and after a set
+of men had been instructed how to cut and gather it, they were kept at
+that work, while others were directed how to wet it down and rot the
+woody fiber and taught the manner in which the fiber was freed of the
+stalks.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+BUILDING UP THE NEW TOWN
+
+
+Within a week most disquieting rumors reached the new village as to the
+attitude of the Illyas and Tuolos. The former sent an insulting message
+that if the White Chief wanted the captives he should come for them.
+
+The Tuolos had returned to their country, but John was determined that
+they must have a visit. Thus far no bands from the warring tribes had
+molested either the Saboros, who were nearest on one side, or the Brabos
+on the other side.
+
+Their silence after a peace message was sent them could only be
+interpreted to mean one thing, on the part of the Tuolos.
+
+"The Illyas will not dare to injure the captives they have with such a
+warning as we gave them, and if they intended to destroy them it is
+possible that has been done already. Under the circumstances a little
+patience on our part may show them that we mean business."
+
+Muro, who understood the Illyas' character better than the others, was
+of the opinion that the Professor's views were most likely to accomplish
+the purpose without bloodshed. On the other hand, he was of an entirely
+different opinion with respect to the Tuolos.
+
+A few weeks of active work, first, in completing all preparations for
+defense, and second, in organizing the tribes into a working unity,
+would be of the greatest importance to the community.
+
+The shop and the laboratory were completed, and most of the things in
+the wagons were now in place. The important thing was the disposition of
+the treasure. For the safe keeping of this a large pit was dug beneath
+one end of the shop, and an underground vault constructed, the brick for
+this purpose being made from a natural silicate found in the hills near
+by, and which hardened without burning. The interior was also plastered
+with the same material, and a strong door, small, but thick, was
+constructed to close the opening.
+
+During the night John, the Professor and Blakely, with the boys,
+carefully stored the treasure there, so that the different tribes had no
+idea of the use to which the vault had been put.
+
+Two of the simple looms had been made, so that there were now three
+ready to turn out goods, and the fiber was in such shape that it could
+soon be utilized. In the meantime the boys concluded that as the weaving
+process was the slowest operation it would be well to construct several
+additional looms, and two of them capable of making goods four feet
+wide.
+
+One of the first acts of the Professor was to scour the hills to the
+north for minerals. He was in search of copper, and taking a half dozen
+of the natives with him, and one of the teams, a load of copper ore was
+brought in.
+
+The furnaces and smelters had been set up by the boys, previous to this,
+and within ten days a hundred pounds of copper were run into clay
+receptacles, to be used for the various purposes.
+
+"What do you suppose the Professor wants with so much copper?" asked
+Ralph.
+
+"You can make up your mind he has some scheme or other," answered
+George.
+
+The Professor really did have a scheme, for the first thing he consulted
+Harry about was a plan to make some small molds in two parts, out of
+brass, from a plaster paris disk which he had carved out.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 8._ THE ONE-CENT COIN]
+
+"What is that for?" asked Harry, laughing.
+
+"That is to make one of the first coins from our mint," he answered,
+smiling.
+
+A sample of the coin is shown.
+
+"What is the hole in the middle for?"
+
+"So they can be strung on a cord, and thus provide a means for keeping
+them."
+
+"That is the first time I ever heard of that plan."
+
+"It is not anything new. The Chinese adopted the plan years ago, and
+Belgium is a country which has followed the idea. It has been found
+very convenient for shoppers, as they can string them on vertical pieces
+of wire, and in that way they are always kept in columns before them,
+and can be readily taken off in making change."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 9._ THE FIVE-CENT COIN]
+
+In making the molds, the molten brass was first poured around the paris
+plaster disk, so that the metal was level with the top of the disk, and,
+after it was thoroughly cooled, an additional amount of metal was poured
+over this, so that the two parts would separate. The disk was then taken
+out, and two holes made on opposite sides through the top. The copper
+was then poured in one hole until it appeared at the other hole. In this
+way the print formed by the disk was cast in the coin.
+
+Harry made a half dozen of these molds, and the mint was ready for
+operation. Tom and one of the natives set to work making the coins, and
+the first day cast two hundred of them. Within a week they became quite
+expert at the business, and when they took stock at the end of the week
+over twenty-five hundred of the coins were in the treasury.
+
+A large-sized coin was turned out, which is also shown, the smaller
+being for one cent, and the larger five cents. The stock of coins within
+ten days amounted to fifty dollars in value, but it was a good
+beginning.
+
+During the evening the coins were shown around and admired, and John
+said: "We have plenty of silver, when the time comes, which can be
+worked up in the same way."
+
+This idea had not occurred to the boys. "But how," asked Will, "shall we
+use these? The natives won't give anything for them?"
+
+"That is what we are trying to teach them. They are of no value except
+as a medium of exchange. Money is of no value, except as it enables us
+to buy something with it. When you have a five-cent piece and a taro
+root before you, and are hungry, which will you take?"
+
+"The taro root, of course."
+
+"So it isn't the coin itself, but only its value in what you want. It is
+want that gives money any value."
+
+"But I still don't see how we are going to make the natives want the
+coins."
+
+"We do not intend to make them want them. But we may soon have some
+things they will need. Now it is immaterial whether they give money for
+it, or if they furnish us something we wish in exchange."
+
+"Then of what use is it to have the coins?"
+
+"Simply because we must have something to measure by. If you buy a yard
+of cloth you must have a yardstick. If you want a certain quantity of
+grain you must have a quart or a bushel measure. Now that yard or
+bushel, each, is worth so much, and they are measured by a coin or
+coins, of which both know the value."
+
+"I understand now. You are simply trading a certain marked coin for a
+bushel of grain, instead of giving something else for it."
+
+"Exactly; money in itself has no value. You cannot eat it, or make it
+serve as an article of clothing, or drink it. You can only measure the
+needed things with it."
+
+The practical operation of the use of coins as money had its first trial
+on the following day, when the Professor had two hundred cords prepared,
+on which were strung five one-cent coins and a five-cent coin.
+
+The warriors were told to file along the wagon, and George handed out
+one of the coin sets to each as he passed. They looked at the bright
+disks curiously, at first, and were informed that they were being
+rewarded for the work they had done. This was a singular way of
+requiting them for their services. They had obtained food in plenty, and
+therefore this way their pay; but now, in addition, they were being
+rewarded.
+
+Uraso explained the new proceeding. They had conspicuously displayed the
+ramie cloth, made in different colors, which had been woven during the
+past two weeks. Not a word was said about that. The goods displayed
+seemed to be of more value than the coins. It was something they could
+wear, and they envied the manner in which the white people clothed
+themselves.
+
+John went up to Jim, who had the fiber cloth in charge, and asked him
+for a piece, indicating the length of the yardstick, which he held, and
+when he was told that it was worth one of the small coins, John made a
+great show of taking one of the coins from the cord and paying for the
+goods which Jim cut off.
+
+Tom did likewise, and this was very soon repeated, some taking two yards
+or more. The natives regarded this as a new species of barter, and it
+did not take them long to see the peculiar features of the transaction.
+Before night fully half of the coins were again back in the hands of the
+treasurer.
+
+The next day the boys, at the instigation of the Professor, began a
+species of trade with the natives, purchasing some trinket or other
+article, for which coins were offered in exchange. This spirit began to
+take possession of the natives. Regularly each week the pay for work
+performed was given, and as the weaving of cloth went on, the sale of
+the goods began to increase.
+
+Soon the Professor called the chiefs, and said: "We ought to send some
+of these men to their homes, each week, and bring others here, so that
+all may have an opportunity to work and to learn, and also be able to
+buy the goods we make."
+
+There was a twofold purpose in this: The warriors would, he knew, take
+their purchases home, and thus give their families the benefits of the
+cloth, and it would incite a desire for them to again return and work
+for the purpose of acquiring more goods.
+
+This was the first object lesson. In the following week, the second one
+was quietly brought to their attention. The workers had been fed from
+the common table. It was desirable to stimulate individual effort.
+
+For this purpose the Professor, John and Blakely, as well as the boys,
+went to the different workers, and made bargains; some offered a coin
+for the bringing in of a brace of fowl; others for a certain amount of
+vegetables; and some for particular quantities of fruit and for barley.
+
+The sawmill was turning out a certain amount of lumber, and the main
+house was erected, and then began the building of a number of small
+two-and three-room dwellings, all put up cheaply, but in a substantial
+manner.
+
+This proceeding was looked on with wonder by the warriors. Before long
+the women and children of some of the workers appeared, and their coming
+pleased the Professor immensely.
+
+It was evident that the two warring tribes were in communication with
+each other, and as the affairs of the little colony were moving along in
+a very satisfactory way, it was determined to bring them to terms. This
+was brought about by two incidents, which will be related.
+
+The Brabo territory extended the farthest north of any of the inhabited
+lands, and adjoined the portion occupied by the Tuolos.
+
+In a previous book the history of John was related, in which he
+described an immense cave, near their village, occupied by the medicine
+men of their tribe, and where he took refuge when pursued. There he
+discovered a large amount of treasure. He and the boys had long wanted
+to go there.
+
+When the report was brought to the new village that the Tuolos had made
+a foray into the Brabo territory, and killed several warriors, carrying
+some of the women into captivity, it was a warning that could not be
+disregarded.
+
+Immediately, on the heels of this news, was the report of two runners
+from the Saboros that depredations had been committed by the Illyas.
+
+The Professor called John, Blakely and the chiefs Oma of the Brabos and
+Muro of the Saboros into consultation.
+
+"We are now in condition," he said, "where we must undertake to call
+those tribes to account. The outrages reported are probably only the
+forerunners of others which may be much more serious, and I want your
+views on the course to follow."
+
+"It is fortunate," answered Blakely, "that the tribes referred to are
+separated by the sections of the island inhabited by our allies. This
+gives us an opportunity to treat with each separately. It seems to me
+that we should attack the Illyas first, as they are the most powerful of
+the two."
+
+"I do not altogether agree with you," responded John. "My view is that
+we should proceed against the Tuolos, as they have committed the most
+serious offense, in killing the Brabos."
+
+"You speak wisely," said Muro. "The Brabos are not as well protected as
+my people."
+
+This observation, coming from Muro, was a most pleasing one to John and
+the Professor, and Blakely was instructed to muster a force of two
+hundred. Notices were sent to all the allied tribes, and within a week
+they arrived, all eager to engage in the expedition.
+
+"While engaged in that work the business must not cease here," observed
+the Professor. "It will be your duty, Blakely, to thoroughly drill the
+men, and instruct them in the uses of the weapons. For reasons which you
+will understand, John will accompany the expedition."
+
+During all this time there was not a day but the Professor, as well as
+George, Ralph and Jim, whenever opportunity offered, scouted about in
+various directions, and brought in new specimens of woods, flowers,
+vegetables, and samples of ores.
+
+The Professor's eyes were gladdened many times at the odd parcels left
+on his table, that excited the curiosity of the boys. Jim was an
+indefatigable gatherer of vegetable products, and one thing which
+attracted him immensely was the branch of a tree which bore a number of
+star-leaved clusters, each leaf being feather-veined, and the stems
+carried numerous yellowish purple-spotted flowers, and also nuts about
+the size of pigeon eggs.
+
+"Down near the large river the banks are full of these. Can we make any
+use of them?" asked Jim.
+
+"Why that is a variety of Chica," he answered.
+
+"What is Chica, anyhow?"
+
+"The seeds are good for making burning oil. The inner bark furnishes a
+fiber which resists all moisture; and the nuts possess a substance
+which is well known all over the world as mucilage. It is recognized in
+commerce as gum tragacanth."
+
+"I saw different kinds there. Are they all useful?"
+
+"Some species contain nuts which are very fine, but are never eaten raw.
+They must be roasted."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 10. Chica The Gum Plant._]
+
+"When Jim and I were down there this morning we saw at least a dozen
+different kinds of plants growing together in a space not three feet
+square. We both wondered why each kept on growing in its own way, from
+the same kind of soil. Now, don't the plants get all they are made of
+from the same soil? And if that is so, why don't they grow to be the
+same things?"
+
+"Of course, like the animal kingdom, the germ of each is different, but
+each takes the identical substances from the same soil, and converts
+them into entirely different products. One will make a gum; the other
+produces a kind of milk; others will turn out a hard substance, like the
+outer portion of the nut; some will make a vegetable good to eat; others
+will yield a poison, and yet all are from the same soil."
+
+"That is what I mean. Even though the plants are different, why is it
+that one will extract one thing and another something else?"
+
+"It is due to what is called irritability or sensitiveness in plants.
+One plant is sensitive to the flow of certain juices, and is irritated,
+so that it is set into activity when different kinds of substances are
+carried along the pores or deposited in the cells. As a result, this
+irritation causes the plant to take only certain ones and reject others,
+and its tissues are thus built up only by such elements as its
+sensitiveness selects."
+
+The training of the warriors with the new guns was a stirring sight for
+the boys, who could not help but be present during most of the time
+during the two days preceding the departure for the country of the
+Tuolos.
+
+Ralph and Tom begged permission to accompany the party, and this was a
+natural request, because they had been rescued from this tribe the year
+before.
+
+It thus happened that the party of warriors, equipped as they had never
+been before, left the village, with one of the wagons, which was loaded
+with provisions and ammunition, and the boys took charge of the team.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+THE EXPEDITION AGAINST THE TUOLOS
+
+
+It was decided to go north until they reached the level country, which
+would afford easy travel, and then move to the west and cross the large
+river which separated the Brabos from the Tuolos, as it would be better
+to meet them on the extreme western side of the ridge which they
+occupied.
+
+"Do you remember, Blakely, what kind of country is to be found directly
+west of their principal village?" asked John.
+
+"I have been over that entire country," responded Blakely.
+
+"When I recovered, the morning of the wreck, I went inland at once,"
+remarked John, "and I never saw the sea again. When you related your
+story about seeing a certain tribe offering up victims you must have
+been on the western side of the village."
+
+"Yes; I came up from the sea."
+
+"Well, you see I came down there directly from the north, and I reached
+the village on the eastern side, and I saw the sacrifice of the captives
+at the same time you did, but on the opposite side of the village."
+
+"That is very probable. On the western side the country is high, but not
+difficult to travel across."
+
+[Illustration: "_The act was such a startling one that they threw
+themselves on the ground in terror_"
+                                                        [See p. 95]]
+
+"That is the exact point I am aiming at. I know that all the way down,
+from the place where I struck into the interior, it would be almost
+impassable for the wagon."
+
+This settled the route to be taken, and they moved westwardly, after
+crossing the river, and before night the boys caught the first glimpse
+of the broad ocean.
+
+In the morning they put out scouts, which went well in advance of the
+column, and Muro was in charge of them. His instinct as a trailer was
+inimitable.
+
+Before evening of the second day the scouts announced the first signs of
+the Tuolos. The village could be reached within two hours' march, but
+John advised waiting for the following morning before approaching.
+
+During the early evening, however, Muro returned on a hurried trip from
+the front. "They are having a great feast at the village, and it appears
+that they will make sacrifices to-night, or to-morrow, so that we should
+approach as close as possible, and if we find that is their intention,
+prevent it."
+
+This news stirred all into activity. The column went forward with the
+utmost caution, although it was dark, and the wagon had to be guided
+along with great care.
+
+The movement proceeded until nine o'clock, and during the night march
+Muro had arranged a constant line of communication with John, through
+his runners. A festival was in progress, and the two victims were
+plainly seen by John when he and Muro went through the grass and
+inspected the village.
+
+The inaction of the whites had entirely disarmed the Tuolos. Indeed, as
+afterwards learned, they began to think that fear prevented an attack on
+their village, and no sentinels were posted to warn them of any
+approaching foe.
+
+While waiting for the return of John and Muro, Ralph and Tom also
+wandered around the section surrounding the camp. They were in a valley,
+on both sides of which were ridges running north and south. The moon
+came out before ten o'clock, and they remembered some of the scenes
+about them. They had been brought from the south through this identical
+valley when they were captured by the Tuolos.
+
+They were on the hillside, not five hundred feet from their camp, and
+were about to descend the hill, when Ralph started back, and grasped
+Tom's arm.
+
+"What is that dark object directly ahead?"
+
+The dark object was an opening into the hill, but as it was by the side
+of a projecting rock, it had the appearance of an object. They looked at
+each other for a moment in silence.
+
+"I wonder if this is another cave, or the one John spoke about?" asked
+Tom.
+
+"No, that is on the east side of the village. We are below the village.
+Do you think we had better make an investigation?"
+
+"Yes; but I wish John was here. Come on; we have plenty of help here if
+we need it."
+
+The opening was approached as noiselessly as possible. It showed a
+typical cave entrance, through solid rock, or, rather, through what
+appeared to be a cleavage which had been spread apart. They had no
+light of any kind, but the discovery was one which interested them,
+because they knew of the treasure caves existing on the island, and two
+of them, at least, were within their knowledge, and contained immense
+hoards.
+
+"Can you strike a match, so we can get some idea of it?" asked Tom.
+
+"I am going to try it at any rate." So saying, the match was lighted,
+and its beams penetrated the interior. In their eagerness the match was
+muffled, and went out, but they caught sight of a huge white cross, far
+beyond, and it seemed to be moving.
+
+"Did you notice that?" asked Tom excitedly.
+
+"Do you mean the cross?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"It seemed to move up and down."
+
+"I thought so, too."
+
+"I don't care about going any farther without we have some one with us
+and can have a decent light."
+
+The boys hurried to the camp, and waited for John. When he came they
+hurriedly related the experience.
+
+"That will do to investigate."
+
+"We saw a cross in there, moving up and down."
+
+"Have we any of the candles with us?" he asked.
+
+"Possibly; I can soon tell."
+
+Tom came back with the news that he had found a box of them.
+
+"As the village is quieting down, we shall have plenty of time to make
+the examination to-night. We must wait until Muro returns, so as to get
+the latest news, and can then start out."
+
+Muro returned shortly after, and together with the boys, went up the
+hill, and entered the mouth of the cavern. Three candles were lighted.
+The great cross was before them, but it was such a different thing, now
+that they were face to face with it. The end of the chamber, which the
+light penetrated, had four openings to the chambers beyond, two above
+and two below. These openings were separated from each other, and the
+white walls between the openings appeared to form the white cross.
+
+It was wonderfully realistic, this fanciful and fantastical carving of
+nature through the rocky structure.
+
+"But I saw it move; that is sure," said Tom.
+
+"Did you see that move, or was it the light of the match that moved?"
+asked John. "Imagination plays many a trick, during the excitement of
+the moment."
+
+John took the light, and by moving it up and down showed how the beams,
+shining past the glistening walls, would cause the illusion of the cross
+moving.
+
+The cavern was found to be much broken up as they advanced, and reaching
+the second set of chambers, it was evident that some one had lately
+occupied it. Penetrating farther into the interior, they were surprised
+to see articles of savage clothing, and long reeds, that had been burned
+at the ends, together with utensils for cooking.
+
+"We have entered one of the homes of the medicine men of the Tuolos. I
+have no doubt they are now at the village attending the festivals, and
+we had better leave as quickly as possible."
+
+Before the entrance was reached they heard a great commotion outside,
+and their own people rushing to and fro, and as they were emerging three
+fantastically garbed natives met them. John ordered them to halt in the
+native tongue, and they stood there irresolute. The boys also leveled
+their guns at them, and they submitted as Muro and his men rushed up.
+
+The appearance of John and the boys startled Muro beyond expression, as
+the latter said: "These are the medicine men of the tribe."
+
+"I knew it," responded John. "We have just been investigating the place
+they live," and he pointed to the mouth of the cavern.
+
+These were the men who performed the sacred rites of the Tuolos, and
+were called the Krishnos, as they learned from Muro.
+
+"Take them to the camp," ordered John.
+
+Without more ado, they were hustled down to the wagon. It seems that
+when the Krishnos returned from the village they found themselves in the
+immediate vicinity of the camp, and in the effort to escape aroused the
+sentries, who rushed upon them.
+
+If they could have reached the cave, not one of the warriors would have
+dared to enter it, as their superstitious fears would have prevented
+them, but outside the cave they had no such feelings. It was fortunate,
+therefore, that John and the boys were there to prevent them from
+entering.
+
+As they were going down the hill, John exhibited a curious cross, He had
+found it in the cave, just before he advised the boys to go out. It was
+made of stone, and one of the limbs had a hole near its end, which
+indicated that it had been carried as a charm.
+
+"Isn't that singular? Why should the natives have the Christian sign of
+the cross?"
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 11. Stone Cross found in Cave._]
+
+"That is one of the earliest symbols that the world knows. Its use goes
+back beyond the earliest period of history. It was the favorite figure
+used by the astronomers and astrologers of the ancient Babylonians,
+fully four or five thousand years ago. The clay tablets and stone
+monuments of the Persians contained them; the Hittites, in the earliest
+Jewish times, used them; and the ancient Egyptians decorated the High
+Priests officiating in the temples with figures of the cross."
+
+"It seems to me that if it was used by peoples in different parts of the
+earth, there must have been some reason for it."
+
+"One of the well-known forms found in the inscriptions shows the cross
+within a circle. This seems to be the meaning of the phrase in Isaiah
+which says the 'four ends of the earth.' In Bible times the earth was
+known to be round, so that the expression used in the Bible about the
+'circle of the earth,' and the four ends, seem to point clearly to the
+cross within the circle, to indicate the four points of the compass."
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 12. Ancient Crosses._]
+
+"So the Christians took an old form and made it their symbol?"
+
+"Yes; the Roman cross, used at the crucifixion, had the lower stem
+longer than the other, and from this fact that form became the Cross of
+Christianity."
+
+The uproar created by the pursuit attracted the attention of the
+warriors in the village, who ran to and fro, and soon learned the cause
+of the disturbance.
+
+The camp was kept quiet, however, but the scouts watched the excitement
+created, and reported the results at frequent intervals. Muro knew they
+would not desert the village, as they would not be likely to leave it at
+the mercy of their enemies, at least without a fight.
+
+John confronted the medicine men as soon as the wagon was reached.
+
+"Why do your people make war, and refuse to treat with us?"
+
+"Because you have no right to come and try to kill us."
+
+"Why did you imprison our people, and offer up some of them as a
+sacrifice?"
+
+"Because your people fought us."
+
+"You lie; you took those who were defenseless, and had no weapons. You
+do not tell the truth."
+
+"The Great Spirit told us to kill you."
+
+"Why do you try to lie to me. I do not believe you. The Great Spirit
+never told you so. He would not speak to you."
+
+"The white man does not know. He speaks to us."
+
+"Where does he speak to you?"
+
+"In the sacred cave."
+
+"How does he tell you?"
+
+"With wonderful signs."
+
+"Tell me some of the wonderful signs."
+
+"He makes a great light, and we read it in the light. He makes a great
+noise, and we know what he says."
+
+"Does he make a great light and a great noise up there?" and John
+pointed up to the heavens.
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then why did you lie to me when you said that he speaks to you in the
+cave?"
+
+"We can understand it only in the cave."
+
+While they were thus speaking John held the stone cross in his hand, and
+the Krishnos eyed him curiously. He finally saw the movement, and, quick
+as a flash, he reached down in his pocket, unobserved by them, and drew
+forth one of the wooden matches, which they had made at the Cataract.
+
+"What is this?" he asked sternly, pointing to the cross.
+
+They raised their hands and rolled their eyes upwardly, as though about
+to pronounce a malediction on John. He deftly drew the match along the
+rear side of the stone, and as it blazed forth into light, he thrust it
+forward into their faces.
+
+The act was such a startling one that they threw themselves on the
+ground in terror.
+
+"The Great Spirit told me that you lied, and he is about to come out of
+the stone and consume you. He will follow you everywhere unless you go
+to the Tuolos at once and tell them that the Great Spirit has told you
+to give up the captives, and to never again kill any of them. You must
+tell them we have been sent to make them our friends, and that if they
+do not follow this advice we will punish them."
+
+The Krishnos cringed before John. It was obvious to the surrounding
+warriors that the words they had heard had an ominous import, and they
+saw how feeble were the devices of the so-called wise men when pitted
+against the knowledge of John.
+
+John assumed a most tragic attitude, as he slowly raised his arm and
+pointed with his finger to the savage village. "Go," he said, "and bring
+back to me the answer before the morning sun comes up."
+
+They hesitated. "Do you fear to go? Are the wise men cowards? Did the
+Great Spirit tell you to fear the Tuolos? Shall we go and sacrifice all
+your people?"
+
+"They will not believe us; they will kill us."
+
+"Then they, too, know you have lied to them. If you remain here you will
+not be safe, because the great light might destroy you."
+
+Then turning to Muro he said: "Take these men to their village, and see
+that they are forced to meet their chiefs," and with an imperious air he
+turned from them.
+
+Muro's warriors were not too gentle with them. The spell of savage
+witchcraft had been broken. John and all of them knew it. They were
+hustled forward in the darkness, and as they approached the village Muro
+told them to advise the chiefs in his presence what John had said.
+
+Muro and the warriors, with the loaded guns, remained at a safe
+distance, and the Krishnos entered the village. They waited in silence
+for more than an hour, and then a commotion was noticed, which grew more
+intense as the voices increased in volume.
+
+In the meantime John with the rest of the warriors came up quietly in
+the rear, and, after consulting with Blakely and Muro, the village was
+surrounded.
+
+The boys saw the large hut where they were confined, after being
+captured, and from which they were rescued. Calling John's attention to
+it, Ralph said: "That big house is the place they kept us, and that is
+where you found us."
+
+John looked at them in surprise. He did not know this, as at the time
+the boys were rescued he was in mental darkness, and did not recall the
+incident.
+
+It was obvious that some tragedy was being enacted. While awaiting the
+result of the conference Muro was away instructing the pickets who were
+around the village. He soon appeared, bringing with him two Tuolos whose
+dress betokened them as belonging to the same order as the individuals
+who had been sent into the village.
+
+Calling John aside he said:
+
+"The Tuolos have two rival sets of medicine men. These belong to the
+other set, and are the ones who perform the religious rites."
+
+"Where did you find them?"
+
+"Directly east of the village."
+
+"Were they going to the village?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Did they come from the hill on the east side?"
+
+John mused for a while, and then said quietly to Muro: "They came from a
+cave on the hill, where they perform their rites, and it is a place I
+want to see. It is one of the reasons I insisted on coming to settle
+matters first with the Tuolos."
+
+Muro was astounded at the information, as he asked: "How do you know
+there is a cave in the hill?"
+
+"Because I have been in it, and I know what it contains. They are having
+trouble in the village with the Krishnos we sent there."
+
+"Yes," responded Muro; "and they have sent for the others, as they do
+not believe what they have told the chiefs."
+
+"I will question the ones you have brought in."
+
+The two captured were brought before John. They stood before him in
+defiant attitude, and some of the Brabo warriors cringed at their
+frowning mien.
+
+"Why were you going to the village?" he asked with a severe frown.
+
+At this question they scarcely deigned to move their heads, and were
+silent. The question was repeated, but they refused to answer. This was
+carrying out the very line of conduct which Muro had advised John would
+be the case, and in concert they had mapped out a course of action.
+
+"Tell me, Muro, have any of your people the same fear of these Krishnos
+as the others possess in the various tribes?"
+
+"It is the universal belief in the various tribes that to offend them
+means death. The only ones who are supreme are the chiefs, who often
+imprison them, but even the chiefs dare not kill them."
+
+"Will your people carry out our command if we do not order them killed?"
+
+"My people will do whatever I say, even though it be to kill them. They
+saw how the other Krishnos quaked when you made the fire come out of
+the stone."
+
+"Then, if they refuse to answer me, I will order them to be beaten. You
+will understand."
+
+"That will be done with pleasure," he answered.
+
+It was obvious to all that the Krishnos considered themselves immune
+from the threats of John, as they stood there and seemed to breathe
+imprecations on the heads of their captors.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+THE SUBMISSION OF THE TUOLOS
+
+
+The situation was a tense one to the entire party, and John moved
+forward, placing himself directly in front of them.
+
+"Do you think the Great Spirit can prevent us from punishing you? If you
+do not answer immediately I will call on him to lay stripes on you. Do
+you answer?"
+
+He stepped back slowly, and then suddenly spoke out the warning signal
+that he had arranged with Muro, and instantly six of the most powerful
+Saboros sprang upon them and bound them together face to face. John
+stood there with arms folded. He raised a hand, and two of the warriors
+raised the supple and toughened twigs, and brought them down on their
+bare backs.
+
+It was all done with such wonderful celerity and precision that it
+astounded the circle of warriors beyond measure, and the effect was
+doubly so to the two Krishnos. John had staged this to produce the
+greatest effect. The Krishnos were bound with their heads side by side,
+and a cloth put over their heads, so that they had no knowledge who
+their tormentors were.
+
+They danced about, and in their shrieks called out imprecations on their
+enemies, but soon, as the blows continued, begged for mercy, and Muro
+signaled them to cease.
+
+The cloth was removed and John again addressed them. They again
+persevered in their silence, and at a motion the cloth was again placed
+over their heads.
+
+Before the second chastisement began they yielded and the cords were
+released.
+
+"You see the Great Spirit did not come to your assistance. Why were you
+going to the village?"
+
+"To tell the chiefs not to yield to you."
+
+"The Great Spirit has told me to tell you that the Tuolos must give up
+their captives, and cease war. Will you tell the chief so?"
+
+"The Great Spirit did not tell you so," they defiantly answered.
+
+At a signal from John the cords were again brought into play, and the
+cloth exhibited. At this sight they pleaded for mercy, and promised to
+do as John requested. They were released and conducted to the outer line
+of pickets, and quickly disappeared within the village.
+
+It was now nearly four in the morning, and the first streaks of light
+began to show in the east. Muro knew the Tuolo character. They regarded
+themselves to be the superiors of all the tribes, and hitherto had
+treated the others with contempt, excepting the Illyas, whom they
+respected only because they were the most powerful.
+
+"They are having a warm time discussing the situation," remarked John,
+as he noted the surging inhabitants. That there was indecision became
+apparent, and the condition of the Krishnos more precarious, as light
+began to give them a more decided glimpse of the activities in the
+village.
+
+Soon warriors were noticed rushing to and from the large circle within
+which the Krishnos sat. Bows and spears were hurriedly grasped.
+
+"What does it mean?" asked John.
+
+"It is likely they know they are surrounded, and have decided to defend
+themselves," answered Muro.
+
+A warrior of distinguished appearance emerged from the circle, and
+advanced toward the position occupied by John. Muro beckoned to John,
+and together they moved into the open. The warrior saw the two
+approaching, and he halted.
+
+Turning to his band he spoke a word, and another no less distinguished
+stepped from the rank and moved toward him.
+
+"The first one is the chief, and the other one he called to follow is
+the next in rank. As there are two of us, so must there be two on his
+side."
+
+John and Muro advanced without halting, and as they neared each other
+the chief, in the most haughty manner, addressed Muro as follows:
+
+"Why do you come to make war on my people?"
+
+Muro, taking his cue from John's previous attitude, rose to his full
+height and replied: "You have always been the aggressor against the
+other people, and you have within the last moon killed and taken two
+Brabos in captivity, and we demand their return."
+
+"That I will not do."
+
+"Then the White Chief will speak to you."
+
+John advanced and began the conversation. "The white people do not
+desire war. You captured two of my people and I took them from you with
+only four men. All the tribes but you and the Illyas have united to
+compel you to submit, and you shall not again be free to murder and
+injure other people.
+
+"If you want war, we are prepared to fight you. Your village is
+surrounded, and we have the fire guns which will compel you to yield. If
+you will surrender, we will see to it that you and your people shall not
+be harmed, but if you resist you will be killed. You cannot escape."
+
+The chief was stunned, and could not answer. John saw the impression the
+address had made, and proceeded: "What did the Krishnos tell you? Did
+they not tell you to surrender? Did they not tell you that they lied
+when they said the Great Spirit wanted you to kill us?"
+
+The chief was silent. Was he debating the matter in his mind? John
+continued: "When this speaks," he said, pointing to his gun, "all of the
+fire guns about your village will speak."
+
+"How shall we know you will keep your word?"
+
+Muro held up his hand, as he spoke: "Ask the Kurabus whether the White
+Chief keeps his word."
+
+Before he could reply, John added: "The White Chief keeps his word. He
+believes the people here will keep their word if they know the others
+will do so. He has armed the tribes who have allied themselves with him,
+because he believes in them, and we do not want to make you captives, or
+offer sacrifices of your brave men."
+
+"The White Chief speaks wisely," said Muro. "He does not believe in
+making sacrifices. The Great Spirit has told him that is wrong."
+
+Still the chief pondered, and, slowly raising his head, said: "I believe
+the white man, and what he says. I will tell my people."
+
+He turned and moved toward the village, John and Muro remaining there,
+as an indication that they expected an immediate answer.
+
+"He will yield," said Muro, "and according to custom, will first tell
+his people what his decision is."
+
+Muro was right. Within a half hour the chief advanced at the head of his
+warriors, the latter of whom had left their bows and spears at the
+circle, and the two stood ready to receive them.
+
+As the two chiefs appeared the warriors lined up behind them.
+
+"I have brought my warriors here to show you that we will be friends."
+And John advanced and took the hand of the chief.
+
+"In my country we become friends when we take each other's hands, and I
+am glad to see that you have wisdom to accept us as your friends."
+
+At a signal from Muro, the warriors advanced from all sides, and
+together they marched into the village, the different ones telling the
+Tuolos the wonderful things the White Chief was doing, and how they were
+bringing all the tribes together, and making them stop war.
+
+The first act of the Tuolo chief was to liberate the two Brabo warriors.
+When the wagon was driven into the village, the people gathered around
+the curious contrivance. Some of them remembered it when it was there
+nearly a year before, but under quite different circumstances.
+
+The boys, Ralph and Tom, soon attracted the attention of the chief. He
+went up to them, and simulating the act of John, held out his hand. The
+boys understood it, and respectfully responded and saluted the chief, in
+regular military fashion.
+
+Then, climax to the foregoing events, Blakely gave a word of command to
+the fifty who were armed with the guns, and for the benefit of their new
+allies, put them through a manual of arms. The precision with which this
+was done, and the remarkable manner in which the subsequent evolutions
+were performed, astonished the Tuolos.
+
+While this was going on there was little time to notice the condition of
+the Krishnos. They had been bound; and were now lying in disgrace at the
+place where the circle had been formed, trembling at their fate.
+
+Before preparations had been made for breakfast, the chief gave a
+command, and a number of warriors rushed up to the poor fellows, and
+began to drag them to the large hut.
+
+Muro motioned to John, and quietly said: "They will probably torture
+them."
+
+John appeared before the chief and said: "The Great Spirit will be
+offended if you injure the Krishnos."
+
+"What would you have me do with them?"
+
+"Give them to me."
+
+The chief ordered them to be brought forward, and spoke to them: "The
+White Chief has asked me not to injure you, and at his command I have
+given you to him."
+
+This announcement seemed to stun them, but Muro was quick to assure them
+that the White Chief meant no harm.
+
+The boys took complete satisfaction in going over to the large hut, to
+again witness the place where they had spent two weeks in terror,
+expecting that each day would be their last.
+
+But we must return to the Professor and the colony. Two days after the
+departure of John and his force, the second insulting message came from
+the Illyas, in which the statement was made that they and the Tuolos had
+united to drive the White Chief from the country and to destroy the
+tribes who were allied against them.
+
+A messenger was sent after John, but this was not necessary, as the
+Tuolos were in their power before the messenger came.
+
+The Professor had ordered the building of a number of small houses, each
+containing two or three rooms, and these were plainly fitted up for
+comfort. Some of the natives became quite expert at putting up these
+structures when once directed.
+
+George and Jim were set to work, with a half dozen of the men, at
+building chairs and tables for the houses, and the work of weaving the
+cloth goods was not interrupted for a moment. As stated, the women began
+to drift in, and the Professor welcomed them. When they arrived, many of
+them with their children, the Professor assigned them and their husbands
+to these cottages.
+
+This was an intense delight to them. Each cottage had a small patch of
+ground surrounding it, and the first care was to advise them how to lay
+off and plant flowers about the place, to make the surroundings
+attractive.
+
+It must not be thought that the houses were gifts. It was not the
+purpose to instill the idea that this work was one of charity. Instead
+each head of a family was made to understand that he must pay for the
+home, and this was done in as simple a manner as possible, so it would
+be appreciated and understood.
+
+Individual effort was stimulated on the part of the different workers.
+As fast as the members of a worker's family arrived, they were installed
+in houses, and then began a new system of providing for their keep.
+Hitherto, they had boarded at the expense of the common fund; but now
+this was gradually changed, and they were informed that each family must
+provide its own food, and that those who did so would receive a larger
+number of coins.
+
+This resulted in each one trying to find some new direction in which
+they could get the coins. It is curious how this new phase of living
+brought out traits common to humanity everywhere. Some more eager than
+others, and having less honesty than the common run of natives, sought
+to get their sustenance by resorting to trickery and thievery.
+
+In their native state this was not considered a crime. It was
+commendable, unless detected. But by constant talk, on the part of the
+Professor, and by example, he instilled into the policemen, which he
+had installed, the principles of honesty. He awarded those who were
+vigilant, and the result was that they were most acute to detect the
+rogues.
+
+The first thief was caught the day after John's party had gone. He was
+immediately brought before the Professor. The arrest of a thief was such
+a new proceeding that the workers could not be kept at work, and the
+Professor suggested that they should all be present at the trial.
+
+The inquiry was conducted with decorum, Harry being appointed to
+prosecute him, and George to defend the prisoner. George did it
+vigorously, too, but it was a plain and palpable case, and he was found
+guilty. This proceeding was another entirely new manner of treating an
+offender, and the people marveled at the attempt to defend the thief.
+
+The Professor saw the cause of the wonderment, and said: "We do not
+defend the wrong, but we believe that each man who is charged with a
+crime should be permitted to defend himself. If he does not know how to
+properly defend himself, then it is our duty to see that he is protected
+in all his rights, for he is not a criminal until it is proven."
+
+"He has tried to explain why he took the goods, but you know what he has
+said was not true, and he must be punished for it. He must work two
+moons without getting any of the coins, and if he repeats the crime, he
+must work until he restores the value of the goods taken, so that each
+one will know that a thief cannot take things from another without
+paying for it."
+
+The incident for a long time deterred anyone from repeating the offense.
+It was an object lesson, because it instilled a respect for a law which
+was fair to all.
+
+Suros, the chief of the Berees, was the most impressed by the scene, and
+could not express himself too forcibly at the wonderful effect which the
+principle would have on the tribes in their dealings with each other. He
+was really an intelligent native, far ahead of the others in his
+comprehension of the duties of one to the other.
+
+The fact that he was regarded with reverence by all but the Kurabus, and
+was even respected by them, was a strong factor in determining the
+Professor to set in motion a form of government which it was hoped would
+forever terminate all bitterness of feeling between the tribes, and
+which will be detailed hereafter.
+
+During the day on which the Tuolos submitted, the two chiefs, together
+with John, Blakely and Muro, were frequently in consultation.
+
+"The Great White Chief, who rules all of us, wishes to see you, and you
+must bring fifty of your warriors with you to his village," said John.
+"He will show you how you can be made strong, and your people happy. He
+will tell you what our purpose is, and what the Great Spirit asks you to
+do. We will start in the morning."
+
+The chief, to the surprise of all, did not demur at this. That night
+John called in Blakely, Muro, Ralph and Tom.
+
+"I want you to go with me to the cave on the hill to the east. There are
+some things which belong to us. We shall take them, since they are of
+no use to the people here, and we may be able to put some of the things
+in such a condition that they will be of value to the people on the
+island."
+
+The wagon was taken along, and the people wondered at the strange
+proceedings. Many of them followed, but Muro warned them to remain
+behind. It was evident to all, however, that they were going to the
+Krishno cave, and its purport was a mystery to them.
+
+John's sense of direction did not deceive him. He soon found the
+entrance on the village side, and, lighting the candles, immediately
+entered the cavern. John led the way, as his experience in its hollows
+enabled him to point out the direction to be taken.
+
+The interior, lighted up by the candles, was most weird and beautiful.
+The stalactite hangings were not massive, but showed the most delicate
+tracings, in the first chamber reached. This was the western wing of the
+great interior cross which John had previously described.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+PLANS FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE NATIVES
+
+
+Directly beyond this chamber, and on a line with the entrance passage,
+was an extension which led to the other side of the hill. The chamber
+formed an immense cross, in its plan section, and the two lateral
+extremities were the points of interest.
+
+The party first went to the left, and there found the habitation of the
+Krishnos. Peculiar implements and instruments were discovered, and all
+of these were taken, and placed together, Muro and the boys looking on
+in wonder.
+
+Among them were found a number of crude crosses and numerous charms or
+amulets, the kind that they vended, and which the natives gave their
+souls and bodies to acquire.
+
+"The possession of these will be of great service to us, as the people
+reverence them, and we must not expect to change their beliefs in a
+fortnight."
+
+"You said there was a lot of treasure here," remarked Ralph.
+
+"That is in the other wing of the chamber. As we have everything from
+this place that is serviceable, we will go to the south wing."
+
+The recessed part of the chamber at this place had the appearance of
+being carved from the rock, and decorated with the universal calcium.
+The floor was covered with stalagmites, rough and uneven, showing that
+the place had not been trod, perhaps for centuries.
+
+"What are those curious things?" asked Tom, gazing at the square-shaped
+objects, which were arranged in one corner.
+
+"By opening them we shall see."
+
+"Here is one, partly opened," exclaimed Ralph in great excitement.
+
+"Yes; that is the one I tried to get into," answered John.
+"Notwithstanding it was a hazardous thing to do at the time, I took the
+risk. The Krishnos were at that very time at the other wing which we
+just left."
+
+The receptacle was brought out and examined. The wealth of gold and
+silver was amazing. Blakely could hardly believe the testimony of his
+eyes.
+
+"Your ship, the _Adventurer_, is floating around in pieces on the
+Pacific, but I imagine there is enough here to compensate you for the
+loss of the vessel," remarked John, as he noticed Blakely's wondering
+look.
+
+"How can we ever get all this stuff on the wagon?" asked Tom. "The boxes
+are all falling to pieces."
+
+"The Krishnos have plenty of copper vessels, as well as others, which
+they have gathered up from the wrecks on the coast. You know the best of
+everything goes to them, and the chiefs are not strong enough really to
+prevent them on account of the superstitious fears they inculcate."
+
+True enough, the eastern wing had a hoard of vessels, some of them of
+the greatest value, which were arranged about the chests of treasure,
+and the work of filling the receptacles was industriously undertaken.
+This occupied them for fully three hours, and the greater task of
+carrying them to the wagon was begun.
+
+When they emerged from the cave at four in the morning they were tired
+beyond all description, but they had a mass of treasure, that did not
+pale in comparison with the amount taken out of the caverns near the
+Cataract.
+
+In the morning the Tuolos were selected, and the chief invited to enter
+the wagon. John went to the large hut, and released the Krishnos. They
+were unbound, and directed to follow the marching column, surprised at
+being free from the captive bonds. They could not understand such
+treatment, and this was heightened when John ordered the aged Krishno,
+who walked with difficulty, to take a place in the wagon.
+
+The natives saw the warriors and their chief depart, not as prisoners,
+since all had their weapons, but conducted in state, if the appearance
+of the chief in the vehicle was an indication of the proceeding.
+
+Two days thereafter the cavalcade approached the village, and the chief
+strained his eyes, as he peered at the multitude about him, and saw a
+village of a most remarkable character, where two moons before was a
+virgin tract of land.
+
+The venerable appearance of the Professor attracted him. He was startled
+at the sight of Suros, and then, glancing about, he recognized Oma of
+the Brabos, Uraso of the Osagas, and lastly, Tastoa, chief of the
+Kurabus, lately his ally.
+
+The Professor welcomed him with outstretched hand. "You are wondering at
+the sight of your late enemies, and of your friends. We have nothing but
+friends here. They can tell you that we welcome you as a friend, and
+will explain why we do so. We will show you what the people are doing
+for themselves, and how happily they live, and the White Chief brought
+you here so that you might see these things for yourself."
+
+"We welcome you, Marmo, as one of our friends," said Suros. "I tried
+many moons ago to tell you that the Great Spirit did not want us to kill
+each other, but the wise men told you differently. We do not believe
+them any more, but listen to the White Chief."
+
+"He has told us the most wonderful things, and taught us how the white
+men live, and how different tribes live together in peace."
+
+After the welcoming functions and the explanations were concluded, he
+was taken to the different works, and everything explained to him. He
+saw the water wheel, and how it turned the sawmill and the grindstone
+and lathes, and the mill for making the flour.
+
+The looms interested him the most of all. It is singular how the various
+tools and machinery affected the different ones, and this was
+particularly observed by the boys.
+
+"I have watched the several tribes," said Harry, "as they first looked
+about them at the strange things, and it is curious how the different
+things impress them. I have noticed that the Osagas are particularly
+interested in machinery. The Saboros like anything connected with the
+soil, and they would make good agriculturists."
+
+"Don't you remember when Uraso came to the Cataract he never took any
+stock in the guns, but Stut couldn't keep his hands off them?" responded
+Tom.
+
+"The old chief Marmo thought the loom was the finest thing in the whole
+lot. He is over there now, and has been watching it for the last two
+hours."
+
+For two days the chief wandered around, paying no attention to anything
+but the machinery, and the products turned out. The coins were a
+novelty, and a string was presented to him. He noticed the friendly
+attitude of all the warriors to his men, and marveled at the change.
+
+He could not understand why the men would work for the coins, and then
+give them up for something else. The Professor tried to explain this,
+and it must be confessed that it was a hard thing to do. It seemed that
+nothing but a practical application would make it plain.
+
+The Tuolo chief was a ready listener now, and was unusually quick to
+grasp a situation, although he could not learn the ethics of the white
+man. The Professor had him present at one of the trials for theft of a
+petty nature, which occurred a few days after his arrival.
+
+He was surprised to find that any notice should be taken of such a
+trivial affair. The Professor, commenting on it at the trial, which he
+did particularly for the benefit of Marmo, said: "It is not the amount
+of the theft, but the act itself, which we must condemn. If you could
+have taken a larger amount you would have done so, and you must learn
+that the property you took did not belong to you but the some one else,
+and that is just as much a crime as though you took all the man
+possessed."
+
+That was sufficient for his first lesson in justice. "But," he asked of
+the Professor, "can all men be guilty of doing wrong?"
+
+"Can you do wrong?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"But you are a Great Chief, and how can you do wrong in taking things
+from your people?"
+
+"Because the people own the things, just as much as you own the things
+which you have properly obtained."
+
+"Then if you do wrong, will you be punished?"
+
+"Yes; just the same as the people who do wrong. My punishment should be
+greater, if I do wrong, because I should set them an example to do
+right."
+
+"But how can I do wrong if I take anything from my people? I own
+everything."
+
+"Who gave everything to you? By what right should you or I own
+everything? Because we are chiefs does not give us the right to own
+everything."
+
+"Then how can the chiefs ever own anything?"'
+
+"They should work for it like everyone else does."
+
+"Do you work like the others do?"
+
+"Yes; I oversee the work of others and try to make them happy, and see
+that no one is idle and that the laws are obeyed. For that work I am
+paid, just as the others are paid for the work they do. I do this work
+because my people ask me to do so, and they pay me a certain number of
+coins for the work, the same as the man is paid for the particular work
+he does."
+
+This doctrine, so entirely new, could not be grasped at once, and he
+continued with his questionings: "But the people may not want me as
+their chief, and take some one else, and that would cause trouble, and
+no one would know who was chief."
+
+"Then it becomes your duty to so conduct yourself that they will not
+want some one else to be chief. If a man works for me and he does not
+know or care how he does the work, or is careless, and I cannot depend
+on him, I get somebody else in his place. Would you keep such a man?"
+
+"No; but I would have the power to send him away."
+
+"Then the wise chief must know that if he acts as a true father to his
+people they will not try to get another chief."
+
+Blakely had been a man of affairs at home, and was a sharp, shrewd
+business man. To him the Professor entrusted the arranging of the
+affairs of the town, impressing on him the importance of directing the
+natives into a wide and diversified character of enterprises.
+
+The business was one admirably suited to his temperament. He had long
+ago spoken to the boys and John about the promotion of the island, by
+the establishments of various industries, and particularly agricultural
+pursuits, which would require workmen to cultivate coffee, cocoa, the
+spices, and the numerous vegetable products which grew in a wild state
+in great abundance everywhere.
+
+These various articles, if grown systematically, would mean an immense
+source of wealth, and should afford employment for all the natives, and
+thus mean their advancement.
+
+The hills were full of mineral. He knew this, and had the testimony of
+the Professor as to the valuable character of the various ores. Sooner
+or later communication could now be established with the outer world.
+All were contemplating the preparation of a suitable vessel which would
+enable them to return to the United States.
+
+One evening, while the conversation was on this absorbing topic, he
+remarked: "I don't know how you gentlemen feel about this place, but as
+for myself I feel that from a business point of view this is the ideal
+spot. I am just as anxious as you are to see my home again, but the
+possibilities are so immense here, that, as soon as possible, I shall
+come back."
+
+"For my part," replied the Professor, "if a ship should appear in the
+harbor to-morrow, I would not for a moment consider leaving these
+people. The work of their redemption is not even started in such a way
+as to permit me to safely leave them. The boys may well be pardoned and
+commended for wanting to go home, but my work is here."
+
+"That expresses my sentiment exactly," said Harry. "I want to go home,
+it is true, but what a wonderful experience we have had here, and when I
+think of the remarkable progress we have made it astonishes me more than
+I can tell you. If I do go home it will be to come back again, because I
+want to be where the Professor is. I like this work, and the excitement
+it affords."
+
+"You won't have any more savages to fight," responded the Professor,
+"and it might not be so interesting for you."
+
+"Making guns is much more pleasant than using them against people."
+
+George's face was a study. He was the sentimental one of the lot. He was
+by all odds the most emotional, and the greatest lover of home. But
+withal that he reechoed the sentiments of Harry. "If I could only see
+home again, I would be content, and when I came back it would be to know
+that I could return whenever I wanted to."
+
+All the boys were enthusiastic about the trip home. Many plans were
+projected, and talked over.
+
+"Won't it create a sensation," remarked Ralph, "when it is announced
+that three of the _Investigator's_ lifeboats were wrecked on an island,
+and that the survivors arrived after an absence of--"
+
+"Yes," broke in Tom. "How long?"
+
+"That will depend on several things," said John. "First, to bring the
+Illyas to terms, and second, to build a boat big enough to take us
+safely to the nearest harbor which is in communication with America. As
+for myself, this life and the hopes for the future are too alluring for
+me to even try to get away."
+
+With characteristic energy Blakely consulted Harry and the working force
+in the shop.
+
+"Do you think we could turn out some plows?" he asked.
+
+Harry smiled. "This establishment is prepared to turn out anything it
+has orders for."
+
+"Then put down my order for a half dozen plows, to be delivered as
+quickly as possible."
+
+The new town was located within the territorial limits of the Osagas'
+country, and it was now necessary to make immediate provision for some
+sort of laws or regulations with respect to the land. The savage theory
+was that the chief owned all the land, and this was a condition that
+well might breed trouble.
+
+Osaga was the chief. He was the first to receive the full understanding
+of the new doctrine. It was proposed that he should receive as full
+compensation a certain stipulated sum, and in return make a transfer of
+all his rights to the State.
+
+"But what is the State," he asked, "and who will he be?"
+
+"The State will mean all of you."
+
+"Then I will own a part of it just the same as everybody else?"
+
+"Yes; let me explain that still further. When your people begin to raise
+coffee and cocoa, and all the other things which the people in the world
+will come here for and buy of you, the lands all about you will become
+very valuable, and many will come here to buy them. The money will go
+to the State, which means you and everyone else here."
+
+"Will it be done the same with the Berees, and the Kurabus and the
+Saboros?"
+
+"Yes; each will be a State of its own, and will be governed in the same
+way, and a Saboro will come here and buy some land, and you will protect
+him, and when one of the Osagas goes to the Berees he can buy land
+there, and they must protect him and his wife and children."
+
+"Yes; I see what you mean. I am content. I will do this whether the
+others do or not."
+
+"But I assure you," continued the Professor, "that the others will be
+compelled to do as you do."
+
+"How can we compel them?"
+
+"No one will want to buy their land, and they will not become valuable
+for that reason, like yours, because the people who come here will buy
+only where they know there is a law and where they know they will be
+protected."
+
+Uraso grasped the wonderful import of this statement, and became its
+most enthusiastic advocate. He had many talks with Marmo and Muro, and
+he presented the matter in such a way that most suitably appealed to the
+savage mind.
+
+The all-absorbing topic now was the proposed expedition to the Illyas.
+Marmo, the Tuolo chief, had sent a message to their chief, in which he
+set forth the advantages which would accrue to them to quietly submit,
+and also stated that he did so willingly, in the belief such a course
+would be of the greatest and most lasting benefit.
+
+Marmo had received no response, and the outlook boded no good.
+Preparations were begun, and Marmo insisted that his warriors should
+form part of the force, and that he himself would accompany the
+expedition. As the boys, by the aid of their helpers, had been at work
+on the guns from the time the factory was set up, they had a hundred and
+twenty guns completed. This was ample for any requirement.
+
+Two new wagons were also made, and several smaller ones, designed for
+single steers, the latter being used by the Professor and the chiefs in
+going to and fro.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+THE PECULIAR SAVAGE BELIEFS AND CUSTOMS
+
+
+The chief Marmo had now an opportunity to learn another lesson he was
+not prepared for. Many of the warriors objected to going on the
+expedition. The work at the factory and in the various occupations so
+fascinated them that they begged to be excused.
+
+At the request of the Professor many were excused from going, care
+having been taken to consult the boys who had charge of the various
+parts of the business as to the ones which could best be spared.
+
+Marmo mused over these things. He saw the great cordiality that existed
+between his warriors and the other tribes. He was also gratified to see
+some of his men making things which were novel to him, as they were
+fascinating to the men.
+
+The Krishnos were all about and were the personal charges of the
+Professor. He had them, daily in the laboratory, and all seemed to be
+pleased and happy. Marmo wanted to know whether they desired to go home,
+but all declined. There seemed to be a fascination about the place he
+could not understand.
+
+One evening the Professor saw a Tuolo worker stealthily coming up the
+pathway leading to the laboratory, and after looking about with a
+curious air, pushed open the door, and in the most subservient manner
+begged permission to speak.
+
+The Professor took him by the hand and led him to a chair. "What is it
+you want, my man? Can I do anything for you!"
+
+The hearty manner and smiling face of the Professor emboldened him to
+speak.
+
+"I have a wife and three children in the Tuolo village, and I want
+permission to bring them here."
+
+"Don't you want to go back there?"
+
+"If I do then I will have no more work. I like the work. I can make many
+things now, and I want my family here."
+
+This was an appeal which could not be neglected, and he responded in
+this manner: "You do not need to ask me to bring your family here. You
+have a right to do so."
+
+"But my chief will not let me do so."
+
+"Did you ask him?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Then I will send for him."
+
+"When Marmo appeared the Professor told him the desire of the man, and
+when he had concluded the chief was puzzled for a moment, and, turning
+to the warrior, said:
+
+"I cannot understand why my warriors do not care about going to war.
+They like the machinery, and the way the little things are made, and to
+learn how to make them. The White Chief says you have a right to bring
+your family here. That is well; but you must not forget your people, and
+when you learn these wonderful things you must come and teach the
+people at the village how to do them."
+
+He was extremely gratified at this permission. A half hour afterwards
+the Professor called Tom and told him of the incident, and suggested
+that he should be provided with a quantity of food for the journey. But
+he had already gone. That was certainly sufficient to show the intense
+eagerness to bring back his people.
+
+George and Ralph were the ones who were always on the alert for new
+things, and Jim made a good companion for them in this respect. The
+latter was the first one to actively canvass the subject of a name.
+
+There had been too much to do even to think of this before, and if it
+occurred to the Professor he had never mentioned it. Jim went over to
+see the Professor as soon as the idea occurred to him.
+
+The Professor smiled when he saw Jim's eagerness.
+
+"Yes, the idea is a good one, but that is something which you boys will
+have to decide. It has not occurred to John and Blakely, I know."
+
+"I thought it would be a good thing to call it Industria, or something
+of that kind," responded Jim.
+
+"I like that name, but you settle it among yourselves." Jim was back
+very quickly, and rushing in to the boys, cried out:
+
+"The Professor said it was up to us to get a name for it."
+
+"Name for what?" asked Harry.
+
+"For the town, of course."
+
+"Well, what shall it be?" asked Tom.
+
+"Call it America," shouted Will.
+
+"Oh, that's too big a name," roared Ralph, with a scornful touch in his
+voice. "Just imagine how this would sound: 'William Rudel, Esq.,
+America, Wonder Island?' What would the postmaster think of such an
+address?"
+
+It did look a little out of proportion, as the boys laughed at the
+sally.
+
+"Let's call it Independence; everybody seems to be pretty independent
+here," was Tom's suggestion.
+
+"I have the best name in the lot."
+
+"What is it?"
+
+"Industria."
+
+"There you are again with your Latin," answered Harry. "This is going to
+a real American town. None of your Latin endings, or any other dead
+language. This is a live town."
+
+"Here is John; let's get a suggestion from him."
+
+He heard the merry laughter, and as he approached wonderingly inquired
+about the cause of the hilarity. George said: "We have been holding a
+convention to find a name for the town. We have decided to leave it to
+you."
+
+"Name of the town? Let me see. I suppose you want a stunning name?
+Something that will make people sit up and take notice. Eh? Well, if it
+turns out all right it doesn't need a name, and if it is a failure
+everybody will be calling it names."
+
+The boys laughed at this first attempt that John had ever essayed to
+treat a subject in a jesting way, but he continued: "If this convention
+hasn't enough wit about it to select a name I don't think you ought to
+get an outsider to make a suggestion. But seriously, Unity would be a
+good name; and so Hustletown."
+
+"Unity is just the thing," suggested George. There was not a dissenting
+voice.
+
+"Now that we have the name, I suppose we shall have to christen it to
+make it hold," remarked George.
+
+"Considering the trials and tribulations we have gone through to put
+this town on the map it doesn't need any christening. If we work as hard
+to make it a success as we did to get it started we needn't be ashamed
+of it," said Harry.
+
+"Probably, the same principle will apply in this case as the sentence
+uttered by the Hindoo priests at the christening of an infant."
+
+"What is that?"
+
+"Thou hast come into the world with all around thee smiling; so live
+that when thou departest thou mayest smile while all around thee weep."
+
+"That is a beautiful sentiment. Hurrah for Unity!" and George raised his
+hat to start the shouting.
+
+As the expedition against the Illyas was about ready to start, the time
+for the departure was set for the following day. Two of the wagons were
+brought into requisition, and loaded with sufficient provisions to
+prevent the necessity of foraging too much.
+
+George and Harry begged to be taken along, as they had put in some
+strenuous times during the two months at Unity, and this was readily
+granted. The other boys were to remain and take charge of the active
+work. John had command of the expedition, and Blakely had now too much
+work at the new town to enable him to take part.
+
+Over three hundred warriors were mustered for the expedition. One
+hundred of the picked men had the muzzle-loading guns, and an ample
+supply of ammunition was stored in the wagons, and each gun bearer had
+twenty-five rounds.
+
+The Professor said, on the eve of their departure: "I have every
+confidence in the ability of Mr. Varney to make it unnecessary to give
+him any advice, but I must say a word to all the warriors. You are going
+to the tribes, not for the purpose of revenge. We know they have
+captives in their possession, and we have demanded their return. They
+sent us an insulting message.
+
+"Notwithstanding this, we must consider that they have sent us this
+reply out of ignorance of our true purpose. Each man must conduct
+himself as the chiefs dictate. There must be no killing except in
+self-defense."
+
+Muro and Uraso, as well as Ralsea, were to accompany them, but the other
+chiefs were kept at home, this arrangement having been made because the
+others really preferred to continue the work in the factory and field.
+
+It was a glorious day to begin the campaign. George and Harry were in
+their element.
+
+"What a wonderful thing it is to look at these people now, and recall
+what our situation was a year ago," said Harry, as they drove down the
+road which had been made from the village to the east.
+
+"Yes; a year ago, we were having some troubles, as it was about that
+time we got the first intelligence that these people were on the
+island," answered George.
+
+"I had particular reference to the trip we made by sea, when we were
+wrecked the second time."
+
+The entire column marched out past the Professor and the chiefs Oma,
+Suros, Marmo and Tastoa. The six tribes had contributed to the
+expedition, which they hoped would end all future wars, and put the
+island in a condition of peace, and thus enable them to carry out the
+great work planned by the Professor.
+
+Before evening of the second day the main Saboro village came in sight.
+Muro was in a heaven of delight. Many of his warriors were in the
+column, and some still remained at Unity. But the women and children
+were still there, and they rushed out to meet the advancing column.
+
+The news of the uprising of the Illyas was confirmed. A large party of
+them were less than a day's march to the east, and the appearance of the
+fighting force was a welcome one. There was no reason to apprehend that
+they had any knowledge of the surrender of the Tuolos.
+
+The night and part of the day spent at the Saboro village was a period
+of feasting. Uraso met his sister, the wife of Muro, and the boys were
+lionized by the chief's family, who took particular pleasure in
+entertaining them. They had heard so much about the remarkable boys,
+and their capacity to make the beautiful things.
+
+Harry and George brought with them a number of the mirrors, and those,
+with other little trinkets, were presented to the women. The boys were
+particularly impressed with Muro's eldest son, a boy of their same age,
+and George won Muro's heart when he asked if he could not accompany
+them.
+
+Speaking to Harry he said: "Wouldn't Lolo enjoy the work at the factory?
+I hope he will let us take him with us when we go back."
+
+"I am going to ask Muro," replied Harry, and he sought him out at once.
+"We want Lolo to go back with us to Unity."
+
+Muro was delighted at the proposal, and he answered: "Yes; Lolo shall go
+back with us, because all of my family are going with us and we shall
+live there."
+
+This news was a source of the greatest pleasure, you may be sure, and it
+was most gratifying to Muro, because he admired the boys.
+
+"Lolo will like to work in the shop with you. He can now make the best
+bows in the tribe, and he makes fine arrows." And Lolo exhibited some of
+his handiwork, which, from the standpoint of the native weapons, was
+really creditable.
+
+Returning now to Unity, we shall have to relate some very singular
+thing's which should be mentioned, as it shows the peculiar beliefs and
+practices of the natives.
+
+On the day the force left the village occurred the first death in Unity.
+This was one of the warriors, who had been wounded during the last
+fight with the Tuolos and Illyas, and he had lingered along until he
+finally succumbed. He was one of the best men, and was mourned by the
+Osagas, of which he was a member.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 13. Ready for the Happy Hunting Grounds._]
+
+Singularly, another of the same tribe died the following morning, who
+was the exact opposite of the warrior. Within six hours of the death of
+the latter his friends carried him away, and he was buried. The warrior,
+however, was not buried, but, instead, his body was carried to an open
+place, fully a half mile beyond the town, and placed on a hanging cot
+suspended from two trees.
+
+The boys witnessed the ceremonies, and could not understand the meaning
+of it.
+
+"Why do they bury one so soon after death, and keep the other for
+several days, and then suspend his body in the air?" asked Tom.
+
+The Professor, who attended both ceremonies, responded: "This action on
+their part has a great significance. In most savage countries there is
+no more noble thing than to die on the battlefield. Usually those who
+die in that way are not accorded a burial, generally, because, in case
+such a warrior belongs to a defeated party, his friends do not have the
+opportunity to inter the body.
+
+"Sir Samuel Baker, in his book, 'The Explorations on the White Nile,'
+relates an incident where he came to a village which had two graveyards,
+on opposite sides of the road. On one side were the scattered bones of
+the dead, and on the other side mounds to indicate burial plots.
+
+"On questioning the chief, he said: 'Yes; our honored dead have their
+bones exposed, as you see, but those who were of no use are put out of
+sight underground.'
+
+"So the object seemed to be to keep them where the people could see
+them?"
+
+"That appears to be the reason the chief gave to Baker. But there may be
+another reason for this custom, and I shall get Suros' views on that
+subject."
+
+"Isn't there some religious meaning connected with it," asked Ralph.
+
+"I do not think so. Here is Suros; let us question him."
+
+As Suros approached the Professor said: "I notice that one has been put
+underground and the other not; why do they observe this difference?"
+
+"We cannot honor the dead by allowing them to go back to the earth."
+
+"Why will it do any good to honor the dead?"
+
+"If we did not honor them, no one would want to be great. No one would
+like to be a great warrior."
+
+"Is that the only reward a man has, to be honored after he is dead?"
+
+"What other reward has a man?"
+
+"Do you not think man will live hereafter?"
+
+"When? After he dies?"
+
+"No; how can man live after he dies, and his body is given to the winds
+or to the earth?"
+
+"The white man believes he will live again?"
+
+"Does the white man believe the yak will live again?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Well the yak is stronger than a man, and if the yak cannot live again,
+then how can man, who is not so strong, expect to do so?"
+
+This was a bit of philosophy which sounded curiously to the boys, and
+the Professor, noticing it, said: "Singularly, this is the same answer
+which Sir Samuel Baker obtained from certain African tribes, when he
+questioned them in like manner."
+
+But the Professor was interested in Suros' statement that they would not
+permit the body of the honored dead to go back to the earth, and he
+continued:
+
+"You said that you did not want the honored dead to go back to the
+earth. When you give his body to the air, does it not go back to the
+earth?"
+
+"No; the earth and the air are entirely different, The Great Spirit is
+in the air; not in the earth."
+
+"Then you give him to the Great Spirit?"
+
+"Yes; the Great Spirit takes his body."
+
+"Don't you believe that man has a spirit also?"
+
+"No; because we have never seen it."
+
+"But you have never seen the Great Spirit, and yet you say there is
+one."
+
+"We have seen the Great Spirit. He comes when it rains, and we can see
+him and hear him. We can feel the wind that he blows, and we can see the
+great light which he makes every day, and the smaller lights at his
+villages every night."
+
+Two things were thus impressed on the boys--namely, that they considered
+the air entirely distinct from the earth, and that the Great Spirit made
+the thunder and lightning, and that the sun was the Spirit's light by
+day, and the moon and stars the lights of his villages by night.
+
+Notwithstanding Suros' limited knowledge, it must be said that in his
+further talk with the Professor he showed himself to be possessed of
+qualities which placed him far above the common run of the natives. When
+he was asked why honor was such a prize to them, he answered:
+
+"Our good men are happy to know that they are so placed that the Great
+Spirit can take them. What greater happiness is there for him?"
+
+"Don't you believe that trying to make your people happy and contented
+will please the Great Spirit?"
+
+"We do not know that. We do not know why the Great Spirit should want
+the bodies of our great warriors and good men. We cannot understand
+it."
+
+"The white man believes that if you do good to your fellow-man it will
+please the Great Spirit."
+
+"That may be; but I do not see why. There is no reason why he should
+care how I treat my people. That is not what he is up there for. What
+good will it do him? How will it help him? I do not believe many of the
+things I have been told by the wise men, and I have never sacrificed the
+captives I have taken, although my father before me did. I try to make
+my people happy, because when I see the Great Spirit giving us the day
+and the bright light and the rain, so that the things about us may grow,
+it seems to me that he is trying to be good to us, and I believe that is
+what we should do to each other."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+EXPEDITION TO SUBDUE THE ILLYAS
+
+
+The occupation of the little houses by the families of the natives gave
+the boys the first close view of the people in their home lives. They
+were exceedingly primitive. The leaf of the plantain tree was the
+greatest boon to these people, and the women were engaged most of the
+time in removing the beautiful fiber and in laboriously weaving cloth
+from the strands.
+
+They were exceedingly deft in this, and it is singular how quickly they
+grasped the idea of the loom, as a means to make a better article. The
+loom used by them was a very crude affair, and an idea may be gained of
+its form by the accompanying illustration, which shows the fork of a
+tree branch (A), which serves to hold the ends of the warp threads (B).
+To weave the goods, the woof thread (C) is threaded back and forth, and
+as they had no needles for the purpose, a thorn was used.
+
+This thorn had no eye, but its large end was split, and the end of the
+thread held in the cleft thus made. Every family had this primitive
+loom, and the whole time, outside of their other household duties, was
+given to the weaving process.
+
+The size of each woven piece was about twelve by fifteen inches, and the
+different sections were afterwards sewn together. When they saw the
+more modern looms at work it interested them intensely, and the
+Professor, noticing their eagerness and natural talents in this
+direction, concluded that this was a good field to encourage the
+industry.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 14. Primitive Weaving Frame._]
+
+Most of the looms made goods thirty inches wide, and it was not long
+before several of the women were instructed in the art of using the
+looms. Like all of the low order of people, they were extremely fond of
+colors, and that is one of the things which attracted them to the
+fabrics which had been previously made and exhibited. At the end of the
+week they were paid for their work, the same as the others who were
+employed. The Professor now considered it time to make a change in the
+system of providing supplies. Under the direction of Will, a store was
+set up, which had on hand a supply of vegetables and game. As many of
+the warriors were away, and the others were generally employed in the
+workshop and fields, some systematic effort had to be made to gather
+food supplies and hunt.
+
+By offering certain sums for such articles the Professor induced
+individual effort in that direction. The provender thus provided was
+placed on sale in the store, and by every art the heads of families were
+encouraged to purchase those things and take them home for consumption
+there.
+
+Gradually, the workers were made to understand that a certain sum would
+be expected in return for their board, so that, in course of time, each
+one became accustomed to know the values of certain things all of which
+were measured by the coins now in circulation.
+
+The kitchen utensils were very limited indeed. They had no metal vessels
+of any kind. Any article of that kind was worth a fortune, and it was
+only the chiefs who had such things, and they were obtained from the
+wrecks of vessels which had reached them from time to time.
+
+Under the direction of the Professor, considerable time was given to the
+bringing in of ores, particularly iron, and the process of recovering
+the metals from the ores was undertaken by a considerable part of the
+force.
+
+Charcoal and coke were turned out, as a preliminary to the smelting of
+the ores, and as fast as the metal was in shape, cooking vessels of
+various sizes were manufactured, and these were placed on sale at the
+store. It was thus possible for each family to acquire several articles
+of this kind, which heretofore had been considered the most valuable of
+all treasures.
+
+Such a thing as a chair or a table was unknown on the island. The beds
+were made of the native grasses, strewn on the floor. It will be
+understood, therefore, that the manner of furnishing the houses occupied
+by the whites was a marvel; and when the families of the various workers
+moved into their new possessions, it naturally dawned on them that
+chairs and tables, as well as properly arranged beds, should accompany
+such luxury.
+
+The Professor was at the homes of these people daily, suggesting ideas
+for comfort and convenience. One of the things which interested him most
+was the subject of cleanliness. People living in the manner to which
+they were accustomed, made the sanitary part of the domestic arrangement
+an exceedingly difficult problem.
+
+The necessity of cleanliness was impressed on them very forcibly when,
+later on, he was called to administer to many of the children, who were
+attacked by diseases, brought on directly by carelessness in thoroughly
+removing all dirt and decaying matter.
+
+To a certain degree the natives understood this, and the subject has
+been referred to previously, where they had the habit of anointing their
+bodies and those of the infants with various oils, which were obnoxious
+to insects and germs.
+
+That knowledge made the task of using disinfectants much easier to
+instill in their minds. It was impressed on them that properly caring
+for the home was a daily task, and must not be neglected.
+
+The women used combs made from the fins of fish. These were constructed
+in the following manner: The entire fin was removed, and the bony
+structure at the base of the teeth was bound between two strips of
+bamboo, and tied around by fibers, as shown. The whole was then placed
+in a vessel containing boiling water. The result was that when taken out
+the meat of the fish, being glue-like, would act as a cement to hold the
+teeth in place.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 15. Comb from fin of Fish._]
+
+Such combs are anything but sanitary, as might be surmised, and the
+inhabitants were subject to pests arising from articles so made. Their
+only salvation was, in fact, the daily habit of using oil, and, from a
+sanitary point of view, there was nothing objectionable to this
+excepting the odor which naturally followed, due to the oil becoming
+rancid. The boys then began to make combs from a specie of bamboo, and
+from the ironwood tree.
+
+During one of the fishing trips the boys brought home an immense turtle.
+The Professor's eyes sparkled when he saw it.
+
+Will related their experience in capturing it. "Is it good to eat?" he
+asked.
+
+"Yes; all turtles and tortoises are good to eat."
+
+"What is the difference between the two?"
+
+"The turtle is a sea animal, and the tortoise a land and water animal.
+You must have caught this near the sea, as it is a specie of turtle
+called the Testudo."
+
+"What a beautiful mottled top it has!"
+
+"That is why it interested me so much," replied the Professor. "You now
+have something that is far better than the wood for making combs and
+other like articles."
+
+"Isn't that fine! Will it be difficult to make them up from this?"
+
+"It is the simplest thing in the world. The outer shell, which is all
+that is used, is put into boiling water, and this softens it so that it
+can be worked easily."
+
+"It seems singular that it is called a 'tortoise' shell if the land
+animals are called tortoises."
+
+"When the shell first became a matter of commerce, it was supposed that
+the turtle and the tortoise were the same, and the name tortoise being
+much older than turtle, the former appellation remained in designating
+the shell."
+
+The day and night of festivities of John and the warriors, at the Saboro
+village, was ended, and the column took up its march for the country of
+the Illyas.
+
+Several of the scouts, sent out two days before, returned during the
+night, and reported that there was a strong force directly ahead and
+that the lower villages were also sending up a body of men, but that the
+latter were still two days away.
+
+Calling Muro, John asked: "What is the nature of the country to the
+extreme south, or next to the sea?"
+
+"I have never been there, but it is elevated, and is a fine country. One
+of my men has been there, and he may be able to tell you something about
+it. I will call him."
+
+The warrior alluded to was tall, handsome and fully tattooed, as was the
+custom with the most distinguished of the Saboros.
+
+"Can you tell me," asked John, "what the nature of the country is south
+of the mountains, and near the sea?"
+
+"It is the country of the wise men of the Illyas. They will not allow
+others to go near there."
+
+"Do you know why?"
+
+"It is said there are wonderful things there."
+
+"Do you know whether there are any big holes in the ground there?"
+
+"Yes; and in some of them they keep their captives."
+
+"Do they sacrifice their captives in those places?"
+
+"No; they take them from those places to the villages."
+
+"At what times do they make the sacrifices?"
+
+"When the night is dark."
+
+John understood from this that the sacrifices were during the period
+when there was no moon.
+
+"Why do you suppose that they wait for that time?" asked George.
+
+"Because the Great Spirit out of anger has hidden the light and to
+appease him the sacrifices are offered at that period. This is one of
+the tales that the wise men give out as the excuse for the ceremony."
+
+John had another motive for these questions, as will appear later on.
+The main Illyas village was far to the north of the caves mentioned.
+Besides the main one were three others, all ranging along the western
+base of the mountain.
+
+"How long will it take us," asked John, "to reach the main village?"
+
+"Osaga knows about that, as he was near there, and was detained for
+several weeks before he escaped."
+
+"I had forgotten about that." He was, however, at this time, one of the
+scouts, and when he returned later in the evening, said:
+
+"We can reach there in two days, unless we should be met by the Illyas
+on the way. I do not think they will retreat without making a show of
+fight, as they will have all their warriors in the field, when they know
+we are marching against them."
+
+At the rate they were going, the main force of the enemy would be
+reached during the day, unless they should retreat. The opinion of both
+Uraso and Muro was that they would not permit too close approach to the
+village before offering fight.
+
+The entire route from Unity, and through the Saboro country, was one
+continual stretch of immense undulating plains, covered at intervals
+with magnificent forests, and it was evident that the soil was rich and
+capable of yielding any products in profusion.
+
+The weather, too, was magnificent. Indeed, it was at a time of the year
+when there were few storms, the moisture being sufficient to support
+the growing vegetation and keeping it a beautiful green. What a paradise
+this part of the island would be made, if it could be maintained in
+peace!
+
+The march was a continued and steady one, the warriors appearing happy
+and acted as though they were going to a festival, instead of to war.
+Early in the afternoon the advance scouts reported the first sight of
+the savages, but only detached bands, which indicated, however, that
+they were not far away.
+
+Several hours before they had entered the Illyas' country. There was no
+strict dividing line between the different countries, but it appeared to
+be tacitly agreed that certain water courses, or other natural lines,
+marked the territorial limits of each.
+
+These divisions were so little understood, in fact, by either, that they
+caused frequent disputes. A party from one tribe in hunting would,
+incautiously, venture too far, and if the other party happened to be
+near, and in sufficient force, would attack on the plea that the
+territory had been invaded.
+
+This was a matter which the present campaign would settle, because the
+Professor saw the necessity of accurately prescribing the limits held by
+each tribe.
+
+It was five o'clock in the evening before reports came in that the main
+body of the enemy was in sight. John went forward with Uraso and Muro,
+fully a mile beyond the main force, and on the way selected a good
+camping spot, leaving several there to order the main body to encamp
+when they arrived.
+
+With the scouts now returning, and which were picked up, a fairly
+adequate idea was obtained as to the number, which was variously
+estimated at two hundred and fifty, which did not take into
+consideration the warriors from the other villages, because they now had
+knowledge of at least one party from the south, on the way to reinforce
+the Illyas.
+
+John gave strict orders that no one should fire a gun during the night,
+and that a double line of guards should be maintained. The course
+pursued during the campaign was as follows: Thirty pickets were selected
+for the watch, five from each tribe. These formed fifteen posts, two
+warriors being at each post, and it was arranged that the two should be
+of different tribes, and as all were in supporting distance of each
+other, in case of an alarm, one of the two watchers would thus be in a
+position to quickly alarm the camp.
+
+An advance set of pickets was also thrown out, under the personal
+command of Muro, to watch the enemies' camp. Fortunately, there was no
+alarm during the night. Early in the morning the forces were put in line
+for approaching the Illyas' camp.
+
+When the first advance came within sight of their camp, the utmost
+consternation and confusion resulted, showing how carefully John had
+concealed their movements.
+
+Muro's scouts had the fortune to capture one of the Illyas, who was
+evidently one of the hunters, and the captive was brought in at the time
+when some of his own men had advanced uncautiously too far.
+
+He was brought before John at once, who addressed him as follows:
+
+"Why have your people started out on the warpath against us?"
+
+"Because you killed our warriors in the last battle."
+
+It is singular how the natives in all their interviews of like nature,
+always found it convenient to refer to the last and most immediate act
+as a particular reason for their enmity. In this respect they were
+veritable children.
+
+They might have been, as they were in this case, the original
+aggressors, but if an attempt is made to repay them the original cause
+of the strife is forgotten, and the last act only is considered. John
+knew it would be of no use to argue the matter with him.
+
+"You may go back to your chief and tell him that we have come to get the
+captives he has. You must tell him that we have no desire to injure him
+or his people. Tell him that all the tribes are now united, and that if
+he does not give up the white people and all others, we will take him
+and his villages, and give his lands to the other tribes.
+
+"You must further tell him that we must have his answer at once, and if
+he does not answer by the time the sun is above us (noon), we will
+consider him our enemy, and shall attack him."
+
+The captive received full instructions from Uraso, who warned him that
+if he failed to convey this information in the manner given it would go
+hard with him.
+
+John went forward with the prisoner, and he was released within sight of
+the Illyas' camp. The enemy was at that time in great commotion, as they
+were, from all indications, preparing for defense.
+
+They occupied a naturally strong position. The camp was on the western
+side of a hill and at the bottom was a small stream.
+
+Directly behind the camp was a heavy forest, which, in case of retreat,
+would afford them shelter. There was a bend in the river, where the camp
+was located, so that the position was impregnable as against the native
+weapons.
+
+The Illyas were not counting on meeting a foe armed with guns like the
+allies possessed. They did not conceive how their enemies could possibly
+make a sufficient number of guns to count against their numbers and
+their skill.
+
+In the talks which John had with Uraso he learned the history of this
+peculiar tribe. Originally the tribe had practical sway over the entire
+island. They were bitter and vindictive, and this intense feeling was
+that which acted against them in the end.
+
+The result was that in times past a constant tribal warfare was in
+evidence among the heads of the leading families. The Kurabus and the
+Tuolos were originally Illyas, or offshoots from this great tribe. This
+was also shown by the characteristics of those three tribes, and by
+their dress as well as language.
+
+John had noticed that the Berees were the whitest people on the island,
+and that the Osagas and Saboros were much lighter in color than the
+other tribes. Uraso confirmed Suros' statement to the Professor, that
+there was white blood in the veins of many of the people of these three
+tribes, brought about by castaways who had been adopted by the people in
+earlier times.
+
+The Illyas kept themselves aloof from the others, excepting the Tuolos
+and Kurabus, and these three tribes were the only ones who still adhered
+to the custom of offering up captives as sacrifices.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE PERILOUS TRIP OF THE WAGON
+
+
+Affairs at Unity were moving along at marvelous speed. Suros, chief of
+the Berees, announced to the Professor that he did not intend to return
+to his country, but would send for his family and the families of all
+his chiefs. This was, indeed, a pleasant surprise for the Professor.
+
+Oma, of the Brabos, was the next to fall into line, and we have already
+stated that such was Muro's intention. The bringing together of all
+these interests, to form one common family, was really the intention of
+the Professor, and it was now being carried out without any suggestion
+on his part.
+
+Each day brought to the village accessions from some of the tribes,
+mainly the women and children of those who were employed, or who were
+with John's forces.
+
+Four days after John's departure the Professor saw one of the Tuolos
+approaching, carrying an infant, with his wife and two other children.
+The Professor went out to meet them, calling Will, as he saw they were
+in a famished condition. It was the native referred to previously, who
+had begged permission to bring his family to Unity.
+
+Several of the little cottages had been completed, and the surprise of
+the Tuolo and his wife was complete when he led them to one of these
+homes, and installed them in it.
+
+Food was brought, and the native cooks ordered to prepare it for them at
+once. The act so astonished the Tuolo chief, Marmo, that he could not
+express himself. For a day he sat pondering. The Professor noticed the
+act, but he said nothing. The next morning Marmo called, and said:
+
+"I can see why the White Chief told me it was well to act so the people
+would not want another chief."
+
+"But I am not acting in this way so that the people will want to keep me
+as their chief."
+
+This reply puzzled him.
+
+"But why do you treat my people in this way?"
+
+"Because he is a man just like myself. I have no right to treat him in
+any other way."
+
+"But he is only a ravoo (common) man."
+
+"Why is he only a common man?"
+
+"Because he is not a warrior, nor were his people warriors before him."
+
+"But he is a man, the same as you and I are. Because he is not a
+warrior, or was not born of some one who was a warrior, or if he does
+not belong to the family of a chief, makes no difference to the white
+man. His children may become chiefs, or great men, and if we show them
+that they may become like we are, it will make all of them better, and
+it will not injure us."
+
+This philosophy was too deep for the chieftain. He could not comprehend
+it, nor could he find words to express his opinions of the new light
+which it gave him.
+
+"Is that why you teach the people to make so many things?"
+
+"No; that is for an entirely different reason. We teach people to make
+these things so they may be able to help themselves and make their wives
+and children happy. We try to teach them that it is wrong to be idle. To
+let them know that there is a better way to live than by fighting each
+other or injuring their neighbors."
+
+"But why do you act so kindly to one of my people when we tried to kill
+you?"
+
+"That makes no difference to us now. You acted that way because you did
+not know any better. You would not try to injure us now, would you? Do
+you think that man would be my enemy? When he tells his friends what I
+have done, will they be my enemy?"
+
+"These things are all so new to me. There will be no more Tuolos, or
+Osagas, or Berees."
+
+"Yes; there will be the same tribes always. In the white man's country
+there are still the same tribes in the different countries. They love to
+think of their own country and their own people, even though they may
+live with the other tribes, and when a man goes from one tribe to live
+with another, the people protect him just the same as though he was one
+of them."
+
+The Professor was not yet through with his lesson, and suggested that
+Marmo should accompany him. They wandered through the town, and called
+at the cottage of the newly arrived Tuolo. The children were playing
+about, and the wife was supremely happy, but awed when the Professor and
+chief appeared.
+
+The Professor took up the little one and affectionately caressed it, to
+the astonishment of the mother. She knew the Chief Marmo would not
+condescend to such an act; but to think that the Great White Chief
+should do such a thing was something beyond her comprehension.
+
+Marmo looked on in amazement. It was another thing which was unlike any
+teaching or belief that he had ever known, that it made a powerful
+impression on him.
+
+This is but one incident in the history of the village which tended to
+instill in the minds of the people, the cardinal duty of man to man. It
+was a practical example, and the knowledge of it went from family to
+family. It became one of the topics of conversation among the men. Equal
+and exact justice was meted out to each, irrespective of what their
+tribal relations might be.
+
+In the absence of Harry and George, Ralph and Jim had charge of the
+factory, and were busy each day turning out plows and other agricultural
+implements. At the suggestion of the Professor, eight more of the steers
+had been trained to work, and he gathered together a dozen of the best
+men, and gave instructions to secure as many of the yaks as could be
+found.
+
+He offered certain sums for this purpose. It was known that, to the
+west, and north of the great forest, were large herds running wild. The
+proposal stirred them to activity. The party prepared for the hunt, and
+in this were assisted by Blakely, who gave them many timely hints as to
+the best method to lasso them.
+
+The first expedition started the day after John left, and within a week
+the first installment of ten animals arrived, and they had returned for
+more. These were tamed and broken to work. The scenes about the town
+were assuming the proportions of a vast beehive of the most earnest and
+enthusiastic workers that it was possible to imagine.
+
+Fields were now laid out, and certain money offers made for the
+production of seeds of various kinds. Coffee-tree shoots, nutmeg plants,
+cocoa cuttings, and many other like species of vegetation were
+apportioned to the newly plowed fields.
+
+Every kind of vegetable known to the island, and which now grew in a
+wild, but scattered, state, was sought for, and distributed in small
+patches over the plowed area. Fruit trees were set out, and these
+latter, with a view to make them the home sites which were to be the
+next lines to be developed.
+
+It will thus be seen that there was enough to tax the energies of
+Blakely and the Professor, to keep the laborers employed, and prevent
+any drones from getting into the hive.
+
+When the captive Illyas which John had sent with the ultimatum did not
+return, nor did the enemy show any symptoms of complying when the sun
+neared midday, it was concluded that the only plan to pursue would be a
+quick and a sharp assault.
+
+The moment the sun reached its height, John ordered Muro to take one
+hundred of the men by a detour to the right, and Uraso with a like
+number to the left.
+
+"Cross the stream and close up behind them in the woods. I will make the
+attack, and you remain at a distance. If they should attempt to retreat
+I will follow them up rapidly. We must, if possible, force their
+surrender."
+
+The two forces were off promptly, and within a half hour John judged
+that they must be in position. The Illyas were still on the hill in
+force, apparently not suspecting that two flanking columns were in their
+rear.
+
+As John gave the order to march forward there was the crack of a half
+dozen guns to their right, in the position occupied by Muro's force.
+This startled the Illyas, as it did John. The latter interpreted this at
+once. It was, undoubtedly, a reinforcing band which Muro had
+intercepted.
+
+This was indeed the case. The knowledge of this force coming to their
+assistance, was probably the reason why the Illyas were so defiant.
+Muro, at the head of fifty of his men, charged the band, to prevent them
+from uniting, but at the same time it brought down on him a large
+portion of the Illyas. Uraso, suspecting the truth, and knowing that the
+excited movement of the Illyas indicated a rush to assist, broke through
+the woods and thus struck them on their left flank, which so surprised
+them that they broke in confusion and, fled before John and the main
+body could come up.
+
+The entire Illyas force was now in confusion. John was in possession of
+their camp, and Uraso's warriors were hurrying through the dense woods,
+so that between the three forces, a number were captured in the effort
+to escape to the east and south.
+
+Within an hour, not an Illyas was in sight, except those captured, but
+the main force, unfortunately, escaped. The wagons were brought up, and
+now came the problem, how to get them through the forest, without making
+too much of a detour.
+
+Uraso suggested that Stut should take a sufficient number of warriors to
+afford protection, and descend the stream to a point below where the
+country was clearer, and then trail to the east and meet the main column
+five miles west of the main village.
+
+The pursuers, under the leadership of John, followed the trails of the
+disorganized Illyas, in the hope that they would be able to be close on
+their heels when they emerged from the forest four miles beyond.
+
+They found this forest maze the most remarkable of any wooded area on
+the island. The trees were not only immense, but the undergrowth
+exceedingly dense. It is not often the case that the two growths are
+found together, and it would have been impossible to get the wagons
+through the mass.
+
+This forest was in reality the great barrier, which kept the Illyas in
+such a protected position against the inroads of the other tribes, even
+though they should have combined, and they counted on this bulwark to
+protect them in the present case.
+
+It took the pursuing force over three hours to push its way through, and
+they had the satisfaction of seeing the main body of the Illyas beyond,
+and brought together in a compact organization. As soon as the opening
+was reached, they halted for the noon meal, and instructions were given
+to follow up as hurriedly as possible.
+
+"We should move our force to the south, and attack them from that side,"
+said John, "for the reason that their only hope of reinforcements is
+from that quarter."
+
+The villages were lying along the base of the mountain range, the
+general altitude of the great plain being fully two hundred feet higher
+than the other level portions of the island. The mountains to the east,
+while not high as mountains go, were by far the greatest of any on the
+island, and John was anxious to know their character, for reasons
+heretofore explained.
+
+In two hours more they would reach the vicinity of the main village, and
+the great struggle for the mastery would begin. In the distance could be
+seen the main portion of the town, and it was far more imposing than any
+other in the island. There was more or less a mystery about the place.
+
+Uraso said: "The place we are now going to is the oldest village in the
+country. Many, many years ago it was a great village, and had big
+houses. They were built by some people that no one knows, but they were
+not built to live in."
+
+"Do you know what they are like?" asked John.
+
+"Nobody can tell, because they do not keep captives there, and only take
+them to that place for the sacrifices."
+
+"How do you know that the place has the wonderful buildings you speak
+of?"
+
+"This was learned from the only captive who ever escaped from them at
+the place. I was kept at the village to the north, and it was from that
+place I escaped."
+
+As the village was neared the sight of the buildings astonished John.
+While not massive, they were of a type entirely distinct from the native
+huts. It was built on an elevated plateau and amidst most magnificent
+trees, the most prominent of which were the great redwoods.
+
+Some little indications of ground cultivation were found, as they passed
+the deserted huts on their way. Small patches of yam and cassava were
+the principal vegetables noticed.
+
+It was nearly four o'clock before they crossed a stream of water,
+flowing to the south, and beyond which a good glimpse of the village
+could be seen. John surveyed the scene and was astonished at the
+character of the spot, since it had evidently been chosen by design, and
+for some particular reason.
+
+Its location at an altitude which commanded a view to the north and
+south, and also afforded a view to the west, betokened some reason not
+compatible with the savage idea of a town. All villages thus far found
+were close to streams, and were located apparently by chance, but here
+was a town which was more like a civilized place, since it was so
+located that it afforded the finest opportunity for drainage.
+
+But another surprise was in store for John. "What are those peculiarly
+formed hills which run to the right and left?" he asked.
+
+Muro had noticed them, but was unable to answer.
+
+"I have heard," said Uraso, "that they have earth-houses to protect the
+town, but I do not know how they are made."
+
+This information was sufficient to inform John that the town was
+actually provided with a chain of defensive works, and this greatly
+added to his astonishment.
+
+"We are certainly getting at the heart of this mystery," he said,
+musingly, as Muro came up. The latter informed him that they had
+captured two Illyas who were making their way to the village from the
+south, and within ten minutes they were brought before him.
+
+John questioned them, but they refused to impart any information. The
+direction from which they had come occasioned some uneasiness because
+the wagons were en route from that quarter, and they might be runners to
+the main village for the purpose of informing the chief of the fact, or,
+they might be from one of the villages announcing reinforcements.
+
+As night approached, and no word was had from the force with the wagon,
+John directed Muro to take twenty-five of the best men, and go directly
+south in search of the convoy.
+
+George and Harry accompanied the teams, and when they left the main
+column the forest was skirted in their trip southwardly. It was known
+that the forest was less dense in that direction, and after traveling
+thus for nearly four hours, the men delegated to beat the forest to the
+east, announced that they might safely turn to the east, which meant two
+hours more of struggling through a country which, without the warriors
+to aid them, would have been impossible.
+
+Most of the men were ahead of the team with their bolos, cutting down
+and dragging away the trees and bushes, and thus forming a trail which
+would allow the wagons to pass. It was past six in the evening when the
+river was reached.
+
+In order to gain as much time as possible, Stut and the boys concluded
+to push across, and move northwardly along the eastern bank, as it was
+evident the eastern shore afforded the best route.
+
+Before the plan could be put into execution a body of Illyas appeared in
+force before them. They hastily drew back, and after consulting,
+concluded to proceed north along the western bank.
+
+They had not proceeded a quarter of a mile before they ran into an
+ambush of Illyas, and two men were struck by arrows. Stut gave the order
+to fire, and the bush was cleared. Immediately a force appeared in their
+rear, but Stut advised an advance, as such a course would bring them
+closer to relief.
+
+Another mile was traversed, but the first lesson was heeded, and the
+enemy did not come close enough to enable the gunmen to get an
+opportunity to shoot. But now an unforeseen obstacle presented itself.
+They had been marching along the more or less elevated bank of the
+stream, and directly in their path was a stream flowing into the main
+one, with steep and rocky sides, so precipitous that it would be
+impossible for the wagons to cross them, heavily laden as they were.
+
+The Illyas appeared in force behind them, and apparently none were to
+the front, thus indicating that they did not believe the wagons could
+cross, and in this they were right. It was growing dark. Harry suggested
+that they make camp and arrange for protection during the night.
+
+This was done, the two wagons being placed thirty feet apart, and the
+fort sections were used to connect the rear ends of the wagons, so that
+a U-shaped fort was thus provided, the open end of the fort being toward
+the river, which was the side they had no fear of, so far as the savages
+were concerned.
+
+While these preparations were going on no attempt was made to attack
+them. "They are either waiting for morning, or for reinforcements," was
+Stut's comment.
+
+"Do you think it would be possible to get a messenger through to John?"
+asked George.
+
+"Yes; but it would be better to send two."
+
+"We can easily spare them," responded Harry, "and you had better select
+them at once."
+
+Two intelligent warriors, one a Saboro, well known to Stut, and an
+Osaga, were delegated to run the risk, and they started to the north
+along the river.
+
+The night was intensely dark, but notwithstanding this Muro pushed
+forward to the south, and the utmost speed, under those conditions, was
+not more than a mile or mile and a half an hour.
+
+It was known that reinforcements were on the way from the south. They
+might meet such a force, and the utmost caution was necessary. It was
+fortunate that the two messengers from Stut heard Muro's warriors, and
+for the purpose of determining who they were, approached closely, and
+made themselves known.
+
+This intelligence was sufficient for Muro to act. The scouts guided them
+back, and as it was beginning to grow light the cracks of several guns
+were sufficient to indicate the direction of the wagons, and the fact
+that the attack had begun.
+
+Muro was a tactician. The scouts stated the situation, with the
+impassible ravine to the north, and the attackers to the south of their
+position. His force was on the eastern side of the river, and moving
+back a sufficient distance to prevent knowledge of his presence from
+reaching the Illyas, went to the south, and crossed the river in their
+rear.
+
+The attack of the savages was in force against the wagon, and the
+spirited cracks of the guns showed Muro that he must make haste if he
+would have a part in it.
+
+Harry and George were seasoned fighters, but in this case they were
+entirely in the dark as to the numbers which opposed them. This lack of
+knowledge was the only thing which gave them any concern. They knew that
+sooner or later John would rescue them in force. The problem was to
+resist and gain time.
+
+The Illyas had heretofore proven themselves wonderful fighters and
+remarkably tenacious. This attack was a more determined one than they
+had ever witnessed. There was no cessation in their forward advance, and
+they were most skillful in seeking cover.
+
+The boys looked at each other, but neither spoke his fears, if he had
+any; to say the least, it was the most businesslike of anything which
+they had witnessed.
+
+Suddenly, they heard the noise of a volley behind the Illyas, and the
+latter made a concerted rush for the underbrush to the west, as Muro,
+with his men, sprang forward through the clearing; and the boys, with
+Stut, sprang from the wagon and started the cheering, followed by the
+warriors.
+
+Muro rushed up and embraced Stut and the boys. A hurried breakfast was
+prepared, and the fort sections replaced. There was no time to lose.
+They must get back to John and be prepared to take part in the capture
+of the great village of the Illyas.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE REMARKABLE DISCOVERY AT BLAKELY'S MOUNTAIN HOME
+
+
+It was the custom of the Professor to take the boys each week for an
+outing in some direction from Unity. The most attractive part was toward
+the great forest, west of the large river. Several boats had been made,
+which were used principally for fishing, and one of these was usually
+taken. They would then sail down the little branch stream, on which the
+town was located, and cross the large river.
+
+During the entire time they were at the village Blakely had not gone
+across the river, although he frequently indicated a desire to do so,
+particularly to look up the location of the home on the hill at the
+forest's edge, where he found seclusion from the savages for nearly nine
+months.
+
+The Professor and the boys insisted on his accompanying them on this
+occasion, and having given instructions to the men, they manned the
+large boat and were soon on the western shore of the river.
+
+The large quantity of driftwood, which was in evidence here, as
+elsewhere, attracted the attention of Jim, as he turned to the
+Professor.
+
+"I have often wondered why it is that there is so much driftwood on the
+western shore of this stream, and hardly any on the eastern shore."
+
+Blakely, his attention having been drawn to it, remarked that he had
+found this to be the case in a number of streams, not only on the
+island, but elsewhere.
+
+"That is a singular thing," replied the Professor. "It is accounted for
+by the rotation of the earth, which is from west to east. The rotation
+of the earth in that direction also accounts for the prevailing trade
+winds which are from the east to the west."
+
+"In what way should the rotation of the earth cause the drift to move
+westwardly?"
+
+"There are two forces which act on a free object on the surface of the
+earth, namely, centrifugal and centripetal. The first named is that
+action which tends to throw an object outwardly, like dirt flying out
+from a rapidly moving wheel; and the latter action is that which draws
+inwardly. Thus the spokes might be likened to centripetal force. The
+attraction of gravitation in the earth is the centripetal force, and its
+rotation produces the centrifugal force. When an object, like a plumb
+bob, or an article floating on the water is free to move, it is found to
+lag behind the movement of the earth surface, this retarding movement
+being sufficient to cause it to creep to the west, with the result you
+have noticed."
+
+The hill pointed out by Blakely was fully three miles west of the river.
+The four boys, Ralph, Tom, Jim and Will, with Blakely and the Professor,
+all armed with guns, made a party strong enough to enable them to
+successfully withstand the attack of any animal, and it was proposed to
+make a trip through a portion of the forest, so as to get some idea of
+its character.
+
+To carry out this plan, their course was directed to the west, and
+within an hour and a half were well in the thick of the wood. The first
+thing that attracted the attention of all were the magnificent trees,
+among them a species of pitch pine, together with immense redwood trees,
+and numerous oak species abounded.
+
+Before they had penetrated a mile the first animals were seen. They had
+never been hunted, as the natives kept away from the forest fastnesses,
+and it was singular to see the familiarity of the animals. An immense
+panther, or tree leopard, fascinated the boys, and they maneuvered to
+get close enough for a shot. He was very wary, however, and Blakely and
+the Professor kept in the background while the boys stalked him from
+tree to tree, and finally Ralph had him in range and fired.
+
+He crashed down but alighted on his feet, and without waiting for any
+explanations bounded over to the spot where Ralph and Will were crouched
+behind a fallen tree. Will saw the movement and called to Jim and Tom,
+and the latter, taking careful aim, fired, without, apparently, checking
+the animal.
+
+With a powerful spring he landed on the tree, not five feet from the
+boys, and Jim shot the moment he landed, the shot taking effect in the
+left eye, and he dropped his head and lay still, hanging over the fallen
+tree.
+
+This was exciting, while it lasted, and gave them something to talk
+about for the rest of the day. Blakely dragged the animal down, and
+Ralph and Will, trembling as they were, had their knives out when
+Blakely commenced to skin the panther. It was a fine trophy, made doubly
+valuable, as it had been their first attempt to secure big game.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 16. THE MARMOSET]
+
+The boys regretted that Angel had not accompanied them, as they saw
+numerous orang-outan; and here for the first time they came across whole
+tribes of monkeys, particularly the marmoset, an interesting little
+creature. The most striking ones were the proboscis monkey, the face
+being not unlike that of an old man with an extremely long nose, with
+whiskers around the neck.
+
+Blakely and the Professor made many notes of the trees, and discussed
+the uses to which they might be put, and the boys had their eyes open
+for the wonderful display of animal life on all sides.
+
+It was fully two o'clock before their steps were turned toward the
+north, so that the hill could be reached, and when they emerged from the
+forest, Blakely pointed out the spot and the best way to reach it. The
+boys went forward with a rush, and mounted the hill, but while they
+searched in every direction could not locate the rocky recess occupied
+by Blakely.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 17. PROBOSCIS MONKEY]
+
+The latter came up smiling. "I told the Professor you would have some
+trouble in finding it. Look directly above you."
+
+About twenty feet from where they stood was a projecting rock, and to
+the left of it another, extending out at right angles.
+
+"But how are we going to reach it?" asked Ralph.
+
+"Go around farther to the right, and you will find a vine. I used that
+as a ladder."
+
+Around to the right the boys scampered, each trying to get there first.
+There was no vine in sight. Blakely was coming up, as the boys turned
+back, disappointed.
+
+"Not there?" he inquired. "It ran up this tree. What is this? Some one
+has cut it off and dragged it up to the shelf above; do you see it
+there?" and Blakely pointed to the vine stump, hidden by the grass and
+weeds.
+
+The boys saw the plain evidence of the cuts.
+
+"This is decidedly interesting," exclaimed Blakely, as he turned to the
+Professor. "This was done since I was here."
+
+The only way to reach the ledge was to climb the tree and try to drag
+the vine from the ledge, and Ralph volunteered to do this.
+
+It was not much of a task, and when the vine had been drawn down he
+moved out on the limb and easily stepped on the ledge of the nearest
+rock, and then drew over the vine so the boys could readily reach the
+main ledge.
+
+Blakely was the last to gain the top, and he led the way around the
+first projecting rock. The view from this point was a charming one.
+
+"Look to the east," cried Ralph; "see Unity beyond; isn't this fine?"
+
+The boys now understood why this was a desirable place for Blakely. It
+appeared to be absolutely safe from either animals or man.
+
+"How did you ever happen to find this place?" asked Tom.
+
+"Simply by accident--the fact is, I stumbled on it. I mean that
+literally. You see there is only one point higher than this. That is
+directly above this ledge. I went up the hill from the forest side, and
+came out to the point, and, missing my footing, fell down to this ledge,
+and discovered that the only way I could get out was by the vine
+ladder."
+
+"What is that?" exclaimed Will, springing back, and pointing to an
+object in front.
+
+Blakely started forward like a shot, and moved around the main point
+from which Will came. The boys followed. Directly ahead, and on the
+ledge in front of the recess were two skeletons. The boys were shocked
+at the sight, and the Professor stopped and intently examined them.
+
+"Some one made this his home after I left it, that is sure. Here are
+things I never saw."
+
+"Was this your gun?" asked Jim, as he picked up a rusty weapon.
+
+"Yes," replied Blakely, in great excitement. "But how did it get here? I
+had it with me when I was captured the first time."
+
+He looked at the Professor in amazement, and then began a minute search
+of the articles scattered about, and lying in the little coves within
+the main recess. Here were found a sextant, several knives, some coins,
+a bunch of keys, a package of letters, written in German, a revolver,
+but no ammunition, various articles of clothing, all in the last stages
+of decay and eaten with holes by insects.
+
+But the condition of the skeletons caused the greatest speculation. They
+were lying near together, and there was no indication of a struggle
+between them. One was lying with the head resting on a mass of molding
+leaves, and this was drawn aside and examined.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 18. The Mysterious Message._]
+
+Here was the first real clue. A bit of paper, evidently a page from a
+scrap book, which showed faint traces of writing. Parts were entirely
+eaten away, and after a time the following words were deciphered:
+
+      "Escaped during the night                miles wes
+   tains       lyas have Rogers                    right
+   faithful
+        (Signed)                                  roman"
+
+The German letters contained no information, excepting the name "Johan,"
+to which they were addressed, and were signed, "Matilda," all dated
+during the year 1911.
+
+"One of these men was a white or Caucasian, and the other was,
+undoubtedly, an aborigine, as the skull formation clearly indicates. I
+am satisfied that this one was a native," remarked the Professor, after
+he had made an extended examination.
+
+"This letter may be an interesting one to decipher," said Blakely, as he
+went over the contents again and again. "It seems to me that the part of
+the word 'lyas' has reference to the 'Illyas,' and 'tains' is part of
+the word 'mountains.' Probably, it would read, if properly
+reconstructed, 'west of the mountains.'"
+
+"Yes, and the space between 'night' and 'miles' refers to the number of
+miles," added Ralph.
+
+"It is remarkable that we should find evidences, of the work of the
+Illyas at the extreme western part of the island, when they are living
+near the eastern border," remarked the Professor.
+
+"I take it," answered Blakely, "that this letter was transmitted to the
+man here, and was written by some one, and conveyed, in all probability,
+by this native."
+
+"That is a reasonable supposition. The word 'faithful' may have
+reference to him," responded the Professor, after some reflection.
+
+"Well, we can do no more than give them a decent burial," said Blakely.
+
+"It will be a difficult task to do that, as we have no tools, and it
+would be necessary to carry the bones a distance in order to inter them.
+If the boys will gather up a quantity of stones we can make a covering
+for them against the wall, within one of the coves."
+
+This suggestion was carried out, and the bones deposited beneath a
+mound, and after gathering up the various articles they descended the
+vine ladder and made a hurried trip to the river.
+
+Unity was reached as it was growing dark to learn that two messengers
+from John had reached them during their absence, detailing the sighting
+of the Illyas' village, which was estimated to be five miles west of the
+mountains.
+
+It was singular how this information seemed to supply the missing word
+in the mysterious message found with the skeleton on the hill. The
+Professor at once made a copy of the letter, and forwarded it by
+messenger to John. In the letter he detailed the information of the
+finding of the message, and he had hopes that they might be able to find
+some traces of the people mentioned in the letter.
+
+While awaiting the return of Muro, John made a complete examination of
+the Illyas' village, encircling it to get its full position, and thus
+enable him to devise the best mode to attack, if it should be found
+necessary to do so.
+
+He was astounded to note the character of the buildings. They had been
+the work of white men, it was evident.
+
+Muro, with the boys, and the wagons came in sight before ten o'clock, to
+the intense relief of John. He suspected the cause of the delay.
+
+"We had a lively brush with them, for a while," said Harry, "but we had
+no fear at any time."
+
+"Harry is right about that, but I want to tell you we have a different
+class of fighters to deal with than anything we have experienced so
+far," added George. "Why our fire didn't seem to frighten them a bit,
+and they adopted the regular Indian plan of getting behind trees and
+brush."
+
+"What kind of a town is that!" asked Harry, as he took the first glimpse
+of the place through the trees.
+
+"Something different in that line, too, as well as in the fighting,"
+answered John, as he smiled at the question.
+
+"How big a town is it?" asked George.
+
+"I judge, from its size, that there must be fully a thousand natives
+there, but they are keeping pretty close. Do you see the line of
+breastworks all around the place!"
+
+The boys were astonished at what they saw. No wonder the other tribes
+hesitated to attack them.
+
+The two warriors captured by Muro were brought before John, after he had
+made a survey of the place, and by the aid of Uraso one of them was
+instructed to carry information as to their intention to the Illyas.
+
+This was to the effect that in the event no reply was received before
+noon no other effort would be made to open communications. It was
+distinctly impressed on the warrior that the Illyas must give up all the
+captives, and that an agreement must be entered into by them not to
+leave their own boundaries in the future, and John also offered
+protection and a safe return of any messenger who might be sent back
+with the answer.
+
+The captive was released, and, bounding forward, was soon within the
+line of earthworks which surrounded the village. The message gave a full
+two hours for them to decide. There was not a sign of an Illyas until
+near the time limit, when the same one which conveyed their message was
+noticed approaching the line of the allies.
+
+He came directly to John, and conveyed this information:
+
+"The chiefs do not intend to do as the White Chief says. They are
+entitled to the captives, and intend to keep them. If the village is
+attacked the white chiefs and the tribes will be destroyed. We do not
+fear him and his fire weapons."
+
+John motioned to the warrior to depart. For a moment he looked at John
+in amazement. Judging the actions of the white man by the ethics of the
+savage, such a message would have meant his death. He glanced around
+stealthily.
+
+Uraso saw why he hesitated, and remarked to him: "You are free to go. No
+one will injure you, because the White Chief has given his word to
+protect you. He is not like the Illyas. He does not lie."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+THE SURPRISE AND CAPTURE OF THE ILLYAS' STRONGHOLD
+
+
+John smiled, as he saw with what satisfaction Uraso gave him this
+parting shot. Still he hesitated.
+
+Uraso went up to him, and he started back. "You need not fear me because
+we will keep our word. Say to your chiefs that Uraso tells them they are
+fools. The Illyas cannot succeed. They will be crushed and their
+villages taken. Your village is surrounded, and you cannot get aid from
+your other villages. Go and tell them that we shall not again ask them
+to treat with us."
+
+This address assured him and he first marched along carefully, and soon
+made his way with celerity to the village. The Illyas were,
+unquestionably, as much surprised as the messenger at the treatment he
+had received. It was so unlike all former experiences.
+
+During John's investigations he had discovered that the approach to the
+village on the east side offered the best chance for a rush, as the
+character of the ground was better suited to go up close to the line of
+works, and from that point a better view was obtained of the interior of
+the village.
+
+A movement during the daytime would disclose his motives, and he
+therefore advised Uraso and Muro of his plans, and suggested that as
+they would be able to mass the troops better during the night, the
+attack should be delayed until early morning.
+
+"During the day we will make a great show of putting up a line of works
+to deceive them into the idea that we intend to attack from this side.
+During the early morning we will take three-fourths of the force and
+steal around to the east, and attack them with a rush."
+
+"But suppose they rush out in this direction?" asked Muro.
+
+"We must keep a sufficient force here to hold them in check, and, if
+necessary, to rush in from this quarter; and I would like to have you
+hold the ones left for that purpose."
+
+Muro was delighted at the position assigned him, and thought he saw the
+slightest bit of feeling on the part of Uraso; but this was soon quelled
+when John took Uraso aside and said: "I want you with me, as you know
+how to handle and direct the men."
+
+"I have no right to feel offended because you have given Muro this post.
+He is the best man."
+
+"He is no better than you, but you are better than he for the position
+required when the charge is made."
+
+This was, really, true. John knew the capacities of each. Muro was a
+better tactician, but Uraso had a much better hold on the affections of
+the warriors, and he was a fearless and intrepid fighter.
+
+The boys could not help admiring the fine situation of the village, and
+the imposing appearance of the town.
+
+"See that building facing this way? It has pillars different from the
+building to the left. Why do you suppose they made them unlike?" was
+George's query, as they sat in the wagon with John during the afternoon
+waiting for night to come.
+
+"I suppose they wanted to put in the different kinds of architecture,
+simply as a freak, or for some other purpose that I have not yet settled
+in my mind. If I am not mistaken there are at least three different
+orders of architecture represented in the buildings. On the other side
+of the town you can see another building, somewhat smaller than the one
+to the left, which has still different columns."
+
+"I imagine the one fronting us is the main building. What order does
+that belong to?"
+
+"That is a Doric front. It had its origin in the log hut, which was
+called Dorus."
+
+"How many kinds of architecture are there?"
+
+"There are five distinct orders, as they are called."
+
+"What are those besides the Doric?"
+
+"The Ionic, the Corinthian, the Tuscan and the Composite."
+
+"What is that building to the left?"
+
+"That is distinctly Ionic."
+
+"I don't see much difference from the Doric," remarked Harry.
+
+"The distinction is very marked. The Ionic is proportioned to the
+dimensions of a man, and has the delicacy of the human figure."
+
+"Yes; I can see that now. Has the proportion anything to do with the
+order?"
+
+"The Tuscan is distinguished by the fact that the column is usually made
+seven times the diameter of the lower part of the shaft in height."
+
+"But I notice that the ones shown in the two buildings don't appear to
+be very much different in proportions."
+
+"No, for the reason that the distinctive features between the Doric,
+Ionic and Corinthian pertain to the capitals. Notice how exceedingly
+simple the Doric is. I am sorry there are not other examples present,
+but I shall make some sketches to show the differences which are
+marked."
+
+"I have heard more about the Corinthian than any other kind."
+
+"That order is the most beautiful of all, and for that reason is so
+frequently referred to by writers. It is designed to represent the
+delicacy of a young girl. The capital is the most ornamental of all the
+orders, and it is also larger and much more showy."
+
+"But you have not yet described the Composite."
+
+"The Composite or Roman, is the Ionic grafted on the Corinthian. From
+this you will see that not only the general form, but also the
+proportion and the ornamentation, go to make up the various orders. To
+illustrate: The Ionic has, as one feature, two scroll-like ornaments,
+called volutes, and it has more moldings and is much more slender than
+the Doric. To make the Composite there is borrowed the quarter round
+molding (A) from the Tuscan; the leaves (B) from the Corinthian, and the
+volutes (C) from the Ionic."
+
+[Illustration: _Doric.    Ionic.   Corinthian.    Tuscan._
+                        _Fig. 19. Orders of Architecture._]
+
+During the night all preparations were made for a quick transfer of the
+main force to the east. Works were thrown up very ostentatiously during
+the afternoon, in their position on the west of the village, and it was
+obvious to the trained eye of John, who was constantly observing the
+movement in the village, that they were bringing the warriors to the
+side facing these preparations.
+
+John, together with Muro and Uraso, crept up close to the line of
+breastworks, during the night, and satisfied themselves the Illyas were
+deceived as to the point of attack.
+
+Shortly before four in the morning the warriors marched out, making a
+wide detour to the right, and within an hour were close to the east
+line, and carefully concealed. The plan was for the men under Muro to
+commence the attack, as soon as it was light enough to see plainly, and
+the firing of four guns was to be the order for the rush on the part of
+the main force.
+
+All awaited the signal with impatience. Soon the firing was heard, and
+instantaneously, as though expecting it, the Illyas were seen rushing
+through the village to the western line.
+
+John gave the word. To approach close to the breastworks without firing
+a gun, and not to discharge a single piece until they were well within
+the fortified line.
+
+The entire force moved forward at the shots. The line of entrenchments
+was reached, and John, with Uraso by his side, was the first to leap
+over. They halted fifty feet beyond the ridge, to allow the warriors to
+come in and form the line, those having the guns in front.
+
+With a shout, the allies bounded forward, withholding their fire until
+the command should be given. The Illyas up to this time were principally
+arranged along the western wall, discharging their arrows at the force
+under Muro.
+
+The appearance of the allies within the walls was such a terrible
+surprise that all semblance of order was lost in their ranks. They
+began to scatter. Uraso shouted out in stentorian tones:
+
+"Throw down your arms, or we will fire. Surrender and you will not be
+killed."
+
+John and the front line were now alongside of the second building, the
+one described by him as having the columns of the Ionic order, which had
+interested the boys so much.
+
+Notwithstanding the excitement of the moment, Harry could not help
+looking at the building with its tawdry and crumbling columns, and in
+doing so espied a half dozen peculiarly garbed Illyas rushing out and
+attempting to escape to the north along the narrow street.
+
+Calling a dozen warriors, he, with George, made a rush after the
+escaping fugitives, and before the limit of the village was reached they
+were surrounded and carried back.
+
+The Illyas warriors were now in a panic. There seemed to be no one to
+order a surrender or a retreat. John ordered Uraso to have his men
+spread out to prevent escape in either direction, and as he turned to
+execute the order, Harry and George returned with the prisoners.
+
+At the sight of the captives Uraso shouted the order to his men, and
+quickly turning to John, who was slightly in the advance, cried out:
+"Here are the chief and his principal advisers."
+
+John turned to look and noticed that they were surrounded by the men in
+charge of Harry and George.
+
+"Good work," he said. "Demand that he tell his men to surrender." And
+Uraso repeated the message.
+
+The chief saw the situation, but refused to give the order.
+
+"Then we shall have to kill them, and unless you surrender we shall
+attack at once."
+
+He had hardly finished the words when Muro, seeing the condition of
+affairs, left their fortress, and rushing forward scaled the low
+entrenchments, directing a volley into the now thoroughly disorganized
+and excited warriors. The entire body of Illyas had seen the capture of
+their chiefs.
+
+The appearance of the chiefs at the head of the column commanded by John
+made his position safe from attack. Whether the chief refused to comply
+with Uraso's demand from stubbornness, or because he was paralyzed at
+the sudden changes from his fancied security, was not apparent at the
+time.
+
+The warriors now advanced with guns ready for a volley, and the chief
+saw that resistance was useless. He held up his hand as a signal. John
+rushed forward toward the oncoming warriors led by Muro, and the latter,
+seeing the chief in the hands of Uraso, ordered his men to halt.
+
+Meanwhile the forces under Uraso had spread out and were approaching the
+halting warriors, who, one by one, threw down their bows, and, as they
+did so, were marched to the open central part of the village and
+surrounded by the men led by Muro on one side and Uraso on the other.
+John rushed back to the cordon surrounding the chiefs.
+
+Up to this time not the sign of a woman or a child had been seen. But
+when order was finally restored and the defenseless warriors were herded
+together as compactly as possible, the huts surrounding the main
+buildings were opened, as by magic, and the women poured forth wailing
+and shrieking.
+
+It was bedlam let loose. They pictured all the terrors of captivity.
+They knew what it meant. They passed around the cordon beating their
+breasts, and shrieking like demoniacs. John, motioning to Muro and
+Uraso, stepped aside, and ordered the chiefs to follow.
+
+"This is the building they came out of," said George quietly to John.
+
+"Then it will be a good place to hold the conference. Uraso, instruct
+your men not to allow anyone to leave his place within the circle, and
+then attend the conference with us."
+
+The guards followed John as he entered the building. The boys were eager
+to see the interior. Once within they saw a dozen women and twice that
+number of children huddled together in one of the rooms. The entrance
+from the main door in front led directly into a hall, and at the rear
+end of the hall was a large room the entire width of the building.
+
+Several smaller rooms were on each side of the hall. It was, to all
+appearance, arranged like an American or European dwelling, the entire
+interior being finished in wood, but in a terribly dilapidated
+condition.
+
+The surprise was still greater when they found in the interior of the
+great room a number of articles of furniture, such as chairs, tables,
+settees, and articles which, in their younger days, might have been
+rugs. Parts of bedsteads were littered around, broken articles of
+furniture were scattered here and there, and everywhere the place was
+lavish with dirt.
+
+The boys had seen many native places where filth had accumulated, but
+the atmosphere seemed to fairly reek. It appeared so to the boys, who
+had lived so much in the open, and who had such vivid imaginations that
+the wrecked condition of the interior suggested a worse atmosphere than
+there really was.
+
+It was not close or confined, that was certain; for the places which
+once, evidently, had windows, did not contain even the suggestion of
+glass. It was one mass of broken, misplaced, jumbled up belongings, that
+would require the rebus manager of a magazine to assemble in order.
+
+When Uraso returned, and the chiefs were placed before them, the boys
+had an opportunity to study the famous chief of the Illyas. They took
+occasion to compare him with the others, for the boys now knew all of
+them.
+
+He was a man, probably sixty years of age, with the most curious
+headdress, which was worked to imitate, somewhat, the crown, to which
+his position entitled him. He wore a brightly colored mantle, if it
+could be called such, for it was simply thrown over one shoulder, and
+its pendant ends were bound to the waist by a wide girdle.
+
+He wore short trousers, or pantalets, and Harry could hardly keep from
+laughing, as George suggested that he was ultra-English in the way his
+trousers were rolled up. He had the face of a man of authority. His
+every action and look betokened one who knew his authority, and the
+first question, together with the imperious manner of uttering it,
+indicated that he was a king, and he knew it.
+
+He looked at Uraso and Muro, both chiefs, and equal to him in rank. He
+did it with such an imperious air as plainly indicated that he
+considered them his inferiors. Uraso and Muro stood there, with arms
+folded, dignified, and returned his gaze with a dignity that won the
+admiration of the boys.
+
+"I wonder how Uraso and Muro feel now, when they have that old devil at
+their mercy?" George whispered to Harry.
+
+When the circle had been arranged the chief, Oroto, addressed John in
+this terse manner:
+
+"What do you want?"
+
+The question came like a shot. It was the first word he had said.
+Neither of the others had asked for information, nor had they deigned to
+notice him, as they were marching to the council chamber. This neglect
+on the part of Muro and Uraso may have nettled him. The attitude of the
+chiefs plainly irritated him.
+
+It is well known that people of this kind are very sensitive to slights,
+or what they consider so. It is just as likely that the two chiefs
+purposely neglected him in that manner to make the humiliation the more
+complete.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+THE RESCUE OF FIVE CAPTIVES
+
+
+The question for the moment nettled John. Here was a prisoner, powerless
+in his hands, imperiously demanding of his captors what they wanted. It
+may not have occurred to him that such a question was out of place.
+
+John drew himself up, and with that piercing glance which he could give,
+leaned forward, and slowly, but with terrible emphasis, answered:
+"Nothing."
+
+It was now the chief's turn to show a look of surprise. He looked at
+John, and his eyes wandered to Uraso and Muro. Neither indicated the
+slightest curiosity at the answer. Not another word was said as John
+kept his eye on the chief.
+
+Then seeing that he had a different kind of creature to deal with than
+any he had heretofore met, addressed John in an entirely different tone
+of voice:
+
+"Why have you captured me and my warriors, and why do you intend to
+destroy my village and take my women and children?"
+
+"Because that is what you have been doing all your life. We do not ask
+you to give us anything. We have taken everything you have and shall not
+ask you for permission in anything we do. We have no desire to injure
+you or your people, and whether we shall do so will depend on your
+action. If you will give us certain information it may make it easier
+for you, but if you do not tell us it will go hard with you."
+
+"I am ready to listen."
+
+"Did you receive the messenger I sent you three days ago?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"What did he tell you?"
+
+"That you intended to kill me and my people."
+
+"Did he not tell you that we did not want war, but peace, but that you
+must give up the captives you had?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Send out for that warrior," John ordered, as he glanced at Oroto.
+
+Muro accompanied one of the sub-chiefs, and in a few moments returned
+with him. He came in with face hanging down.
+
+He was placed before John. "Why did you lie to the chief?"
+
+The savage was mute. He cast an appealing glance at his chief, but the
+latter did not notice him.
+
+Addressing Uraso, John said: "Take this man out and beat him. He must be
+punished for lying."
+
+George called in several of the warriors, who were instructed to carry
+out the decree. In the meantime Uraso called John aside, and stated that
+the poor fellow had undoubtedly told the truth, but the chief had lied.
+
+"I suspected that," answered John. "I do not want the man beaten, so
+that you may go and stop the execution of it, but do not let the chief
+know that the order was not carried out."
+
+"Did you get a second message from me yesterday through one of your own
+warriors?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"What did he tell you?"
+
+"He said that you had declared war against me and my people and would
+kill all of us and take our women and children into captivity."
+
+"Did he not tell you that we came to make terms of friendship, and that
+all we wanted was the captives which you wrongfully held?"
+
+"No."
+
+"Bring in that warrior."
+
+Uraso went out with one of the sub-chiefs, and when he appeared
+addressed him sharply:
+
+"Why did you lie to your chief, and not tell him what I told you? Answer
+me."
+
+The chief merely glanced at the wretch, and the latter bowed his head.
+The question was repeated, and he was told that he would be protected
+against the fury of his chief if he would tell the truth. As he was
+about to reply the chief merely glanced at him, and his lips were
+sealed.
+
+"Take him out and beat him as severely as you have beaten the other.
+These people must be taught to learn that they should not lie."
+
+Uraso understood John's look, and acted accordingly. He was taken out,
+but was not beaten.
+
+Turning to the chief, and acting on the information imparted by Uraso,
+he startled Oroto by the following question:
+
+"Why did you lie to me and allow your warriors to be beaten?"
+
+The question stunned him for a moment. John did not permit him time to
+frame an excuse.
+
+"You lied to me when you stated that they had told you the things you
+said, and I know it. You are deserving of the same punishment as those
+who were wrongfully beaten. Take him out and see that he is punished as
+he deserves."
+
+This judgment against the august one was like a death pall on the ears
+of the sub-chiefs. The chief trembled; his footsteps, theretofore so
+supple, were trembling, and he held out his hands for support.
+
+The enormity of this punishment to a chief by whipping is the most
+disgraceful thing that can happen. The person of a chief must not be
+defiled by a rod, which is intended only for children and for offenses
+committed by the unruly members of a tribe.
+
+The procession filed out, and John hurriedly called Uraso and Muro to
+his side, explaining in a whisper that they should intercede to prevent
+the punishment.
+
+The excitement of the surrounded warriors was intense, as the word was
+circulated that their great chief had judgment pronounced against him,
+and was to be publicly whipped.
+
+As they were proceeding across the open space, Uraso and Muro, in well
+simulated tones, begged that John should forego the punishment, but he
+refused to comply until they had reached the place selected.
+
+John advanced to him and said: "Your friends, Muro and Saboro, have
+begged me not to inflict the punishment for lying; I have decided not to
+do so at this time, as I am guided by their judgment, and I know they
+are wise. Instead, you and your chiefs must come with me and see the
+Great White Chief, and he may order that you shall not be punished."
+
+This statement that he was not the Great White Chief was another piece
+of news that he could not understand.
+
+"And now, I want to know where you have the captives?"
+
+He hesitated. He looked at Muro and Uraso in a different manner this
+time. Uraso quietly spoke to him: "You cannot escape the vigilance of
+the white man. The wonderful fire guns can kill all of your people. You
+do not know what you are doing in trying to resist him. If you do not
+tell him he will find them, and then I cannot plead for you."
+
+The chief, turning to one of the sub-chiefs, said: "Sama will take you
+to them."
+
+The boys jumped as they learned the import of these words. They looked
+at John. The latter turned to the chief and said:
+
+"How far are they from this place?"
+
+The distance was indicated by signs, which Uraso interpreted to mean two
+hours.
+
+"Bring in the wagons at once, and unload one of them; then take the
+other, with twenty-five men well armed, and carry Sama with you. The
+poor fellows are not, probably, in a condition to walk." Then, again
+turning to the chief, he asked: "How many prisoners have you?"
+
+He held up his hand with fingers outstretched, indicating five. There
+was no delay in preparing the wagon, and Jack and Jill, the two old
+trustworthies, were hustled along, to show the path of freedom to some
+of the boys' former companions and associates.
+
+John's last injunction was: "Be sure and take plenty of food along." The
+order was unnecessary. The boys had thought of this, and the wagon, held
+precious little but articles of comfort for the unfortunates.
+
+Sama directed the wagon to the north, and Muro's son Lolo accompanied
+them on the journey.
+
+"Do you know," said Harry, "we are going straight toward the Cataract?"
+
+"I had quite forgotten that," answered George. "How I would like to go
+back again to the dear old place!"
+
+"I have just been thinking, what a wonderful life we have had since we
+landed here. We had nothing when we came, and now we have everything!"
+
+"Yes," answered George; and he stopped, while his eyes took on a blurry
+feeling, and the lashes began to blink at an alarming rate. "All but
+home!"
+
+Harry looked at George. There was an inflection, which he caught.
+
+"Of course; I mean that, too. But we haven't lost them. When this
+business here is settled we are to go to work on the big vessel. When I
+think of that it eases my mind."
+
+"That is the great comfort to me, too. It makes me happy when I think of
+the joy we are bringing to the people here. I really love every foot of
+this island. It has been a wonderful experience to us."
+
+"And," responded Harry, "to think that we have aided in restoring so
+many to freedom; John and Blakely, and the four boys, and--I wonder who
+the ones are that we are going after now?"
+
+"That is what I have been thinking about all along. But did you ever see
+such bricks as Uraso and Muro?"
+
+Lolo had learned many things in the short ten days that he had been with
+them. The boys had attained a remarkable knowledge of the language, and
+Lolo was a constant instructor for them. He was so simple and unaffected
+in his ways that they grew to love him.
+
+Within two hours the location of the village was sighted. It was
+distinctly noticed among the trees, perched on a hillside, and the
+excitement of the boys was intense. Stut was in charge of the warriors.
+
+Before the village was reached several warriors belonging to the Illyas
+appeared, but fell back when they saw what was approaching. Stut
+directed Sama to inform them that they had come at the command of Oroto.
+
+This information did not satisfy them, but the wagon did not stop. As it
+moved up the incline, the warriors lined up, fully twenty of them,
+wondering what the strange visit meant. There was no act of hostility
+apparent, still they could not understand why there were no Illyas
+present except Sama.
+
+"Take us direct to the captives," commanded Stut.
+
+Sama knew where they were. A typical native hut, but much larger than
+the others, stood behind the main homes of the village. To that the
+wagon was directed.
+
+The warriors on Stut's command lined up behind the wagon, and the boys,
+accompanied by Lolo, rushed for the door. It was but the work of a
+moment to wrench the bars away, and without waiting for any ceremony
+George and Harry were inside.
+
+The scene that met their eyes was appalling. The five captives were in a
+pitiful state. Two of the three boys were lying on filthy hay, and one
+man, also badly emaciated, was on the other side, lying down.
+
+The boy who was still on his feet rushed to Harry and threw his arms
+about him. "Is that you, Harry? Thank God! And George, too. Where did
+you come from?"
+
+"Who is this?" came like a moan from one of the boys. George stooped
+down. "Harry, here is Robert--Robert Lamson; and who are you?" And he
+crawled on his knees over to the other, who feebly turned his eyes.
+
+Lamson turned to Harry, who was now on his knees. "You know Min, don't
+you?" Min was the nickname of one of the boys, because of his
+diminutive size.
+
+"Poor Min!" said Harry, as he put his arm around him. "We will get you
+out of this at once."
+
+"But we are so hungry," cried Robert, as the tears streamed down his
+face.
+
+The boys were all crying now. The tears streaked their faces. Lolo was
+very much affected, but he was a jewel in this emergency. He called to
+Stut, and together they carried out Robert, and Harry, with his strong
+arms, lifted Min as though he was a feather.
+
+They were carried to the wagon, and tenderly laid on the clean, sweet
+hay. Poor Min had fainted with the excitement, and Robert was not much
+better. But who were the men?
+
+When Harry returned to the hut he found the warriors around one of the
+men, talking excitedly. He was a Saboro, and Stut recognized him as one
+of his people, who, it was believed, had been sacrificed long before.
+The other was a white man, and he was lying in a sort of stupor,
+apparently not recognizing his visitors.
+
+Harry spoke to him, and at the strange voice he turned his head, and
+with an effort raised himself. "Who is this? What do you want? Is that
+you, Rogers?" and he fell back exhausted.
+
+The still active boy, Roy Whitten, came up, and said: "He was here when
+we were brought to the place. His name is Gustave Wright. He has a
+wonderful story to tell."
+
+"What is the matter with him? Was he wounded?"
+
+"Yes; but he is over that now. The trouble is that he is starved, like
+the rest of us. Can't we have something to eat?"
+
+"George is getting it ready for you. You must eat sparingly at first.
+George will attend to that, never mind."
+
+The Saboro was in better physical condition than the others of the
+party. There was no time for talk. The captives were fed sparingly. "Oh,
+how good this tastes!" said Robert. "We had given up all hope, after
+they brought us here. We tried so hard to get away and go to the
+northeast side of the island, where some white people are living."
+
+Harry dragged Robert out of the hut, and called to George. "Here,
+George, did you hear what he said? How did you know there were white
+people in the northeast part of the island?"
+
+"We saw it on a litter, which the Illyas brought into their other
+village."
+
+Harry looked at George. "That was the litter we made at the Cataract,
+and on which we carried out the Kurabu. I wonder how the Illyas got hold
+of it?"
+
+"Where is the Cataract?" asked Robert.
+
+"That is at the northeast part of the island. That was our home."
+
+"But don't you live there now?"
+
+"No; we live in a big town at the southwest part of the island."
+
+"But this is so wonderful to us. Just you two boys, and all the
+savages. How did you manage it?"
+
+"But we are not alone. The Professor has been with us, and we have Mr.
+Varney, and we rescued a Mr. Blakely, and four of the _Investigator's_
+boys."
+
+"The Professor--the Professor, and Varney? Rogers spoke about Varney. Do
+you mean the professor of philosophy that you used to be so chummy
+with?"
+
+"Yes," answered Harry, eagerly. "But let us get busy now." Stut had
+rounded up the warriors, and through Sama informed them that they were
+wanted at the village.
+
+The women were in consternation, but Stut informed them that no harm
+would befall the men. Up to this time Stut had not permitted Sama to
+give any information about the situation at the village, but he now
+turned to the waiting warriors, and said:
+
+"The Great White Chief and all the tribes have united, and have taken
+the Illyas chief and all his people prisoners, and all their women and
+children are now captives. The Illyas have not acted right and the
+chiefs must now go to the Great Chief and show that he is sorry, and
+that he will not again try to take captives, and will not make
+sacrifices."
+
+Without waiting for a moment, the train started back for the Illyas'
+village. It is wonderful how the stimulating influence of surroundings
+will build up and strengthen the depressed. The poor boys, emaciated as
+they were, had smiles and tears, as they heard little snatches of
+experiences from the boys.
+
+"We are telling you these things, but we are simply crazy to hear your
+stories. But they will keep. Let us do the talking now. You will be all
+right in a day or two."
+
+The boys' eyes were kept on the vessels containing the food. Time and
+again George would shake his head as one or the other tried to get
+another "bite." The liquid food was the first administered. The journey
+back took much longer, because Harry would not hurry the animals over
+the rough roads with the patients in their low condition.
+
+When the wagon and the train of warriors arrived at the village, the
+only thing the boys saw were the warriors of the allies. The captives
+were in the buildings, and were guarded on all sides.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+REMARKABLE GROWTH OF UNITY
+
+
+"We haven't heard from John for two days. I wonder if they have met with
+any difficulties?" asked Will, as they were together the evening after
+their trip to the hill and forest.
+
+"John is very prudent, and a man of very extensive knowledge as a
+campaigner. If they had met any disaster we should have known of it
+before this."
+
+"We ought to have had a telegraph line. That would keep us in touch with
+the army," added Jim.
+
+"Wireless telegraphy would be still better," responded Tom.
+
+"But how about wireless telephones?"
+
+"And if wireless telephones, why not wireless power?"
+
+The Professor smiled, as one suggestion after the other was made. The
+other boys smiled, too, at Jim's last suggestion that power might be
+transmitted by wireless.
+
+"That is going a little too far," said Will. "I can understand why
+sounds can be sent, but power is another thing, it seems to me."
+
+"I am afraid that is not a very logical conclusion," interposed the
+Professor. "What is the difference between sound and power?"
+
+"I should say that sound is a motion in the air," replied Will, "and
+that power is motion----"
+
+"In the air, too," continued the Professor. "That is not a very good
+definition of the matter. Let us try and make it clear. Sound is
+produced by vibration; the lowest number of vibrations the ear can
+distinguish, is sixteen per second, which is known as the low bass notes
+of an organ. The highest are, approximately, 12,000 per second. These
+vibrations require power to produce them."
+
+"Do you mean to say that all vibrations require power?"
+
+"Yes; nature speaks to us only in the form of motion, or vibrations of
+some sort. Light, heat, electricity, are merely different forms of
+motion. Taste and smell, as well as sound, are merely modes of motion.
+The beating heart; the winking of the eyelids; the rhythmic breathing of
+the body; the swinging of the pendulum; the movement of the sap in trees
+and the unfolding of the leaves; the light mists which go up and the
+rains which bring the particles back again; the winds and the waves; and
+the giant swings of the planets through space, all show how nature
+performs her work through unceasing movement; and all these require
+power."
+
+"I remember," remarked Ralph, "about reading of a Hindoo fakir in India,
+who claimed that he could bring to him an object ten thousand miles
+away, in ten minutes of time. As that was motion it must have taken
+considerable power to do it."
+
+"That is easily determined," answered the Professor. "Ten thousand
+miles would be 16.6 miles, per second, at that velocity. If the article
+should be only one inch square it would take 18,000,000 horsepower to
+transport it that distance in the time given. This calculation is
+sufficient to show the absurdity of the Hindoo's statement."
+
+Considering that the new community was one which had been recruited from
+a people which had no ambition in life, except merely to live, the work
+going on in every quarter was more remarkable every day. Tom came to the
+Professor and remarked: "It would do you good to go down on street B and
+see how the Saboros have fixed up their places."
+
+This was a sufficient hint for him, and busy as he was, he sauntered in
+that direction.
+
+What he saw was, really, a surprise. Taking the hint from the sodding
+operation which the women had noticed around the boys' quarters, he
+found that they had actually borrowed the wheelbarrows and made some
+nice lawns.
+
+The Professor called in at the places, and congratulated them on the
+beautiful appearances, and the nice manner in which the work was done
+What a wonderful thing that was to those poor women, to see the Great
+Chief take such notice of their work.
+
+He went into the cottages, and examined every room, and suggested many
+changes, and offered advice in the manner of keeping the houses clean,
+and in taking care of the children. This work of beautifying their homes
+was, of course, crude, but it had a remarkable stimulus to the others.
+On every hand this was taken up. It was a spirit of emulation that was
+worth encouraging.
+
+When John left with the forces, the Professor consulted Blakely, and
+ordered the erection of three larger and more pretentious cottages. Each
+of these had five rooms, all plain, but arranged in good taste, and the
+furniture was also being made, and the large number employed enabled
+them to complete the buildings ready for furnishing before John's party
+returned.
+
+The working force was now ready to put up a still larger building. "Do
+you know what this is for?" asked Ralph, as the timber was being taken
+to the new location.
+
+"I suppose this is to be the Town Hall," replied Will.
+
+"No, indeed; it is the schoolhouse." And the boys laughed at the idea.
+But it was an idea that was well considered and determined on, long
+before John left on the expedition.
+
+But the town was growing beyond all comprehension. Daily new families
+arrived, and Blakely was the busiest man in the place, in his efforts to
+find work for them, while the Professor and the boys were often at their
+wits' end to know how and where they would house them. The Saboros were
+the most numerous, followed by the Berees and Osagas. But now the
+Kurabus were coming in--the families of the warriors with John.
+
+The Chief Oroto saw and marveled at the sights. During the entire time
+he had been there, he had never suggested the idea of returning. The
+Kurabu medicine men who had been brought down with him, were still
+under the charge of the Professor, and one day one of them accosted
+Ralph in broken English.
+
+He looked up in surprise. It was the first inkling that the so-called
+wise men were being taught the language. Ralph had quite a conversation
+with him, and reported the information to the boys.
+
+How was this change brought about? The first step of the Professor was
+to show the wise (?) men some of the mysterious things which the white
+men could do. The battery, which the boys had made at Cataract, was one
+of the instruments. Then he showed them the simple experiments in
+chemistry; how ores were treated and metals extracted and tempered.
+
+These things were so much more important and wonderful than anything
+they could do or ever dreamed of, that when he told them they could do
+those things, he had the most willing pupils. Hour after hour they would
+perform some task, until they began to crave for new things. Then began
+the work of instilling knowledge of the language as a part of their
+education. They were taught how to communicate ideas by signs in the
+English language, and thus the alphabet was taught.
+
+A spirit of rivalry was exhibited among them, and it was so intense that
+they had no further time for idleness or useless wanderings about the
+place. It was no wonder that the boys saw so little of them when the
+spirit once took possession of their energies.
+
+Two of the men referred to had an undoubted aptitude for chemical
+experiments, one of them, Talala, being exceptionally bright and quick
+to grasp the meaning of an experiment. He usually accompanied the
+Professor on all his rounds visiting the sick, because this was now an
+imperative daily task on his part.
+
+The thermometer was in frequent use and Talala understood its meaning.
+Only the simplest remedies were used and administered, and the gathering
+of the vegetables necessary for the making up of the remedies was a part
+of the work of each. In this the natives had a pretty good knowledge,
+but they knew nothing of making the extracts, or how to concentrate the
+compounds.
+
+Cinchona, the Peruvian bark, and calisaya, its sister, which furnish the
+quinine of commerce, were well known to them, but they did not know how
+the white man made it so more efficient than the crude product as used
+by them.
+
+He explained that by the use of an acid, like that furnished by sulphur,
+a chemical change could be produced, whereby a single grain would be
+more efficient than a dozen grains in the way they used it. This was
+labeled "Sulphate of Quinine," and so on along the whole line of
+remedies, he gave a term which they learned, and the reasons for it.
+
+When John saw the wagon approaching he rushed out, followed by Uraso and
+Muro. The rescued captives were in the wagon. Pending their arrival a
+number of the warriors had cleaned out the large building--the one with
+the Doric columns, which stood at right angles to the chief's house.
+This structure appeared to be in the best state of preservation.
+
+Another lot of the warriors took the wagon, and with their bolos
+gathered a large quantity of the sweet grass from the hillside, and this
+was brought to the building and arranged for the use of the chiefs and
+John, and for the boys when they returned.
+
+George was eager to tell of their adventure, and of the prisoners they
+had brought with them. "We got three of the boys, but two of them are
+very weak. We have a friend of yours, also."
+
+"Who is it?" exclaimed John, just as eager as the boys could be.
+
+"Wright; Gustave Wright."
+
+John bounded into the wagon. Wright saw John, and feebly extended his
+hand.
+
+"I knew I would find you sooner or later," said John, as he put his arm
+around him. "But we got you soon enough to save you. All you need is
+something good to eat." And Wright smiled.
+
+"Yes," he answered. "They haven't permitted me to take much so far; but
+I guess they are all right. What a fine set of boys you have!"
+
+"The finest in the world. Wait until you know them! But never mind about
+talking now. And these are the boys? Poor fellows! What an experience
+they must have had! Come on, men; get them out and make them as
+comfortable as possible."
+
+There were willing hands for every job. Muro was delighted at the rescue
+of his friend. He was one of the most skillful and powerful warriors,
+but he did not look like it at this time.
+
+Inside the patients were ranged about the place, and the cooking stove
+brought in from the wagon.
+
+"I suppose I shall have to take charge of the kitchen," said George, as
+he ordered it arranged in place and directed them where to put the
+various articles. Before long the savory odor of the vegetables and game
+reached the famished ones, and they begged for some of it.
+
+"A little at a time," said George, soothingly. "I am doctor and cook,
+and there is plenty here, of the best kind."
+
+"Oh, doesn't that smell good!" exclaimed Min, joyously.
+
+"That's the way I like to hear you talk," said Harry. "Your voice
+doesn't seem starved. You'll be out in a couple of days, and be better
+than ever."
+
+"How long have you been in that place?" asked John.
+
+"In that particular place, only about a month; but we were in a worse
+place, still farther south, for about three months."
+
+"Starving all the time?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"I was moved to say that starving is a good thing, in its way, but it
+has its limits, and four months is a little too long for either comfort
+or health. You will find, however," continued John, "that you will be
+much healthier for the experience, particularly if you have ever had
+stomach troubles, as my friend Wright here has had all his life. Isn't
+that so, Wright?"
+
+"Do you think I have been to a health cure?" he asked.
+
+"Certainly; the best kind, for one in your condition." And John laughed.
+
+"Probably you took me away before the cure was effected; but as I always
+was magnanimous, I shall forgive you this time."
+
+There was a continuous fire of conversation, which cheered the patients,
+and added greatly to their store of knowledge.
+
+Harry, who had been outside, rushed in, and exclaimed excitedly:
+
+"Did you have _Investigator's_ Lifeboat No. 3?"
+
+"Yes," exclaimed the boys.
+
+"Who wrote the note we found in it?"
+
+"Did you find our boat? Where did you get it?" asked Robert.
+
+"We found it on a river to the north of this place."
+
+"How in the world did it ever get there?"
+
+"But who wrote the note?"
+
+"What note?"
+
+"The message signed Will."
+
+The boys looked at each other, as they all shook their heads.
+
+"That is one of the mysteries which George and I thought you could
+solve."
+
+"Mysteries! Did you have many of them?"
+
+"Many of them! We had over a dozen, and some of them are still on the
+puzzle board. Do you remember Raggy, the drawing teacher? He always
+liked to call some of our drawings the unsolved puzzles. I wonder where
+he is? We had enough mysteries the first three months to supply
+headaches for a year."
+
+"We want to know about them."
+
+"We'll tell you all about them; and some were mighty thrilling. We had
+some just as exciting as any you ever read of in the last boys' series
+that we had about two years ago."
+
+"You see," said George, in a sage-like tone, "Harry and I don't read
+books of that kind any more; we simply act them." And the boys, and men,
+too, laughed at this sally.
+
+"Stop your talking for a while and eat something," continued George.
+
+"Good, but it's awful hot," said Min, as he puckered up his mouth and
+drew in a breath of cool air.
+
+"I made it hot so you wouldn't eat too fast," chuckled George.
+
+Just then a great commotion was heard on the outside, and George, Harry
+and Robert rushed for the door. Beyond the village a scrimmage was
+taking place, and a few shots were fired.
+
+John and Uraso were racing across the open place, and dozens of warriors
+were following. Muro was seen as he emerged from the combatants, and he
+was smiling as John came up.
+
+"The reinforcements from the south village came too late. I suspected
+they would be here, and I had a number of the men in wait for them. They
+have captured all of them."
+
+John nodded his head with approval at the course of Muro. The warriors
+brought in the prisoners, who were astounded at the unexpected welcome
+which awaited them. Forty-five were in the party. They were put under
+guard with the others.
+
+The utmost care was observed during the night, as the Illyas were known
+to be very foxy, and half the force was detailed to keep guard.
+
+Early in the morning John's first care was to make an investigation as
+to the character of the provisions on hand, and to arrange that foraging
+parties should be sent out to bring in vegetables.
+
+He was surprised to learn that the Illyas cultivated many kinds of
+garden products, and fruit was growing in abundance. This was found to
+be a prudent thing to consider, when it will be remembered that the
+village now had to feed over three hundred of the allies, and that the
+penned-up Illyas were not in a position to go out and bring in the daily
+supply.
+
+The boys were fed at intervals during the night, but before four they
+all felt so much restored that sleep overtook them, and John advised
+them to permit sleep, as that would be the best restorer, and they were
+not disturbed until they naturally awoke during the forenoon.
+
+A plentiful supply of broth was prepared, and administered during the
+day. But Harry and George were simply wild to explore the buildings. The
+excitement had been too intense to enable them to give it much thought.
+But now something must be known about the buildings and the reason for
+their erection at that place.
+
+John had questioned various ones about the buildings, but none seemed to
+know anything concerning them. Uraso and Muro were just as much
+surprised as the whites. Neither had known of the existence of a place
+with such buildings.
+
+It appears that the Illyas never allowed captives to be confined in the
+village, and this was a wise thing; because the escape of anyone would
+be sure to inform the other tribes of the existence of the Forbidden
+City.
+
+The remarkable thing about it, aside from the buildings, was the plan
+upon which the town had been built. It was regularly laid out. There
+were three main buildings; the first and largest being the one facing
+the west, with the Doric front. The next largest had its front facing
+the south, and this had Ionic columns. The third, and which was not
+noticeable from a position west of the village, was smaller than either,
+with a front of Tuscan architecture.
+
+What did these buildings mean? By whom were they erected, and for what
+purpose were they intended? These were questions ever uppermost in the
+minds of John and the boys.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+THE MYSTERIOUS CAVE. RETURNING TO UNITY
+
+
+"It may be there are some sort of records or tablets somewhere about the
+buildings which will indicate what they were erected for; but my
+investigations thus far leave me just as much in the dark as when I
+first saw them," remarked John, as they were examining the structures.
+
+"I wonder if they have corner stones? Sometimes they put records there,"
+observed Harry.
+
+"I made an examination in that direction also, but the character of the
+underpinning is the same all around, and the corners have no
+distinguishing stones."
+
+"It must be a very old custom to have cornerstones for buildings."
+
+"It was a custom to have cornerstones, or memorial stones, in all
+buildings in ancient times. They were well known in the time of Job, and
+buildings thousands of years prior to his day contained them. It is not
+known from what the custom arose."
+
+"Didn't you say that the treasure charts showed the existence of caves
+to the southeast of the cave we found at the Tuolos' village?"
+
+"Yes, and that is something that we shall have to investigate to-morrow.
+To-day the patients still need our care, but they will be well enough to
+enable us to be absent to-morrow."
+
+"I think we ought to make sketches of the plan of this town. I have a
+presentiment that we shall know something more about this place in the
+future," said George.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 20. The Peculiar Illya Village._]
+
+"By all means have it prepared during the day. Later on I may be able to
+give a pretty good guess what all this means." And the boys looked at
+each other significantly.
+
+If the chiefs, or any of the lower order, knew anything about the origin
+of the town, they did not make it apparent.
+
+"Do you notice one singular thing about this town and the people in it?"
+asked John.
+
+Neither of the boys could guess.
+
+"Where are the medicine men, and those who perform the sacred rites at
+their festivals?"
+
+The boys again looked at each other for an answer. George replied: "I
+think they are at the caves of which the charts give some indication,"
+finally exclaimed Harry.
+
+"That is the case, undoubtedly. That is where we shall have the
+difficulty. The chiefs will not disclose their hiding places. Before
+going on the search we must question the chief."
+
+In the early morning John and the boys called on the chief in company
+with Uraso. A complete change had come over him. Two days before he was
+sullen and moody, after the first lesson had been given him. Now he was
+different and agreeable.
+
+"Before we start for the village of the Great White Chief there are some
+questions I would ask you. How many medicine men have you?"
+
+"Ten."
+
+"Where are they?"
+
+"In their dark homes."
+
+"Where are those homes?"
+
+"To the east. Sama will take you to them, but you cannot go in."
+
+"Why not?"
+
+"Because you will be destroyed."
+
+"How do you know?"
+
+"Because they have told us so."
+
+"Do you believe them?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Do you sacrifice your captives because they tell you the Great Spirit
+demands it?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then I must tell you that they lie to you. The Great Spirit does not
+tell them to sacrifice. It is not death to enter their homes."
+
+"But we know that no one has ever come from them alive."
+
+"Does the Great Spirit kill them when they go in?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Do you want to know whether they tell the truth?"
+
+"Yes."
+
+"Then I will go in, and show you that the Great Spirit will not harm
+me."
+
+"How shall I know that you go in?"
+
+"You must go with me and stand at the opening."
+
+The chief's eyes now wandered about. He was visibly affected at this
+bold declaration, and John saw hesitation in his demeanor.
+
+Without giving him time to waver, he continued: "The great Chief Oroto
+must not show his people that he is afraid. He must show them that he is
+greater and wiser than the medicine men, and that the wise men who have
+told him those tales have not told the truth."
+
+Turning to Uraso he said: "Prepare the wagon, and we will start at
+once." The chief and two of the sub-chiefs were taken out and placed in
+the wagon. Harry, George, Uraso and Muro, with a picked company of
+twenty-five men, were selected to accompany them.
+
+The wagon was a curiosity to Oroto. He enjoyed the ride immensely and
+admired the manner in which Harry handled and guided the yaks.
+
+Their course was directed due east for a mile, and then moved along a
+well-beaten path diagonally up the hill in a southern direction. After
+proceeding thus for a half mile farther the ground, became rough and cut
+up by innumerable gullies.
+
+"How much farther must we go?"
+
+"To the place where the great trees are." And he pointed to a group of
+trees less than five hundred feet beyond. Progress with the team was
+impossible, and all alighted. Leaving three of the warriors with the
+team, the others ascended the slight elevation, and before them was the
+mouth of the cavern.
+
+The opening was not more than eight feet in height, and not over six
+feet wide, with irregular sides. Arriving in front of it, John advanced
+to Oroto, and said: "I am about to show you that the Great Spirit will
+not injure me!" And saying so boldly marched in.
+
+He remained for a full half hour, and the chief became uneasy. The boys,
+as well as Uraso and Muro, affected not to be disturbed. What John did
+was this: It was evident to him that the occupants of the cave had no
+knowledge of the approach of the party.
+
+They knew that the White Chief and the allies had captured the village
+and the chiefs. They felt a certain sense of security in their home,
+because in all the tribal warfares the medicine men and the wise men of
+the tribes were regarded with fear and reverence.
+
+When John entered the cave, he went in a sufficient distance to be
+surrounded by total darkness. He remained concealed long enough so that
+he could become accustomed to the darkness, and slowly moved toward the
+interior, as he felt assured the occupants' presence would sooner or
+later be revealed by their lights.
+
+In this he was not mistaken, and he was surprised to find them much
+nearer the entrance than he anticipated. It would be more impressive to
+remain for some time than to emerge at once, so he sat down to observe
+the wise men.
+
+There was the most oppressive silence when he first observed the light,
+but as he neared them, a more or less animated conversation took place.
+Much of this was understood by John, as his knowledge of two of the
+dialects gave him some key to the words uttered. From this it was
+evident that they knew of the rescue of the captives.
+
+The chief had told them of ten belonging to the order. John could count
+only eight. Possibly two were in some other part of the cavern, and he
+moved along at the opposite side of the large chamber to discover what
+was beyond.
+
+Brushing along the wall, a hanging stalactite was dislodged, and it
+fell. The noise did not give even a momentary start to the company. John
+was surprised. He stopped and reflected, and the reason soon became
+plain. They supposed that it was caused by the absent ones returning.
+
+But John waited and the two did not return, and they began to glance
+about. At this time he was on the opposite side of the chamber, so that
+the medicine men were between him and the mouth of the cave.
+
+A half dozen of them had arisen, and John stepped forward with his gun
+in position. In a stentorian voice John shouted:
+
+"I am the Great White Chief. Go to the door of the cave. If any refuse
+he will die. Go!"
+
+It might be stated that before leaving for the cave Uraso had fully
+instructed John how to use the above phrases. His sudden apparition on
+the side opposite the mouth of the cave was most startling to them. Not
+a word was uttered by either.
+
+"Go!" again shouted John. They seemed to be paralyzed. By a common
+impulse they moved toward the entrance, and as they marched out and saw
+the party there waiting to receive them, together with their own chief,
+the consternation was most marked on the faces of all.
+
+Addressing the chief, John said: "Here are your wise men. The Great
+Spirit is not there. They have lied to you."
+
+It was now apparent from the actions of the chief why he was considered
+such a power and a terror to his own people and to the tribes. He was
+every inch a chief. He strode forward, and would have crushed them with
+his own hands, but John interposed.
+
+"We shall take care of them. They will never again lie to the great
+chief Oroto." And so saying they were ordered bound, and Uraso
+instructed to take them to the village and carefully guard them.
+
+"You may take the wagon with you, Uraso, as the boys and I want to
+attend to some matters on our own account, and we shall soon follow
+you."
+
+When the cavalcade passed from their sight, John said: "I suppose we
+shall now have an opportunity to examine the place. Have you any
+candles?"
+
+Harry had not forgotten them, and the boys smiled as John also drew
+forth several, and thus they entered the cave. John marched direct to
+the place where the wise men had their quarters, and their lamps were
+still burning.
+
+"By the way, we came in too soon. Two of them are outside, or are
+somewhere in the cave. We want them as well as the others. If they find
+us here, they will be likely to get away. But we are here now, and we
+must find out what we can, and as quickly as possible." The lights at
+the habitable part of the cave were left burning and the three plunged
+into the passageway which led to the east.
+
+"This is the cave noted in the chart. How fortunate it is. You will note
+that this, like the other cave, has also a cross-shaped formation, and
+the treasure should be at the south branch."
+
+"Here it is," whispered George.
+
+"What, the treasure?" was Harry's eager question.
+
+"No; the south branch."
+
+"You are undoubtedly right. There is no other opening."
+
+This branch was followed less than a hundred feet, when a solid white
+wall appeared in front, and it was readily seen that the channel
+terminated in the chamber.
+
+The floor of this chamber was one mass of uneven projections, entirely
+unlike the other parts of the cave, and what was more singular still, it
+was fully six feet higher than the floors of the other portions, but it
+was absolutely devoid of any treasure, or anything which could contain
+such a hoard as the chart seemed to indicate.
+
+"It is just as well," said John, resignedly. "I suppose we have enough
+for our purposes."
+
+While crawling down the rough portion which formed the elevated floor of
+the chamber Harry slipped, and broke off a portion of the stalagmite
+overlaying the side. It was dark beneath.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 21. Diagram of the Cross-Shaped Cave._]
+
+"This is not calcareous matter," exclaimed John.
+
+"What is it?" asked both in a breath.
+
+The lights were concentrated on a sample, and as John raised his head he
+looked at the boys, and slowly uttered one word:
+
+"Copper!"
+
+The boys did not at first grasp the true significance of the word. It
+was marvelous to them that copper should be found there, but John
+thought of something else. It offered a possible explanation to the
+origin of the buildings. Where were the mines? Were they in the cave
+itself? This was not copper ore. It was a partly refined product.
+
+It was evident to John, and further verified that the entire chamber,
+which was fully sixty feet long and fifty feet wide, was covered with a
+layer of this copper for a height of six feet. A calculation of the
+value could be readily made.
+
+John and the boys made their way out and past the fires that were still
+burning, and which would be relighted no more. The two absent ones were
+not found. They had not returned. The reason was explained when the
+village was reached. They were captured by Uraso before they had left
+the cave a thousand feet.
+
+During the day and the succeeding night the patients improved each hour.
+Both of the invalid boys were able to sit up. Rogers wanted a full meal,
+but still none were allowed to indulge. John announced that a start for
+home would be made in the morning.
+
+There was intense bustle in the village the next morning. The chief was
+informed that he and two of his sub-chiefs would be required to
+accompany them, together with one hundred of his warriors. The ten wise
+(?) men were also to be of the party.
+
+There was mingled feeling of emotion in the minds of the people when
+they saw their great chief for the first time in the knowledge of the
+people humbled and taken captive by a foreign tribe.
+
+It was well to leave them with that impression. They would soon learn
+otherwise, and for the first time begin to appreciate that the white
+man's way is superior to their own.
+
+The boys and Gustave were in the wagon with the Chief Oroto. The others
+were on foot. Occasionally John would take a place and delight in the
+chatter of the boys, and sometimes would listen to remarks about Oroto,
+that would not have been pleasant for his ears.
+
+John didn't blame them a bit for it either. The pale, drawn faces of the
+two boys made them pitiable objects, and when he saw them he felt like
+cursing the chief who would permit such cruelties to innocent boys. But
+he remembered that the chief knew no better. He lived according to the
+best that was given him. Why was he to be blamed?
+
+There was hardly a subject but was canvassed by the boys. The chief soon
+became interested, and he frequently asked Lolo questions. Before the
+journey ended the boys changed their opinions about Oroto. Perhaps the
+vivacity of the boys attracted him.
+
+But later on, through Lolo, he began to learn things which astounded
+him. Muro had told his son Lolo that Harry was the one who made the
+wonderful guns, and this was communicated to the chief. Harry was a hero
+to him from that time on. Lolo told the chief about the wonderful things
+which they were making at the new town, and long before they sighted the
+place he was interested just like a common mortal.
+
+But the Saboro village was in sight. "Moro," asked John, "how long will
+it take to get your family ready?"
+
+"We shall go on with you this afternoon."
+
+They were ready and waiting when the train came in sight. Lolo was out
+of the wagon and sprang to his mother, just like any other boy would do,
+and he told her in two minutes what had happened in fifteen days. An
+American boy could not have done better than that.
+
+Was Stut's family going, too? Certainly! The boys laughed merrily. One
+wagon was given over to the families, containing seven women and
+fourteen children. But the wagons were lightened of their heavy loads of
+provisions and easily accommodated to emigrants.
+
+This was a happy party. The natives never knew of such an outing. It was
+quite a cavalcade. Just imagine four hundred warriors, the two wagons,
+the women and the children, the men chanting a peculiar song as they
+marched, occasionally interspersed with laughter, and a constant flow of
+talk about the new and wonderful place they were going to, of the great
+white chiefs, and above all the real and unaffected pleasure that grew
+out of the knowledge that there would be no more war.
+
+On the second day after leaving the Saboro village, Unity came in sight.
+George crawled to the top of the wagon, and, raising his hat and waving
+it, began to cheer. Every warrior did likewise when he saw the signal.
+It was a bedlam for a few moments. The Illyas chief saw it and smiled.
+
+Unity heard the cheers. There was no more work that day. The men in the
+fields came in. Those in the workshops deserted their posts, and lined
+up along the newly made sidewalks that had been carefully arranged
+several days before.
+
+The women were out in force, and the children in evidence everywhere.
+The two wagons were in advance, Harry being in the lead. Not a man left
+the town to rush out and greet them. The Professor suggested that a more
+fitting welcome could be given by forming lines to receive the warriors
+as they filed by.
+
+The wagon was now within five hundred feet of the end of the receiving
+line of the villagers. Angel, the orang-outan, was in the line also. The
+sight of the wagons was too much for him. He scampered along the street
+in that peculiar shuffling gait that all the villagers knew, and started
+for the wagon.
+
+He was the only one in the town who disobeyed the orders of the
+Professor. He knew that George was in the wagon. He passed the first
+one, driven by Harry, but he was up in the top of the second in an
+instant, and he made his way to George's side, and looked up in his
+face. George put his arm around him, as he was accustomed to do, and
+this was sufficient for him.
+
+The children screamed in delight, but Angel didn't mind, because he saw
+that George didn't. When George put his arm around Lolo's little baby
+sister, Angel looked at George, reproachfully, at first, but when George
+laughed Angel emitted his well-known chuckle, which always indicated
+delight, and he knew that all jealousy had vanished.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+BUILDING A SHIP TO TAKE THEM HOME
+
+
+Great was the surprise of Oroto to find that Marmo, chief of the Tuolos,
+and Tastoa, chief of the Kurabus, were in the town. Greater still was
+the marvel to know that they were entirely free to go and come, and when
+Uraso announced to him that there were no restrictions on his liberty,
+he wondered why he had been brought from his village.
+
+This proceeding was most unusual. During the preceding day, when they
+marched into the town, he had been kept in one of the buildings under
+guard, and had not seen the Professor, as the latter first desired to
+confer with John, and learn all about the facts about the chief and his
+actions.
+
+Oroto was most anxious to see the Great White Chief, and when Uraso
+announced to him that he was prepared to receive him, he was eager to
+go. John thought it would be much better for them to meet alone, because
+it was desired to avoid all cause for jealousy among the different
+chiefs, and it would, probably, be disagreeable to have them present.
+All must be present, or none.
+
+Uraso conducted him to the door of the Professor's apartment, and left
+him. As he entered, the Professor came forward, and grasped his hand,
+and put his arm around him, and in that manner conducted him to a seat.
+
+The chief looked at him, and saw the strong, handsome face and the
+white beard and hair. He appeared to be awed by the sight, as he was
+affected by the kind reception. He was far from assuming the defiant
+attitude with which he met John.
+
+"I welcome you," said the Professor. "I know we can be friends."
+
+The chief was overcome by the greeting words. It was plain that he had
+prepared for an entirely different kind of meeting. He did not answer,
+but sat there with eyes riveted on the Professor, and the latter
+continued:
+
+"I hope my warriors have treated you right, and that they have not
+injured any of your people."
+
+When Oroto had recovered from his surprise he responded:
+
+"Why do you call me your friend?"
+
+The Professor smiled, and he answered: "Are you my enemy?"
+
+This was a question which was unexpected. What manner of man was this?
+The Professor saw the struggle in the chief's mind, as he tried to frame
+a reply.
+
+"I was your enemy; but I do not see why I should be. I was told that you
+were a terrible chief."
+
+"Who told you so?"
+
+"The wise men."
+
+"Do you believe them?"
+
+"No; I shall kill them, because they have lied to me and my people."
+
+"Why do you wish to kill them? Will that do you or your people any
+good?"
+
+"Then what can I do with people who deceive us?"
+
+"Teach them to understand and know that it is better to tell the truth
+than to lie. When you do that you are also teaching the people what is
+right. If you kill them you are teaching people revenge, and revenge
+will not help them."
+
+"You are telling me something new and strange. My people would not
+understand that. They would think I feared to punish."
+
+"The white man does not think so. He believes that each man is entitled
+to his life. If he does wrong, he may be deprived of his liberty, and
+made to labor for others, and pleasures kept from him, but that his life
+should not be taken from him, unless he has committed the greatest crime
+against the people."
+
+"What is the greatest crime?"
+
+"The killing of another."
+
+"I am in your power. What do you want me to do? What will you do with
+me? I did not know you taught such things."
+
+"You are in my village; but you are free to go where you will. My chief
+did not bring you here to humiliate you, or to punish you. I told him to
+bring you here so you might know how the white men live, and how they
+try to make the people happy. You can see these things for yourself.
+Then you can understand."
+
+"I am told that you have people here from all the tribes, and that they
+live together in peace and in contentment."
+
+"Yes; and why not? Because one man was born and lives in one place, is
+that any reason why he should be the enemy of one who lives somewhere
+else?"
+
+"But how can we prevent them from fighting each other?"
+
+"Let all the chiefs agree to do what is right to each other, and to
+their people; and treat each man the same, whether he belongs to your
+tribe or to some other. Do not seek revenge, but justice."
+
+"I shall forever be the White Chief's friend."
+
+"But you must be not only my friend, but the friend of all the chiefs.
+They have agreed to live together in peace. We will find work for all
+your people to do, so they can become happy and strong, and I want you
+to go with me to see the things we are doing to help the people. Before
+we do so you must talk to the chiefs who have been here and who know
+what we are trying to bring about."
+
+Oroto sought out Marmo at once. He was the nearest in kin to the Illyas,
+and the Professor noted this action on his part with the greatest
+satisfaction. Soon Tastoa, of the Kurabus, was brought in, and no
+restraint was placed on any of these conferences.
+
+When all the whites met that night you may be sure that there was a
+jollification that knew no bounds. What a wonderful thing had been
+accomplished. All grasped the Professor's hand, and many tears were shed
+in the joy of the meeting. Six boys and three men had been rescued from
+the jaws of death by the Professor and the two boys.
+
+In less than two years they had transformed an island of savage races
+into some semblance of orderly life, and inspired the people with a new
+impulse. It was the first time the chiefs of the island had ever met
+together. Within a week all were on friendly terms with each other.
+
+At the conference that evening the Professor remarked: "We have now put
+in nearly two years of hard work, and accomplished the most wonderful
+results. The boys want to go home, and it is right that they should.
+Owing to the peculiar conditions existing here, we have not been in a
+position where we could take any organized steps to go home. As long as
+any of our friends were in captivity it was our duty to remain."
+
+"The situation is different now. We have really started a little empire
+here. This is the 'Empire' that Harry spoke about when we landed here.
+He little knew how prophetic that was. We now have the men, the
+material, the energy, and the ingenuity to make anything that is made
+anywhere in the world."
+
+"We must build a ship--"
+
+But the Professor could go no further. The boys were wild with
+excitement at the news, as they gathered about him.
+
+"But I am coming back again," cried one after the other.
+
+"But I am not going away," added the Professor, "because I am afraid I
+should never be able to come back again."
+
+There was a tone of sadness as he said this, and it touched all the
+boys. It was hard to tell whether this was an occasion for joy or
+sorrow.
+
+All knew what the Professor and John and Blakely felt, and that it
+would become their great field for future work.
+
+Here was also a field for the energies of the boys, whose abilities
+could be directed into useful channels. Commercially the island was of
+immense value, if properly used. So long as John and the Professor were
+there no wrong speculative efforts would dare to be attempted by
+unscrupulous adventurers.
+
+John, together with Harry, Tom and Jim, who were the engineering force
+of the island, soon began the work of preparing the material for the
+ship which would place them in communication with the great world.
+
+The three new boys were initiated into the crafthood which was ever
+widening and gaining new recruits. The natives showed remarkable
+aptitude for the various branches of work. But the Professor and Blakely
+had other ideas than to train too many of them to labor in the
+mechanical lines.
+
+Here was a land, rich in soil, capable of growing any crop, or adapted
+to give up its bounty in the form of many valuable kinds of produce.
+Rubber, coffee, spices, cocoanuts, the finest fibers, in variety, and
+all of them now growing wild.
+
+This land must be occupied and tilled by a people adapted to the soil
+and climate. The principles of agriculture must be instilled. What a
+wonderful work to contemplate!
+
+The schoolhouse was ready, but there were no books. Robert had taken the
+preliminary lessons as an artist, and was very handy with the brush and
+pencil. Entirely on his own initiative, he prepared a set of letters,
+containing the caps of the alphabet, and these were cut out by him, and
+the work so delighted the Professor that he instructed the boys how to
+cast the whole series at one time, so that a good stock of type was
+finally turned out.
+
+"I have an idea," said Robert, "that it would be a good thing to put
+some pictures in the primer; just enough to make it look attractive."
+
+"That would be fun," answered Min. "Don't say anything to the Professor
+about it."
+
+The latter had already arranged a simple press, but when the latter was
+nearing completion, Roy burst out laughing, as he remarked: "Type is a
+good thing, and so is a printing press, but I am interested in knowing
+where we are going to get the paper."
+
+"Paper?" exclaimed George; "lots of it growing all about here." And he
+looked at the boys a little maliciously. "All we need to do is to go out
+and gather it."
+
+"Paper growing? Well, I have seen many things here, but that is
+something new to me."
+
+"Do you know what the plantain tree is, the tree, with the big sprawling
+leaves? Those leaves will make good sheets for printing on."
+
+The Professor heard the last part of the conversation, and remarked: "We
+might as well make paper, and I have already asked Harry to make a
+grinder for furnishing the pulp. We have the finest paper stock in the
+world."
+
+"Yes," exclaimed George; "the ramie."
+
+"No; not that. There is a reason why hemp, and many other fibers are
+better than that. Do you recall the peculiarity about ramie?"
+
+[Illustration: "_The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction
+which Tom and Ralph had gone on the former trip_"
+                                                           [See p. 235]]
+
+Harry remembered. It resists moisture, and while it makes an excellent
+paper would be difficult with their crude means to turn it out
+satisfactorily. The grinding machine was a simple affair, and the fiber
+was fed through again and again, until it was cut up into short lengths.
+
+[Illustration: _Fig. 22. Paper Making Machine._]
+
+The principal thing, however, in paper making is to get it the same
+thickness. "It will take too long to make a cylinder, which makes the
+paper even, and distribute the pulp perfectly, and in the absence of
+that I have ordered an apparatus which will turn out a sheet at a time."
+
+The Professor then exhibited a drawing, and continued: "Notice the box,
+which is two feet square inside and two feet high. See this cleat all
+around the inside, six inches from the top. That is to hold the frame of
+a cloth web, which fits in the box exactly."
+
+"At the bottom of the box is a pipe, right in the middle. This pipe is
+for the purpose of carrying the water into the box. Below the box is a
+larger box, and this contains the water which has the pulp mixed with
+it, just enough of the pulp to make it look cloudy.
+
+"The water in the box is carried into the box by the pump. When the
+screen, or web, is placed in position, and the pump set to work, the
+water, carrying the pulp, moves upwardly in the box, and the fine
+particles of pulp are caught by the screen and held there, the little
+fibers lying crisscross over each other.
+
+"Every minute or so the screen with the paper mat on its underside must
+be taken out and another put in, and the matted paper on each screen put
+under a press, and the water squeezed out, after which it will readily
+peel off the screen, and when it is dried it makes a good blotting
+paper. To make a writing paper of it, the sheet must be run through a
+number of heavily weighted steel rollers, but we don't need that for
+printing our books."
+
+The paper was made in that manner, and the Professor was delighted when
+he saw the illustrations. Thus the first serious attempt was made to
+begin the teaching of the children, and when the books were ready the
+boys were all happy to undertake the work of teaching. It was here that
+the Tuolo medicine men were utilized, and it may be said to their credit
+that they found the new calling agreeable and pleasant.
+
+But there is still so much to be said about the town, the people, the
+actions of the chiefs, the work that was being prosecuted, the farms and
+plantations that were started, the manufactured articles turned out, the
+new houses erected everywhere, and the intense interest exhibited by the
+people under the new order of things.
+
+The boys knew they had been a great factor in the regeneration of the
+island, and were proud of it. Lolo, and boys of like ages with our boys,
+were given special training, due to the suggestion of the Professor.
+Some were taught the theory of medicine, as the necessity of proper
+medical treatment was essential. Many received the rudimentary knowledge
+of carpentry and other occupations from John.
+
+The ship was the principal topic of conversation, and to that the main
+energies were directed. The finest oak trees were cut and brought in; a
+new and larger sawmill installed; the machine shop was busy day and
+night in the making of two new lathes, a planer, and several drilling
+machines.
+
+During the rush and the excitement of all these new enterprises, the
+boys could not forget their earlier experiences, and about the
+mysterious things which formed parts of their adventures.
+
+To enumerate all of them would take too much space, and be unnecessary,
+but some of them had an intense personal interest, and they recalled how
+the missing flag was accounted for when John appeared; the removal of
+their boat at the Palls of South River was explained; the discovery of
+the light beyond the West River really indicated the location of the
+savage village.
+
+But there were other things still unaccounted for, and the boys craved a
+solution to the mysterious happenings. Who wrote the message found in
+the _Investigator's_ lifeboat, No. 3? Who took the flagstaff at
+Observation Hill? Who placed the crude oars and the strange ropes in
+their boat which was found stranded on the sea beach ten miles from the
+place where they left it?
+
+The boys determined to know these things, and they trusted to the future
+to be able to give the answers.
+
+Little of the time was devoted to pleasure now. The great forest to the
+west was looked on by the boys with longing eyes many times. They had
+heard about the experience at Blakely's old home on the hill. One day
+Harry said: "There is one thing lacking in the town."
+
+"What is it?" asked Tom.
+
+"The American flag."
+
+"Good! We must get a fitting flag pole for that."
+
+All the boys conspired together that night.
+
+They would go to the great forest and bring in the finest pole to be
+found. Jack and Jill and Angel must go with them; and Lolo and his best
+boy friend were invited.
+
+Early in the morning, without giving anyone an idea of their intentions,
+the guns and the bolos were loaded on the wagon, and plenty of
+provisions, you may be assured. George and Ralph manned the large boat,
+so that the crossing of the river would be facilitated. The wagon still
+had the fort sections, which were taken along so that could be floated
+across.
+
+Within an hour the main river was reached and the float sections
+attached, so that the yaks plunged in and drew the wagon across, while
+the boat was drawn up on shore to await their return.
+
+The party plunged into the forest, taking the direction which Ralph and
+Tom had gone on the former trip. Quantities of game were bagged, but
+there was no exciting incident. The pole was the main thing, after all,
+and when they tramped in every direction the selection was narrowed down
+to two fine specimens of shellbark hickory, and one was felled and
+trimmed, and after hoisting one end on the wagon, the other was put on
+the truck and the party drove into Unity in the afternoon.
+
+The inhabitants swarmed the streets at the novel spectacle. The
+Professor, John, Blakely and Rogers instantly divined the meaning of the
+pole.
+
+"Where shall we put it up?" asked Harry.
+
+"Right in the center of the town," was the Professor's response.
+"To-morrow is flag-raising day, and it shall be a holiday!"
+
+Before night the hole had been dug, and the immense pole erected.
+
+When "Old Glory" went up the next day there was nothing lacking but the
+music; the hats of everyone came off as the flag slowly ascended, and
+the cheers that came from the throats of the natives could not have been
+more intense, nor the enthusiasm greater, if participated in by genuine
+Americans.
+
+[Illustration: The Stars and Stripes]
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+GLOSSARY OF WORDS
+USED IN TEXT OF THIS VOLUME
+
+  Astrologer.    An interpreter of the supposed influence of the stars
+                 on the destinies of man.
+
+  Accumulation.  To add to; gathering little by little. A store of things.
+
+  Acquiring.     To receive or gain in whatsoever manner.
+
+  Accosted.      To speak to; to address; to approach.
+
+  Adequate.      Sufficient; enough.
+
+  Alluring.      That which attracts; to have a fancy for.
+
+  Alternative.   Either one or the other.
+
+  Animated.      Lively; sparkling; exhilarating.
+
+  Apportion.     To divide and distribute or assign.
+
+  Aptitude.      Suited to the work; well adapted.
+
+  Betokened.     To give a promise or evidence of.
+
+  Cardinal.      The main feature; the original.
+
+  Calcareous.    Partaking of lime.
+
+  Capillary.     That capacity in liquids to cohere to material.
+
+  Celerity.      Quickly; with speed.
+
+  Climax.        To bring to a conclusion.
+
+  Chaparral.     A dense cluster of small trees.
+
+  Cooperation.   Acting together; in concert.
+
+  Concise.       Short and to the point.
+
+  Cohesive.      To stick together; to adhere to each other.
+
+  Comprehend.    To understand.
+
+  Compact.       In a small space.
+
+  Concentrated.  To bring together.
+
+  Commotion.     Not orderly; violent agitation; tumult.
+
+  Cringed.       To bow in servility; to wince.
+
+  Deterred.      Prevented; kept from.
+
+  Devoid.        To be without; bereft.
+
+  Depredations.  The act of plundering or laying waste.
+
+  Decorum.       In an orderly manner.
+
+  Demoniacs.     Influenced by demons, or possessed with bad spirit.
+
+  Detained.      Held as a captive.
+
+  Deftly.        Neat and skillful in action.
+
+  Diagonally.    Across from corner to corner.
+
+  Dismantle.     To take apart; to dissever.
+
+  Discernible.   To see.
+
+  Disinfectant.  To make germ proof; to make sanitary.
+
+  Diversified.   A variety; having different qualities; many of the same
+                 kind.
+
+  Disclose.      To show; to advise or inform.
+
+  Doctrine.      That which is taught or set forth for belief.
+
+  Drones.        Those which are not busy, or prone to shirk.
+
+  Effusive.      Talkative.
+
+  Emboldened.    One who is encouraged to go forward.
+
+  Entrapped.     One who is caught by some design on the part of another.
+
+  Emotional.     An excitement of the mind.
+
+  Emaciated.     Lean; thin from want of food.
+
+  Emulated.      To copy after; to take pattern from.
+
+  Enumerated.    Counted.
+
+  Entrancing.    To put into a state of delight.
+
+  Ethics.        The philosophy of morals.
+
+  Evolutions.    A term employed to show the manner in which soldiers
+                 are trained.
+
+  Factor.        One of the elements in a problem.
+
+  Fantastical.   Peculiarly garbed; out of the natural manner.
+
+  Fascination.   A peculiar drawing to; pleasant attraction.
+
+  Function.      Any specific act or power that belongs to an agent.
+
+  Gratified.     Satisfied; well pleased.
+
+  Hilarity.      Joy; the state of being demonstratively happy.
+
+  Identical.     The same; exactly alike.
+
+  Impulse.       That which is done at the moment.
+
+  Imprecations.  To hurl defiance; to bring down maledictions.
+
+  Impressed.     To produce an effect; warned.
+
+  Imperiously.   In a haughty manner; in a way to indicate power.
+
+  Imitated.      To do in the same manner.
+
+  Initiated.     To bring into; to make familiar with; to install.
+
+  Imposing.      Adapted to make an impression.
+
+  Interspersed.  To put between or among.
+
+  Indication.    To show; to give an idea of.
+
+  Instilling.    To educate; to teach.
+
+  Installed.     To establish; to put in the proper place.
+
+  Inculcate.     To teach by principle, or otherwise.
+
+  Indignant.     Anger or scorn aroused by a wrong act.
+
+  Instigation.   To entice another to do a thing.
+
+  Indefatigable. Continual act in doing a thing; not weary in work or
+                 play.
+
+  Innumerable.   A large number; many of the same kind or thing.
+
+  Indited.       To put into words or writing.
+
+  Irritability.  Rubbing against; friction of part.
+
+  Irrepressible. Difficult to control; hard to keep down.
+
+  Instrumental.  The means by which a thing is done.
+
+  Malediction.   A wish that harm may come; a curse.
+
+  Medium.        A means; an object that enables the carrying out of a
+                 design.
+
+  Muster roll.   The list of a set of men who have combined for an object.
+
+  Maneuvered.    The arranging of forces in a certain manner.
+
+  Naturalist.    One versed in natural history.
+
+  Omen.          A sign; a favorable or unfavorable issue.
+
+  Pendant.       Hanging; an article suspended; swinging below.
+
+  Penetrated.    Going into; entering a body.
+
+  Phase.         One form; a particular manner.
+
+  Projection.    To give out; a throwing, shooting or sending out.
+
+  Precarious.    Rather dangerous; not the safest.
+
+  Profusion.     A quantity; many of the same kind or quality.
+
+  Presentiment.  Believing or feeling beforehand.
+
+  Prescribing.   Setting forth; explaining in detail.
+
+  Precipitous.   Doing quickly; acting without considering results.
+
+  Restriction.   Within certain bounds or limits.
+
+  Restoration.   To bring back to its original form.
+
+  Requiting.     To pay; to give just dues.
+
+  Requisition.   The necessity for a thing; to call for some quality or
+                 article.
+
+  Regeneration.  To make over anew; to better.
+
+  Reconstructed. To put into a better condition; or to restore to its
+                 original form.
+
+  Rhythmic.      Made to correspond in sound, in a regular or determined
+                 time.
+
+  Rudimentary.   Original, or basic.
+
+  Saturated.     To thoroughly fill a substance, as with a liquid so it
+                 will not hold more.
+
+  Scantling.     A piece of sawn timber, used as the upright support
+                 of a building.
+
+  Seclusion.     Hidden; kept out of sight.
+
+  Semblance.     The same as; likened unto.
+
+  Simulating.    To copy; to imitate.
+
+  Smelter.       A furnace for melting metals.
+
+  Solicitation.  Asking for anything; requesting, by petition or
+                 otherwise.
+
+  Stimulating.   To encourage; to cause to act.
+
+  Stalagmite.    An incrustation on the floor of a cave or cavern.
+
+  Stalactite.    The calcareous or lime hangings on the walls and
+                 ceilings of a cavern.
+
+  Stipulated.    Set forth in some particular manner.
+
+  Tactics.       The science or art of military evolutions.
+
+  Talisman.      Something that produces or is capable of bringing about
+                 a wonderful effect.
+
+  Tempered.      The quality in a metal of hardening.
+
+  Tissues.       The flesh, muscles and organic materials of a body.
+
+  Tournament.    A festival of ancient time; games and feats of arms.
+
+  Transmitted.   Sent away; forwarded to a distant place.
+
+  Transport.     Carried away by joyful news or emotions.
+
+  Typical.       A good sample; the like in kind.
+
+  Unaffected.    Not influenced; without emotion.
+
+  Undulating.    Wavy; rolling.
+
+  Unscrupulous.  Not guided by a right course; wrongful actions.
+
+
+
+
+THE "HOW-TO-DO-IT" BOOKS
+
+
+CARPENTRY FOR BOYS
+
+A book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all
+subjects pertaining to the "King of Trades"; showing the care and use of
+tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles
+involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the
+rudiments of architecture. It contains over two hundred and fifty
+illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a
+complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. The most
+comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys.
+
+
+ELECTRICITY FOR BOYS
+
+The author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental
+principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the
+work in the successive stages. It shows how the knowledge has been
+developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using
+technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. It
+has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred
+original drawings.
+
+
+PRACTICAL MECHANICS FOR BOYS
+
+This book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical
+shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of
+shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work,
+and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. Every
+subject is illustrated, and model building explained. It contains a
+glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature
+that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. Fully
+illustrated.
+
+            _Price 60 cents per volume_
+
+
+
+
+THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUTS
+
+
+A SERIES OF BOOKS FOR BOYS
+
+ Which, in addition to the interesting boy scout stories by CAPTAIN ALAN
+  DOUGLAS, Scoutmaster, contain articles on nature lore, native animals
+      and a fund of other information pertaining to out-of-door life,
+            that will appeal to the boy's love of the open
+
+I. THE CAMPFIRES OF THE WOLF PATROL
+
+Their first camping experience affords the scouts splendid opportunities
+to use their recently acquired knowledge in a practical way. Elmer
+Chenoweth, a lad from the northwest woods, astonishes everyone by his
+familiarity with camp life. A clean, wholesome story every boy should
+read.
+
+II. WOODCRAFT; OR, HOW A PATROL LEADER MADE GOOD
+
+This tale presents many stirring situations in which some of the boys
+are called upon to exercise all their ingenuity and unselfishness. A
+story filled with healthful excitement.
+
+III. PATHFINDER; OR, THE MISSING TENDERFOOT
+
+Some mysteries are cleared up in a most unexpected way, greatly to the
+credit of our young friends. A variety of incidents follow fast, one
+after the other.
+
+IV. FAST NINE; OR, A CHALLENGE FROM FAIRFIELD
+
+They show the same team-work here as when in camp. The description of
+the final game with the team of a rival town, and the outcome thereof,
+form a stirring narrative. One of the best baseball stories of recent
+years.
+
+V. GREAT HIKE; OR, THE PRIDE OF THE KHAKI TROOP
+
+After weeks of preparation the scouts start out on their greatest
+undertaking. Their march takes them far from home, and the good-natured
+rivalry of the different patrols furnishes many interesting and amusing
+situations.
+
+VI. ENDURANCE TEST; OR, HOW CLEAR GRIT WON THE DAY
+
+Few stories "get" us more than illustrations of pluck in the face of
+apparent failure. Our heroes show the stuff they are made of and
+surprise their most ardent admirers. One of the best stories Captain
+Douglas has written.
+
+
+BOY SCOUT NATURE LORE TO BE FOUND IN THE HICKORY RIDGE BOY SCOUT SERIES
+
+Wild Animals of the United States--Tracking--in Number I.
+
+Trees and Wild Flowers of the United States in Number II.
+
+Reptiles of the United States in Number III.
+
+Fishes of the United States in Number IV.
+
+Insects of the United States in Number V.
+
+Birds of the United States in Number VI.
+
+_Cloth Binding  Cover Illustrations in Four Colors  40c. Per Volume_
+
+              THE NEW YORK BOOK COMPANY
+    147 FOURTH AVENUE (near 14th St.) NEW YORK
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE WONDER ISLAND BOYS: CONQUEST OF
+THE SAVAGES***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 21832.txt or 21832.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/2/1/8/3/21832
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/21832.zip b/21832.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f28a085
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21832.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..678e74e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #21832 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/21832)